cx2600-220 commandreference 0703 eng

Contents

Contents

1 Preface...................................................................................... 1-1

█ Before reading the command reference: ........................................................ 1-2

2 Operation Modes ..................................................................... 2-1

Logout .................................................................................................................... 2-2

Switch from general mode to privileged mode........................................................ 2-3

Switch from privileged mode to general mode........................................................ 2-4

Switch from privileged mode to maintenance mode ............................................... 2-5

Setting of privileged mode password...................................................................... 2-6

Clearing of privileged mode password.................................................................... 2-7

Setting of login password ....................................................................................... 2-8

Clearing of login password ..................................................................................... 2-9

Setting of terminal prompt .....................................................................................2-10

Setting of scroll control defaults.............................................................................2-11

Setting of local terminal scroll control ....................................................................2-12

Setting of autonomous message output ................................................................2-13

Setting of automatic logout time ............................................................................2-14

Display of terminal information ..............................................................................2-15

Registration of user account..................................................................................2-16

Display of user account .........................................................................................2-17

Clearing of user account........................................................................................2-18

Setting of command mode.....................................................................................2-19

Display of command mode settings.......................................................................2-20

3 Global Configuration............................................................... 3-1

Setting of administrator contact .............................................................................. 3-2

Setting of system name.......................................................................................... 3-3

Setting of system location....................................................................................... 3-4

Display of system information................................................................................. 3-5

Setting of date and time.......................................................................................... 3-6

Setting of timezone................................................................................................. 3-7

i

Contents

Setting of daylight saving time................................................................................ 3-8

Display of date and time........................................................................................3-11

Clearing of daylight saving time.............................................................................3-12

4 Administration Ports ............................................................... 4-1

Setting of out-band IP address ............................................................................... 4-2

Clearing of out-band IP address............................................................................. 4-3

Setting of in-band IP address ................................................................................. 4-4

Display of in-band port setup information ............................................................... 4-5

Clearing of in-band IP address ............................................................................... 4-6

Setting of default gateway ...................................................................................... 4-7

Clearing of default gateway .................................................................................... 4-8

Setting of static route.............................................................................................. 4-9

Display of network information ..............................................................................4-10

Clearing of static route...........................................................................................4-12

Block/unblock of in-band port ................................................................................4-13

Setting of in-band port VLAN.................................................................................4-14

Setting of out-band port speed/communication direction.......................................4-15

Setting of out-band port flow control ......................................................................4-16

Display of out-band port setup information ............................................................4-17

Checking of connection .........................................................................................4-18

Setting of virtual IP address...................................................................................4-19

Confirmation of connection with host.....................................................................4-20

Clearing of virtual IP address ................................................................................4-21

Setting of in-band mode ........................................................................................4-22

5 Ports.......................................................................................... 5-1

Setting of port blocking/unblocking......................................................................... 5-2

Setting of port speed and MDI/MDI-X..................................................................... 5-3

Setting of GbE port media ...................................................................................... 5-5

Setting of flow control ............................................................................................. 5-6

Setting of port link protection time .......................................................................... 5-7

Setting of SNMP link trap transmission .................................................................. 5-8

Setting of ATM transmission path clock.................................................................. 5-9

Setting of ATM transmission path framing mode...................................................5-10

Display of port setting and status information........................................................5-11

ii

Contents

Display of link trap transmission setting.................................................................5-16

Display of port link protection time.........................................................................5-18

Setting of port cable length....................................................................................5-19

Display of port cable length settings......................................................................5-21

Setting of TDMP155 port logical interface .............................................................5-23

Display of TDMP155 port logical interface setting .................................................5-25

Setting of impedance.............................................................................................5-26

Display of impedance setting.................................................................................5-27

Display of port (line) alarm status for TDMP155 port.............................................5-28

6 VLAN......................................................................................... 6-1

Setting of tagbase VLAN ........................................................................................ 6-2

Clearing of tagbase VLAN...................................................................................... 6-3

Setting of portbase VLAN....................................................................................... 6-4

Show VLAN table per port (line) ............................................................................. 6-5

Display of VLAN table per VLAN ............................................................................ 6-7

Setting of portbase VLAN and tagbase VLAN en bloc ........................................... 6-8

Setting of VLAN tag swapping................................................................................ 6-9

Display of VLAN tag swapping information............................................................6-10

Clearing of VLAN tag swapping.............................................................................6-11

Display of number of VLAN entries .......................................................................6-12

Setting of Ethernet type for VLAN tag recognition .................................................6-13

Display of Ethernet type information for VLAN tag recognition..............................6-14

Setting of VLAN name...........................................................................................6-15

Clearing of VLAN name.........................................................................................6-16

7 QoS ........................................................................................... 7-1

Setting of maximum band limiting operation mode................................................. 7-2

Display of maximum band limiting operation mode ................................................ 7-4

Setting of maximum band limiting function in input VLAN units.............................. 7-6

Setting of priority mapping function in input VLAN units ......................................... 7-9

Setting of priority discard function in input VLAN units ..........................................7-12

Display of maximum band limiting function in input VLAN units ............................7-16

Clearing of maximum band limiting function in input VLAN units...........................7-19

Setting of maximum band limiting function in output VLAN units...........................7-21

Setting of priority mapping function in output VLAN units......................................7-24

iii

Contents

Setting of priority discard function in output VLAN units ........................................7-28

Display of maximum band limiting function in output VLAN units ..........................7-32

Clearing of maximum band limiting function in output VLAN units ........................7-35

Setting of priority mapping.....................................................................................7-37

Display of priority mapping ....................................................................................7-38

Creating of priority mapping profile........................................................................7-40

Display of priority mapping profile .........................................................................7-42

Creating of CoS profile ..........................................................................................7-43

Display of CoS profile ............................................................................................7-46

Clearing of CoS profile ..........................................................................................7-48

Setting of input CoS priority mapping ....................................................................7-49

Display of input CoS priority mapping....................................................................7-50

Clearing of CoS priority mapping...........................................................................7-51

Setting of output CoS priority mapping ..................................................................7-52

Display of output CoS priority mapping .................................................................7-53

Clearing of output CoS priority mapping................................................................7-54

Setting of output-side fairness control mode function............................................7-55

Display of output-side fairness control mode function ...........................................7-56

Setting of priority discard function of output-side fairness control function of output port .........................................................................................................7-57

Setting of output-side fairness control function rate of output port.........................7-60

Setting of output-side fairness control function weight of output port ....................7-62

Setting of upper threshold of output-side fairness control function of output port .............................................................................................................7-64

Display of output-side fairness control function of output port ...............................7-66

Clearing of output-side fairness control function of output port..............................7-70

Setting of default priority mapping .........................................................................7-72

Display of default priority mapping ........................................................................7-74

Setting of default burst tolerance...........................................................................7-76

Display of default burst tolerance ..........................................................................7-79

Setting of subtraction cycle....................................................................................7-81

Display of subtraction cycle ...................................................................................7-82

8 Switch Control ......................................................................... 8-1

Setting of frame size............................................................................................... 8-2

Display of frame size .............................................................................................. 8-3

Setting of aging time............................................................................................... 8-4

iv

Contents

Display of aging time .............................................................................................. 8-5

Display of MAC learning count in port units............................................................ 8-6

Display of MAC learning count in VLAN units......................................................... 8-8

Display of MAC learning count in device units........................................................ 8-9

Display of MAC learning information .....................................................................8-10

Display of MAC learning information in port units..................................................8-11

Clearing of MAC learning information in port units ................................................8-12

Display of MAC learning information in VLAN units...............................................8-13

Clearing of MAC learning information in VLAN units .............................................8-14

Setting of IFG overrate mode ................................................................................8-15

Display of IFG overrate mode................................................................................8-16

9 Route Control........................................................................... 9-1

Setting of spanning tree protocol enable/disable support ....................................... 9-2

Setting of spanning tree mode................................................................................ 9-3

Display of spanning tree mode ............................................................................... 9-4

Setting of switch priority.......................................................................................... 9-5

Setting of spanning tree timer................................................................................. 9-6

Setting of hold count............................................................................................... 9-7

Display of spanning tree switch information ........................................................... 9-8

Setting of spanning tree enable/disable per port ...................................................9-10

Setting of priority per port ......................................................................................9-11

Setting of path cost per port ..................................................................................9-12

Display of spanning tree port information ..............................................................9-13

Setting of edge port ...............................................................................................9-15

Display of edge port ..............................................................................................9-16

Setting of point-to-point .........................................................................................9-17

Display of point-to-point.........................................................................................9-18

Setting of BPDU transparency enable/disable per VLAN ......................................9-20

Display of BPDU transparency function setting in specified VLAN........................9-21

Setting of MAC address transparency function .....................................................9-22

Display of MAC address transparency function.....................................................9-23

Setting of link aggregation group...........................................................................9-24

Display of link aggregation setting status ..............................................................9-25

Clearing of link aggregation group.........................................................................9-27

Setting of system priority .......................................................................................9-28

v

Contents

Display of system priority.......................................................................................9-29

Setting of port priority ............................................................................................9-30

Display of port priority............................................................................................9-31

Setting of link aggregation protection time.............................................................9-32

Display of link aggregation protection time............................................................9-33

Setting of IGMP Snooping function enable/disable ...............................................9-34

Display of IGMP Snooping function enable/disable information ............................9-35

Display of IGMP Snooping entry for specified MAC ..............................................9-36

Clearing of IGMP Snooping entry for specified group address..............................9-37

Display of IGMP Snooping entry for specified VLAN.............................................9-38

Display of IGMP Snooping entry for specified port number ...................................9-39

Clearing of IGMP Snooping entry for specified VLAN ...........................................9-40

10 Filters.................................................................................... 10-1

Setting/clearing of port isolate ...............................................................................10-2

Display of port isolate setting state........................................................................10-3

Creating of filtering profile......................................................................................10-4

Display of filtering profile .......................................................................................10-6

Clearing of filtering profile......................................................................................10-8

Setting of input filtering ..........................................................................................10-9

Display of input filtering .......................................................................................10-10

Clearing of input filtering......................................................................................10-12

Setting of output filtering......................................................................................10-13

Display of output filtering .....................................................................................10-14

Clearing of output filtering....................................................................................10-16

Setting of MAC address learning limiting count function......................................10-17

Display of MAC address learning count limiting function.....................................10-18

Clearing of MAC address learning count limiting function ...................................10-20

Setting of static MAC address of MAC address learning count limiting function................................................................................................................10-21

Clearing of static MAC address of MAC address learning count limiting function................................................................................................................10-22

11 EtherOAM ............................................................................. 11-1

Setting of MEG ......................................................................................................11-2

Display of MEG setting information .......................................................................11-3

vi

Contents

Clearing of MEG....................................................................................................11-5

Setting of MEP ......................................................................................................11-6

Display of MEP setting information........................................................................11-8

Clearing of MEP ..................................................................................................11-10

Setting of test target MEP....................................................................................11-11

Display of test target MEP setting information.....................................................11-12

Clearing of test target MEP .................................................................................11-13

Setting of associated MEP ID..............................................................................11-14

Clearing of associated MEP ID............................................................................11-15

Setting of MIP......................................................................................................11-16

Display of MIP setting information .......................................................................11-17

Clearing of MIP....................................................................................................11-19

Setting of EtherOAM frame common information ................................................11-20

Display of EtherOAM frame common information ...............................................11-21

Setting of Reply frame returning period...............................................................11-22

Display of Reply frame returning period ..............................................................11-23

Setting of EtherOAM Continuity Check transmission ..........................................11-24

Setting of RDI operation ......................................................................................11-26

Display of final fault information...........................................................................11-27

Display of CCM error cause ................................................................................11-28

Clearing of CCM error cause...............................................................................11-30

Starting of EtherOAM Loop Back test..................................................................11-31

Starting of EtherOAM Link Trace test ..................................................................11-33

Starting of EtherOAM Frame Delay Measurement test .......................................11-35

Starting of EtherOAM Loss Measurement test ....................................................11-37

Setting of EtherPS enable/disable.......................................................................11-40

Setting of EtherPS control VLAN.........................................................................11-42

Setting of EtherPS lockout...................................................................................11-43

Setting of EtherPS timer ......................................................................................11-44

Changeover of EtherPS state..............................................................................11-45

Resetting of EtherPS state changeover...............................................................11-46

Display of EtherPS configuration information ......................................................11-47

Display of EtherPS status....................................................................................11-49

12 APS ....................................................................................... 12-1

Setting of APS enable/disable ...............................................................................12-2

vii

Contents

Setting of APS lockout...........................................................................................12-4

Setting of APS timer values...................................................................................12-5

Changeover of APS...............................................................................................12-6

Resetting of APS changeover ...............................................................................12-8

Display of APS settings and status........................................................................12-9

13 ATM Control ......................................................................... 13-1

Registration of PVC...............................................................................................13-2

Clearing of PVC.....................................................................................................13-3

Registration of PVC name.....................................................................................13-4

Clearing of PVC name...........................................................................................13-5

Setting of PVC blocking/unblocking.......................................................................13-6

Setting of enbloc PVC blocking/unblocking ...........................................................13-7

Display of PVC setting information ........................................................................13-8

Setting of PVC-VLAN mode ................................................................................13-10

Setting of VLAN VC.............................................................................................13-11

Clearing of VLAN VC settings .............................................................................13-12

Display of VLAN VC setting status in PVC units..................................................13-13

Display of VLAN VC setting status in VLAN units................................................13-15

Setting/clearing of PVC isolate ............................................................................13-17

Display of PVC isolate setting status...................................................................13-18

Display of MAC learning information in PVC units...............................................13-19

Display of MAC learning information in VLAN units.............................................13-20

Display of MAC learning count in PVC units........................................................13-22

Display of MAC learning count in VLAN units......................................................13-24

Clearing of MAC learning information in PVC units .............................................13-26

Setting/clearing of ATM loop guard .....................................................................13-27

Display of ATM loop guard setting status ............................................................13-28

Display of ATM loop trap transmission state .......................................................13-29

Clearing of ATM loop detection ...........................................................................13-30

Setting of ATMoP mode ......................................................................................13-31

Setting of ATMoP format .....................................................................................13-32

Display of ATMoP format information..................................................................13-34

Clearing of ATMoP format setting .......................................................................13-36

Setting of path between ATMs ............................................................................13-37

Display of path information between ATMs .........................................................13-39

viii

Contents

Clearing path setting between ATMs...................................................................13-40

14 ATM-QoS .............................................................................. 14-1

Setting of rate mode ..............................................................................................14-2

Setting of ATM shaper...........................................................................................14-3

Display of ATM shaper ..........................................................................................14-6

Display of effective band .......................................................................................14-8

Clearing of ATM shaper.......................................................................................14-10

Setting of AAL5 mode..........................................................................................14-11

Display of AAL5 mode.........................................................................................14-12

Setting of CLP .....................................................................................................14-13

Display of CLP.....................................................................................................14-14

Clearing of CLP ...................................................................................................14-15

Setting of CLP-CoS mapping ..............................................................................14-16

Display of CLP-CoS mapping setting status........................................................14-19

15 ATM-OAM ............................................................................. 15-1

Setting of ATM-OAM operation .............................................................................15-2

Setting of ATM-OAM flow point .............................................................................15-4

Display of ATM-OAM setting information...............................................................15-6

Display of ATM-OAM status information................................................................15-8

16 ATM-IMA ............................................................................... 16-1

Setting of IMA group..............................................................................................16-2

Display of IMA group setting information ...............................................................16-4

Display of IMA group status information ................................................................16-5

Clearing of IMA group............................................................................................16-9

Setting of IMA clock mode...................................................................................16-10

Display of IMA clock mode setting information ....................................................16-11

Starting and result display of IMA loopback test..................................................16-12

17 TDM-Path.............................................................................. 17-1

Setting of TDM group ............................................................................................17-2

Display of TDM group setting information..............................................................17-4

Clearing of TDM group ..........................................................................................17-6

ix

Contents

Setting of TDM group name ..................................................................................17-8

Display of TDM group name setting ....................................................................17-10

Clearing of TDM group name setting...................................................................17-12

Setting of TDM path ............................................................................................17-14

Display of TDM path setting information..............................................................17-16

Clearing of TDM path ..........................................................................................17-18

18 TDM over Packet.................................................................. 18-1

Setting of TDMoP mode ........................................................................................18-2

Clearing of TDMoP mode setting ..........................................................................18-4

Setting of TDMoP group ........................................................................................18-5

Display of TDMoP group setting information .........................................................18-7

Clearing of TDMoP group......................................................................................18-9

Setting of TDMoP connection..............................................................................18-11

Display of TDMoP connection setting..................................................................18-13

Clearing of TDMoP connection............................................................................18-15

Setting of variation tolerance ...............................................................................18-17

Display of variation tolerance ..............................................................................18-19

Display of TDMoP path setting status information...............................................18-21

Setting of TDMoP format .....................................................................................18-23

Display of TDMoP format setting.........................................................................18-26

Clearing of TDMoP format...................................................................................18-29

Setting of TDMoP blocking/unblocking................................................................18-31

Setting of adaptive clock......................................................................................18-33

Display of adaptive clock setting .........................................................................18-35

Clearing of adaptive clock ...................................................................................18-36

19 Clock Control ....................................................................... 19-1

Setting of external clock mode ..............................................................................19-2

Setting of reference clock priority ..........................................................................19-4

Setting of reference clock operation ......................................................................19-6

Display of reference clock information...................................................................19-7

Resetting of reference clock ..................................................................................19-9

Change of external clock .....................................................................................19-10

20 Network Management ......................................................... 20-1

x

Contents

Setting of SNMP enable/disable............................................................................20-2

Setting of SNMP manager.....................................................................................20-3

Setting of SNMP trap manager..............................................................................20-4

Clearing of SNMP manager settings .....................................................................20-5

Clearing of SNMP trap manager settings ..............................................................20-6

Setting of SNMP unauthorized access trap transmission......................................20-7

Display of SNMP setting information .....................................................................20-8

Setting of access list............................................................................................20-10

Display of access list ...........................................................................................20-11

Clearing of access list..........................................................................................20-12

Display of session ...............................................................................................20-13

Clearing of session..............................................................................................20-14

Setting of remote log enable/disable ...................................................................20-15

Setting of syslog server and message facility......................................................20-16

Display of syslog server configuration information ..............................................20-17

Clearing of syslog server .....................................................................................20-18

Setting of syslog message level remapping ........................................................20-19

Display of syslog message level mapping status ................................................20-20

Clearing of syslog message level remapping ......................................................20-21

Display of local log ..............................................................................................20-22

Clearing of local log.............................................................................................20-24

Setting of NTP access time .................................................................................20-25

Setting of IP address of NTP server ....................................................................20-26

Display of NTP server setting information ...........................................................20-27

Clearing of IP address of NTP server ..................................................................20-28

21 Network Test ........................................................................ 21-1

Setting of M/C management function basics .........................................................21-2

Starting of M/C loopback test ................................................................................21-3

Prompting of M/C to send M/C status notification..................................................21-5

Display of M/C information ....................................................................................21-6

Starting of ATM loopback test ...............................................................................21-9

Setting of ATM loopback source ID .....................................................................21-12

Display of ATM loopback source ID ....................................................................21-13

Setting of ATM loopback monitoring mode..........................................................21-14

Display of ATM loopback monitoring configuration..............................................21-15

xi

Contents

Setting of ATM loopback monitoring function ......................................................21-18

Display of ATM loopback monitoring information ................................................21-20

Clearing of ATM loopback monitoring function ....................................................21-22

22 Monitors................................................................................ 22-1

Display of port counter...........................................................................................22-2

Clearing of port counter .........................................................................................22-5

Display of discard counter .....................................................................................22-6

Display of VLAN counter .......................................................................................22-8

Clearing of VLAN counter....................................................................................22-13

Registration of VLAN counter ..............................................................................22-14

Display of VLAN counter registration information ................................................22-16

Clearing of VLAN counter registration .................................................................22-18

Registration of PVC counter ................................................................................22-19

Display of PVC counter registration information ..................................................22-20

Clearing of PVC counter registration ...................................................................22-21

Display of byte/frame counter information in PVC units.......................................22-22

Clearing of byte/frame counter information in PVC units .....................................22-24

Display of cell counter information.......................................................................22-25

Display of cell counter information in F4 units .....................................................22-28

Display of cell counter information in F5 units .....................................................22-31

Display of cell counter information in IMA port units............................................22-34

Clearing of cell counter information .....................................................................22-36

Setting of mirroring start or stop ..........................................................................22-37

Display of mirroring settings ................................................................................22-39

23 Maintenance and Operation ............................................... 23-1

Uploading of running configuration to ftp server ....................................................23-2

Uploading of startup configuration to ftp server .....................................................23-3

Uploading of system log to ftp server ....................................................................23-4

Uploading of setting information to ftp server ........................................................23-5

Uploading of fault information to ftp server ............................................................23-6

Downloading of software .......................................................................................23-7

Downloading of FPGA of UGSW module ..............................................................23-8

Downloading of FPGA of line module..................................................................23-10

Downloading of running configuration from ftp server .........................................23-12

xii

Contents

Downloading of startup configuration from ftp server ..........................................23-14

Display of running configuration ..........................................................................23-15

Display of startup configuration ...........................................................................23-17

Display of configuration difference ......................................................................23-19

Setting of trap transmission selection..................................................................23-20

Display of trap transmission selection setting status ...........................................23-24

Display of all setting information..........................................................................23-27

Saving of setting information ...............................................................................23-29

Clearing of line module configuration ..................................................................23-30

Clearing of startup configuration..........................................................................23-33

Setting of backup server......................................................................................23-34

Clearing of backup server....................................................................................23-35

Setting of backup schedule .................................................................................23-36

Display of backup information .............................................................................23-37

Display of current fault and alarm information .....................................................23-38

Clearing of WR fault ............................................................................................23-40

Display of past fault information ..........................................................................23-41

Clearing of past fault information.........................................................................23-43

Display of device installation status and other various statuses ..........................23-44

Display of bridge information for device...............................................................23-46

Display of module ID information.........................................................................23-47

Display of various version information.................................................................23-49

Display of device temperature .............................................................................23-51

Setting of autonomous rebooting enable/disable.................................................23-53

Display of autonomous rebooting settings...........................................................23-54

Display of CPU usage .........................................................................................23-55

Display of memory usage ....................................................................................23-57

24 Device Control ..................................................................... 24-1

Setting of line module type ....................................................................................24-2

Setting of TDMP line mode....................................................................................24-3

Setting of ATMP line mode....................................................................................24-5

Setting of TDMP155 line mode..............................................................................24-7

Setting of GbE line mode.......................................................................................24-9

Display of line mode setting.................................................................................24-10

Changeover of UGSW module system................................................................24-12

xiii

Contents

Resetting of entire device ....................................................................................24-13

Resetting of UGSW module ................................................................................24-15

Resetting of line module ......................................................................................24-17

Display of reset factor..........................................................................................24-18

OUS setting of UGSW module ............................................................................24-19

OUS setting of line module..................................................................................24-20

Removing of external memory.............................................................................24-21

25 Maintenance Mode .............................................................. 25-1

Downloading of software .......................................................................................25-2

Downloading of FPGA of UGSW module ..............................................................25-3

Downloading of FPGA of line module....................................................................25-5

Uploading of running configuration to external memory ........................................25-7

Uploading of startup configuration to external memory .........................................25-8

Uploading of system log to external memory.........................................................25-9

Downloading of running configuration from external memory..............................25-10

Downloading of startup configuration from external memory...............................25-11

Uploading of fault information to external memory ..............................................25-12

Uploading of setting information ..........................................................................25-13

Saving of setting status to external memory........................................................25-14

Switch from maintenance mode to privileged mode ............................................25-15

Display of directory list.........................................................................................25-16

Creating of directory ............................................................................................25-17

Removing of directory..........................................................................................25-18

Change of current directory .................................................................................25-19

Copying file..........................................................................................................25-20

Change of file name ............................................................................................25-21

Deleting file..........................................................................................................25-22

Removing of external memory.............................................................................25-23

Display of asynchronous switch status of UGSW module ...................................25-24

26 Appendix .............................................................................. 26-1

Appendix 1 Commands shown by show config and show all ......................26-2

Appendix 2 Line module type conditions .....................................................26-12

xiv

Preface

1-1

1 Preface

Preface

1-2

█ Before reading the command reference:

� This device has three types of modes to use commands.

General mode: Mode to use terminal local set commands that do not involve displaysystem and configuration update (default)

Privileged mode: Mode to use all commands related to usual maintenance operation suchas display commands and configuration commands

Maintenance mode: Mode to use commands for file operations

• Marks located at the top of descriptions for each command indicate following meanings:

Privilege Indicates that this command can be used in privileged mode.

General Indicates that this command can be used in general mode. (When both are displayed, the command can be used in both modes.)

Maintenance Indicates that this command can be used in maintenance mode. (For details, see 25 "Maintenance Mode".)

Save Indicates that the settings can be saved. (Without an indication, the settings for the command cannot be saved.)

Synchronize Indicates that the settings automatically synchronize with the other system when the device is operated in dual mode.

SBY execution Indicates that the command can be used by the standby system when the device is operated in dual mode.

• Notation in “Input format” includes following meanings. Parameters enclosed in brackets can be omitted.

When multiple parameters are enclosed in a pair of brackets, all the parameters enclosed can be omitted. Example) [P1] : P1 can be omitted.

[P1 P2] : P1 and P2 can be omitted. Either one of P1 or P2 cannot be omitted. [P1[P2]] : P1 and P2 can be omitted. P2 can be omitted without omitting P1, but P1 cannot be omitted without omitting P2.

General Mode

Privileged Mode

Maintenance Mode

enable maintenance

disable end

Mode Transition and Command for Transition

Preface

1-3

Commands described with multiple input formats vary parameters to be specified according to the settings. In such a case, the key parameter is indicated as "Px (bold italic)" with an explanation. Example) P1 (aaa/bbb) P2 P3 : When aaa or bbb is specified by P1, specify P2 and P3. P1 (ccc) P4 P5 : When ccc is specified by P1, specify P4 and P5.

• Notation in "Parameters" includes following meanings. Braces indicate that one of the keywords delimited by vertical bars must be selected. indicates that subsequent parameter to be specified varies according to parameters

previously specified. In such a case, the affected parameter is indicated as "indent | (vertical bar)". All the parameters are affected as long as "indent |" continues.

* indicates a supplement for the parameter. A keyword with _ (underline) indicates that the keyword needs to be input upon command

input.

• In command input, use ASCII characters (excluding control characters).

Usable characters: [space] !"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMN OPQRSTUVWXYZ [\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~

Also, the following characters can be used as VLAN and PVC names. Usable characters: (The first character must be an alphabetic character.) Alphanumeric characters, "-", and "_"

Finer restrictions are applied to some commands. (For details, see the Note field of each command.)

• The line types specified in command entry correspond to the following line module types:

Line Type Line Module Type atm atm155 atmp atmp atmp155 atmp155 fe (fe8-pv), (fx8a-pv), (fx8b-pv), (fx8s-pv) gbe gbe-pv, gbe-pv2 gmx (gm8-t), (gm8-x) tdmp tdmp tdmp155 tdmp155

* Line modules in parentheses are not yet supported.

Preface

1-4

(Blank page)

Operation Modes

2-1

2 Operation Modes

Operation Modes

2-2

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Save Synchro-

nize SBY execution

exit Logout

This command is used for logout from CLI.

Input format exit

Parameter None

Default value None

Usage condition None

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# exit

Output item

Related commands

enable Switch from general mode to privileged mode disable Switch from privileged mode to general mode

Operation Modes

2-3

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

enable Switch from general mode to privileged mode

Enables you to switch from general mode to privileged mode.

Input format enable

Parameter None

Default value None

Usage condition Interactively enter your privileged mode password. When not setting this password, press [Enter].

Note None

Input example *Switch@1> enable Input enable password: *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

exit Logout disable Switch from privileged mode to general mode

Operation Modes

2-4

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

disable Switch from privileged mode to general mode

Enables you to switch from privileged mode to general mode.

Input format disable

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# disable *Switch@1>

Output item

Related commands

exit Logout enable Switch from general mode to privileged mode

Operation Modes

2-5

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

maintenance Switch from privileged mode to maintenance mode

Enables you to switch from privileged mode to maintenance mode.

Input format maintenance

Parameter None

Default value None

Usage condition If another session is in maintenance mode, you cannot switch from privileged mode to maintenance mode.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# maintenance *Switch@1%

Output item

Related command

end Switch from maintenance mode to privileged mode

Operation Modes

2-6

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set enable password Setting of privileged mode password

Sets your privileged mode password.

Input format set enable password

Parameter None

Default value None

Usage condition Set your privileged mode password interactively.

Note Set this password with 4 to 16 ASCII characters other than [space], [!], [?], and [control character].

Input example *Switch@1# set enable password Input old enable password: Input new enable password: Retype new enable password: *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

enable Switch from general mode to privileged mode clear enable password Clearing of privileged mode password

Operation Modes

2-7

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear enable password Clearing of privileged mode password

Clears your privileged mode password.

Input format clear enable password

Parameter None

Default value None

Usage condition Clear your privileged mode password interactively.


Input example *Switch@1# clear enable password Input old enable password: *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

enable Switch from general mode to privileged mode set enable password Setting of privileged mode password

Operation Modes

2-8

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set login password Setting of login password

Sets your login password.

Input format set login password

Parameter None

Default value None

Usage condition Set your login password interactively.


Input example *Switch@1# set login password Input old password: Input new password: Retype new password: *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

exit Logout clear login password Clearing of login password

Operation Modes

2-9

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear login password Clearing of login password

Clears your login password.

Input format clear login password

Parameter None

Default value None

Usage condition Clear your login password interactively.


Input example *Switch@1# clear login password Input old password: *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

exit Logout set login password Setting of login password

Operation Modes

2-10

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set terminal prompt Setting of terminal prompt

Sets a terminal prompt.

Input format set terminal prompt P1

Parameter P1: Terminal prompt name (1 to 20 characters)

Default value P1: Switch


Notes Terminal prompts for other than the set terminal are set at reconnection. Set this prompt name with ASCII characters other than ["], [?], and [control character]. When using [space], enclose the entire character string in double quotation marks.

Input example *Switch@1# set terminal prompt CX2600-220 *CX2600-220@1#

Output item

Related command

None

Operation Modes

2-11

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set terminal scroll system Setting of scroll control defaults

Sets scroll control defaults.

- Specifying that screen scroll stop is off set terminal scroll system P1 (off)

Input Formats

- Specifying that screen scroll stop is on set terminal scroll system [P1 (on) ] [P2]

Parameters P1: Scroll control {off | on} off: Screen scroll stop is off on: Screen scroll stop is on * If P1 is omitted, on is assumed.

• When on is specified in P1. P2: Number of scroll lines (1 to 99)

* If P2 is omitted, 22 is assumed.

Default value P1: on

P2: 22


Note Scroll control defaults are set in all terminals at reconnection.

Input example *Switch@1# set terminal scroll system on *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show terminal config Display of terminal information

Operation Modes

2-12

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set terminal scroll local Setting of local terminal scroll control

Sets local terminal scroll control.

- Specifying that screen scroll stop is off set terminal scroll local P1 (off)

Input Formats

- Specifying that screen scroll stop is on set terminal scroll local [P1 (on) ] [P2]

Parameters P1: Scroll control {off | on} off: Screen scroll stop is off on: Screen scroll stop is on * If P1 is omitted, on is assumed.

• When on is specified in P1. P2: Number of scroll lines (1 to 99)


Default value P1: on

P2: 22


Notes Local terminal scroll control only for the set terminal is set. A local terminal operates in scroll control default setting at reconnection.

Input example *Switch@1# set terminal scroll local on *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command


Operation Modes

2-13

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set terminal monitor Setting of autonomous message output

Sets autonomous message output.

Input format set terminal monitor P1

Parameter P1: Autonomous message control {enable | disable} enable: Enables autonomous message output disable: Disables autonomous message output

Default values P1: [RS-232C] enable

[telnet] disable


Notes Autonomous message output is suppressed during command execution. Terminals operate by default at reconnection.

Input example *Switch@1# set terminal monitor enable *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show terminal config Display of Show terminal information

Operation Modes

2-14

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set terminal logout Setting of automatic logout time

Sets automatic logout time.

Input format set terminal logout P1

Parameter P1: Automatic logout time (0 to 60 minutes) 0: Disables automatic logout time setting

Default value P1: 5 minutes


Note Automatic logout time for other than the set terminal is set at reconnection.

Input example *Switch@1# set terminal logout 60 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command


Operation Modes

2-15

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution


Shows terminal information.

Input format show terminal config

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show terminal config Current Terminal Configuration ============================== Console TimeOut (minutes) : 60 Output Length : off Alarm Monitor : disabled Default Terminal Configuration ============================== Console TimeOut (minutes) : 60 Output Length : 99 *Switch@1#

Output items Console Timeout (minutes): Automatic logout time Output Length: Scroll control off: Screen scroll stop is off XX: Scroll line

Alarm Monitor: Autonomous message output control enable: Enables autonomous message output disable: Disables autonomous message output

Related commands

set terminal scroll system Setting of scroll control defaults set terminal scroll local Setting of local terminal scroll control set terminal monitor Setting of autonomous message output set terminal logout Setting of automatic logout time

Operation Modes

2-16

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set user account Registration of user account

Registers a user account or changes the password of the registered user account.

Input format set user account P1 P2

Parameters

P1: User account name (1 to 10 characters) P2: Permission specification {read-only | read-write}

read-only: General mode read-write: Privileged mode

Default value None

Usage condition Set your password interactively.

Notes Set a user account with ASCII characters other than ["], [?], and [control character]. When using [space], enclose the entire character string in double quotation marks. You can register up to six user accounts except the default user account. You can change the password of the registered user account by specifying the same user account name and user privilege as the registered user account and entering the old password. Set the password with 4 to 16 ASCII characters other than [space], [!], [?], and [control character].

Input example *Switch@1# set user account cx2600 read-write Input password: Retype password: *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

show user account Display of user account clear user account Clearing of user account

Operation Modes

2-17

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show user account Display of user account

Shows registered user account information.

Input format show user account

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show user account User Information ================ User Name Rights -------------------------------- admin read-write ippan read-only tokken read-write cx2600 read-write *Switch@1#

Output items User Name: User account name Rights: Mode rights

read-only: General mode read-write: Privileged mode

Related commands

set user account Registration of user account clear user account Clearing of user account

Operation Modes

2-18

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear user account Clearing of user account

Clears a user account.

Input format clear user account P1

Parameter P1: User account name (1 to 10 characters)

Default value None


Notes You cannot clear the default user account “admin”. Set a user account with 4 to 16 ASCII characters other than ["], [?], and [control character]. When using [space], enclose the entire character string in double quotation marks.

Input example *Switch@1# clear user account cx2600 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set user account Registration of user account show user account Display of user account

Operation Modes

2-19

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set command-mode Setting of command mode

Sets command mode.

Input format set command-mode P1

Parameter P1: Command mode {normal | safety} normal: Normal mode safety: Safety mode

Default value P1: normal


Notes If command mode is safety mode, the command sequence control function, execution confirmation function, and overwrite setting suppression function are valid. For the target commands of each function, refer to "Command Mode Functions" of "Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions" in the "Instruction Manual".

Input example *Switch@1# set command-mode safety *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show command-mode Display of command mode settings

Operation Modes

2-20

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show command-mode Display of command mode settings

Shows command mode settings.

Input format show command-mode

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show command-mode Command Mode Configuration ========================== Command Mode : normal *Switch@1#

Output item Command Mode: Command mode normal: Normal mode safety: Safety mode

Related command

set command-mode Setting of command mode

Global Configuration

3-1

3 Global Configuration


3-2

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set system contact Setting of administrator contact

Sets an administrator to contact.

Input format set system contact P1

Parameter P1: Administrator to contact (0 to 255 characters)

Default value None


Notes To return the set administrator contact to the default value, set ” ” in P1. Set an administrator contact with ASCII characters (excluding control characters) like normal command entry.

Input example *Switch@1# set system contact abc *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show system information Display of system information


3-3

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set system name Setting of system name

Sets system name.

Input format set system name P1

Parameter P1: System name (0 to 255 characters)

Default value None


Notes To return the set system name to the default value, set ” ” in P1. Set a system name with ASCII characters (excluding control characters) like normal command entry.

Input example *Switch@1# set system name CX2600 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command



3-4

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set system location Setting of system location

Sets system location.

Input format set system location P1

Parameter P1: System location (0 to 255 characters)

Default value None


Notes To return the set system location to the default value, set ” ” in P1. Set a system location with ASCII characters (excluding control characters) like normal command entry.

Input example *Switch@1# set system location NEC *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command



3-5

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution


Shows system information.

Input format show system information

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show system information System Information ================== SysDescr : NEC CX2600/220 Ver.00.01.07 System Location: NEC System Name : CX2600/220 System Contact : abc System Up Time : 0 days, 00:53:41.57 *Switch@1#

Output items SysDescr: Device information NEC: Company name (fixed) CX2600/220: Device name (fixed) Ver.vv.rr.mm: Software version

vv: Version rr: Revision mm: Minor version

System Location: System location System Name: System name System Contact: Administrator contact System Up Time: Elapsed time after system start (unit: 10 ms)

Related commands

set system contact Setting of administrator contact set system name Setting of system name set system location Setting of system location


3-6

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

date Setting of date and time

Sets system date and time.

Input format date P1 P2

Parameters P1: Date (mm/dd/yy) mm: Month (01-12) dd: Day (01-31) yy: Year (00-99)

P2: Time (hh:mm:ss) hh: Hour (00-23) mm: Minute (00-59) ss: Second (00-59)

Default value None


Note Second input (ss) can be omitted. If omitted, 0 second is assumed.

Input example *Switch@1# date 04/18/06 12:00 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show system date Display of date and time


3-7

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set system timezone Setting of timezone

Sets timezone.

Input format set system timezone P1

Parameter P1: Timezone ±hh:mm <±>: Sign - or + <hh>: Hour (00-23) <mm>: Minute (00-59)

Default value P1: +9:00

Usage condition Always specify a sign of time difference.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set system timezone +09:00 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

date Setting of date and time show system date Display of date and time


3-8

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set system daylight-time Setting of daylight saving time

Sets daylight saving time.

- Specifying daylight saving time by date set system daylight-time P1 (date) P2 P3 P4 [P12]

Input Formats

- Specifying daylight saving time by week set system daylight-time P1 (week) P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 [P12]

Parameters P1: Start date (daylight saving time specification by date) specification or daylight saving time specification by week {first | second | third | fourth | last} - Start date (daylight saving time specification by date) (mm/dd)

mm: Month (01-12) dd: Date (01-31)

- Daylight saving time specification by week first: The first week second: The second week third: The third week fourth: The fourth week last: The last week

• When start date (daylight saving time specification by date) is specified in P1. P2: Start time (hh/mm)

hh: Hour (00-23) mm: Minute (00-59)

P3: End date (mm/dd) mm: Month (01-12) dd: Date (01-31)

P4: End time (hh/mm) hh: Hour (00-23) mm: Minute (00-59)


3-9

• When daylight saving time specification by week is specified in P1. P5: a start day of the week {sunday | monday | tuesday | wednesday | thursday | friday | saturday}

sunday: Sunday monday: Monday tuesday: Tuesday wednesday: Wednesday thursday: Thursday friday: Friday saturday: Saturday

P6: Start month (1-12) P7: Start time (hh:mm)


P8: End week {first | second | third | fourth | last} first: The first week second: The second week third: The third week fourth: The fourth week last: The last week

P9: an end day of the week {sunday | monday | tuesday | wednesday | thursday | friday | saturday}

sunday: Sunday monday: Monday tuesday: Tuesday wednesday: Wednesday thursday: Thursday friday: Friday saturday: Saturday

P10: End month (1-12) P11: End time (hh:mm)


P12: Time difference by daylight saving time (hh:mm) hh: Hour (00-23) mm: Minute (00 to 59) * If P12 is omitted, 01:00 is assumed.

Default value None

Usage condition In date specification, you cannot specify the same date for start/end date of daylight saving time. Also, in specification of a day of week, you cannot specify the same month/date/day of week for start/end date of daylight saving time.


3-10

Notes When daylight saving time starts, the clock is not set to the set start time, moving forward corresponding to the time difference by daylight saving time. Example) When the start time is 1:00 and time difference by daylight saving time is 0:300:58 -> 0:59 -> 1:30 When daylight saving time ends, the clock is not set to the set end time, moving backward corresponding to the time difference by daylight saving time. Example) When the end time is 2:00 and time difference by daylight saving time is 0:301:58 -> 1:59 -> 1:30 If daylight saving time is shorter than time difference by daylight saving time, the specified end date is changed to that of the next year. If the start date or the end date is Feb. 29, daylight saving time is applied only to leap years. If Feb. 29 is set as the start date and the daylight saving time is shorter than time difference by daylight saving time, the end date is changed to that of the next year of the leap year. If Feb. 29 is set as the end date and the daylight saving time is shorter than time difference by daylight saving time, the start date is changed to that of the previous year of a leap year. During daylight saving time, (DST) is shown in the current time.

Input example *Switch@1# set system daylight-time first sunday 4 1:00 last saturday 10 2:00 0:30 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

date Setting of date and time show system date Display of date and time clear system daylight-time Clearing of daylight saving time


3-11

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show system date Display of date and time

Shows system date and time.

Input format show system date [P1]

Parameter P1: Showing type {detail} detail: Detailed showing * If P1 is omitted, setting of daylight saving time is not shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show system date detail System Date =========== Current Date : 09/21/2006 Current Time : 14:14:47 (DST) Time Zone : GMT +09:00 Daylight Time Start : 04/02/2006 01:00 Daylight Time End : 10/28/2006 02:00 Daylight Time Offset: 00:30 *Switch@1#

Output items Date: Date Time: Time Time Zone: Time difference from Greenwich mean time Daylight Time Start : Start date and time of daylight saving time Daylight Time End : End date and time of daylight saving time Daylight Time Offset : Time difference by daylight saving time

Related commands

date Setting of date and time set system timezone Setting of timezone set system daylight-time Setting of daylight saving time


3-12

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear system daylight-time Clearing of daylight saving time

Clears daylight saving time settings.

Input format clear system daylight-time

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear system daylight-time *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

date Setting of date and time show system date Display of date and time set system daylight-time Setting of daylight saving time

Administration Ports

4-1

4 Administration Ports


4-2

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set ip address out-band Setting of out-band IP address

Sets the IP address and subnet mask of an out-band port.

Input format set ip address out-band P1 P2 P3

Parameters P1: Switch module number or system {system} Switch module number: 1 to 2 system: System

P2: IP address P3: Subnet mask

Default value None

Usage conditions You cannot use the network addresses set in the set ip address in-band command (Setting of in-band IP address) and set ip route command (Setting of static route). You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx as the IP address. (”xxx” is any numeric character.) You cannot set 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 as the network address. You cannot set 0 or 1 to all bits of the host part as the IP address.

Note If you log in via telnet communication, the login session close confirmation message is output.

Input examples *Switch@1# set ip address out-band 1 10.40.50.4 255.0.0.0 *Switch@1# set ip address out-band 2 10.40.50.5 255.0.0.0 *Switch@1# set ip address out-band system 10.40.50.6 255.0.0.0 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

clear ip address out-band Clearing of output-bound IP address set ip route default Setting of default gateway set ip route Setting of static route show ip config Display of network information


4-3

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear ip address out-band Clearing of out-band IP address

Initializes the IP address of an out-band port.

Input format clear ip address out-band P1

Parameter P1: Switch module number or system {system} Switch module number: 1 to 2 system: System

Default value None



Input examples *Switch@1# clear ip address out-band 1 *Switch@1# clear ip address out-band 2 *Switch@1# clear ip address out-band system *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set ip address out-band Setting of out-band IP address set ip route default Setting of default gateway set ip route Setting of static route show ip config Display of network information


4-4

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set ip address in-band Setting of in-band IP address

Sets an IP address and subnet mask for the logical interface.

Input format set ip address in-band P1 P2 P3

Parameters P1: Switch module number or system {system} Switch module number: 1 to 2 system: System

P2: IP address P3: Subnet mask

Default value None

Usage conditions You cannot use the network addresses set in the set ip address out-band command (Setting of out-band IP address) and set ip route command (Setting of static route). You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx as the IP address. (”xxx” is any numeric character.) You cannot set 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 as the network address. You cannot set 0 or 1 to all bits of the host part as the IP address.

Note If you log in via telnet communication, the login session disconnection confirmation message is output.

Input examples *Switch@1# set ip address in-band 1 1.1.1.1 255.0.0.0 *Switch@1# set ip address in-band 2 1.1.1.2 255.0.0.0 *Switch@1# set ip address in-band system 1.1.1.3 255.0.0.0 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

show in-band information Display of in-band port setup information clear ip address in-band Clearing of in-band IP address set ip route default Setting of default gateway set ip route Setting of static route show ip config Display of network information set in-band vid Setting of in-band port VLAN


4-5

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show in-band information Display of in-band port setup information

Shows in-band port setup information.

Input format show in-band information

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show in-band information In-Band Configuration ===================== Module Admin ------------------- Switch#1 : enabled Switch#2 : disabled In-Band VLAN Configuration ========================== VID : 4094 Name: abcd *Switch@1#

Output items Module: Module Admin: Port block/unblock setting

enabled: Port unblocked disabled: Port blocked

Related commands

set in-band admin Block/unblock of in-band port set in-band vid Setting of in-band port VLAN


4-6

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear ip address in-band Clearing of in-band IP address

Clears logical interface settings.

Input format clear ip address in-band P1

Parameter P1: Switch module number or system {system} Switch module number: 1 to 2 system: System

Default value None



Input example *Switch@1# clear ip address in-band 1 *Switch@1# clear ip address in-band 2 *Switch@1# clear ip address in-band system *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set ip address in-band Setting of in-band IP address set ip route default Setting of default gateway set ip route Setting of static route show ip config Display of network information set in-band vid Setting of in-band port VLAN


4-7

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set ip route default Setting of default gateway

Sets a default gateway.

Input format set ip route default P1

Parameter P1: IP address

Default value None

Usage conditions If a default gateway is set in in-band communication, a default gateway cannot be used in out-band communication. If a default gateway is set in in-band communication, the default gateway that is already set in out-band communication is disabled. If a default gateway is set in out-band communication, the default gateway that is already set in in-band communication is disabled. You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx as the IP address. (”xxx” is any numeric character.) If you set 0 or 1 to all bits of the host part as the IP address, this setting may not provide correct communication. You can set the network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 as the gateway address but this setting does not provide correct communication.


Input example *Switch@1# set ip route default 10.20.30.40 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set ip address in-band Setting of in-band IP address clear ip address in-band Clearing of in-band IP address set ip address out-band Setting of out-band IP address clear ip address out-band Clearing of out-band IP address clear ip route default Clearing of default gateway show ip config Display of network information


4-8

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear ip route default Clearing of default gateway

Clears a default gateway.

Input format clear ip route default

Parameter None

Default value None



Input example *Switch@1# clear ip route default *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set ip route default Setting of default gateway show ip config Display of network information


4-9

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set ip route Setting of static route

Sets a static route.

Input format set ip route P1 P2 P3 P4

Parameters P1: Routing domain (1 to 32) P2: Destination address P3: Subnet mask P4: IP address (next hop)

Default value None

Usage conditions You cannot use the network addresses set in the set ip address in-band command (Setting of in-band IP address) and set ip address out-band command (Setting of out-band IP address). You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx as the IP address. (”xxx” is any numeric character.) If you set 0 or 1 to all bits of the host part as the gateway address or set 1 to all bits as the destination address, this setting may not provide correct communication. You cannot set the network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 as the destination address. Also, you can set the gateway address for the network address 192.168.128.0/24 or 192.168.129.0/24 but this setting does not provide correct communication.


Input example *Switch@1# set ip route 1 1.2.3.4 255.255.255.0 10.20.30.40 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set ip address in-band Setting of in-band IP address clear ip address in-band Clearing of in-band IP address set ip address out-band Setting of out-band IP address clear ip address out-band Clearing of out-band IP address clear ip route Clearing of static route show ip config Display of network information


4-10

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show ip config Display of network information

Shows network information for out-band/in-band.

Input format show ip config

Parameter None

Default value None

Usage conditions 0.0.0.0 is shown in unset IP address and subnet mask. 00:00:00:00:00:00 is shown in the MAC addresses of uninstalled switch modules.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show ip config Out-Band IP Table ================= Module MAC Address IP Address Netmask -------------------------------------------------------------- System : 00:00:4c:b4:fc:64 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Switch#1 : 00:00:00:00:00:00 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Switch#2 : 00:00:4c:b4:fc:64 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 In-Band IP Table ================ Module MAC Address IP Address Netmask ----------------------------------------------------------------------System : 00:00:4c:b4:fc:a4 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Switch#1 : 00:00:00:00:00:00 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Switch#2 : 00:00:4c:b4:fc:a4 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 IP Routing Table ================ Destination Gateway Index Address Netmask Address Port ---------------------------------------------------------------------- - 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 10.20.30.40 --- In-Band Mode ============ Mode : virtual VLAN Virtual-Address Table ========================== Index VID Name Address ----------------------------------------------------------------------3 300 1.1.1.10


4-11

*Switch@1#

Output items Module: Module MAC Address: MAC address IP Address: IP address Netmask: Subnet mask Index: Routing domain Destination Address: Destination address Gateway Address: Gateway address Port: Band

out-band: Out-band communication in-band : In-band communication - : No band

Mode: In-band mode Virtual: User connection test function enabled Real: Administration port control function enabled VID: VLAN ID Name: VLAN name (32 characters) Address: Virtual IP address

Related commands

set ip address in-band Setting of in-band IP address clear ip address in-band Clearing of in-band IP address set ip address out-band Setting of out-band IP address clear ip address out-band Clearing of out-band IP address set ip route default Setting of default gateway clear ip route default Clearing of default gateway set ip route Setting of static route clear ip route Clearing of static route set ip in-band mode Switching of in-band mode set ip virtual-address Setting of virtual IP address clear ip virtual-address Clearing of virtual IP address


4-12

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear ip route Clearing of static route

Clears a static route.

Input format clear ip route P1

Parameter P1: Routing domain (1 to 32)

Default value None


Note After this command is entered, execution is confirmed.

Input example *Switch@1# clear ip route 1 Would you like to terminate remote session : (Y/N) : y *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set ip route Setting of static route show ip config Display of network information


4-13

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set in-band admin Block/unblock of in-band port

Blocks and unblocks an in-band port.

Input format set in-band admin P1 P2

Parameters P1: Switch module number (1 to 2) P2: In-band port block/unblock setting {enable | disable}

enable: In-band port unblocked disable: In-band port blocked

Default value P2: enable



Input example *Switch@1# set in-band admin 1 enable *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set ip address in-band Setting of in-band IP address clear ip address in-band Clearing of in-band IP address set ip route default Setting of default gateway set ip route Setting of static route show ip config Display of network information set in-band vid Setting of in-band port VLAN


4-14

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set in-band vid Setting of in-band port VLAN

Sets the VLAN to which the CPU port belongs.

Input format set in-band vid P1

Parameter P1: VLAN identifier {VLAN-ID | VLAN-name} VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters

Default values VLAN-ID: 1

Usage conditions The VLAN to which the CPU port belongs is set in the set the in-band vid command.

This VLAN transfers all broadcast, multicast, and unknown unicast frames to the CPU port. To reduce CPU load, use this VLAN separately from user lines.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set in-band vid 1 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set ip address in-band Set in-band IP address clear ip address in-band Clear in-band IP address set ip route default Setting of default gateway set ip route Setting of static route show ip config Display of network information set in-band admin Blocking/unblocking of in-band port


4-15

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set out-band speed Setting of out-band port speed/communication direction

Sets out-band port speed/communication direction.

- Specifying port speed (Auto-negotiation) set out-band speed P1(auto)

Input formats

- Specifying the following port speed -10m-half -10m-full -100m-half -100m-full

set out-band speed P1(10m-half | 10m-full | 100m-half | 100m-full) P2 Parameters P1: Port speed {10m-half | 10m-full | 100m-half | 100m-full | auto}

10m-half: 10Mbps and Half Duplex 10m-full: 10Mbps and Full Duplex 100m-half: 100Mbps and Half Duplex 100m-full: 100Mbps and Full Duplex auto: Auto-negotiation

• When 10m-half, 10m-full, 100m-half, or 100m-full is specified in P1. P2: Interface {mdi | mdi-x}

mdi : MDI mode mdi-x: MDI-X mode

Default value None



Input example *Switch@1# set out-band speed auto *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show out-band information Display of out-band port setup information


4-16

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set out-band flowcontrol Setting of out-band port flow control

Sets out-band port flow control.

Input format set out-band flowcontrol P1

Parameter P1: Flow control enable/disable setting {enable | disable} enable: Enables flow control disable: Disables flow control

Default value P1: disable


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set out-band flowcontrol enable *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command



4-17

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution


Shows out-band port setup information.

Input format show out-band information

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show out-band information Out-Band Table ============== Port Link Flowcontrol Flowcontrol Module Speed Status MDI Configuration Status ----------------------------------------------------------------------- Switch#1 : auto 100m-full auto disabled disabled Switch#2 : auto --- auto disabled --- *Switch@1#

Output items Module: Module Port Speed: Port speed setting

10m-half: 10Mbps Half Duplex 10m-full: 10Mbps Full Duplex 100m-half: 100Mbps Half Duplex 100m-full: 100Mbps Full Duplex auto: Auto-negotiation

Link Status: Port physical link status 10m-half: 10Mbps Half Duplex 10m-full: 10Mbps Full Duplex 100m-half: 100Mbps Half Duplex 100m-full: 100Mbps Full Duplex link-down: Link down --- : Uninstalled

MDI: MDI setting mdi: MDI mode mdi-x: MDI-X mode auto: Auto-negotiation

Flowcontrol Configuration: Flow control configuration

enabled: Flow control configuration enabled disabled: Flow control configuration disabled

Flowcontrol Status: Flow control status enabled: Flow control enabled disabled: Flow control disabled --- : Flow control uninstalled

Related commands

set out-band speed Setting of out-band port speed/communication direction set out-band flowcontrol Setting of out-band port flow control


4-18

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

ping Checking of connection

Checks if connection with the host is correct. To cancel the connection test halfway, press Ctrl + c key combination.

Input format ping P1 [P2]

Parameters P1: IP address P2: Execution count (1 to 2147483647)

* If P2 is omitted, 4 times are assumed.

Default value None

Usage conditions To cancel the connection test, press Ctrl + c . You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx as the IP address. (”xxx” is any numeric character.) Also, you can set the network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 but this setting does not provide correct communication.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# ping 192.168.1.212 PING 192.168.1.212: 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 192.168.1.212: icmp_seq=0 ttl=255 time<5 ms 64 bytes from 192.168.1.212: icmp_seq=1 ttl=255 time<5 ms 64 bytes from 192.168.1.212: icmp_seq=2 ttl=255 time<5 ms 64 bytes from 192.168.1.212: icmp_seq=3 ttl=255 time<5 ms --- 192.168.1.212 ping statistics --- 4 packets transmitted, 4 packets received, 0% packet loss round-trip min/avg/max/stddev = 0.000/0.000/0.000/0.000 ms *Switch@1#

Output item ping response information is output.

Related commands

set ip address in-band Setting of in-band IP address set ip address out-band Setting of out-band IP address set ip route default Setting of default gateway set ip route Setting of static route


4-19

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set ip virtual-address Setting of virtual IP address

Sets a VLAN ID and virtual IP address in the specified index.

Input format set ip virtual-address P1 P2 P3

Parameters P1: Index (1 to 16) P2: Virtual IP address P3: VLAN identifier {VLAN-ID | VLAN-name}

VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters

Default value None

Usage condition You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx as the IP address. (”xxx” is any numeric character.)

Notes You can assign up to 16 virtual IP addresses corresponding to VLAN IDs. The same virtual IP address can be assigned for another VLAN. Out-band IP addresses can also be duplicated with virtual IP addresses.

Input example *Switch@1# set ip virtual-address 3 172.16.1.10 test-vlan-1 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

show ip config Display of network information set ip in-band mode Setting of in-band mode virtual-ping Confirmation of connection with host clear ip virtual-address Clearing of virtual IP address


4-20

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

virtual-ping Confirmation of connection with host

Performs the user connection test on the CX2600 side to confirm the connection with the host. To cancel the user connection test halfway, press [Ctrl]+[c].

Input format virtual-ping P1 P2 [P3] [P4]

Parameters P1: Virtual IP address P2: VLAN identifier {VLAN-ID | VLAN-name}

VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters

P3: Consecutive transmission times count (1 to 65535) * If P3 is omitted, 4 times are assumed.

P4: Response wait timeout value time (1 to 60 sec) * If P4 is omitted, 1 second is assumed.

Default value None

Usage conditions You can enter this command when the in-band user connection test function is enabled (when virtual is effective). This virtual-ping cannot be transferred beyond a gateway. You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx as the IP address. (”xxx” is any numeric character.)

Note The size of ICMP ECHO packet to be transmitted is fixed at 64 bytes.

Input example *Switch@1# virtual-ping 172.16.1.17 30 count 2 time out 1 PING 172.16.1.17: 64 data bytes 64 bytes from 172.16.1.17: icmp_seq=1 ttl=128 time<5 ms 64 bytes from 172.16.1.17: icmp_seq=2 ttl=128 time<5 ms --- 172.16.1.17 ping statistics --- 2 packets transmitted, 2 packets received, 0% packet loss round-trip min/avg/max/stddev = 0.000/0.000/0.000/0.000 ms

*Switch@1#

Output item virtual-ping response information is displayed.

Related commands

set ip in-band mode Setting of in-band mode set ip virtual-address Setting of virtual IP address clear ip virtual-address Clearing of virtual IP address


4-21

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear ip virtual-address Clearing of virtual IP address

Clears the virtual IP address of the specified index.

Input format clear ip virtual-address P1

Parameter P1: Index (1 to 16)

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear ip virtual-address 6 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

show ip config Display of network information set ip in-band mode Setting of in-band mode set ip virtual-address Setting of virtual IP address virtual-ping Confirmation of connection with host


4-22

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set ip in-band mode Setting of in-band mode

Switches in-band mode (real or virtual) to specify whether to enable the in-band user connection test function or in-band administration port control function.

Input format set ip in-band mode P1

Parameter P1: In-band mode specification real: Enables the in-band administration port control function virtual: Enables the in-band user connection test function

Default value None


Notes If the set in-band mode command enables the in-band user connection test function, various in-band telnet/SNMP/NTP/syslog/ftp functions are disabled and the connected in-band telnet session is disconnected. When the telnet session is disconnected, interactive confirmation is performed. An attempt to download running-config including this command in in-band mode will fail because the connected ftp session is also suspended.

Input example *Switch@1# set in-band mode virtual *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

show ip config Display of network information set ip virtual-address Setting of virtual IP address virtual-ping Confirmation of connection with host clear ip virtual-address Clearing of virtual IP address

Ports

5-1

5 Ports

Ports

5-2

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set port admin Setting of port blocking/unblocking

Blocking a port disables communication due to link down in a physical layer or unblocking it enables communication.

Input format set port admin P1 P2 P3

Parameters P1: Port (line) type {fe | gbe | gmx | atm | atmp | tdmp | atmp155 | tdmp155} fe: FE port gbe: GbE port gmx: GbE-MUX port atm: ATM155 port atmp: ATMP port tdmp: TDMP port atmp155: ATMP155 port tdmp155: TDMP155 port

P2: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) P3: Port blocking/unblocking setting {enable | disable}

enable: Port unblocking disable: Port blocking


Usage condition When port blocking is set, the “LINK DOWN” message may be displayed. When port unblocking is set, the “LINK UP” message may be displayed. Whether “LINK DOWN” or “LINK UP” is displayed depends on the physical connection status of the set port.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set port admin gbe 10/1 enable *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show port information Display of port setting and status information

Ports

5-3

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set port speed Setting of port speed and MDI/MDI-X

Sets a port speed and electrical interface (MDI/MDI-X) switching. If auto-negotiation is set as the port speed, you cannot set MDI/MDI-X because the interface is automatically switched.

Input format - Setting auto set port speed P1 P2 P3(auto)

- Setting mdi/mdi-x set port speed P1 P2 P3(10m-full | 100m-full | 1000m-full) [P4]

Parameters P1: Port (line) type {fe | gbe | gmx} fe: FE port gbe: GbE port gmx: GbE-MUX port

P2: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) P3: Port speed {10m-full | 100m-full | 1000m-full | auto}

10m-full: 10Mbps and Full Duplex 100m-full: 100Mbps and Full Duplex 1000m-full: 1000Mbps and Full Duplex auto: Auto-negotiation

• When a port speed other than auto is specified in P3. P4: Interface {mdi | mdi-x}

mdi: MDI mode mdi-x: MDI-X mode

Default values P3: auto <FE(100BASE-TX)>, <GbE>, <GbE-MUX>

100m-full <FE(100BASE-FX)>

Usage conditions - You can set only 100m-full in the FX(100BASE-FX) line module. - We recommend you to set auto-negotiation in the GbE/GbE-MUX line module.

Notes If 100m-full is set in the FE (100BASE-TX) line module, SPEED-LED always goes on without reference to the port (line) status. If the port (line) speed is fixed at 1000 Mbps in the GigabitEther electrical interface, 1000 Mbps fixed connection is performed using auto-negotiation. For connection with an associated device that performs 1000 Mbps fixed connection without auto-negotiation, 1000m-full link down may become unstable. In 1000 Mbps connection, auto is always set for mdi/mdi-x because auto-negotiation is always used.For the optical interface, auto-negotiation is not used in 1000m-full setting. However, if the associated device performs 1000 Mbps fixed connection using auto-negotiation, link down may become unstable. For the optical interface, mdi/mdi-x setting is ignored.

Input example *Switch@1# set port speed fe 1/1 10m-full mdi *Switch@1#

Ports

5-4

Output item

Related command show port information Display of port setting and status information

Ports

5-5

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set port type Setting of GbE port media

Specifies a port (1000BASE-T or 1000BASE-X) used in the GbE module. If auto-negotiation is specified, the connected port (line) is automatically selected.

Input format set port type P1 P2 P3

Parameters P1: Port (line) type {gbe} gbe: GbE port

P2: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) P3: Interface type {electric | optical | auto}

electric: 1000BASE-T optical: 1000BASE-X auto: Auto-negotiation

Default value P3: auto

Usage condition If lines are connected to both 1000BASE-T and 1000BASE-X when auto-negotiation is specified, 1000BASE-X precedes 1000BASE-T.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set port type gbe 1/1 electric *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command


Ports

5-6

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set port flowcontrol Setting of flow control

Sets whether to enable or disable the flow control function. When enabled, the flow control port controls transmission stop and restart between itself and an associated device using a flow control frame (inactive frame). When the receiving buffer becomes full, the port transmits the inactive frame to the associated device. When it receives the inactive frame, the port suppresses transmission.

Input format set port flowcontrol P1 P2 P3

Parameters P1: Port (line) type {fe | gbe} fe: FE port gbe: GbE port

P2: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) P3: Flow control setting {enable | disable | auto}

enable: Enables flow control disable: Disables flow control auto: Auto-negotiation


Usage conditions When setting auto-negotiation in this command, you must specify auto-negotiation as the port speed in advance. If the flow control function of the associated device is disabled when auto-negotiation is specified in this command, flow control cannot be performed.

Note You cannot enter this command to the GbE-MUX port because this port does not support the flow control function.

Input example *Switch@1# set port flowcontrol fe 1/8 enable *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set port speed Setting of port speed and MDI/MDI-X show port information Display of port setting and status information

Ports

5-7

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set port protection-time Setting of port link protection time

Sets the protection time that lasts from when a port link down occurs to when it is recovered.

Input format set port protection-time P1 P2 P3 P4


P2: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) P3: Link status {link-up | link-down}

link-up: Link up link-down: Link down

P4: Link protection time (0 to 7000 msec)

Default value P4: 3000 (P3=link-up)

500 (P3=link-down)

Usage condition You can set this protection time (0 to 7000 msec) in units of 500 msec.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set port protection-time fe 1/2 link-up 0 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show port protection-time Display of port link protection time

Ports

5-8

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set port link-trap Setting of SNMP link trap transmission

Sets whether to enable or disable SNMP link trap transmission. This setting corresponds to ifLinkUpDownTrapEnable setting in the standard MIB ifMIB group.

Input format set port link-trap P1 P2 P3

Parameters P1: Port (line) type {fe | gbe | gmx | atm | atmp | tdmp | tdmp155 | atmp155} fe: FE port gbe: GbE port gmx: GbE-MUX port atm: ATM155 port atmp: ATMP port tdmp: TDMP port tdmp155: TDMP155 port atmp155: ATMP155 port

P2: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) P3: SNMP link trap transmission setting {enable | disable}

enable: Enables SNMP link trap transmission disable: Disables SNMP link trap transmission



Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set port link-trap fe 1/1 enable *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show port trap Display of link trap transmission setting

Ports

5-9

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set port clock Setting of ATM transmission path clock

Sets clock supply mode for the ATM transmission path.

Input format set port clock P1 P2 P3

Parameters P1: Port (line) type {atm | atmp155} atm: ATM155 port atmp155: ATMP155 port

P2: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) P3: Clock setting {master | slave}

master: Clock independent supply mode slave: Clock external supply mode

Default values ATM155 port

P3: slave ATMP155 port

P3: master Usage condition You can set clock supply mode only for the ATM155/ATMP155 port.

Note None

Input example Switch@1# set port clock atm 3/1 slave *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

show port information Display of port setting and status information set line type Setting of line module type

Ports

5-10

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set port frame Setting of ATM transmission path framing mode

Sets framing mode for the ATM transmission path.

Input formats - Setting idle cell method set port frame P1 P2 P3(idle)

- Setting unassigned idle cell method set port frame P1 P2 P3(unassigned) P4

Parameters P1: Port (line) type {atm | atmp155} atm: ATM port atmp155: ATMP155 port

P2: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) P3: Cell method setting {idle | unassigned}

idle: Idle cell method unassigned: Unassigned idle cell method

• When unassigned is specified in P3. P4: Framing mode {sdh | sonet}

sdh: SDH physical frame layer sonet: SONET physical frame layer

Default value P3: idle

Usage condition You can set framing mode only for the ATM155/ATMP155 port.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set port frame atm 3/1 idle *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

show port information Display of port setting and status information set line type Setting of line module type

Ports

5-11

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution


Shows port setup information and the line status.

Input format show port information [P1]

Parameter P1: Line module number (single specification) or port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.)

Line module number (single specification): 1 to 12 Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) * If P1 is omitted, all line module numbers are assumed.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show port information 1 Port Information Table ====================== Port Link Port Admin Speed Status MDI ------------------------------------------------------ 1/1 enabled 10m-full 10m-full mdi 1/2 enabled 10m-full 10m-full mdi-x 1/3 enabled 100m-full 100m-full mdi 1/4 enabled 100m-full link-down mdi-x 1/5 enabled 10m-full link-down mdi 1/6 enabled 10m-full link-down mdi-x 1/7 enabled 100m-full link-down mdi 1/8 enabled auto link-down auto mdi/mdi-x Flowcontrol Flowcontrol Port Configuration Status -------------------------------- 1/1 disabled disabled 1/2 disabled disabled 1/3 disabled disabled 1/4 disabled disabled 1/5 disabled disabled 1/6 disabled disabled 1/7 disabled disabled 1/8 auto disabled *Switch@1#

Ports

5-12

Output items Port: Port (line) number Admin: Port block/unblock setting enabled: Port unblocked disabled: Port blocked

Port Speed: Port speed setting 10m-full: 10Mbps Full Duplex 100m-full: 100Mbps Full Duplex 1000m-full: 1000Mbps Full Duplex auto: Auto-negotiation 155s: Single-mode optical fiber 155m: Multi-mode optical fiber

Link Status: Port physical link status 10m-full: 10Mbps Full Duplex 100m-full: 100Mbps Full Duplex 1000m-full: 1000Mbps Full Duplex link-down: Link down 155s: Single-mode optical fiber 155m: Multi-mode optical fiber 1.5m-t1: T1 1.5Mbps 2.048m-e1: E1 2.048Mbps

MDI: Port MDI/MDI-X setting mdi: mdi setting mdi-x: mdi-x setting auto mdi/mdi-x: Automatic recognition (when Speed is auto))

Flowcontrol Configuration: Flow control configuration enabled: Flow control configuration enabled disabled: Flow control configuration disabled auto: Determined from alignment with the associated device

Flowcontrol Status: Flow control status enabled: Flow control enabled disabled: Flow control disabled

(The following Type Status and Type Configuration are shown only in the GbE module.) Type Status: Current line type

1000BASE-SX: 1000BASE-SX line (optical) 1000BASE-LX: 1000BASE-LX line (optical) 1000BASE-ZX: 1000BASE-ZX line (optical) 1000BASE-BX10-D: 1000BASE-BX10-D line (optical) 1000BASE-BX10-U: 1000BASE-BX10-U line (optical) 1000BASE-T: 1000BASE-T line Other: Unsupported line type

Type Configuration: Line type setting electric: Electrical line selected optical: Optical line selected auto: Automatic selection of line

Ports

5-13

(The following SFP type, Tx Error, and Rx Error are shown only in the GbE/ATMP155/TDMP155 module.) SFP type: Type of optical module currently being used

1000BASE-SX: 1000BASE-SX module 1000BASE-LX: 1000BASE-LX module 1000BASE-ZX: 1000BASE-ZX module 1000BASE-BX10-D : 1000BASE-BX10-D module 1000BASE-BX10-U : 1000BASE-BX10-U module OS3-MS2 : OC3 Multimode Shortreach 2Km OS3-SI15 : OC3 Singlemode Interreach 15Km OS3-SL40 : OC3 Singlemode Longreach 40Km OS3-SL80 : OC3 Singlemode Longreach 80Km Other: Unsupported optical module

Tx Error: Optical module output error detection status normal: No output error occurred fail: An output error occurred

Rx Error: Optical module input error detection status normal: No input error occurred fail: An input error occurred

SFP Vendor Information: Optical module vendor information Vendor Name: Manufacturer name Vendor OUI: OUI Vendor Part Number: Manufacturing number Vendor Revision: Version Vendor Serial Number: Serial number

(The following Clock, Framing, and Cell Padding are shown only in the ATM155/ATMP155 line module.) Clock: Clock control

master: Independent mode setting slave: External supply mode setting

Framing: Physical layer frame method sdh: SDH method sonet: SONET method

Cell Padding: Cell method idle: Idle cell method unassigned: Unassigned idle cell method

(The following F1-F3 Status Tables are shown only in the ATM155/ATMP155 line module.) F1 Status Table: F1 alarm status

LOS: Loss of signal LOF: Loss of frame alignment

F2 Status Table : F2 alarm status MS-AIS: Receiving multiplex section failure MS-SD: Multiplex section error rate degradation MS-RDI: Sending multiplex section failure MS-ERR: Receiving multiplex section error MS-REI: Sending multiplex section error

Ports

5-14

F3 Status Table: F3 alarm status LOP: AU pointer error P-AIS: Receiving transmission path error LCD: Out-of-cell delineation detect: Alarm detected ---: Alarm not detected

(The following Framing, Frame Type, and Code/Alarm Status are shown only in the ATMP/TDMP line module.) Framing: Frame format setting

crc4: CRC4 multiframe crc4-no-cas: CRC4 multiframe-without-CAS non-crc4: G.704 unstructured: unstructured esf: extended superframe sf: superframe

Frame Type: Frame type setting t1: T1 mode e1: E1 mode

Code: LineCode setting hdb3: HDB3 ami: AMI b8zs: B8ZS

Alarm Status: Alarm status normal: No alarm los: LOS detection ais: AIS detection lof: LOF detection rai: RAI detection

(The following Framing, SECTION(RS) Status Table, and LINE(MS) Status Table are only shown in the TDMP155 line module.) Framing: Frame format

sdh: SDH method sonet: SONET method

SECTION(RS) Status Table: RS alarm status LOS: Foss of frame detection LOF: Loss of frame alignment continuous detection OOF: Loss of frame alignment detection RS-TIM: Detection of mismatch in path trace character string RS-BIP: BIP error (B1) detected

LINE(MS) Status Table: MS alarm status MS-AIS: Receiving multiplex section failure detected MS-DEG: B2 error rate 10-6 or higher detection MS-EXC: B2 error rate 10-3 or higher detection MS-RDI: Sending multiplex section failure detection MS-REI: Sending multiplex section error detection MS-BIP: BIP error (B2) detection

Ports

5-15

Related commands

set port admin Setting of port blocking/unblocking set port speed Setting of port speed and MDI/MDI-X set port type Setting of GbE port media set port flowcontrol Setting of flow control set port clock Setting of ATM transmission path clock set port frame Setting of ATM transmission path framing mode

Ports

5-16

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show port trap Display of link trap transmission setting

Shows whether SNMP link trap transmission setting is enabled or disabled.

Input format show port trap [P1]

Parameter P1: Line module number (single specification) (1 to 12) * If P1 is omitted, all line module numbers are assumed.

Default value None


Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# show port trap 1 Port Trap Table =============== Port Link Trap ------------------------- 1/1 enabled 1/2 disabled 1/3 enabled 1/4 enabled 1/5 enabled 1/6 enabled 1/7 enabled 1/8 enabled *Switch@1# show port trap 10 Port Trap Table =============== Port Link Trap ------------------------- 10/1 enabled 10/2 enabled 10/3 enabled 10/4 enabled 10/5 enabled 10/6 enabled 10/7 enabled 10/8 enabled *Switch@1#

Ports

5-17

Output items Port: Port (line) number Link Trap: Port trap transmission setting

Enabled: Port trap transmission setting enabled Disabled: Port trap transmission setting disabled

Related command

set port link-trap Setting of SNMP link trap transmission

Ports

5-18

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show port protection-time Display of port link protection time

Shows the protection time that lasts from when a port link down occurs to when it is recovered.

Input format show port protection-time [P1]

Parameter P1: Line module number (single specification) (1 to 12) *If P1 is omitted, all line module numbers are assumed.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show port protection-time 1 Link Protection Time Table ========================== Port Link Up(msec) Link Down(msec) -------------------------------------------------------- 1/1 3000 500 1/2 0 500 1/3 3000 500 1/4 3000 500 1/5 3000 0 1/6 3000 500 1/7 3000 500 1/8 3000 500 *Switch@1#

Output items Port: Port (line) number Link Up: Link up protection time (msec) Link Down: Link down occurrence protection time (msec)

Related command

set port protection-time Setting of port link protection time

Ports

5-19

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set port cable-length Setting of port cable length

Sets port cable length.

- Specifying length (short) set port cable-length P1 P2(short) [P3] - Specifying length (long) set port cable-length P1 P2(long) [P3] [P4]

Input format

- Specifying length (default) set port cable-length P1 P2(initial)

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) P2: Length type {short | long | initial}

short: short long: long initial: default

• When short is specified in P2. P3: Cable length {133ft | 266ft | 399ft | 533ft | 655ft}

133ft : 133ft 266ft: 266ft 399ft: 399ft 533ft: 533ft 655ft: 655ft * If P3 is omitted, 133ft is assumed.

• When long is specified in P2. P3: Transmission attenuator {0db | 7.5db | 15db | 22.5db}

0db : 0db 7.5db: 7.5db 15db: 15db 22.5db: 22.5db * If P3 is omitted, 0db is assumed.

P4: gain value {gain21db | gain31db} gain21db: gain21db gain31db: gain31db * If P4 is omitted, gain 31db is assumed.

Default value If short is specified in P2, P3: 133ft.

If long is specified in P2, P3: 0db, P4: gain 31db. If initial is specified in P2, the same value as the default when length (short) is specified.

Usage condition The frame type of a specified port (line) needs to be set to t1.

Note None

Ports

5-20

Input example set port cable-length 1/3 short set port cable-length 1/1-2,1/4-8 short 399ft set port cable-length 3/1 long 7.5db set port cable-length 3/2 long gain21db set port cable-length 3/2-4,3/5-8 long 7.5db gain31db set port cable-length 12/1 initial

Output item

Related commands

set line mode tdmp Setting of TDMP line mode set line mode atmp Setting of ATMP line mode show port cable-length Display of port cable length settings

Ports

5-21

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show port cable-length Display of port cable length settings

Shows port cable length settings.

Input format show port cable-length [P1]

Parameter P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) * If P1 is omitted, all ports (lines) for which the frame type is set to T1 are assumed.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show port cable-length Cable Length Information Table ============================== Cable Receive Port Kind Length Tx ATT Sensitivity ---------------------------------------- 3/1 short 133ft --- --- 3/2 short 266ft --- --- 3/3 short 399ft --- --- 3/4 short 533ft --- --- 3/5 short 655ft --- --- 3/6 short 133ft --- --- 3/7 short 133ft --- --- 3/8 short 133ft --- --- 4/1 long --- 0db gain21db 4/2 long --- 0db gain31db 4/3 long --- 7.5db gain21db 4/4 long --- 7.5db gain31db 4/5 long --- 15db gain21db 4/6 long --- 15db gain31db 4/7 long --- 22.5db gain21db 4/8 long --- 22.5db gain31db *Switch@1#

Output items Port: Port (line) number Kind: Length type Cable Length: Cable length Tx ATT: Transmission attenuator Receive Sensitivity: Gain value

Ports

5-22

Related commands

set line mode tdmp Setting of TDMP line mode set line mode atmp Setting of ATMP line mode set port cable-length Setting of port cable length

Ports

5-23

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set port logical-interface Setting of TDMP155 port logical interface

Sets a TDMP155 port logical interface.

- Setting frame format set port logical-interface P1 P2 (sdh | sonet) P3 [P4]

Input formats

- Clearing frame format setting set port logical-interface P1 P2 (none)

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (single specification) (1/1-12/1) P2: Frame type {sdh | sonet | none}

sdh: Specification for the SDH mode sonnet: Specification for the SONET mode none: No frame format setting

• When sdh or sonet is specified in P2 P3: Logical port number

SDH: 1-3 /1-7 / 1-3 SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4

• When sdh is specified in P2 P4: Frame format {crc4 | crc4nocas | non-crc4 | unframed}

crc4: CRC4 multiframe crc4nocas: CRC4 multiframe-without-CAS non-crc4: G.704 unframed: unframed * If P4 is omitted, crc4 is assumed.

• When sonet is specified in P2 P4: Frame format {esf | sf}

esf: extended superframe sf: superframe * If P4 is omitted, esf is assumed.

Default values P4: crc4 (for SDH), esf (for SONET)

Usage conditions

The TDMP155 line mode must have been set. If either of the following has already been set for the logical port number specified in P3, an error occurs.

set tdm group set tdmop group

If the TDM mode is set for the line mode and the SDH mode is set for the frame type in the TDMP155 line mode setting, unframed cannot be specified in P4. If the SDH mode is set for the frame type in the TDMP155 line mode setting and CESoPSN is set for the TDMoP operation mode setting, unframed cannot be specified in P4.

Ports

5-24

Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set port logical-interface 1/1 sdh 1/1/1 crc4nocas *Switch@1# set port logical-interface 1/1 sdh 1/1/2 *Switch@1# set port logical-interface 2/1 sonet 1/1/1 sf *Switch@1# set port logical-interface 2/1 sonet 1/1/4

Output item

Related commands

set line mode tdmp155 Setting of TDMP155 line mode set tdmop mode Setting of TDMoP mode set tdmop group Setting of TDMoP group show port logical-interface Display of TDMP155 port logical interface setting

Ports

5-25

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

show port logical-interface Display of TDMP155 port logical interface setting

Shows the TDMP155 port logical interface setting.

Input format show port logical-interface [P1 [P2]]

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (single specification) (1/1-12/1) P2: Logical port number

SDH: 1-3 /1-7 / 1-3 SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4 * If P2 is omitted, the TDMP155 port logical interface setting on all frame formats set for the port (line) number specified in P1 is shown.

* If all parameters are omitted, the TDMP155 port logical interface setting on all ports (lines) in which the TDMP155 line module is installed is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show port logical-interface Logical Interface Table ======================= Logical Frame Port Port Format ------------------------ 1/1 1/1/1 crc4 1/1 1/1/2 crc4nocas 1/1 1/1/3 unframed 1/1 1/2/1 non-crc4 : : : 1/1 3/7/3 crc4 *Switch@1#

Output items Port: Port (line) number Logical Port: Logical port number Frame Format: Frame format

Related commands

set line mode tdmp155 Setting of TDMP155 line mode set port logical-interface Setting of TDMP155 port logical interface

Ports

5-26

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set port impedance Setting of impedance

Sets impedance.

Input format set port impedance P1 [P2]

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) P2: Impedance setting {e1-75 | e1-120}

e1-75: 75Ω e1-120: 120Ω

* If P1 is omitted, e1-120 is assumed.

Default value P2: e1-120

Usage condition The frame type of the specified port (line) must be set to the E1 mode.

Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set port impedance 1/1 e1-75 *Switch@1# set port impedance 12/2-5 e1-75 *Switch@1# set port impedance 5/1-8 e1-120 *Switch@1# set port impedance 6/1-5,7,8 e1-120

Output item

Related commands

set line mode tdmp Setting of TDMP line mode set line mode atmp Setting of ATMP line mode show port impedance Display of impedance setting

Ports

5-27

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

show port impedance Display of impedance setting

Shows the impedance setting.

Input format show port impedance [P1]

Parameter P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) * If P1 is omitted, the impedance setting of all ports (lines) in which the frame type is set to the E1 mode is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show port impedance Port Impedance Information Table ================================ Port Impedance(ohm) -------------------- 1/1 e1-120 1/2 e1-120 1/3 e1-75 1/4 e1-120 1/5 e1-75 1/6 e1-75 1/7 e1-120 1/8 e1-75 *Switch@1#

Output items Port: Port (line) number Impedance(ohm): Impedance value

Related commands

set line mode tdmp Setting of TDMP line mode set line mode atmp Setting of ATMP line mode set port impedance Setting of impedance

Ports

5-28

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show stm status Display of port (line) alarm status for TDMP155 port

Shows the port (line) alarm detection status for a TDMP155 port.

Input format show stm status [P1 [P2]]

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (single specification) (1/1-12/1) P2: Logical port number

SDH: 1-3 /1-7 / 1-3 SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4 * If P2 is omitted, the port (line) alarm detection status for all logical ports set for the port (line) number specified in P1 is shown.

* If all parameters are omitted, the port (line) alarm detection status for all ports (lines) to which the TDMP155 line module is installed is shown.

Default value None

Usage condition The TDMP155 line mode must be set.

Note None

Ports

5-29

Input example Switch@1# show stm status 12/1 STM Path Alarm Status Table =========================== Alarm Status ============ Port HO-PATH LO-PATH PDH ------------------------------ 12/1 --- --- --- HO-PATH Status ============== Port TUG-3 AU-AIS AU-LOP --------------------------- 12/1 1 --- --- … Port TUG-3 HP-TIM HP-UNEQ HP-PLM HP-EXC HP-DEG HP-REI HP-RDI HP-BIP ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 12/1 1 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- … LO-PATH Status ============== Logical Port Port TU-AIS TU-LOP TU-LOM ------------------------------------- 12/1 1/1/1 --- --- --- … Logical Port Port LP-TIM LP-UNEQ LP-PLM LP-EXC LP-DEG LP-REI LP-RDI LP-BIP ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 12/1 1/1/1 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- … PDH Status ========== Logical Port Port AIS OOF RAI SEF FAS CRC ------------------------------------------------------------- 12/1 1/1/1 --- --- --- --- --- --- …

Output items ■ Alarm Status: Outline display of alarm status Port: Port number (1/1-12/1) HO-PATH: Higher path alarm detection status LO-PATH: Lower path alarm detection status PDH: PDH alarm detection status

detect: Detection status ---: No detection status

Ports

5-30

■ HO-PATH Status: Detailed display of higher path alarms Port: Port number (1/1-12/1) TUG-3/STS-1: TUG-3/STS-1 number AU-AIS : AU-AIS alarm detection status AU-LOP: AU-LOP alarm detection status HP-TIM: HP-TIM alarm detection status HP-UNEQ: HP-UNEQ alarm detection status HP-PLM: HP-PLM alarm detection status HP-EXC: HP-EXC alarm detection status HP-DEG: HP-DEG alarm detection status HP-REI: HP-REI alarm detection status HP-RDI: HP-RDI alarm detection status HP-BIP: HP-BIP alarm detection status


■ LO-PATH Status: Detailed display of lower path alarms Port: Port number (1/1-12/1) Logical Port: Logical port number

SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3 SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4

TU-AIS: TU-AIS alarm detection status TU-LOP: TU-LOP alarm detection status TU-LOM: TU-LOM alarm detection status LP-TIM: LP-TIM alarm detection status LP-UNEQ: LP-UNEQ alarm detection status LP-PLM: LP-PLM alarm detection status LP-EXC: LP-EXC alarm detection status LP-DEG: LP-DEG alarm detection status LP-REI: LP-REI alarm detection status LP-RD : LP-RDI alarm detection status LP-BIP: LP-BIP alarm detection status


■ PDH Status : Detailed display of PDH alarms Port: Port number Logical Port: Logical port number

SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3 SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4

AIS: AIS alarm detection status OOF: OOF alarm detection status RAI: RAI alarm detection status SEF: SEF alarm detection status FAS: FAS alarm detection status CRC: CRC alarm detection status

Ports

5-31


Related command

set line mode tdmp155 Setting of TDMP155 line mode

Ports

5-32

(Blank page)

VLAN

6-1

6 VLAN

VLAN

6-2

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set vlan tagbase Setting of tagbase VLAN

Sets a tagbase VLAN.

Input format set vlan tagbase P1 [P2]

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (single specification) P2: VLAN identifier {VLAN-ID | VLAN-name}

VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple values can be specified.) VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters * If P2 is omitted, no VLAN member is assumed.

Default value None

Usage conditions If VLAN tag swapping is set in a port, you cannot set a VLAN ID that is already being used as the swapping destination VLAN ID. If command mode is safety mode, the following conditions are applied: 1) When setting a tagbase VLAN in a line where a portbase VLAN is set, you cannot

set a VLAN ID. You can set a VLAN ID only when no VLAN exists. 2) When setting a tagbase VLAN in the VLAN tag swapping setting line, you cannot

set a VLAN ID that is duplicated with the swapping source VLAN ID. The following conditions are applied when a tagbase VLAN is set in the GbE-MUX line module. 1) You can register up to 32 VLANs per port (line). 2) In the same line module, you cannot set a VLAN ID that is duplicated with any of

the following VLAN IDs in several lines: - VLAN ID for which a tagbase VLAN is set - Swapping source VLAN ID for which VLAN tag swapping is set

Note If a set vlan tagbase command without a VLAN ID is entered to the portbase VLAN setting line when command mode is safety mode, execution is confirmed.

Input example *Switch@1# set vlan tagbase 12/1 4094 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

clear vlan tagbase Clearing of tag base VLAN show vlan table port Display of VLAN table per port (line) show vlan table vid Display of VLAN table per VLAN

VLAN

6-3

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear vlan tagbase Clearing of tagbase VLAN

Clears a tagbase VLAN.

Input format clear vlan tagbase P1 [P2]


VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (single specification) VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters * If P2 is omitted, all VLANs are assumed.

Default value None


Note If P2 is omitted, execution is confirmed after this command has been entered.

Input example *Switch@1# clear vlan tagbase 12/1 Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set vlan tagbase Setting of tagbase VLAN show vlan table port Display of VLAN table per port (line) show vlan table vid Display of VLAN table per VLAN

VLAN

6-4

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set vlan portbase Setting of portbase VLAN

Sets a portbase VLAN.

Input format set vlan portbase P1 P2 [P3]


VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (single specification) VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters

P3: Frame type {admit-all | untag} admit-all: All frames are transmissive untag: Frames without tags and tags whose Ethernet types are not 0x8100 are transmssive * If P3 is omitted, admit-all is assumed.

Default value P3: admit-all

Usage conditions You cannot set untag as the frame type for the lines where an Ethernet type other than

0x8100 is set. If command mode is safety mode, you can set a portbase VLAN only in lines where tagbase VLAN without VLAN ID is set.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set vlan portbase 1/1 1 admit-all *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

show vlan table port Display of VLAN table per port (line) show vlan table vid Display of VLAN table per VLAN

VLAN

6-5

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show vlan table port Show VLAN table per port (line)

Display of a VLAN table per port (line).

Input format show vlan table port [P1]

Parameter P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) * If P1 is omitted, all ports (lines) are assumed.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show vlan table port VLAN Table ========== Port Base VID Name Frame-Type -------------------------------------------------------------- 1/1 port 1 VLAN0001 admit-all 1/2 port 1 VLAN0001 admit-all 1/3 port 1 VLAN0001 admit-all 1/4 port 1 VLAN0001 admit-all 1/5 port 1 VLAN0001 admit-all 1/6 port 1 VLAN0001 admit-all 1/7 port 1 VLAN0001 admit-all 1/8 port 1 VLAN0001 admit-all 4/1 port 2 untag 12/1 tag 4094 VLAN4094 --- *Switch@1#

Output items Port: Port (line) number Base: VLAN type

port: Portbase VLAN tag: Tagbase VLAN swap: VLAN tag swapping

VID: VLAN ID Name: VLAN name Frametype: Frame type

admit-all: All frames are transmissive untag: Untaged frames or frames whose Ethernet types are not 0x8100 are transmissive

VLAN

6-6

Related commands

set vlan tagbase Setting of tagbase VLAN clear vlan tagbase Clearing of tagbase VLAN set vlan portbase Setting of portbase VLAN set vlan swap Setting of VLAN tag swapping clear vlan swap Clearing of VLAN tag swapping

VLAN

6-7

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show vlan table vid Display of VLAN table per VLAN

Shows a VLAN table per VLAN.

Input format show vlan table vid [P1]

Parameter P1: VLAN identifier {VLAN-ID|VLAN-name} VLAN-ID 1 to 4094 (Multiple values can be specified.) VLAN-name 1 to 32 characters * If P1 is omitted, all VLANs are assumed.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show vlan table vid 4094 VLAN Table ========== VID : 4094 Name : VLAN4094 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Portbase Ports : 1/1-8,12/1 Tagbase Ports : *Switch@1#

Output items VID: VLAN ID Name: VLAN name Portbase Ports: Portbase VLAN ports (lines) Tagbase Ports: Tagbase VLAN ports (lines)

Related commands

set vlan tagbase Setting of tagbase VLAN clear vlan tagbase Clearing of tagbase VLAN set vlan portbase Setting of portbase VLAN set vlan name Setting of VLAN name clear vlan name Clearing of VLAN name

VLAN

6-8

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set vlan member Setting of portbase VLAN and tagbase VLAN en bloc

Sets the portbase VLAN and tagbase VLAN en bloc.

-Setting portbase VLAN en bloc set vlan member P1 P2 -Setting tagbase VLAN en bloc set vlan member P1 P3

Input format

-Setting portbase VLAN and tagbase VLAN en bloc set vlan member P1 P2 P3

Parameters P1: VLAN identifier {VLAN-ID | VLAN-name} VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (single specification) VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters

P2: Portbase VLAN port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) portbase: Port (line) number

P3: Tagbase VLAN port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) tagbase: Port (line) number

Default value None

Usage conditions You cannot set the same port (line) number in the portbase VLAN (port) number and tagbase VLAN port (line) number. You cannot set a line where the total number of tagbase VLANs and VLAN tag swapping settings exceeds 100 as a portbase VLAN port (line). The usage conditions of the set portbase VLAN command are applied to the portbase VLAN in this command. The usage conditions of the set tagbase VLAN command are applied to the tagbase VLAN in this command. If the portbase VLAN is set, admit-all (default value) is set as the frame type.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set vlan member 100 portbase 1/1-8,3/1,5/1 tagbase 4/1-4,6/1*Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

show vlan table port Display of VLAN table per port (line) show vlan table vid Display of VLAN table per VLAN clear vlan tagbase Clearing of tagbase VLAN

VLAN

6-9

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set vlan swap Setting of VLAN tag swapping

Sets VLAN tag swapping.

Input format set vlan swap P1 P2 P3

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) P2: VLAN identifier {VLAN-ID | VLAN-name}


P3: Swapping destination VLAN ID VLAN ID: 0 to 4094 (single specification)

Default value None

Usage conditions You cannot reassign the VLAN ID that is already being used as the swapping destination VLAN ID in the port to another VLAN as the swapping destination VLAN ID.If command mode is safety mode, the following conditions are applied: 1) You cannot set VLAN tag swapping for the portbase VLAN setting line. 2) When setting VLAN tag swapping in the tagbase VLAN setting line, you cannot set a

swapping source VLAN ID that is duplicated with the VLAN ID. 3) When setting VLAN tag swapping in the VLAN tag swapping setting line, you cannot

overwrite the VLAN ID that is already being used as the swapping source VLAN ID.The following conditions are applied when VLAN tag swapping is set in the GbE-MUX line module. 1) You can register up to 32 VLANs per port (line). 2) In the same line module, you cannot set a VLAN ID that is duplicated with any of the

following VLAN IDs in several lines: - VLAN ID for which a tagbase VLAN is set - Swapping source VLAN ID for which VLAN tag swapping is set 3) In the same port (line), you cannot set the swapping destination VLAN ID that is the

same as the swapping destination VLAN ID for which VLAN tag swapping.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set vlan swap 1/1 1 4094 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

show vlan table port Display of VLAN table per port (line) show vlan swap Display of VLAN tag swapping information clear vlan swap Clearing of VLAN tag swapping

VLAN

6-10

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show vlan swap Display of VLAN tag swapping information

Shows VLAN tag swapping information.

Input format show vlan swap [P1 [P2]

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) * If P1 is omitted, all ports (lines) are assumed.

P2: VLAN identifier {VLAN-ID | VLAN-name} VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple values can be specified.) VLAN name: 1 to 32 characters * If P2 is omitted, all VLAN names are assumed.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show vlan swap 1/1 VLAN100 VLAN Swap Table =============== Port : 1/1 Ether-Type : 0x0600 VID Name (Interior) VID (Exterior) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 100 VLAN100 200 *Switch@1#

Output items Port: Port (line) number Ethertype: Ethernet type value VID : VLAN ID Name (Interior): VLAN name VID (Exterior): Swapping destination VLAN ID

Related commands

set vlan swap Setting of VLAN tag swapping clear vlan swap Clearing of VLAN tag swapping

VLAN

6-11

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear vlan swap Clearing of VLAN tag swapping

Clears VLAN tag swapping.

Input format clear vlan swap P1 [P2]


VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (single specification) VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters *If P2 is omitted, all VLAN names are assumed.

Default value None



Input example *Switch@1# clear vlan swap 1/1 Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

show vlan table port Display of VLAN table per port (line) set vlan swap Setting of VLAN tag swapping show vlan swap Display of VLAN tag swapping information

VLAN

6-12

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show vlan summary Display of number of VLAN entries

Shows the number of VLAN entries.

Input format show vlan summary

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show vlan summary VLAN Summary Information ======================== Total VLAN Entry : 2 *Switch@1#

Output item Total VLAN Entry: Number of VLAN entries

Related commands

set vlan tagbase Setting of tagbase VLAN clear vlan tagbase Clearing of tagbase VLAN set vlan portbase Setting of portbase VLAN set vlan name Setting of VLAN name clear vlan name Clearing of VLAN name

VLAN

6-13

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set vlan ethertype Setting of Ethernet type for VLAN tag recognition

Sets the Ethernet type for VLAN tag recognition.

Input format set vlan ethertype P1 P2

Parameters P1: Port (line) number or line module number Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) Line module number (Multiple values can be specified.)

P2: Ethernet type value (0x0600 to 0xffff)

Default value P2: 0x8100

Usage conditions If untag is specified as the frame type in the port (line) where a portbase is set, you cannot set an Ethernet type value other than 0x8100 in the port (line). If a portbase is specified in the set PVC-VLAN mode command when the ATM line module is set, you cannot set an Ethernet type value other than 0x8100. For GbE-MUX, you can specify only a line module number. For other line module types, you can specify only a port (line) number.

Note If the Ethernet type for VLAN tag recognition is set in GbE-MUX with line module number specification, the Ethernet type values of all ports (lines) belonging to the line module are set to the same value.

Input example *Switch@1# set vlan ethertype 1/1 0x0600 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set vlan tagbase Setting of tagbase VLAN set vlan swap Setting of VLAN tag swapping show vlan swap Display of VLAN tag swapping information show vlan ethertype Display of Ethernet type information for VLAN tag recognition

VLAN

6-14

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show vlan ethertype Display of Ethernet type information for VLAN tag recognition

Shows Ethernet type information for VLAN tag recognition.

Input format show vlan ethertype [P1]

Parameter P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) *If P1 is omitted, all port (line) numbers are assumed.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show vlan ethertype VLAN Ether-Type Table ===================== Port Ether-Type ----------------------------- 1/1 0x600 1/2 0x8100 1/3 0x8100 1/4 0x8100 1/5 0x8100 1/6 0x8100 1/7 0x8100 1/8 0x8100 12/1 0xffff *Switch@1#

Output items Port: Port (line) number Ethertype: Ethernet type value

Related command

set vlan ethertype Setting of Ethernet type for VLAN tag recognition

VLAN

6-15

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set vlan name Setting of VLAN name

Sets a VLAN name in a VLAN ID.

Input format set vlan name P1 P2

Parameters P1: VLAN ID (1 to 4094) (single specification) P2: VLAN name (1 to 32 characters)

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set vlan name 4094 VLAN4094 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

show vlan table port Display of VLAN table per port (line) show vlan table vid Display of VLAN table per VLAN show vlan summary Display of number of VLAN entries clear vlan name Clearing of VLAN name

VLAN

6-16

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear vlan name Clearing of VLAN name

Clear a VLAN name.

Input format clear vlan name P1

Parameter P1: VLAN identifier {VLAN-ID | VLAN-name} VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (single specification) VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear vlan name 4094 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

show vlan table port Display of VLAN table per port (line) show vlan table vid Display of VLAN table per VLAN show vlan summary Display of number of VLAN entries set vlan name Setting of VLAN name

QoS

7-1

7 QoS

QoS

7-2

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set qos maximum-mode Setting of maximum band limiting operation mode

Sets maximum band limiting operation mode.

Input format set qos maximum-mode P1 P2

Parameters P1: Line module number (1 to 12) (Multiple values can be specified.) P2: Maximum band limiting operation mode {in | out | both}

in: Maximum band limiting operation mode for input out: Maximum band limiting operation mode for output both: Maximum band limiting operation mode for both input and output

Default value P2: both

Usage conditions If the maximum band limiting function is set, you cannot change maximum band limiting operation mode. If the port type is FE, ATM155, ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, or TDMP155, an error occurs when this command is entered.

Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set qos maximum-mode 1-3 in *Switch@1# set qos maximum-mode 2,4,5 out *Switch@1# set qos maximum-mode 6 both *Switch@1#

Output item

QoS

7-3

Related commands

show qos maximum-mode Display of maximum band limiting operation mode set qos in-rate maximum Setting of maximum band limiting function in input

VLAN units set qos in-class-map maximum Setting of priority mapping function in input VLAN

units set qos in-priority maximum Setting of priority discard function in input VLAN

units clear qos in-rate maximum Clearing of maximum band limiting function in input

VLAN units show qos in-rate maximum Display of maximum band limiting function in input

VLAN units set qos out-rate maximum Setting of maximum band limiting function in output

VLAN units set qos out-class-map maximum Setting of priority mapping function in output VLAN

units set qos out-priority maximum Setting of priority discard function in output VLAN

units show qos out-rate maximum Display of maximum band limiting function in

output VLAN units clear qos out-rate maximum Clearing of maximum band limiting function in

output VLAN units

QoS

7-4

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show qos maximum-mode Display of maximum band limiting operation mode

Shows maximum band limiting operation mode.

Input format show qos maximum-mode

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show qos maximum-mode Line Maximum Mode Table ======================= Slot Mode ---------- 4 in 6 out 7 both *Switch@1#

Output items Slot: Line module number Mode: Maximum band limiting operation mode

in: Maximum band limiting operation mode for input out: Maximum band limiting operation mode for output both: Maximum band limiting operation mode for both input and output

QoS

7-5

Related commands

set qos maximum-mode Setting of maximum band limiting operation modeset qos in-rate maximum Setting of maximum band limiting function in input



units show qos in-rate maximum Display of maximum band limiting function in input

VLAN units clear qos in-rate maximum Clearing of maximum band limiting function in

input VLAN units set qos out-rate maximum Setting of maximum band limiting function in

output VLAN units set qos out-class-map maximum Setting of priority mapping function in output

VLAN units set qos out-priority maximum Setting of priority discard function in output VLAN



output VLAN units

QoS

7-6

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set qos in-rate maximum Setting of maximum band limiting function in input VLAN units

Sets the maximum band limiting function in input VLAN units.

- Specifying VLAN set qos in-rate maximum P1 P2 P3(vid) P4 P5(maximum band limiting value) - Specifying Remaining-VLAN set qos in-rate maximum P1 P2 P3(remain) P5(maximum band limiting value) - Specifying separate mode (specifying VLAN) set qos in-rate maximum P1 P2 P3(vid) P4 P5(separate mode) [P6] [P7] [P8] [P9]

Input format

- Specifying separate mode (specifying Remaining-VLAN) set qos in-rate maximum P1 P2 P3(remain) P5(separate mode) [P6] [P7] [P8] [P9]


P2: Port (line) number (single specification) P3: VLAN specification {vid} or Remaining-VLAN specification {remain}

vid: VLAN specification remain: Remaining-VLAN specification

• When vid is specified in P3. P4: VLAN identifier {VLAN-ID | VLAN-name}

VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple values can be specified.)VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters

QoS

7-7

P5: Maximum band limiting value or separate mode {separate | separate-red} Maximum band limiting value(Kbps)

FE port: 0 to 100000(Kbps) GbE port: 0 to 1000000(Kbps) * The setting granularity is 25(Kbps).

Separate mode separate: Separate mode separate-red: Separate mode (RED use)

• When separate mode {separate | separate-red} is specified in P5. P6: Maximum band limiting value of class A

FE port: class a 0 to 100000(Kbps) GbE port: class a 0 to 1000000(Kbps)

P7: Maximum band limiting value of class B FE port: class-b 0 to 100000(Kbps) GbE port: class-b 0 to 1000000(Kbps)

P8: Maximum band limiting value of class C FE port: class-c 0 to 100000(Kbps) GbE port: class-c 0 to 1000000(Kbps)

P9: Maximum band limiting value of class D FE port: class-d 0 to 100000(Kbps) GbE port: class-d 0 to 1000000(Kbps)

* The setting granularity in P6 to P9 is 25(Kbps). Default values P5 to P9: 100000(FE), 1000000(GbE)

* The default values depend on port (line) type (fe/gbe) specification.

Usage conditions The number of VLANs that can be registered on a corresponding port depends on the maximum band limiting operation mode to be set. The following table shows the number of VLANs that can be set for one port according to a specified maximum band limiting operation mode.

Maximum band limitation of input port Maximum band limiting operation mode FE port GbE port

Input/output mode (both) 64 1024 Input mode (in) 128 2048 Output mode (out) 0 0

In input mode (in) and input/output mode (both), one place is used for Remaining-VLAN among the number of settable VLANs.

Notes If P6 to P9 are omitted, the values that are already set are pre-retained. If P6 to P9 are omitted when maximum band limiting operation mode is switched, the default values are set.

Input examples *Switch@1# set qos in-rate maximum fe 3/7 vid 100 separate-red class-a 1000 class-b 2000 *Switch@1# set qos in-rate maximum gbe 5/1 vid VLAN200 separate class-c 3000 class-d 4000 *Switch@1# set qos in-rate maximum fe 1/7 vid 50 10000 *Switch@1#

QoS

7-8

Output item

Related commands

set vlan tagbase Setting of tagbase VLAN set vlan swap Setting of VLAN tag swapping set qos maximum-mode Setting of maximum band limiting operation mode show qos maximum-mode Display of maximum band limiting operation mode set qos in-class-map maximum Setting of priority mapping function in input VLAN



VLAN units clear qos in-rate maximum Clearing of maximum band limiting function in input

VLAN units

QoS

7-9

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set qos in-class-map maximum Setting of priority mapping function in input VLAN units

Sets the priority mapping function in input VLAN units.

- Specifying VLAN set qos in-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P6 (class-a) P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 - Specifying Remaining-VLAN set qos in-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P6 (class-a) P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 - Specifying separate mode (specifying VLAN) set qos in-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (separate mode) P6 (class-a) P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 - Specifying separate mode (specifying Remaining-VLAN) set qos in-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P5 (separate mode) P6 (class-a) P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 - Specifying default (specifying VLAN) set qos in-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 [P5 (separate)] P6 (initial) - Specifying default (specifying Remaining-VLAN) set qos in-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) [P5 (separate)] P6 (initial) - Specifying default (RED use) (specifying VLAN) set qos in-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (separate-red) P6 (initial)

Input format

- Specifying default (RED use) (specifying Remaining-VLAN) set qos in-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P5 (separate-red) P6 (initial)






P5: Setting mode {separate | separate-red} separate: Separate mode separate-red: Separate mode (RED use) * P5 (setting mode) can be specified only when separate mode is specified in the “set qos in-rate maximum” command.

QoS

7-10

• When P5 is omitted. P6: Class A priority {class-a} or default setting {initial}

class-a: Class A priority specification initial: Default specification

• When class-a is specified in P6. P7: Priority specification {priority | unset}

priority: 0 to 7 (Multiple values can be specified.) unset: none

P8: Class B priority {class-b} P9: Priority specification {priority | unset}


P10: Class C priority {class-c} P11: Priority specification {priority | unset}


P12: Class D priority {class-d} P13: Priority specification {priority | unset}


• When P5 is specified. P6: Class A priority {class-a} or default setting {initial}


• When class-a is specified in P6. P7: Priority specification {priority | broadcast | multicast | broadcast&multicast | unset}

priority: 0 to 7 (Multiple values can be specified.) broadcast: broadcast multicast: multicast broadcast&multicast: bc+mc unset: none

P8: Class B priority {class-b} P9: Priority specification {priority | broadcast | multicast | broadcast&multicast | unset}


P10: Class C priority {class-c} P11: Priority specification {priority | broadcast | multicast | broadcast&multicast | unset}


P12: Class D priority {class-d}

QoS

7-11

P13: Priority specification {priority | broadcast | multicast | broadcast&multicast | unset}


* For priority specification of classes A to D (P7, P9, P11, and P13), you can specify broadcast/multicast/bc+mc respectively only once in one of classes A to D. Also, you cannot specify other priorities in the class where broadcast/multicast/bc+mc is specified.

* You cannot specify none for priority specification of classes A to D (P7, P9, P11, and P13). Specify priority for any of classes A to D.

* The priority to be specified in any of classes A to D cannot be duplicated with the priority specified in any other class. For example, you can set broadcast and multicast in different classes but cannot set broadcast&multicast in a different class because it is duplicated.

* The priority not specified in any of classes A to D does not belong to any class (No Entry). Because a (No Entry) frame, frame that a priority does not belong to any class, is not assigned to any classes, it becomes out of control and is discarded.

Default values P7: 6,7 P9: 4,5 P11: 0,3 P13: 1,2

Usage conditions You can set the priority mapping function in input VLAN units after setting the maximum band limiting function in input VLAN units in the set qos in-rate maximum. You cannot specify mode different from the mode set in the set qos in-rate maximum.

Notes To inhibit a priority from belonging to a class, specify “none” explicitly. (You cannot omit “none”.) Selecting the default specification (initial) sets the value set in the “set qos initial-class-map in-maximum” command.

Input examples *Switch@1# set qos in-class-map maximum fe 1/5 vid 100 separate-red class-a 1,2,3 class-b 0,5-7 class-c broadcast class-d multicast *Switch@1# set qos in-class-map maximum gbe 4/1 vid 100 separate class-a 0-4 class-b 5-7 class-c bc+mc class-d none *Switch@1# set qos in-class-map maximum gbe 5/1 vid 100 initial *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set vlan tagbase Setting of tagbase VLAN set vlan swap Setting of VLAN tag swapping set qos maximum-mode Setting of maximum band limiting operation mode show qos maximum-mode Display of maximum band limiting operation mode set qos in-rate maximum Setting of maximum band limiting function in input

VLAN units set qos in-priority maximum Setting of priority discard function in input VLAN unit show qos in-rate maximum Display of maximum band limiting function in input


VLAN units

QoS

7-12

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set qos in-priority maximum Setting of priority discard function in input VLAN units

Sets the priority discard function in VLAN units.

- Specifying separate mode (specifying VLAN) set qos in-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 [P5] (separate) [P6(burst tolerance for class-a)] [P7] [P8] [P9] - Specifying separate mode (specifying Remaining-VLAN) set qos in-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) [P5 (separate)] [P6 (burst tolerance for class-a) ] [P7] [P8] [P9] - Specifying separate mode (RED use) (specifying VLAN) set qos in-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (separate-red) [P6 (burst tolerance (upper threshold) for class-a) P7 [P8]] [P9 P10 [P11]] [P12 P13 [P14]] [P15 P16 [P17]] - Specifying separate mode (RED use) (specifying Remaining-VLAN) set qos in-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P5 (separate-red) [P6 (burst tolerance (upper threshold) for class-a) P7 [P8]] [P9 P10 [P11]] [P12 P13 [P14]] [P15 P16 [P17]] - Specifying default (specifying VLAN) set qos in-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 [P5 (separate)] P6 (initial) - Specifying default (specifying Remaining-VLAN) set qos in-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) [P5 (separate)] P6 (initial) - Specifying default (RED use) (specifying VLAN) set qos in-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (separate-red) P6 (initial)

Input format

- Specifying default (RED use) (specifying Remaining-VLAN) set qos in-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P5 (separate-red) P6 (initial)

QoS

7-13





VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple values can be specified.) VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters

P5: Setting mode {separate | separate-red} separate: Separate mode separate-red: Separate mode (RED use)

• When separate is specified in P5 or P5 is omitted. P6: Burst tolerance specification for class A {class-a 1 to 127} or default setting {initial}

Burst tolerance specification for class A: class-a 1 to 127(Kbyte) initial: Default specification

• When burst tolerance for class A is specified in P6. P7: Burst tolerance specification for class B {class-b 1 to 127}

class-b 1 to 127(Kbyte) P8: Burst tolerance specification for class C {class-c 1 to 127}

class-c 1 to 127(Kbyte) P9: Burst tolerance specification for class D {class-d 1 to 127}

class-d 1 to 127(Kbyte)

* If burst tolerance specification for classes A to D (P6 to P9) is omitted, the values that are already set are pre-retained.

• When separate-red is specified in P5. P6: Burst tolerance specification for class A or default setting {initial}

Burst tolerance A for class A (upper threshold) FE port: class-a 1 to 3000(Kbyte) GbE port: class-a 1 to 30000(Kbyte) initial: Default specification

• When burst tolerance (upper threshold) for class A is specified in P6. P7: Burst tolerance A (lower threshold) for class A or burst lower threshold/probability disable {disable}

Burst tolerance A (lower threshold) for class A FE port: 1 to 2999(Kbyte) GbE port: 1 to 29999(Kbyte) disable: Burst lower threshold/probability disable

QoS

7-14

• When burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class A is specified in P7. P8: Probability A (1 to 32)

P9: Burst tolerance (upper threshold) specification for class B FE port: class-b 1 to 3000(Kbyte) GbE port: class-b 1 to 30000(Kbyte)

P10: Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class B or burst lower threshold/probability disable {disable}

Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class B FE port: 1 to 2999(Kbyte) GbE port: 1 to 29999(Kbyte) disable: Burst lower threshold/probability disable

• When burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class B is specified in P10.P11: Probability B (1 to 32)

P12: Burst tolerance (upper threshold) specification for class C FE port: class-c 1 to 3000(Kbyte) GbE port: class-c 1 to 30000(Kbyte)

P13: Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class C or burst lower threshold/probability disable {disable}

Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class C FE port: 1 to 2999(Kbyte) GbE port: 1 to 29999(Kbyte) disable: Burst lower threshold/probability disable

• When burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class C is specified in P13.P14: Probability C (1 to 32)

P15: Burst tolerance (upper threshold) specification for class D FE port: class-d 1 to 3000(Kbyte) GbE port: class-d 1 to 30000(Kbyte)

P16: Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class D or burst lower threshold/probability disable {disable}

Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class D FE port: 1 to 2999(Kbyte) GbE port: 1 to 29999(Kbyte) disable: Burst lower threshold/probability disable

• When burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class D is specified in P16.P17: Probability D (1 to 32)

* If burst tolerance (upper/lower threshold) of classes A to D and probability values (P6 to P17) are omitted, the values that are already set are pre-retained.

Default values When separate is specified in P5 or P5 is omitted:

P6: 127(Kbyte), P7: 64(Kbyte), P8: 32(Kbyte), P9: 16(Kbyte), When separate-red is specified in P5:

P6: 127(Kbyte), P6, P8: disable P9: 64(Kbyte), P10, P11: disable P12: 32(Kbyte), P13: 16(Kbyte), P14: 32(Kbyte) P15: 16(Kbyte), P16: 8(Kbyte), P17: 32(Kbyte)

QoS

7-15

Usage conditions You can set the priority discard function in input VLAN units after setting the maximum band limiting function in input VLAN units in the set qos in-rate maximum. You cannot specify mode different from the mode set in the set qos in-rate maximum.

Notes If P5 is omitted, arbitrarily specify P6 to P9 per class (omissible). If separate is specified in P5, you can arbitrarily specify P6 to P9 per class as separate mode {separate} (omissible). If separate-red is specified in P5, you can arbitrarily specify P6 to P17 per class as separate mode (RED use) (omissible). If P5 is specified, you cannot specify mode different from the mode specified in the “set qos in-rate maximum” command. If separate-red is specified in P5, you cannot set a value greater than the value set in P6 in P7. You cannot also set a value greater than the value set in P6 in P9, P10, P12, P13, P15, and P16. If P6 is specified, the value set in the “set qos initial-priority (in-maximum / in-maximum-red)” command is used.

Input examples *Switch@1# set qos in-priority maximum fe 1/1 vid 100 separate-red class-a 3000 20 4 class-b 1500 disable *Switch@1# set qos in-priority maximum gbe 3/1 vid 70 separate-red class-c 48 disable class-d 8 1 32 *Switch@1# set qos in-priority maximum fe 1/8 vid 1000 separate-red class-a 127 disable class-b 64 disable class-c 3000 16 10 class-d 2000 8 5 *Switch@1# set qos in-priority maximum gbe 6/1 vid 100 separate class-a 1 class-b 1 class-c 127 class-d 127 *Switch@1# set qos in-priority maximum gbe 5/1 vid 100 initial *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set qos maximum-mode Setting of maximum band limiting operation mode show qos maximum-mode Display of maximum band limiting operation mode set qos in-rate maximum Setting of maximum band limiting function in input




VLAN units

QoS

7-16

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show qos in-rate maximum Display of maximum band limiting function in input VLAN units

Shows the maximum band limiting function in input VLAN units.

- Displaying specified port/specified VLAN show qos in-rate maximum [P1 [P2 (vid) P3]] - Displaying specified port/specified Remaining-VLAN show qos in-rate maximum [P1 [P2 (remain)]] - Displaying specified VLAN show qos in-rate maximum [P2 (vid) P3]

Input format

- Displaying specified Remaining-VLAN show qos in-rate maximum [P2 (remain)]

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) P2: VLAN specification {vid} or Remaining-VLAN specification {remain}



VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple values can be specified.) VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters * Multiple VLAN IDs can be specified only if P1 is omitted.

* About displayed data if P1 is omitted. Information for all the VLANs and Remaining-VLANs set in all the ports is shown. If P2 and P3 are specified, information is displayed in ascending order of VLAN IDs. Within the same VLAN, information is displayed in ascending order of ports. * If P2 is omitted, information for all the VLANs and Remaining-VLANs set in the port specified in P1 is shown.

Default value None


Note None

QoS

7-17

Input example *Switch@1# show qos in-rate maximum QoS Input Port Maximum Table ============================ Port Registered-VID Available-VID ------------------------------------------------------- 6/1 2 1022 QoS Input VLAN Maximum Table ============================ Port : 6/1 VID : 100 Mode : separate =================== Rate Maximum- Minimum- Priority (Kbps) Burst(KByte) Burst(KByte) Probability----------------------------------------------------------------------- Class-All : --- --- --- --- --- Class-A : broadcast 1000000 127 --- --- Class-B : multicast 1000000 127 --- --- Class-C : none 1000000 1 --- --- Class-D : 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 1000000 1 --- --- No Entry : none --- --- --- --- Port : 6/1 VID : remain Mode : normal =================== Rate Maximum- Minimum- Priority (Kbps) Burst(KByte) Burst(KByte) Probability----------------------------------------------------------------------- Class-All : --- 1000000 --- --- --- Class-A : 6,7 --- 127 --- --- Class-B : 4,5 --- 64 --- --- Class-C : 0,3 --- 32 --- --- Class-D : 1,2 --- 16 --- --- No Entry : none --- --- --- --- *Switch@1#

QoS

7-18

Output items (QoS Input Port Maximum Table) Port: Port (line) number Registered-VID: Number of VLANs registered in maximum band limiting mode Available-VID: Number of VLANs that can be registered (QoS Input VLAN Maximum Table) Port: Port (line) number VID: VLAN ID Mode: Setting mode

normal: Normal mode separate: Separate mode separate-RED: Separator mode (RED use)

Priority: Class mapping ---: Unset broadcast: Broadcast setting multicast: Multicast setting bc+mc: Broadcast and multicast setting none: Priority does not belong to any class Numeric value: Priority

Rate: Maximum band limiting value per class If Mode is Normal, the maximum band limiting value is shown in Class-All. Maximum-Burst: Maximum burst tolerance Minimum-Burst: Minimum burst tolerance Probability: Probability

Related commands

set qos maximum-mode Setting of maximum band limiting operation modeshow qos maximum-mode Display of maximum band limiting operation modeset qos in-rate maximum Setting of maximum band limiting function in input



units clear qos in-rate maximum Clearing of maximum band limiting function in

input VLAN units

QoS

7-19

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear qos in-rate maximum Clearing of maximum band limiting function in input VLAN units

Clears the maximum band limiting function in input VLAN units.

- Clearing maximum band limiting setting of specified port/specified VLAN clear qos in-rate maximum P1 P2 [P3 (vid) P4]

Input formats

- Clearing maximum band limiting setting of specified port/specified Remaining-VLAN clear qos in-rate maximum P1 P2 [P3 (remain)]



vid: VLAN specification remain: Remaining-VLAN specification * If a VLAN is already registered in the specified port when Remaining-VLAN is specified in P3, you cannot clear the maximum band limiting function in input VLAN units.

* If P3 is omitted, the setting of the maximum band limiting function of all the VLANs and the Remaining-VLAN in the port specified in P2 are cleared.



Default value None


Notes If P3 is omitted, execution is confirmed after this command has been entered. The priority mapping function setting of the specified VLAN and the priority discard function setting are also cleared.

Input examples *Switch@1# clear qos in-rate maximum fe 4/1 vid 100 *Switch@1# clear qos in-rate maximum gbe 5/1 vid 200 *Switch@1# clear qos in-rate maximum gbe 3/1 Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y *Switch@1#

Output item

QoS

7-20

Related commands

set qos maximum-mode Setting of maximum band limiting operation modeshow qos maximum-mode Display of maximum band limiting operation modeset qos in-rate maximum Setting of maximum band limiting function in input




VLAN units

QoS

7-21

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set qos out-rate maximum Setting of maximum band limiting function in output VLAN units

Sets the maximum band limiting function in output VLAN units.

- Specifying VLAN set qos out-rate maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (maximum band limiting value) - Specifying Remaining-VLAN set qos out-rate maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P5 (maximum band limiting value) - Specifying separate mode (specifying VLAN) set qos out-rate maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (separate mode) [P6] [P7] [P8] [P9]

Input formats

- Specifying separate mode (specifying Remaining-VLAN) set qos out-rate maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P5 (separate mode) [P6] [P7] [P8] [P9]






QoS

7-22

P5: Maximum band limiting value or separate mode {separate | separate-red} Maximum band limiting value

FE port: 0 to 100000(Kbps) GbE port: 0 to 1000000(Kbps) * The setting granularity is 25(Kbps).

Separate mode separate: Separate mode separate-red: Separate mode (RED use)

• When separate mode {separate | separate-red} is specified in P5. P6: Maximum band limiting value of class A

FE port: class a 0 to 100000(Kbps) GbE port: class a 0 to 1000000(Kbps)

P7: Maximum band limiting value of class B FE port: class-b 0 to 100000(Kbps) GbE port: class-b 0 to 1000000(Kbps)

P8: Maximum band limiting value of class C FE port: class-c 0 to 100000(Kbps) GbE port: class-c 0 to 1000000(Kbps)

P9: Maximum band limiting value of class D FE port: class-d 0 to 100000(Kbps) GbE port: class-d 0 to 1000000(Kbps)

* The setting granularity in P6 to P9 is 25(Kbps). Default values P5 to P9: 100000(FE), 1000000(GbE)

* The default values depend on port (line) type (fe/gbe) specification.

Usage conditions The number of VLANs that can be registered on a corresponding port depends on the maximum band limiting operation mode to be set. The following table shows the number of VLANs that can be set for one port according to a specified maximum band limiting operation mode.

Maximum band limitation of output port Maximum band limiting operation mode FE port GbE port

Input/output mode (both) 64 1024 Input mode (in) 0 0 Output mode (out) 128 2048

In output mode (in) and input/output mode (both), one place is used for Remaining-VLAN among the number of settable VLANs.

Notes If P6 to P9 are omitted, the values that are already set are pre-retained. If P6 to P9 are omitted when maximum band limiting operation mode is switched, the default values are set.

Input examples *Switch@1# set qos out-rate maximum fe 3/7 vid 100 separate-red class-a 1000 class-b 2000 *Switch@1# set qos out-rate maximum gbe 5/1 vid VLAN200 separate class-c 3000 class-d 4000 *Switch@1# set qos out-rate maximum fe 1/7 vid 50 10000 *Switch@1#

QoS

7-23

Output item

Related commands

set vlan tagbase Setting of tagbase VLAN set vlan swap Setting of VLAN tag swapping set qos maximum-mode Setting of maximum band limiting operation mode show qos maximum-mode Display of maximum band limiting operation mode set qos out-class-map maximum Setting of priority mapping function in output VLAN

units set qos out-priority maximum Setting of priority discard function in output VLAN



output VLAN units

QoS

7-24

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set qos out-class-map maximum Setting of priority mapping function in output VLAN units

Sets the priority mapping function in output VLAN units.

Input formats - Specifying VLAN set qos out-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P6 (class-a) P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13

- Specifying Remaining-VLAN set qos out-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P6 (class-a) P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13

- Specifying separate mode (specifying VLAN) set qos out-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (separate mode) P6 (class-a) P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13

- Specifying separate mode (specifying Remaining-VLAN) set qos out-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P5 (separate mode) P6 (class-a) P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13

- Specifying default (specifying VLAN) set qos out-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 [P5 (separate)] P6 (initial)

- Specifying default (specifying Remaining-VLAN) set qos out-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) [P5 (separate)] P6 (initial)

- Specifying default (RED use) (specifying VLAN) set qos out-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (separate-red) P6 (initial)

- Specifying default (RED use) (specifying Remaining-VLAN) set qos out-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P5 (separate-red) P6 (initial)

QoS

7-25







* P5 (setting mode) can be specified only when separate mode is specified in the “set qos in-rate maximum” command. • When P5 is omitted.

P6: Class A priority {class-a} or default setting {initial} class-a: Class A priority specification initial: Default specification

• When class-a is specified in P6. P7: Priority specification {priority | unset}


P8: Class B priority {class-b} P9: Priority specification {priority | unset}


P10: Class C priority {class-c} P11: Priority specification {priority | unset}


P12: Class D priority {class-d} P13: Priority specification {priority | unset}


• When P5 is specified. P6: Class A priority {class-a} or default setting {initial}


• When class-a is specified in P6. P7: Priority specification {priority | broadcast | multicast | broadcast&multicast | unset}


QoS

7-26

P8: Class B priority {class-b} P9: Priority specification {priority | broadcast | multicast | broadcast&multicast | unset}


P10: Class C priority {class-c} P11: Priority specification {priority | broadcast | multicast | broadcast&multicast | unset}


P12: Class D priority {class-d} P13: Priority specification {priority | broadcast | multicast | broadcast&multicast | unset}


* For priority specification of classes A to D (P7, P9, P11, and P13), you can specify broadcast/multicast/bc+mc respectively only once in one of classes A to D. Also, you cannot specify other priorities in the class where broadcast/multicast/bc+mc is specified.

* You cannot specify none for priority specification of classes A to D (P7, P9, P11, and P13). Specify priority for any of classes A to D. * The priority to be specified in any of classes A to D cannot be duplicated with the priority specified in any other class. For example, you can set broadcast and multicast in different classes but cannot set broadcast&multicast in a different class because it is duplicated. * The priority not specified in any of classes A to D does not belong to any class (No Entry). Because a (No Entry) frame, frame that a priority does not belong to any class, is not assigned to any classes, it becomes out of control and is discarded.


Usage conditions You can set the priority mapping function in output VLAN units after setting the maximum band limiting function in output VLAN units in the set qos out-rate maximum. You cannot specify mode different from the mode set in the set qos out-rate maximum.

Notes To inhibit a priority from belonging to a class, specify “none” explicitly. (You cannot omit “none”.) Selecting the default specification (initial) sets the value set in the “set qos initial-class-map out-maximum” command.

QoS

7-27

Input examples *Switch@1# set qos out-class-map maximum fe 1/5 vid 100 separate-red class-a 1,2,3 class-b 0,5-7 class-c broadcast class-d multicast *Switch@1# set qos out-class-map maximum gbe 6/1 vid 100 separate class-a bc+mc class-b none class-c 0-4 class-d 5-7 *Switch@1# set qos out-class-map maximum gbe 5/1 vid 100 class-a 0-1 class-b 2-3 class-c 4-5 class-d 6-7 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set qos maximum-mode Setting of maximum band limiting operation mode show qos maximum-mode Display of maximum band limiting operation mode set qos out-rate maximum Setting of maximum band limiting function in output

VLAN units set qos out-priority maximum Setting of priority discard function in output

VLAN units show qos out-rate maximum Display of maximum band limiting function in


output VLAN units

QoS

7-28

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set qos out-priority maximum Setting of priority discard function in output VLAN units

Sets the maximum band priority discard function in output VLAN units.

Input formats - Specifying separate mode (specifying VLAN) set qos out-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 [P5 (separate)] [P6(burst tolerance for class-a)] [P7] [P8] [P9]

- Specifying separate mode (specifying Remaining-VLAN) set qos out-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) [P5 (separate)] [P6 (burst tolerance for class-a)] [P7] [P8] [P9]

- Specifying separate mode (RED use) (specifying VLAN) set qos out-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (separate-red) [P6 (burst tolerance (upper threshold) for class-a) P7 [P8]] [P9 P10 [P11]] [P12 P13 [P14]] [P15 P16 [P17]]

- Specifying separate mode (RED use) (specifying Remaining-VLAN) set qos out-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P5 (separate-red) [P6 (burst tolerance (upper threshold) for class-a) P7 [P8]] [P9 P10 [P11]] [P12 P13 [P14]] [P15 P16 [P17]]

- Specifying default (specifying VLAN) set qos out-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 [P5 (separate)] P6 (initial)

- Specifying default (specifying Remaining-VLAN) set qos out-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) [P5 (separate)] P6 (initial)

- Specifying default (RED use) (specifying VLAN) set qos out-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (separate-red) P6 (initial)

- Specifying default (RED use) (specifying Remaining-VLAN) set qos out-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P5 (separate-red) P6 (initial)

QoS

7-29







• When separate is specified in P5 or P5 is omitted. P6: Burst tolerance specification for class A {class-a 1 to 127} or default setting {initial}

Burst tolerance specification for class A: class-a 1 to 127(Kbyte) initial: Default specification

• When burst tolerance for class A is specified in P6. P7: Burst tolerance specification for class B {class-b 1 to 127}




* If burst tolerance specification for class A to class D (P6 to P9) is omitted, the values that are already set are pre-retained.

• When separate-red is specified in P5. P6: Burst tolerance specification for class A or default setting {initial}

Burst tolerance A for class A (upper threshold) FE port: class-a 1 to 3000(Kbyte) GbE port: class-a 1 to 30000(Kbyte) initial: Default specification

• When burst tolerance (upper threshold) for class A is specified in P6. P7: Burst tolerance A (lower threshold) for class A or burst lower threshold/probability disable {disable}

Burst tolerance A (lower threshold) for class A FE port: 1 to 2999(Kbyte) GbE port: 1 to 29999(Kbyte) disable: Burst lower threshold/probability disable

QoS

7-30

• When burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class A is specified in P7. P8: Probability A (1 to 32)

P9: Burst tolerance (upper threshold) specification for class B FE port: class-b 1 to 3000(Kbyte) GbE port: class-b 1 to 30000(Kbyte)

P10: Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class B or burst lower threshold/probability disable {disable}

Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class B FE port: 1 to 2999(Kbyte) GbE port: 1 to 29999(Kbyte) disable: Burst lower threshold/probability disable

• When burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class B is specified in P10.P11: Probability B (1 to 32)

P12: Burst tolerance (upper threshold) specification for class C FE port: class-c 1 to 3000(Kbyte) GbE port: class-c 1 to 30000(Kbyte)

P13: Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class C or burst lower threshold/probability disable {disable}

Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class C FE port: 1 to 2999(Kbyte) GbE port: 1 to 29999(Kbyte) disable: Burst lower threshold/probability disable

• When burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class C is specified in P13.P14: Probability C (1 to 32)

P15: Burst tolerance (upper threshold) specification for class D FE port: class-d 1 to 3000(Kbyte) GbE port: class-d 1 to 30000(Kbyte)

P16: Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class D or burst lower threshold/probability disable {disable}

Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class D FE port: 1 to 2999(Kbyte) GbE port: 1 to 29999(Kbyte) disable: Burst lower threshold/probability disable

• When burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class D is specified in P16.P17: Probability D (1 to 32)

* If burst tolerance (upper/lower threshold) of classes A to D and probability values (P6 to P17) are omitted, the values that are already set are pre-retained.

Default values When separate is specified in P5 or P5 is omitted:

P6: 127(Kbyte), P7: 64(Kbyte), P8: 32(Kbyte), P9: 16(Kbyte), When separate-red is specified in P5:

P6: 127(Kbyte), P7, P8: disable P9: 64(Kbyte), P10, P11: disable P12: 32(Kbyte), P13: 16(Kbyte), P14: 32(Kbyte) P15: 16(Kbyte), P16: 8(Kbyte), P17: 32(Kbyte)

QoS

7-31

Usage conditions You can set the priority discard function in output VLAN units after setting the maximum band limiting function in output VLAN units in the set qos out-rate maximum. You cannot specify mode different from the mode set in the set qos out-rate maximum.

Notes If P5 is omitted, arbitrarily specify P6 to P9 per class (omissible). If separate is specified in P5, you can arbitrarily specify P6 to P9 per class as separate mode (separate) (omissible). If separate-red is specified in P5, you can arbitrarily specify P6 to P17 per class as separate mode (RED use) (omissible). If P5 is specified, you cannot specify mode different from the mode specified in the “set qos in-rate maximum” command. If separate-red is specified in P5, you cannot set a value greater than the value set in P6 in P7. You cannot also set a value greater than the value set in P6 in P9, P10, P12, P13, P15, and P16. If P6 is specified, the value set in the “set qos initial-priority (in-maximum / in-maximum-red)” command is used.

Input examples *Switch@1# set qos out-priority maximum fe 1/1 vid 100 separate-red class-a 3000 20 4 class-b 1500 disable *Switch@1# set qos out-priority maximum gbe 3/1 vid 70 separate-red class-c 48 disable class-d 8 1 32 *Switch@1# set qos out-priority maximum fe 1/8 vid 1000 separate-red class-a 127 disable class-b 64 disable class-c 3000 16 10 class-d 2000 8 5 *Switch@1# set qos out-priority maximum gbe 5/1 vid 100 class-a 1 class-b 1 class-c 127 class-d 127 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set qos maximum-mode Setting of maximum band limiting operation mode show qos maximum-mode Display of maximum band limiting operation mode set qos out-rate maximum Setting of maximum band limiting function in output

VLAN units set qos out-class-map maximum Setting of priority mapping function in output VLAN



output VLAN units

QoS

7-32

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show qos out-rate maximum Display of maximum band limiting function in output VLAN units

Shows the maximum band limiting function in output VLAN units.

Input formats - Displaying specified port/specified VLAN show qos out-rate maximum [P1 [P2 (vid) P3]]

- Displaying specified port/specified Remaining-VLAN show qos out-rate maximum [P1 [P2 (remain)]]

- Displaying specified VLAN show qos out-rate maximum [P2 (vid) P3]

- Displaying specified Remaining-VLAN show qos out-rate maximum [P2 (remain)]

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) P2: VLAN specification {vid} or Remaining-VLAN specification {remain}




* About displayed data if P1 is omitted. Information for all the VLANs and Remaining-VLANs set in all the ports is shown. If P2 and P3 are specified, information is displayed in ascending order of VLAN IDs. Within the same VLAN, information is displayed in ascending order of ports. * If P2 is omitted, information for all the VLANs and Remaining-VLANs set in the port specified in P1 is shown.

Default value None


Note None

QoS

7-33

Input example *Switch@1# show qos out-rate maximum QoS Output Port Maximum Table ============================= Port Registered-VID Available-VID ----------------------------------- 6/1 2 1022 QoS Output VLAN Maximum Table ============================= Port : 6/1 VID : 100 Mode : separate =================== Rate Maximum- Minimum- Priority (Kbps) Burst(KByte) Burst(KByte) Probability ----------------------------------------------------------------------- Class-All : --- --- --- --- --- Class-A : bc+mc 100 127 --- --- Class-B : none 100 64 --- --- Class-C : 0,1,2,3,4 100 32 --- --- Class-D : 5,6,7 100 16 --- --- No Entry : none --- --- --- --- Port : 6/1 VID : remain Mode : normal =================== Rate Maximum- Minimum- Priority (Kbps) Burst(KByte) Burst(KByte) Probability -----------------------------------------------------------------------Class-Al l : --- 1000000 --- --- --- Class-A : 6,7 --- 127 --- --- Class-B : 4,5 --- 64 --- --- Class-C : 0,3 --- 32 --- --- Class-D : 1,2 --- 16 --- --- No Entry : none --- --- --- --- *Switch@1#

QoS

7-34

Output Items (QoS Output Port Maximum Table) Port: Port (line) number Registered-VID: Number of VLANs registered in maximum band limiting mode Available-VID: Number of VLANs that can be registered (QoS Input VLAN Maximum Table) Port: Port (line) number VID: VLAN ID Mode: Setting mode

normal: Normal mode separate: Separate mode separate-RED: Separator mode (RED use)

Priority: Class mapping ---: Unset broadcast: Broadcast setting multicast: Multicast setting bc+mc: Broadcast and multicast setting none: Priority does not belong to any class Numeric value: Priority

Rate: Maximum band limiting value per class If Mode is Normal, the maximum band limiting value is shown in Class-All.

Maximum-Burst: Maximum burst tolerance Minimum-Burst: Minimum burst tolerance Probability: Probability

Related commands

set qos maximum-mode Setting of maximum band limiting operation modeshow qos maximum-mode Display of maximum band limiting operation modeset qos out-rate maximum Setting of maximum band limiting function in



VLAN units clear qos out-rate maximum Clearing of maximum band limiting function in

output VLAN units

QoS

7-35

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear qos out-rate maximum Clearing of maximum band limiting function in output VLAN units

Clears the maximum band limiting function in output VLAN units.

Input format - Clearing maximum band limiting setting of specified port/specified VLAN clear qos out-rate maximum P1 P2 [P3 (vid) P4]

- Clearing maximum band limiting setting of specified port/specified Remaining-VLAN clear qos out-rate maximum P1 P2 [P3 (remain)]



vid: VLAN specification remain: Remaining-VLAN specification * If a VLAN is already registered in the specified port when Remaining-VLAN is specified in P3, you cannot clear the maximum band limiting function in output VLAN units. * If P3 is omitted, the setting of the maximum band limiting function of all the VLANs and the Remaining-VLAN in the port specified in P2 are cleared.



Default value None


Notes If P3 is omitted, execution is confirmed after this command has been entered. The priority mapping function setting of the specified VLAN and the priority discard function setting are also cleared.

Input examples *Switch@1# clear qos out-rate maximum fe 6/1 vid 100 *Switch@1# clear qos out-rate maximum gbe 5/1 vid 100 *Switch@1# clear qos out-rate maximum gbe 4/1 Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y *Switch@1#

Output item

QoS

7-36

Related commands

set qos maximum-mode Setting of maximum band limiting operation modeshow qos maximum-mode Display of maximum band limiting Operation modeset qos out-rate maximum Setting of maximum band limiting function in



VLAN units Show qos out-rate maximum Display of maximum band limiting function in

output VLAN units

QoS

7-37

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set qos class-map Setting of priority mapping

Sets priority mapping.

Input format - Specifying port (line) number set qos class-map P1 (port (line) type) P2 P3

- Specifying line module set qos class-map P1 (line module number) P3

Parameters P1: Port (line) type {fe | gbe} or line module number Port (line) type specification fe: FE port

gbe: GbE port Line module number (Multiple values can be specified.): 3 to 10

• When port (line) type is specified in P1. P2: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.)

P3: Profile number (1 to 4) * If the port type is ATM155, ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, or TDMP155, line module numbers are used for specification.

Default value P3: 1


Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set qos class-map fe 1/1-3 2 *Switch@1# set qos class-map gbe 6/1 4 *Switch@1# set qos class-map 3 2 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

show qos class-map Display of priority mapping set qos class-map profile Creating of priority mapping profile show qos class-map profile Display of priority mapping profile

QoS

7-38

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show qos class-map Display of priority mapping

Shows priority mapping.

Input format - Displaying specified port show qos class-map [P1 (port (line) number)]

- Displaying specified line module show qos class-map [P1 (line module number)]

Parameter P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) or line module number (1 to 12) (Multiple values can be specified.) * If a port (line) number is specified in P1, the priority profile number set in the specified port is shown. * If a line module number is specified in P1, the priority profile number set in the specified module is shown. (You can specify a line module number only when the port type is ATM155, ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, or TDMP155.) * If P1 is omitted, the priority profile numbers set in all the ports and those set in all the line module numbers are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show qos class-map QoS Priority Mapping Table ========================== Port Slot Profile No. ----------------------- 1/1 --- 1 1/2 --- 2 1/3 --- 2 1/4 --- 1 1/5 --- 1 1/6 --- 1 1/7 --- 1 1/8 --- 1 --- 10 3 *Switch@1#

Output items Port: Port (line) number Slot: Module number Profile No.: Profile number

QoS

7-39

Related commands

set qos class-map Setting of priority mapping set qos class-map profile Creating of priority mapping profile show qos class-map profile Display of priority mapping profile

QoS

7-40

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set qos class-map profile Creating of priority mapping profile

Creates a priority mapping profile.

Input formats - Specifying device initial value set qos class-map profile P1 P2 (default)

- Setting priority mapping profile set qos class-map profile P1 P2 (class-a) P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9

Parameters P1: Profile number (1 to 4) P2: Class A priority specification {class-a} or device initial value specification {default}

class-a: Class A priority specification default: Device initial value specification

• When class-a is specified in P2. P3: Priority specification or unset {none}

Priority: 0 to 7 (Multiple values can be specified.) Unset: none

P4: Class B priority {class-b} P5: Priority specification or unset {none}


P6: Class C priority {class-c} P7: Priority specification or unset {none}


P8: Class D priority {class-d} P9: Priority specification or unset {none}


* You cannot specify none for all classes A to D (P2, P4, P6, and P8). Specify priority for any of classes A to D (P2, P4, P6, and P8). * The priority to be specified in any of classes A to D (P2, P4, P6, and P8) cannot be duplicated with the priority specified in any other class. * The priority not specified in any of classes A to D (P2, P4, P6, and P8) does not belong to any class.



Notes To inhibit a priority from belonging to a class, specify “none” explicitly. (You cannot omit “none”.) If the output-side fairness control mode function is disabled, class mapping does not function.

QoS

7-41

Input examples *Switch@1# set qos class-map profile 4 class-a none class-b 1,3,5 class-c 2,4,6 class-d 0,7 *Switch@1# set qos class-map profile 3 default *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set qos class-map Setting of priority mapping show qos class-map profile Display of priority mapping show qos class-map profile Display of priority mapping profile

QoS

7-42

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show qos class-map profile Display of priority mapping profile

Shows a priority mapping profile.

Input format show qos class-map profile [P1]

Parameter P1: Profile number (1 to 4) * If P1 is omitted, information for all the profiles is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show qos class-map profile 1 QoS Class Mapping Profile Table =============================== Profile No. : 1 =============== Priority -------------------------- Class-A : 6,7 Class-B : 4,5 Class-C : 0,3 Class-D : 1,2 No Entry : none *Switch@1#

Output items

Profile No.: Profile number Priority: Class mapping Numeric value: Priority none: Priority does not belong to any class

Related commands

set qos class-map Setting of priority mapping show qos class-map Display of priority mapping set qos class-map profile Creating of priority mapping profile

QoS

7-43

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set qos cos-map profile Creating of CoS profile

Creates a CoS profile.

Input formats - Specifying CoS set qos cos-map profile P1 [P2 (index number)] P3 (cos) P4 P5 P6

- Specifying IPv4ToS / IPv6TC set qos cos-map profile P1 [P2 (index number)] P3 (v4ToS/v6TC) P4 P5

- Specifying ether-type set qos cos-map profile P1 [P2 (index number)] P3 (ether-type) P4 P5

- Specifying other set qos cos-map profile P1 P2 (other) P3

QoS

7-44

Parameters P1: Profile number (1 to 128) P2: Index number or others {other}

Index number: 1 to 31 other: Others * Only index numbers can be omitted. If an index number is omitted, a free and low-number index number is used. (However, if there is an index number that is already registered, that number is used.)* If the command where P2 is omitted is entered when all P2 index numbers has already been set, it is treated as an error because there are no free index numbers, and the setting is not configured.

• When P2 is omitted or an index number is specified. P3: Service type {cos | v4tos | v6tc | ether-type}

cos: CoS specification v4tos: IPv4 ToS specification v6tc: IPv6 TC specification ether-type: Ethernet type specification

• When cos is specified in P3. P4: Tag type {inner | outer}

inner: Inner tag specification outer: Outer tag specification

P5: Pre-change priority or untag {untag} Priority: 0 to 7 untag: Untag specification

P6: Post-change priority (0 to 7)

• When v4tos or v6tc is specified in P3. P4: ToS type {IP-Precedence specification | DSCP specification | Full bit specification}

IP-Precedence specification: ip-precedence 0 to 7 DSCP specification: dscp 0 to 63 Full bit specification: fullbit 0 to 255

P5: Post-conversion CoS value (0 to 7) • When ether-type is specified in P3.

P4: EtherType value (0x0600 to 0xffff) P5: Post-conversion CoS value (0 to 7)

• When other is specified in P2.

P3: Post-conversion CoS value (0 to 7) Default value None


Notes You can overwrite a registered index but cannot reregister it. At initial setup, post-conversion CoS value “0” is automatically set to the setting of other.

QoS

7-45

Input examples *Switch@1# set qos cos-map profile 10 2 cos inner 3 5 *Switch@1# set qos cos-map profile 10 cos inner untag 7 *Switch@1# set qos cos-map profile 10 v4tos fullbit 110 0 *Switch@1# set qos cos-map profile 10 5 v6tc dscp 63 2 *Switch@1# set qos cos-map profile 10 other 3 *Switch@1# set qos cos-map profile 10 ether-type 0x8100 7 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

show qos cos-map profile Display of CoS profile clear qos cos-map profile Clearing of CoS profile set qos in-port cos-map Setting of input CoS priority mapping show qos in-port cos-map Display of input CoS priority mapping clear qos in-port cos-map Clearing of input CoS priority mapping set qos out-port cos-map Setting of output CoS priority mapping show qos out-port cos-map Display of output CoS priority mapping clear qos out-port cos-map Clearing of output CoS priority mapping

QoS

7-46

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show qos cos-map profile Display of CoS profile

Shows a CoS profile.

Input format show qos cos-map profile [P1]

Parameter P1: Profile number (1 to 128) * If P1 is omitted, information for all the profiles registered in the device is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show qos cos-map profile CoS Profile Table ================= Profile No. : 1 ================= Before Convert Index Field Type Kind Data Data ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 cos inner 3 5 10 v4tos ip-precedence 5 3 15 v6tc fullbit 200 4 20 ether-type --- 0x600 6 Other --- --- --- 2 *Switch@1#

Output items Profile No: Profile number Index: Profile index

Field Type: Service type cos: CoS specified v4tos: IP v4 ToS specified v6tc: IP v6 TC specified ether-type: ether-type specified

Kind: Tag type/ToS type Inner: Inner tag specified (when CoS is specified) Outer: Outer tag specified (when CoS is specified) IP Precedence specified (when v4tos/v6tc is specified) DSCP specified (when v4tos/v6tc is specified) Full bit specified (when v4tos/v6tc is specified)

Before Data: Pre-change priority or Untag specified (CoS)/pre-conversion data (v4tos/v6tc) Convert Data: Post-change priority (CoS)/post-conversion CoS value (v4tos/v6tc)

QoS

7-47

Related commands

set qos cos-map profile Creating of CoS profile clear qos cos-map profile Clearing of CoS profile set qos in-port cos-map Setting of input CoS priority mapping show qos in-port cos-map Display of input CoS priority mapping clear qos in-port cos-map Clearing of input CoS priority mapping set qos out-port cos-map Setting of output CoS priority mapping show qos out-port cos-map Display of output CoS priority mapping clear qos out-port cos-map Clearing of output CoS priority mapping

QoS

7-48

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear qos cos-map profile Clearing of CoS profile

Clears a CoS profile.

Input format clear qos cos-map profile [P1 [P2]]

Parameters P1: Profile number (1 to 128) P2: Index number (1 to 31) * If all the parameters are omitted, all the registered CoS profiles are cleared.

Default value None

Usage condition If command mode is safety mode, you cannot clear the profiles that are already mapped.

Notes If P1 and P2 are omitted, execution is confirmed after this command has been entered.If no profile is registered in the index number specified in P2, an error occurs. No error occurs even if the profile number specified in P1 does not exist.

Input examples *Switch@1# clear qos cos-map profile 3 34 *Switch@1# clear qos cos-map profile 3 Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y *Switch@1# clear qos cos-map profile Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set qos cos-map profile Creating of CoS profile clear qos cos-map profile Clearing of CoS profile set qos in-port cos-map Setting of input CoS priority mapping show qos in-port cos-map Display of input CoS priority mapping clear qos in-port cos-map Clearing of input CoS priority mapping set qos out-port cos-map Setting of output CoS priority mapping show qos out-port cos-map Display of output CoS priority mapping clear qos out-port cos-map Clearing of output CoS priority mapping

QoS

7-49

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set qos in-port cos-map Setting of input CoS priority mapping

Sets input CoS priority mapping.

Input format set qos in-port cos-map P1 P2 P3 P4

Parameters P1: Port (line) type {atm | fe | gbe | gmx} atm: ATM155 port fe: FE port gbe: GbE port gmx: GbE-MUX port

P2: Port (line) number (multiple specification) P3: VLAN identifier {VLAN-ID | VLAN-name}

VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (multiple specification) VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters

P4: Profile number (1 to 128)

Default value None

Usage condition If command mode is safety mode, you cannot specify an unregistered profile.

Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set qos in-port cos-map fe 4/1 VLAN100 128 *Switch@1# set qos in-port cos-map gbe 6/1 100 1 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set qos cos-map profile Creating of CoS profile clear qos cos-map profile Clearing of CoS profile clear qos in-port cos-map Clearing of input CoS priority mapping show qos cos-map profile Display of CoS profile show qos in-port cos-map Display of input CoS priority mapping

QoS

7-50

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show qos in-port cos-map Display of input CoS priority mapping

Shows input CoS priority mapping.

Input format show qos in-port cos-map [P1]

Parameter P1: Port (line) number or VLAN identifier {VLAN-ID | VLAN-name} Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple values can be specified.) VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters *If P1 is omitted, the CoS profile lists set in all the VLANs of all the ports are shown. *If P1 is omitted or a port (line) number is specified, input CoS priority mapping is shown per port. *If a VLAN identifier is specified in P1, input CoS priority mapping is shown per VLAN.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show qos in-port cos-map Input CoS Priority Mapping Table ================================ Port VID Profile -------------------------------- 4/1 100 128 6/1 100 1 *Switch@1#

Output items Port: Port (line) number VID : VLAN ID Profile: Profile number

Related commands

set qos cos-map profile Creating of CoS profile show qos cos-map profile Display of CoS profile clear qos cos-map profile Clearing of CoS profile set qos in-port cos-map Setting of input CoS priority mapping clear qos in-port cos-map Clearing of input CoS priority mapping

QoS

7-51

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear qos in-port cos-map Clearing of CoS priority mapping

Clears CoS priority mapping.

Input format clear qos in-port cos-map P1 P2 [P3]

Parameters P1: Port (line) type {atm | fe | gbe | gmx} atm: ATM155 port fe: FE port gbe: GbE port gmx: GbE-MUX port

P2: Port (line) number (single specification) P3: VLAN identifier {VLAN-ID | VLAN-name}

VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (single specification) VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters * If P3 is omitted, the CoS priority mapping settings of all the VLANs of the port specified in P2 are cleared.

Default value None



Input examples *Switch@1# clear qos in-port cos-map fe 4/1 VLAN100 *Switch@1# clear qos in-port cos-map gbe 6/1 100 *Switch@1# clear qos in-port cos-map gbe 3/1 Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set qos cos-map profile Creating of CoS profile show qos cos-map profile Display of CoS profile clear qos cos-map profile Clearing of CoS profile set qos in-port cos-map Setting of input CoS priority mapping show qos in-port cos-map Display of input CoS priority mapping

QoS

7-52

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set qos out-port cos-map Setting of output CoS priority mapping

Sets output CoS priority mapping.

Input format set qos out-port cos-map P1 P2 P3 P4




P4: Profile number (1 to 128)

Default value None


Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set qos out-port cos-map fe 1/7 100 10 *Switch@1# set qos out-port cos-map gbe 6/1 VLAN100 1 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set qos cos-map profile Creating of CoS profile show qos cos-map profile Display of CoS profile clear qos cos-map profile Clearing of CoS profile show qos out-port cos-map Display of output CoS priority mapping clear qos out-port cos-map Clearing of output CoS priority mapping

QoS

7-53

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show qos out-port cos-map Display of output CoS priority mapping

Shows output CoS priority mapping.

Input format show qos out-port cos-map [P1]

Parameter P1: Port (line) number or VLAN identifier {VLAN-ID | VLAN-name} Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple values can be specified.) VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters *If P1 is omitted, the CoS profile lists set in all the VLANs of all the ports are shown. *If P1 is omitted or a port (line) number is specified, output CoS priority mapping is shown per port. *If a VLAN identifier is specified in P1, output CoS priority mapping is shown per VLAN.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show qos out-port cos-map Output CoS Priority Mapping Table ================================= Port VID Profile ---------------------------------- 4/1 100 128 6/1 100 1 *Switch@1#

Output items Port: Port (line) number VID: VLAN ID Profile: Profile number

Related commands

set qos cos-map profile Creating of CoS profile show qos cos-map profile Display of CoS profile clear qos cos-map profile Clearing of CoS profile set qos out-port cos-map Setting of output CoS priority mapping clear qos out-port cos-map Clearing of output CoS priority mapping

QoS

7-54

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear qos out-port cos-map Clearing of output CoS priority mapping

Clears output CoS priority mapping.

Input format clear qos out-port cos-map P1 P2 [P3]



VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (single specification) VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters * If P3 is omitted, the CoS priority mapping settings of all the VLANs of the port specified in P2 are cleared.

Default value None



Input examples *Switch@1# clear qos out-port cos-map fe 1/5 30 *Switch@1# clear qos out-port cos-map gbe 1/5 30 *Switch@1# clear qos out-port cos-map gbe 1/5 Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set qos cos-map profile Creating of CoS profile show qos cos-map profile Display of CoS profile clear qos cos-map profile Clearing of CoS profile set qos out-port cos-map Setting of output CoS priority mapping show qos out-port cos-map Display of output CoS priority mapping

QoS

7-55

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set qos out-fairness-mode Setting of output-side fairness control mode function

Sets the output-side fairness control mode function.

Input format set qos out-fairness-mode P1

Parameter P1: Output fairness control mode {enable | disable} enable: Output fairness operation enable mode disable: Output fairness operation disable mode



Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set qos out-fairness-mode enable *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

show qos out-fairness-mode Display of output-side fairness control mode function

set qos out-priority fairness Setting of priority discard function of output-side fairness control function of output port

set qos out-rate fairness maximum-port Setting of upper threshold of output-side fairness control function of output port

set qos out-weight fairness Setting of output-side fairness control function weight of output port

show qos out-weight fairness Display of output-side fairness control function of output port

clear qos out-weight fairness Clearing of output-side fairness control function of output port

QoS

7-56

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show qos out-fairness-mode Display of output-side fairness control mode function

Shows the output-side fairness control mode function.

Input format show qos out-fairness-mode

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show qos out-fairness-mode QoS Out Fairness Mode Table =========================== Port Status ---------------------- all enabled *Switch@1#

Output items Port: all (all ports) Status: Output-side fairness control mode

enabled: Output-side fairness operation enabled mode disabled: Output-side fairness operation disabled mode

Related commands







QoS

7-57

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution


Sets the priority discard function of the output-side fairness control function of an output port.

Input formats - Specifying VLAN set qos out-priority fairness P1 (port (line) type) P2 P3 (vid) P4 [P5 (burst tolerance for class-a))] [P6] [P7] [P8]

- Specifying Remaining-VLAN set qos out-priority fairness P1 (port (line) type) P2 P3 (remain) [P5 (burst tolerance for class-a)] [P6] [P7] [P8]

- Specifying VLAN (ATM155/ATMP/TDMP/ATMP155/TDMP155) set qos out-priority fairness P1 (line module number) P3 (vid) P4 [P5 (burst tolerance for class-a))] [P6] [P7] [P8]

- Specifying Remaining-VLAN (ATM155/ATMP/TDMP/ATMP155/TDMP155) set qos out-priority fairness P1 (line module number) P3 (remain) [P5 (burst tolerance for class-a))] [P6] [P7] [P8]

- Specifying default (specifying VLAN) set qos out-priority fairness P1 (port (line) type) P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (initial)

- Specifying default (specifying Remaining-VLAN) set qos out-priority fairness P1 (port (line) type) P2 P3 (remain) P5 (initial)

- Specifying default (specifying VLAN) (ATM155/ATMP/TDMP/ATMP155/TDMP155) set qos out-priority fairness P1 (line module number) P3 (vid) P4 P5 (initial)

- Specifying default (specifying Remaining-VLAN) (ATM155/ATMP/TDMP/ATMP155/TDMP155) set qos out-priority fairness P1 (line module number) P3 (remain) P5 (initial)

QoS

7-58

Parameters P1: Port (line) type specification {fe | gbe} or line module number specification fe: FE port gbe: GbE port Line module number: 3 to 10 (single specification) * A line module number can be specified only when the port type is ATM155, ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, or TDMP155.

• When a port (line) type is specified in P1. P2: Port (line) number (single specification)

FE port: 1/1 to 4/8 GbE port: 3/1 to 10/1

P3: VLAN specification {vid} or Remaining-VLAN specification {remain} vid: VLAN specification remain: Remaining-VLAN specification



P5: Burst tolerance specification for class A {class-a 1 to 127} or default setting {initial} Burst tolerance specification for class A: class-a 1 to 127(Kbyte) initial: Default specification

• When P5 is omitted or burst tolerance for class A is specified. P6 Burst tolerance specification for class B {class-b 1 to 127}

class-b 1 to 127 (Kbyte) P7: Burst tolerance specification for class C {class-c 1 to 127}

class-c 1 to 127 (Kbyte) P8: Burst tolerance specification for class D {class-d 1 to 127}

class-d 1 to 127 (Kbyte)

* The granularity for burst tolerance is 1 (Kbyte). * If burst tolerance specification for class A to class D (P5 to P8) are omitted, the current values are kept.

Default value P5: 127 (Kbyte), P6: 64 (Kbyte), P7: 32 (Kbyte), P8: 16 (Kbyte)

Usage condition If the output-side fairness control mode function is disable, you cannot set this function.

Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set qos out-priority fairness fe 1/3 vid 100 class-a 10 class-b 20 *Switch@1# set qos out-priority fairness gbe 9/1 vid 200 class-a 20 class-b 30 *Switch@1# set qos out-priority fairness 3 vid 100 class-a 10 class-b 20*Switch@1# set qos out-priority fairness 10 remain initial *Switch@1#

Output item

QoS

7-59

Related commands

set qos out-priority maximum Setting of priority discard function in output VLAN units


show qos out-fairness-mode Display of output-side fairness control function of output port





QoS

7-60

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set qos out-weight rate Setting of output-side fairness control function rate of output port

Sets the output-side fairness control function rate of an output port.

Input formats - Specifying VLAN set qos out-weight rate P1 (port (line) type) P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5

- Specifying Remaining-VLAN set qos out-weight rate P1 (port (line) type) P2 P3 (remain) P5

- Specifying VLAN (ATM155/ATMP/TDMP/ATMP155/TDMP155) set qos out-weight rate P1 (line module number) P3 (vid) P4 P5

- Specifying Remaining-VLAN (ATM155/ATMP/TDMP/ATMP155/TDMP155) set qos out-weight rate P1 (line module number) P3 (remain) P5







P6: Rate value FE: 0 to 100000 (Kbps) GbE, ATM155, ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, TDMP155: 0 to 1000000 (Kbps) * The granularity is 25 (Kbps).

Default value None


Note If the GbE line mode function is se to FE in GbE-PV2, the maximum number of VLANs that can be set for one port is the same as the maximum number of FE ports.

QoS

7-61

Input example *Switch@1# set qos out-weight rate fe 1/1 vid 1 1000 *Switch@1# set qos out-weight rate gbe 6/1 vid VLAN100 1000000 *Switch@1# set qos out-weight rate 3 vid 100 1 *Switch@1# set qos out-weight rate 3 remain 0 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands






QoS

7-62

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution


Sets the output-side fairness control function weight of and output port.

Input formats - Specifying VLAN set qos out-weight fairness P1 (port (line) type) P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5

- Specifying Remaining-VLAN set qos out-weight fairness P1 (port (line) type) P2 P3 (remain) P5

- Specifying VLAN (ATM155/ATMP/TDMP/ATMP155/TDMP155) set qos out-weight fairness P1 (line module number) P3 (vid) P4 P5

- Specifying Remaining-VLAN (ATM155/ATMP/TDMP/ATMP155/TDMP155) set qos out-weight fairness P1 (line module number) P3 (remain) P5







P5: Weight value (0 to 40000) * The granularity is 1 (Weight). * The default are fe, gbe, atm155, atmp, tdmp, atmp155, and tdmp155: 1 (Weight). * Maximum number of registrations: gbe, atm155, atmp, tdmp, atmp155, and tdmp155 =2047(+1)/fe=255(+1) (+1) is for Remaining-VLAN.

* Remaining-VLAN is registered when the output-side fairness control mode function is enabled.

* You cannot clear Remaining-VLAN.

Default value P5: fe, gbe, atm155, atmp, tdmp, atmp155, tdmp155: 1(Weight)

QoS

7-63


Note If the GbE line mode function is se to FE in GbE-PV2, the maximum number of VLANs that can be set for one port is the same as the maximum number of FE ports.

Input examples *Switch@1# set qos out-weight fairness fe 4/1 vid 100 40000 *Switch@1# set qos out-weight fairness gbe 6/1 vid VLAN100 0 *Switch@1# set qos out-weight fairness 3 vid 100 1 *Switch@1# set qos out-weight fairness 3 remain 0 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands





QoS

7-64

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution


Sets the upper threshold of the output-side fairness control function of an output port.

Input formats - Setting specified port/the upper threshold of the output-side fairness control function set qos out-rate fairness maximum-port P1 (port (line) type) P2 P3

- Setting specified line module/ the upper threshold of the output-side fairness control function (ATM155/ATMP/TDMP/ATMP155/TDMP155) set qos out-rate fairness maximum-port P1 (line module number) P3

Parameters P1: Port (line) type specification {fe | gbe} or line module number specification fe: FE port gbe: GbE port Line module number: 3 to 10 (Multiple values can be specified.) * A line module number can be specified only when the port type is ATM155, ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, or TDMP155.

• When a port (line) type is specified in P1. P2: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.)


P3: Rate value FE: 1000 to 100000 (Kbps) GbE, ATM155, ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, TDMP155: 1000 to 1000000 (Kbps) * The granularity is 1000 (Kbps).

Default values P3: fe: 100(Mbps), gbe, atm155, atmp, tdmp, atmp155, tdmp155: 1(Gbps)


Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set qos out-rate fairness maximum-port fe 1/1 30000 *Switch@1# set qos out-rate fairness maximum-port gbe 6/1 1000000 *Switch@1# set qos out-rate fairness maximum-port 3 50000 *Switch@1#

Output item

QoS

7-65

Related commands





QoS

7-66

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution


Shows the output-side fairness control function of an output port.

Input formats - Displaying specified port/all VLANs show qos out-weight fairness [P1 (port (line)number)]

- Displaying specified line module/all VLANs show qos out-weight fairness [P1 (line module number)]

- Displaying specified port/specified VLAN show qos out-weight fairness [P1 (port (line)number) [P2 (vid) P3]]

- Displaying specified port/specified Remaining-VLAN show qos out-weight fairness [P1 (port (line)number) [P2 (remain)]]

- Displaying specified line module/specified VLAN (ATM155/ATMP/TDMP/ATMP155/TDMP155) show qos out-weight fairness [P1 (line module number) [P2 (vid) P3]]

- Displaying specified line module/specified Remaining-VLAN (ATM155/ATMP/TDMP/ATMP155/TDMP155) show qos out-weight fairness [P1 (line module number) [P2 (remain)]]

- Displaying all ports/specified VLAN show qos out-weight fairness [P2 (vid) P3]

- Displaying all VLANs/specified Remaining-VLAN show qos out-weight fairness [P2 (remain)]

Parameters P1: Port (line) number or line module number specification Port (line) number: 1/1 to 10/8 Line module number: 3 to 10 (Multiple values can be specified.) * A line module number can be specified only when the port type is ATM, ATMP, or TDMP.




* If all the parameters are omitted, information for all the VLANs set in all the ports and Remaining-VLANs, and information for all the VLANs set in all the line module numbers are shown. * About displayed data if P2 is omitted. If a port (line) number is specified in P1, information for all the VLANs set in the specified port and Remaining-VLANs are shown per port. If a line module number is specified in P1, information for all the VLANs set in the specified line module number is shown per line module. * If P1 is omitted, information is shown per VLAN.

QoS

7-67

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show qos out-weight fairness 6/1 QoS Output Port Fairness Table ============================== Maximum- Real-Maximum- Total-25Kbps- Registered Available Port Slot Rate(Kbps) Rate(Kbps) basedRate(Kbps) -VID -VID ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 6/1 --- 1000000 1000000 25 2 2046 QoS Output VLAN Fairness Table ============================== Port : 6/1 VID : 100 Priority Profile : 1 ========================= 25Kbps-based- Real- Priority Weight Rate(Kbps) Rate(Kbps) Burst(KByte) -----------------------------------------------------------------------Class-All : -- 0 0 0.00 --- Class-A : 6,7 --- --- --- 127 Class-B : 4,5 --- --- --- 64 Class-C : 0,3 --- --- --- 32 Class-D : 1,2 --- --- --- 16 No Entry : none --- --- --- --- Port : 6/1 VID : remain Priority Profile : 1 ========================= 25Kbps-based- Real- Priority Weight Rate(Kbps) Rate(Kbps) Burst(KByte) ----------------------------------------------------------------------- Class-All : --- 1 25 1000000.00 --- Class-A : 6,7 --- --- --- 127 Class-B : 4,5 --- --- --- 64 Class-C : 0,3 --- --- --- 32 Class-D : 1,2 --- --- --- 16 No Entry : none --- --- --- --- *Switch@1#

QoS

7-68

Output items (QoS Output Port Fairness Table) Port: Port number Slot: Line (slot) module number Maximum-Rate: Upper threshold of line Real-Maximum-Rate: Real upper threshold of line Total-25Kbps- based-Rate: Total rate value (1weight=25Kbps) Registered-VID: Number of VLANs that are already set Available-VID: Number of remaining available VLANs (QoS Output VLAN Fairness Table) Port: Port number VID: VLAN ID Priority Profile: Profile number Priority: Class mapping Weight: Weight value 25Kbps-based-Rate: Rate value (1weight=25Kbps) Real-Rate: Real rate value Burst: Burst tolerance

Related commands





QoS

7-69

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution


Clears the output-side fairness control function of an output port.

Input formats - Clearing specified port/VLAN-output-side fairness control setting clear qos out-weight fairness P1 (port (line) type) P2 [P3]

- Clearing specified line module/VLAN-output-side fairness control setting (ATM155/ATMP/TDMP/ATMP155/TDMP155) clear qos out-weight fairness P1 (line module number) [P3]

Parameters P1: Port (line) type specification {fe | gbe} or line module number specification fe: FE port gbe: GbE port Line module number: 3 to 10 * A line module number can be specified only when the port type is ATM155, ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, or TDMP155.



P3: VLAN identifier {VLAN-ID | VLAN-name} VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (single specification) VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters * If P3 is omitted, the fairness control settings of all the VLANs registered in the specified port are cleared.

Default value None



Input examples *Switch@1# clear qos out-weight fairness fe 1/1 70 *Switch@1# clear qos out-weight fairness gbe 6/1 VLAN100 *Switch@1# clear qos out-weight fairness 3 500 *Switch@1# clear qos out-weight fairness 3 Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y *Switch@1#

Output item

QoS

7-70

Related commands





QoS

7-71

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set qos initial-class-map Setting of default priority mapping

Sets default priority mapping.

Input formats - Setting default set qos initial-class-map P1 P2 (default)

- Setting default priority mapping set qos initial-class-map P1 P2 (class-a) P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9

Parameters P1: Band specification {in-maximum | in-fairness | out-maximum} in-maximum: Specification of maximum band limiting function of input port in-fairness: Specification of input-side fairness control function of multiport out-maximum: Specification of maximum band limiting function of output port * Specification of input-side fairness control function of multiport is unsupported in P1.

P2: Class A priority specification {class-a} or device initial value specification {default} class-a: Class A priority specification default: Device initial value specification

• When class A priority is specified in P1. P3: Priority specification {priority | unset}


P4: Class B priority {class-b} class-b: Class B priority

P5: Priority specification {priority | unset} priority: 0 to 7 (Multiple values can be specified.) unset: none

P6: Class C priority {class-c} class-c: Class C priority


P8: Class D priority {class-d} class-d: Class D priority


* You cannot specify none for all classes A to D (P2, P4, P6, and P8). Specify priority for any of classes A to D (P2, P4, P6, and P8). * The priority to be specified in any of classes A to D (P2, P4, P6, and P8) cannot be duplicated with the priority specified in any other class. * The priority not specified in any of classes A to D (P2, P4, P6, and P8) does not belong to any class. * If P2 (default) is specified, the device initial value is set.

Default value P2: 6,7 P4: 4,5 P6: 0,3 P8:1,2

QoS

7-72


Notes To inhibit a priority from belonging to a class, specify “none” explicitly. If command mode is safety mode, execution is confirmed after this command has been entered.

Input examples *Switch@1# set qos initial-class-map in-maximum class-a 4,5,7 class-b 0 class-c 1,2,3,6 class-d none *Switch@1# set qos initial -class-map out-maximum class-a 4-6 class-b 1,2 class-c 0,3 class-d 7 *Switch@1# set qos initial -class-map fairness default *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set qos class-map Setting of priority mapping set qos class-map profile Creating of priority mapping profile show qos initial-class-map Display of default priority mapping

QoS

7-73

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show qos initial-class-map Display of default priority mapping

Shows default priority mapping.

Input format show qos initial-class-map

Parameter None

Default value None


Notes The default priority mapping of the maximum band limiting function of an input port is shown. The default priority mapping of the maximum band limiting function of an output port is shown. The default priority mapping of the multiport fairness control function is shown. * Because the default priority mapping of the multiport fairness control function is unsupported function, the default value is shown.

Input example *Switch@1# show qos initial-class-map QoS Default Class Mapping Table =============================== In-Maximum In-Fairness Out-Maximum (Priority) (Priority) (Priority) ------------------------------------------------------------------------ Class-A : 6,7 6,7 6,7 Class-B : 4,5 4,5 4,5 Class-C : 0,3 0,3 0,3 Class-D : 1,2 1,2 1,2 No Entry : none --- none *Switch@1#

Output items In-Maximum: Specification of maximum band limiting function of input port In-Fairness: Specification of multiport fairness control function Out-Maximum: Specification of maximum band limiting function of output port Class-A to Class-D: Class mapping

QoS

7-74

Related commands

set qos in-class-map maximum Setting of priority mapping function in input VLAN units

set qos out-class-map maximum Setting of priority mapping function in output VLAN units

set qos class-map Setting of priority mapping show qos class-map Display of priority mapping set qos class-map profile Creating of priority mapping profile show qos class-map profile Display of priority mapping profile set qos initial-class-map Setting of default priority mapping

QoS

7-75

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set qos initial-priority Setting of default burst tolerance

Sets default burst tolerance.

Input formats - Setting default burst tolerance set qos initial-priority P1 (band specification) P2 (burst tolerance for class-a) P3 P4 P5

- Setting default set qos initial-priority P1 (band specification) P2 (default)

- Setting default burst tolerance (RED use) set qos initial-priority P1 (band specification(RED use)) P2 P3 (burst tolerance (upper threshold) for class-a) P4 [P5] P6 P7 [P8] P9 P10 [P11] P12 P13 [P14]

- Setting default (RED use) set qos initial-priority P1 (band specification (RED use)) P2 P3 (default)

Parameters P1: Band specification {in-maximum | out-maximum | in-fairness | out-fairness} or band specification (RED use) {in-maximum-red | out-maximum-red}

in-maximum: Specification of maximum band limitation of input port out-maximum: Specification of maximum band limitation of output port in-fairness: Specification of input-side fairness control of multiport out-fairness: Specification of output-side fairness control of output port in-maximum-red: Specification of maximum band limitation of input port (RED use) out-maximum-red: Specification of maximum band limitation of output port (RED use) * Specification of input-side fairness control function of multiport is unsupported in P1.

• When band specification is specified in P1. P2: Burst tolerance A specification or device initial value specification {default}

Burst tolerance A: class-a 1 to 127(Kbyte) default: Device initial value specification

• When burst tolerance A is specified in P2. P3: Burst tolerance specification for class B {class-b 1 to 127}




QoS

7-76

• When band specification (RED use) is specified in P1. P2: Port (line) type {fe | gbe}

fe: FE port gbe: GbE port

P3: Burst tolerance A (upper threshold) specification or device initial value specification {default}

Burst tolerance A (upper threshold) FE port: class-a 1 to 3000(Kbyte) GbE port: class-a 1 to 30000(Kbyte)

default: Device initial value specification • When burst tolerance A (upper threshold) is specified in P3.

P4: Burst tolerance A (lower threshold) or probability disable {disable} Burst tolerance A (lower threshold) FE port: class-a 1 to 2999(Kbyte) GbE port: class-a 1 to 29999(Kbyte) disable: Probability disable

• When burst tolerance A (lower threshold) is specified in P4. P5: Probability A (1 to 32)

P6: Burst tolerance B (upper threshold) FE port: class-b 1 to 3000(Kbyte) GbE port: class-b 1 to 30000(Kbyte)

P7: Burst tolerance B (lower threshold) or probability disable {disable} Burst tolerance B (lower threshold) FE port: 1 to 2999(Kbyte) GbE port: 1 to 29999(Kbyte) disable: Probability disable

• When burst tolerance B (lower threshold) is specified in P7. P8: Probability B (1 to 32)

P9: Burst tolerance C (upper threshold) FE port: class-c 1 to 3000(Kbyte) GbE port: class-c 1 to 30000(Kbyte)

P10: Burst tolerance C (lower threshold) or probability disable {disable} Burst tolerance C (lower threshold) FE port: 1 to 2999(Kbyte) GbE port: 1 to 29999(Kbyte) disable: Probability disable

• When burst tolerance C (lower threshold) is specified in P10. P11: Probability C (1 to 32)

P12: Burst tolerance D (upper threshold) FE port: class-d 1 to 3000(Kbyte) GbE port: class-d 1 to 30000(Kbyte)

P13: Burst tolerance D (lower threshold) or probability disable {disable} Burst tolerance D (lower threshold) FE port: 1 to 2999(Kbyte) GbE port: 1 to 29999(Kbyte) disable: Probability disable

• When burst tolerance D (lower threshold) is specified in P13. P14: Probability D (1 to 32)

QoS

7-77

Default value None

Usage condition

None

Notes You cannot set a value greater than the value set in P3 in P4. You cannot also set a value greater than the values set in P3 in P6, P7, P9, P10, P12, and P13. If command mode is safety mode, execution is confirmed after this command has been entered.

Input example *Switch@1# set qos initial-priority in-maximum class-a 96 class-b 64 class-c 2 class-d 1 *Switch@1# set qos initial-priority out-maximum default *Switch@1# set qos initial-priority in-maximum-red gbe class-a 30000 29999 32 class-b 5000 4000 16 class-c 3000 2000 2 class-d 1000 500 1 *Switch@1# set qos initial-priority out-maximum-red fe class-a 96 disable class-b 64 32 10 class-c 3000 20 32 class-d 2000 10 1 *Switch@1# set qos initial-priority out-maximum-red gbe default *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set qos in-priority maximum Setting oft priority discard function in input VLAN units set qos out-priority maximum Setting of priority discard function in output VLAN unitsset qos out-priority fairness Setting of priority discard function of output-side

fairness control function of output port show qos initial-priority Display of default burst tolerance

QoS

7-78

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show qos initial-priority Display of default burst tolerance

Shows default burst tolerance.

Input format show qos initial-priority

Parameter None

Default value None


Note * Because the default burst tolerance of input-side fairness control function of multiport (in-fairness) is unsupported function, the default value is shown.

Input example *Switch@1# show qos initial-priority QoS Initial Burst Table ======================= In-Maximum In-Fairness Out-Fairness Out-Maximum (KByte) (KByte) (KByte) (KByte) ------------------------------------------------------------ Class-A : 127 14 127 127 Class-B : 64 14 64 64 Class-C : 32 14 32 32 Class-D : 16 14 16 16 QoS Initial Burst(RED) Table ============================ In-Maximum(FE) ============== Maximum-Burst(KByte) Minimum-Burst(KByte) Probability ----------------------------------------------------------------------- Class-A : 127 disabled disabled Class-B : 64 disabled disabled Class-C : 32 16 32(100%) Class-D : 16 8 32(100%) In-Maximum(GbE) =============== Maximum-Burst(KByte) Minimum-Burst(KByte) Probability ----------------------------------------------------------------------- Class-A : 127 disabled disabled Class-B : 64 disabled disabled Class-C : 32 16 32(100%) Class-D : 16 8 32(100%) Out-Maximum(FE)

QoS

7-79

=============== Maximum-Burst(KByte) Minimum-Burst(KByte) Probability ----------------------------------------------------------------------- Class-A : 127 disabled disabled Class-B : 64 disabled disabled Class-C : 32 16 32(100%) Class-D : 16 8 32(100%) Out-Maximum(GbE) ================ Maximum-Burst(KByte) Minimum-Burst(KByte) Probability ----------------------------------------------------------------------- Class-A : 127 disabled disabled Class-B : 64 disabled disabled Class-C : 32 16 32(100%) Class-D : 16 8 32(100%) *Switch@1#

Output items (QoS Initial Burst Table) In-maximum: Specification of maximum band limiting function of input port In-fairness: Specification of input-side fairness control function of multiport Output-fairness: Specification of maximum band limiting function of output port Out-maximum: Specification of maximum band limiting function of output port Class-A to Class-D: Burst tolerance (QoS Initial Burst(RED) Table) In-Maximum(FE): Specification of maximum band limiting function of input (FE port) Maximum-Burst: Upper threshold burst tolerance Minimum-Burst: Lower threshold burst tolerance Probability: Probability In-Maximum(GBE): Specification of maximum band limiting function of input (GbE port) Maximum-Burst: Upper threshold burst tolerance Minimum-Burst: Lower threshold burst tolerance Probability: Probability Out-Maximum(FE): Specification of maximum band limiting function of output port (FE port) Maximum-Burst: Upper threshold burst tolerance Minimum-Burst: Lower threshold burst tolerance Probability: Probability Out-Maximum(GBE): Specification of maximum band limiting function of output port (GBE port) Maximum-Burst: Upper threshold burst tolerance Minimum-Burst: Lower threshold burst tolerance Probability: Probability

Related command

set qos initial-priority Setting of default burst tolerance

QoS

7-80

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set qos measure-cycle Setting of subtraction cycle

Sets a subtraction cycle.

Input format set qos measure-cycle P1

Parameter P1: Subtraction cycle {short | long} short: Short cycle specification long: Long cycle specification

Default value P1:long


Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set qos measure-cycle short *Switch@1# set qos measure-cycle long *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show qos measure-cycle Display of subtraction cycle

QoS

7-81

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show qos measure-cycle Display of subtraction cycle

Shows a subtraction cycle.

Input format show qos measure-cycle

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set qos measure-cycle short *Switch@1# show qos measure-cycle QoS Measure Cycle Table ======================= Cycle : short *Switch@1# *Switch@1# set qos measure-cycle long *Switch@1# show qos measure-cycle QoS Measure Cycle Table ======================= Cycle : long *Switch@1#

Output items Cycle: Subtraction cycle short: Short cycle specification long: Long cycle specification

Related command

set qos measure-cycle Setting of subtraction cycle

Switch Control

8-1

8 Switch Control

Switch Control

8-2

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set frame-size Setting of frame size

Sets a frame size.

Input format set frame-size P1 P2

Parameters P1: Target port type {fe | gbe | atm } fe: FE port gbe: GbE port atm: ATM transmission path

P2: Frame size maximum value fe 64 to 1536 (byte) gbe 64 to 9000 (byte) atm 64 to 1536 (byte)

Default value P2: 1536


Notes Tagbase VLAN port: Allowable frame size = Command specification value + 4 (Byte) In a GbE line module for which the line module operation is set to FE, even if the value set for the frame size exceeds 1536 bytes, it is dealt as 1536 bytes.

Input example *Switch@1# set frame-size fe 1536 *Switch@1# set frame-size gbe 9000 *Switch@1# set frame-size atm 1536 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show frame-size Display of frame size

Switch Control

8-3

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show frame-size Display of frame size

Shows a frame size.

Input format show frame-size

Parameter None

Default value None


Notes Tagbase VLAN port: Allowable frame size = Command specification value + 4 (Byte)

Input example *Switch@1# show frame-size Frame Size Value (Byte) ======================= FE-Port : 1536 GbE-Port : 9000 ATM-Port : 1536 *Switch@1#

Output items FE-Port: Frame value of FE port GbE-Port: Frame value of GbE port ATM-Port: Frame value of ATM transmission path

Related command

set frame-size Setting of frame size

Switch Control

8-4

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set fdb agingtime Setting of aging time

Sets FDB aging time.

Input format set fdb agingtime P1

Parameter P1: Aging time (10 to 1000000 seconds)

Default value P1: 300 seconds


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set fdb agingtime 1000000 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show fdb agingtime Display of aging time

Switch Control

8-5

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show fdb agingtime Display of aging time

Shows the currently set FDB aging time.

Input format show fdb agingtime

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show fdb agingtime FDB AgingTime Configuration =========================== AgingTime (sec) : 1000000 (hh:mm:ss) : 277:46:40 *Switch@1#

Output items Agingtime(sec): Aging time value (second) Agingtime(hh:mm:ss): Aging time value (hour:minute:second)

Related command

set fdb agingtime Setting of aging time

Switch Control

8-6

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show fdb count port Display of MAC learning count in port units

Shows the MAC learning count in port units.

Input format show fdb count port [P1]

Parameter P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) * If P1 is omitted, the MAC learning counts for all ports are shown.

Default value None


Notes When MAC learning information learned is shown in ATMP and TDMP line modules, of the port (line) numbers in the same line module, the lowest port (line) number serves as the pilot port (line) number, and the display is as follows. - When specifying a port (line) number

All the MACs learned in the same line module are shown on the assumption that they are learned using a pilot port (line) number. For this reason, even if a pilot port (line) number and a specified port (line) number are different, the pilot port (line) number is shown.

- When omitting a port (line) number All the MACs learned in the same line module are shown on the assumption that they are learned using a pilot port number.

* A pilot port (line) number is the lowest port (line) number in the same line module.

Input example *Switch@2# show fdb count port 1/1-8 FDB Learned Entry ================= Port Learned-Entry ----------------------------- 1/1 1 1/2 0 1/3 0 1/4 0 1/5 0 1/6 0 1/7 0 1/8 0 *Switch@2#

Output items Port: Port (line) number Learned-Entry: FDB learning count

Switch Control

8-7

Related commands

show fdb count vid Display of MAC learning count in VLAN units show fdb count all Display of MAC learning count in device units show fdb table port Display of MAC learning information in port units show fdb table vid Display of MAC learning information in VLAN units

Switch Control

8-8

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show fdb count vid Display of MAC learning count in VLAN units

Shows the MAC learning count in VLAN units.

Input format show fdb count vid [P1]

Parameter P1: VLAN identifier {VLAN-ID | VLAN-name} VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple values can be specified.) VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters * If P1 is omitted, the MAC learning counts for all the VLANs are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@2# show fdb count vid 1-5 FDB Learned Entry ================= VID Name Learned-Entry -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 VLAN0001 1 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 *Switch@2#

Output items VID: VLAN ID Name: VLAN name Learned-Entry: FDB learning count

Related commands

show fdb count port Display of MAC learning count in port units show fdb count all Display of MAC learning count in device units show fdb table port Display of MAC learning information in port units show fdb table vid Display of MAC learning information in VLAN units

Switch Control

8-9

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show fdb count all Display of MAC learning count in device units

Shows the MAC learning count in device units.

Input format show fdb count all

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show fdb count all FDB Learned Entry ================= Total Learned Entry : 15000 *Switch@1#

Output item Total Learned Entry: FDB learning count

Related commands

show fdb count port Display of MAC learning count in port units show fdb count vid Display of MAC learning count in VLAN units show fdb table port Display of MAC learning information in port units show fdb table vid Display of MAC learning information in VLAN units

Switch Control

8-10

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show fdb table Display of MAC learning information

Shows the MAC learning information.

Input format show fdb table [P1]

Parameter P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) * If P1 is omitted, the MAC learning information for all ports is shown.

Default value None

Usage condition For ATMP and TDMP line modules, specify a pilot port (line) number only. * A pilot port (line) number is the lowest port (line) number in the same line module.

Notes None

Input example *Switch@1# show fdb table Data Transferring...... FDB Learning Table ================== Port MAC Address VID Name --------------------------------------------------------------- 1/1 00:00:00:00:00:01 1 VLAN0001 4/1 00:00:00:00:40:94 4094 VLAN4094 12/1 00:00:00:00:00:03 1 VLAN0001 *Switch@1#

Output items Port: Port (line) number MAC Address: MAC address

VID: VLAN ID Name VLAN name

Related command

None

Switch Control

8-11

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show fdb table port Display of MAC learning information in port units

Shows MAC learning information in port units.

Input format show fdb table port [P1]

Parameter P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) * If P1 is omitted, MAC learning information for all the ports is shown.

Default value None


Notes When MAC learning information learned is shown in ATMP and TDMP line modules, of the port (line) numbers in the same line module, the lowest port (line) number serves as the pilot port (line) number, and the display is as follows. - When specifying a port (line) number

All the MACs learned in the same line module are shown on the assumption that they are learned using a pilot port (line) number. For this reason, even if a pilot port (line) number and a specified port (line) number are different, the pilot port (line) number is shown.

- When omitting a port (line) number All the MACs learned in the same line module are shown on the assumption that they are learned using a pilot port number.

* A pilot port (line) number is the lowest port (line) number in the same line module.

Input example *Switch@1# show fdb table port FDB Learning Table ================== Port MAC Address VID Name --------------------------------------------------------------- 1/1 00:00:00:00:00:01 1 VLAN0001 4/1 00:00:00:00:40:94 4094 VLAN4094 12/1 00:00:00:00:00:03 1 VLAN0001 *Switch@1#

Output items Port: Port (line) number MAC Address: MAC address

VID: VLAN ID Name: VLAN name

Related commands

show fdb count port Display of MAC learning count in port units show fdb count all Display of MAC learning count in device units clear fdb table port Clearing of MAC learning information in port units

Switch Control

8-12

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear fdb table port Clearing of MAC learning information in port units

Clears MAC learning information for the specified port.

Input format clear fdb table port [P1]

Parameter P1: Port (line) number (single specification) *If P1 is omitted, MAC learning information for all the ports is cleared.

Default value None


Notes If P1 is omitted, execution is confirmed after this command has been entered. For ATMP and TDMP line modules, the operation is as follows. If the VLAN-ID that is the same as that set in the specified port (line) number is set in another port in the same line module when MAC learning information is cleared in port units, the MAC learning information relating to the VLAN ID is also cleared.

Input example *Switch@1# clear fdb table port Would you like to clear the information? :(Y/N): y *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show fdb table port Display of MAC learning information in port units

Switch Control

8-13

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show fdb table vid Display of MAC learning information in VLAN units

Shows MAC learning information in VLAN units.

Input format show fdb table vid [P1]

Parameter P1: VLAN identifier {VLAN-ID | VLAN-name} VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple values can be specified.) VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters * If P1 is omitted, MAC learning information for all the VLANs is shown.

Default value None


Notes When MAC learning information learned is shown in ATMP and TDMP line modules, of the port (line) numbers in the same line module, the lowest port (line) number serves as the pilot port (line) number. All the MACs learned in the same line module are shown on the assumption that they are learned using a pilot port number.

Input example *Switch@1# show fdb table vid FDB Learning Table ================== VID Name MAC Address Port ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 VLAN0001 00:00:00:00:00:01 1/1 4094 VLAN4094 00:00:00:00:00:03 4/1 1 VLAN0001 00:00:00:00:40:94 12/1 *Switch@1#

Output items VID: VLAN ID Name: VLAN name

MAC Address: MAC address Port: Port (line) number

Related commands

show fdb count vid Display of MAC learning count in VLAN units show fdb count all Display of MAC learning count in device units clear fdb table vid Clearing of MAC learning information in VLAN units

Switch Control

8-14

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear fdb table vid Clearing of MAC learning information in VLAN units

Clears MAC learning information for the specified VLAN.

Input format clear fdb table vid P1

Parameter P1: VLAN identifier {VLAN-ID | VLAN-name} VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (single specification) VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear fdb table vid 1 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show fdb table vid Display of MAC learning information in VLAN units

Switch Control

8-15

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set ifg over-rate Setting of IFG overrate mode

Sets IFG overrate mode.

Input format set ifg over-rate P1

Parameter P1: Overrate mode specification {enable | disable} enable: Enables overrate mode disable: Disables overrate mode



Note This function is valid only when the frame that flowed in from the port set in the portbase VLAN goes out of the line set in the tagbase VLAN of the GbE line module.

Input example *Switch@1# set ifg over-rate enable *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show ifg over-rate Display of IFG overrate mode

Switch Control

8-16

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show ifg over-rate Display of IFG overrate mode

Shows IFG overrate mode.

Input format show ifg over-rate

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show ifg over-rate IFG Over-Rate Configuration =========================== Over-Rate : enabled *Switch@1#

Output items Over-Rate: enabled: IFG overrate mode enabled Disabled: IFG overrate mode disabled

Related command

set ifg over-rate Setting of IFG overrate mode

Route Control

9-1

9 Route Control

Route Control

9-2

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set spantree Setting of spanning tree protocol enable/disable support

Sets whether to enable or disable spanning tree protocol support.

Input format set spantree P1

Parameter P1: Spanning tree protocol support specification {enable | disable} enable: Enables spanning tree protocol support disable: Disables spanning tree protocol support



Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set spantree enable *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show spantree mode Display of spanning tree mode

Route Control

9-3

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set spantree mode Setting of spanning tree mode

Sets spanning tree mode.

Input format set spantree mode P1

Parameter P1: Spanning tree mode {rstp | stp} rstp: RSTP mode stp: STP mode

Default value P1: rstp

Usage condition You can enter this command only when spanning tree protocol support is disabled.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set spantree mode stp *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

show spantree mode Display of spanning tree mode show spantree info Display of spanning tree switch information

Route Control

9-4

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show spantree mode Display of spanning tree mode

Shows spanning tree mode.

Input format show spantree mode

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show spantree mode Spantree Mode Information ========================= Mode : RSTP Status : disabled *Switch@1#

Output items Mode: Mode type RSTP: RSTP mode STP: STP mode

Status: Spanning tree enable/disable status enabled: Spanning tree enabled disabled: Spanning tree disabled

Related command

set spantree mode Setting of spanning tree mode

Route Control

9-5

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set spantree priority Setting of switch priority

Sets a switch priority.

Input format set spantree priority P1

Parameter P1: Priority RSTP mode: 0 to 61440 (setting granularity: 4096) STP mode: 0 to 65535 * If the priority is not a multiple of the setting granularity, this parameter results in an error.



Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set spantree priority 61440 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show spantree info Display of spanning tree switch information.

Route Control

9-6

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set spantree time Setting of spanning tree timer

Sets a spanning tree timer.

- Default specification set spantree time P1 (default)

Input formats

- Type setting (hello time/maximum aging time/forward delay time) set spantree time P1 (hello | maxage | forward) P2

Parameters P1: Setting type specification {default | hello | maxage | forward } default: Default setting hello: Hello time maxage: Maximum aging time forward: Forward delay time * Multiple setting of hello, maxage, and forward is possible. * When entering all the hello, maxage, and forward parameters, you must enter them in any of the following orders: hello->maxage->forward, maxage->hello->forward, and forward->hello->maxage

• When hello, maxage, or forward is specified in P1. P2: Time setting (seconds)

When hello is specified: 1 to 10 When maxage is specified: 6 to 40 When forward is specified: 4 to 30

Default values P1: default

Hello time: 2 seconds Maximum aging time: 20 seconds Forward delay time: 15 seconds

Usage conditions

The spanning tree timer to be set must meet the following: 2 × (forward delay time - 1) ≥ maximum aging time Maximum aging time ≥ 2 × (hello time + 1)

Note An unspecified type is not set.

Input example *Switch@1# set spantree time hello 4 maxage 10 forward 12 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show spantree info Display of spanning tree switch information

Route Control

9-7

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set spantree txholdcount Setting of hold count

Sets a hold count.

Input format set spantree txholdcount P1

Parameter P1: Maximum BPDU transmission count (1 to 10 times)

Default value P1: 3


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set spantree txholdcount 10 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command


Route Control

9-8

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution


Shows spanning tree switch information.

Input format show spantree info

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show spantree info STP Global Information ====================== Spanning Tree Version : IEEE802.1W(RSTP) STP Priority : 61440 Time Since Topology Change (sec) : --- STP Topology Changes : --- STP Designated Root : --- STP Root Cost : --- STP Root Port Number : --- STP MAX Age (sec): --- STP Hello Time (sec): --- STP Hold Time (sec): --- STP Forward Delay (sec): --- Local Switch Information ======================== STP Bridge MAX Age (sec): 20 STP Bridge Hello Time (sec): 2 STP Bridge Forward Delay (sec): 15 STP TX Hold Count : 10 *Switch@1#

Route Control

9-9

Output items Spanning Tree Version: Spanning tree version STP Priority: Spanning tree switch priority Time Since Topology Change (sec): Topology post-change time STP Topology Changes: Topology change count STP Designated Root: Spanning tree root switch STP Root Cost: Spanning tree root cost STP Root Port Number: Spanning tree root port number STP MAX Age (sec): Maximum aging time of spanning tree STP Hello Time (sec): Hello time of spanning tree STP Hold Time (sec): Hold time of spanning tree STP Forward Delay (sec): Forward delay time of spanning tree STP Bridge MAX Age (sec): Maximum aging time STP Bridge Hello Time (sec): Hello time STP Bridge Forward Delay (sec): Forward delay time STP TX Hold Count: Transmission hold count value

Related commands

set spantree mode Setting of spanning tree mode set spantree priority Setting of switch priority set spantree time Setting of spanning tree timer set spantree txholdcount Setting of hold count

Route Control

9-10

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set spantree port Setting of spanning tree enable/disable per port

Sets whether to enable or disable the spanning tree per port.

Input format set spantree port P1 P2

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) P2: Spanning tree enable/disable setting {enable | disable}

enable: Enables spanning tree disable: Disables spanning tree



Note Disabled ports are excluded from the spanning tree.

Input example *Switch@1# set spantree port 9/1 enable *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show spantree port Display of spanning tree port information

Route Control

9-11

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set spantree port priority Setting of priority per port

Sets a priority per port.

Input format set spantree port priority P1 P2

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) P2: Priority

RSTP mode: 0 to 240 (setting granularity: 16) STP mode: 0 to 255 * If the priority is not a multiple of the setting granularity, this parameter results in an error.



Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set spantree port priority 8/1 240 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command


Route Control

9-12

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set spantree port cost Setting of path cost per port

Sets path cost per port.

Input format set spantree port cost P1 P2

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) P2: Port cost value or automatic setting {auto}

RSTP mode: 1 to 200000000 STP mode: 1 to 65535 Automatic setting: auto



Note When setting auto, the port cost value depends on the port speed. - Actual default values when auto is set:

RSTP mode STP mode 10Mbps: 2000000 10Mbps: 100 100Mbps: 200000 100Mbps: 19 1Gbps: 20000 1Gbps: 4

Input example *Switch@1# set spantree port cost 9/1 auto *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command


Route Control

9-13

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution


Shows spanning tree p ort information.

Input format show spantree port [P1]

Parameter P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) * If P1 is omitted, spanning tree port information for all the ports is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show spantree port RSTP Port Configuration Table ============================= Port Priority Status Edge Cost ----------------------------------------------------------- 1/1 128 disabled disabled auto 1/2 128 disabled disabled auto 1/3 128 disabled disabled auto 1/4 128 disabled disabled auto <Omission> 8/1 128 disabled disabled auto 9/1 128 disabled disabled auto 10/1 128 disabled disabled auto 11/1 128 disabled disabled auto 12/1 128 disabled disabled auto RSTP Port Status Table ====================== DES DES DES Port Status Role Cost Bridge Cost Port TC ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 1/1 discarding disabled 200000 800000004cb47c7f 0 8001 0 1/2 discarding disabled 200000 800000004cb47c7f 0 8002 0 1/3 discarding disabled 200000 800000004cb47c7f 0 8003 0 1/4 discarding disabled 200000 800000004cb47c7f 0 8004 0 <Omission>

Route Control

9-14

8/1 discarding disabled 200000 800000004cb47c7f 0 8039 0 9/1 discarding disabled 200000 800000004cb47c7f 0 8041 0 10/1 discarding disabled 200000 800000004cb47c7f 0 8049 0 11/1 discarding disabled 200000 800000004cb47c7f 0 8051 0 12/1 discarding disabled 200000 800000004cb47c7f 0 8059 0 *Switch@1#

Output items Port: Port (line) number STP(RSTP) Port Configuration Table:

Priority: Priority per port Status: Spanning tree status per port enabled: Spanning tree enabled disabled: Spanning tree disabled Edge: Edge port status enabled: Edge port enabled disabled: Edge port disabled Cost: Port path cost value or auto

STP(RSTP) Port Status Table: Status: Spanning tree status per port disabled: Disabled spanning tree discarding: Discarding spanning tree learning: Learning spanning tree forwarding: Forwarding spanning tree Role: Port role status disabled: Disabled port alternate: Alternate port designated: Designated port root: Root port backup: Backup port Cost: Path cost value per port DES Bridge: Specified bridge information DES Cost: Specified port cost DES Port: Specified port number TC: Topology change count

Related commands

set spantree port Setting of spanning tree enable/disable per port set spantree port priority Setting of priority per port set spantree port cost Setting of path cost per port

Route Control

9-15

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set spantree port edge Setting of edge port

Sets an edge port.

Input format set spantree port edge P1 P2

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) P2: Edge port enable/disable setting {enable | disable}

enable: Enables edge port disable: Disables edge port



Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set spantree port edge 12/1 enable *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

show spantree port Display of spanning tree port information show spantree port edge Display of edge port

Route Control

9-16

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show spantree port edge Display of edge port

Shows an edge port.

Input format show spantree port edge [P1]

Parameter P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) * If P1 is omitted, all edge ports are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show spantree port edge RSTP Operational Status of Edge Port Table ========================================== Port Oper Admin ------------------------------------- 1/1 disabled disabled 1/2 disabled disabled 1/3 disabled disabled 1/4 disabled disabled 1/5 disabled disabled 1/6 disabled disabled 1/7 disabled disabled 1/8 disabled disabled 5/1 disabled disabled 8/1 disabled disabled 9/1 disabled disabled 12/1 disabled disabled *Switch@1#

Output items Port: Port (line) number Oper: Edge port status

enabled: Edge port enabled disabled: Edge port disabled

Admin: Edge port settings information enabled: Edge port settings enabled disabled: Edge port settings disabled

Related command

set spantree port edge Setting of edge port

Route Control

9-17

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set spantree port point-to-point Setting of point-to-point

Sets point-to-point.

Input format set spantree port point-to-point P1 P2

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) P2: Point-to-point setting {enable | disable | auto}

enable: Enables point-to-point setting disable: Disables point-to-point setting auto: Automatic point-to-point setting


Usage conditions If the port is full duplex when auto is set in P2, point-to-point setting is enabled.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set spantree port point-to-point 1/1 enable *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show spantree port point-to-point Display of point-to-point

Route Control

9-18

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show spantree port point-to-point Display of point-to-point

Shows point-to-point information.

Input format show spantree port point-to-point [P1]

Parameter P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) * If P1 is omitted, point-to-point setting information for all the ports is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show spantree port point-to-point RSTP Operational Status of Point-To-Point Table =============================================== Port Oper Admin --------------------------------------------------- 1/1 enabled auto 1/2 enabled auto 1/3 enabled auto 1/4 enabled auto 1/5 enabled auto 1/6 enabled auto 1/7 enabled auto 1/8 enabled auto 3/1 disabled disabled 3/2 enabled auto 3/3 enabled auto 3/4 enabled auto 3/5 enabled auto 3/6 enabled auto 3/7 enabled auto 3/8 enabled auto 8/1 enabled auto 9/1 enabled auto 12/1 enabled auto *Switch@1#

Route Control

9-19

Output items Port: Port (line) number Oper: Point-to-point status

enabled: Point-to-point enabled disabled: Point-to-point disabled

Admin: Point-to-point setting information enabled: Point-to-point setting enabled disabled: Point-to-point setting disabled auto: Automatic point-to-point setting

Related command

set spantree port point-to-point Setting of point-to-point

Route Control

9-20

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set l2p-transparent stp-bpdu Setting of BPDU transparency enable/disable per VLAN

Sets whether to enable or disable BPDU transparency per VLAN.

- Specifying all VLANs set l2p-transparent stp-bpdu P1 (all) P3

Input formats

- Specifying individual VLAN set l2p-transparent stp-bpdu P1 (vid) P2 P3

Parameters P1: Individual specification {vid} or all specification {all} vid: Individual VLAN specification all: All VLAN specification

• When vid is specified in P1 P2: VLAN identifier {VLAN-ID | VLAN-name}


P3: Flooding enable/disable specification {enable | disable} enable: Enables flooding disable: Disables flooding


Usage conditions To enable the BPDU transparency function, enable the spanning tree function. If the BPDU transparency function is enabled when the spanning tree function is enabled, the BPDUs to be made transparent are excluded from the spanning tree function.

Notes The frames to which this function is to be applied are frames that comply with IEEE802.1D and have the destination MAC address 01:80:C2:00:00:00. Tagged BPDU reception does not comply with IEEE802.1D but the appropriate switch is supported.

Input example *Switch@1# set l2p-transparent stp-bpdu vid 100-105 enable *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show l2p-transparent stp-bpdu Display of BPDU transparency function setting in specified VLAN

Route Control

9-21

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show l2p-transparent stp-bpdu Display of BPDU transparency function setting in specified VLAN

Shows all the VLAN IDs for which the BPDU transparency function was set.

Input format show l2p-transparent stp-bpdu

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show l2p-transparent stp-bpdu L2P BPDU Transparent Configuration ================================== BPDU Transparent VID : 100-105 *Switch@1#

Output item BPDU Transparent VID: All VLAN IDs set as the BPDU transparency function

Related command

set l2p-transparent stp-bpdu Setting of BPDU transparency enable/disable per VLAN

Route Control

9-22

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set l2p-transparent reserved-mac Setting of MAC address transparency function

Sets the MAC address transparency function.

- Disabling MAC address transparency set l2p-transparent reserved-mac P1 P2 P3 (disable)

Input formats

- Enabling MAC address transparency set l2p-transparent reserved-mac P1 P2 P3 (enable) [P4 P5] [P6 P7]

Parameters P1: Port (line) type {atm | fe | gbe} atm: ATM transmission path fe: FE port gbe: GbE port

P2: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) P3: MAC transparent mode {enable | disable}

enable: Enables MAC transparent mode disable: Disables MAC transparent mode

• When enable is selected in P3 P4: BPDU discard mode specification {bpdu} P5: BPDU discard mode {admit | block}

admit: Transparency specification block: Discard specification

P6: LACP discard mode specification {lacp} P7: LACP discard mode {admit | block}

admit: Transparency specification block: Discard specification

Default value P3 : disable


Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set l2p-transparent reserved-mac fe 2/1 enable bpdu block lacp block *Switch@1# set l2p-transparent reserved-mac gbe 8/1 enable lacp block *Switch@1# set l2p-transparent reserved-mac atm 3/1 enable bpdu block

Output item

Related command

show l2p-transparent reserved-mac Display of MAC address transparency function

Route Control

9-23

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show l2p-transparent reserved-mac Display of MAC address transparency function

Shows the MAC address transparency function.

Input format show l2p-transparent reserved-mac [P1]

Parameter P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) * If P1 is omitted, the MAC address transparency functions set in all the ports are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show l2p-transparent reserved-mac 2/1-8 L2P Reserved-MAC Transparent Configuration Table ================================================ Port Transparent BPDU LACP ----------------------------------------------- 2/1 enabled block block 2/2 enabled admit block 2/3 enabled admit admit 2/4 disabled --- --- 2/5 disabled --- --- 2/6 disabled --- --- 2/7 disabled --- --- 2/8 disabled --- --- *Switch@1#

Output items Port: Port (line) number Transparent: MAC transparent mode

enabled: MAC transparent mode enabled disabled: MAC transparent mode disabled

BPDU: BPDU discard mode admit: Transparency specified block: Discard specified

LACP: LACP discard mode admit: Transparency specified block: Discard specified

Related command

set l2p-transparent reserved-mac Setting of MAC address transparency function

Route Control

9-24

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set aggregation group Setting of link aggregation group

Sets a link aggregation group.

Input format set aggregation group P1 P2 [P3] [P4] [P5] P6 [P7]

Parameters P1: Group index (1 to 32) P2: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) P3: Number of valid ports (1 to 8)

* Specify the number of ports to be made valid in the group. * If P3 is omitted, all the grouped ports are made valid.

P4: Standby filtering {standby-block | standby-admit} Set whether to discard (standby-block) or admit (standby-admit) receiving frames except LACP in the standby port. * You can specify standby-admit only when local is selected in P5. * If P4 is omitted, standby-block (discard) mode is set.

P5: Aggregation mode {local | dot3ad | passive} local: Simple aggregation dot3ad: LACP link aggregation mode passive: Passive mode * If P5 is omitted, simple aggregation is set.

P6: Distribution setting {both-mac | src-mac | dst-mac} both-mac: XOR values of source MAC address and destination MAC address src-mac: Source MAC address dst-mac: Destination MAC address

P7: Group name (1 to 32 characters) * If P7 is omitted, no group name is set.

Default values P3: 8, P4: standby-block, P5: local


Note When configuring link aggregation, specify two or more ports (lines). If no parameter is specified when the setting is overwritten, the default values are set.

Input example *Switch@1# set aggregation group 32 1/1,1/2,1/3 2 standby-admit local both-mac Index32 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show aggregation group Display of link aggregation setting status

Route Control

9-25

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show aggregation group Display of link aggregation setting status

Shows the link aggregation setting status.

Input format show aggregation group [P1]

Parameter P1: Group identifier {group-index | group-name} group-index: 1 to 32 group-name: 1 to 32 characters * If P1 is omitted, all the set groups are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show aggregation group 32 Switch Aggregate Table ====================== Aggregated Ports/ Active-Numbers/ Mode/ DistributeIndex Name Standby-Filter Time(msec) Type ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 32 1/1-3 2 local both-mac index32 standby-admit 10000 Switch Aggregate Port Information ================================= Partner Port Port Status Status Priority ----------------------------------------------------------- 1/1 active NO-LACP 128 1/2 active NO-LACP 128 1/3 standby NO-LACP 128 *Switch@1#

Route Control

9-26

Output items Index: Group index Aggregated Ports: Port (line) number set as link aggregation Name: Group name Active-numbers: Number of active ports Standby-filter: Standby filtering

standby-block: Discards receiving frames except LACP standby-admit: Admits receiving frames except LACP

Mode: Aggregation mode local: Simple aggregation dot3ad: LACP link aggregation mode passive: Passive mode

Time(msec): Link aggregation protection time setting Distribute Type: Distribution type setting

both-mac: XOR values of source MAC address and destination MAC address src-mac: Source MAC address dst-mac: Destination MAC address

Port: Port (line) number Status: block/down/active/standby status per port

block: Port blocked down: Port unblocked and port physical link down active: Active port standby: Standby port

Partner Status: Partner status LACP: LACP received NO-LACP: LACP not received

Port Priority: Port priority Related command


Route Control

9-27

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear aggregation group Clearing of link aggregation group

Clears a link aggregation group.

Input format clear aggregation group P1

Parameter P1: Group identifier {group-index | group-name} group-index: 1 to 32 group-name: 1 to 32 characters

Default value None


Note Clearing a group by specifying its group name requires that the group name be registered in the set link aggregation in advance.

Input example *Switch@1# clear aggregation group 1 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command


Route Control

9-28

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set aggregation system priority Setting of system priority

Sets a link aggregation system priority.

Input format set aggregation system priority P1

Parameter P1: System priority (0 to 65535)


Usage condition If a link aggregation group is already set in the device, you are not allowed to set the system priority.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set aggregation system priority 65535 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show aggregation system priority Display of system priority

Route Control

9-29

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show aggregation system priority Display of system priority

Shows the link aggregation system priority.

Input format show aggregation system priority

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show aggregation system priority LAG System Priority =================== System Priority: 65535 *Switch@1#

Output item LAG System Priority: Link aggregation system priority value Related command

set aggregation system priority Setting of system priority

Route Control

9-30

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set aggregation port priority Setting of port priority

Sets a link aggregation port priority.

Input format set aggregation port priority P1 P2

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) P2: Priority (0 to 255)


Usage condition Setting for a port to which the link is down in the link aggregation group cannot be allowed.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set aggregation port priority 1/1 255 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show aggregation port priority Display of port priority

Route Control

9-31

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show aggregation port priority Display of port priority

Shows a link aggregation port priority.

Input format show aggregation port priority [P1]

Parameter P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) * If P1 is omitted, the priorities of all the installed ports are shown.

Default value None


Notes If P1 is omitted, the priorities of all the installed ports are shown.

No link aggregation port priority is shown for GbE-MUX and ATM line module ports.

Input example *Switch@1# show aggregation port priority 1/1 LAG Port Information ==================== Port Index Priority ------------------- 1/1 255 *Switch@1#

Output items Port: Port (line) number Index: Group index Priority: Port priority value

Related command

set aggregation port priority Setting of port priority

Route Control

9-32

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set aggregation protection-time Setting of link aggregation protection time

Sets link aggregation protection time.

Input format set aggregation protection-time P1 P2

Parameters P1: Group identifier {group-index | group-name} group-index: 1 to 32 group-name: 1 to 32 characters

P2: Link aggregation protection time (0 to 10000 ms) * The setting granularity is 100 ms.

Default value P2: 0


Note The link aggregation protection time function is effective for the link aggregation group that operates in simple aggregation and for which standby-admit is set.

Input example *Switch@1# set aggregation protection-time 32 10000 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show aggregation protection-time Display of link aggregation protection time

Route Control

9-33

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show aggregation protection-time Display of link aggregation protection time

Shows link aggregation protection time.

Input format show aggregation protection-time [P1]

Parameter P1: Group identifier {group-index | group-name} group-index: 1 to 32 group-name: 1 to 32 characters * If P1 is omitted, link aggregation protection times for group indexes 1 to 32 are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example Switch@1# show aggregation protection-time 32 LAG Protection Time Information =============================== Index Name Time(msec) ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 32 index32 10000 Switch@1#

Output items Index: Group index Name: Group name Time(msec): Link aggregation protection time (msec)

Related command

set aggregation protection-time Setting of link aggregation protection time

Route Control

9-34

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set igmp Setting of IGMP Snooping function enable/disable

Sets whether to enable or disable the IGMP Snooping function.

- Disabling IGMP Snooping function set igmp P1(enable) [P2]

Input formats

- Enabling IGMP Snooping function set igmp P1(disable)

Parameters P1: IGMP Snooping function enable/disable setting {enable | disable} enable: Enables IGMP Snooping function disable: Disables IGMP Snooping function

• When enable is selected in P1 P2: IPv4/IPv6 specification {ipv4 | ipv6}

ipv4: IPv4 ipv6: IPv6 * If P2 is omitted, IPv4 is assumed.



Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set igmp enable *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show igmp status Display of IGMP Snooping function enable/disable information

Route Control

9-35

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show igmp status Display of IGMP Snooping function enable/disable information

Shows IGMP Snooping function enable/disable information.

Input format show igmp status

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show igmp status IGMP Snooping Status ==================== igmp: ipv4 enabled *Switch@1#

Output items Igmp: IGMP Snooping function mode setting ipv4 enabled: IGMP Snooping function enabled (IPv4) ipv6 enabled: IGMP Snooping function enabled (IPv6) disabled: IGMP Snooping function disabled

Related command

set igmp Setting of IGMP Snooping function enable/disable

Route Control

9-36

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show igmp mac Display of IGMP Snooping entry for specified MAC

Shows the IGMP Snooping entry for the specified MAC.

Input format show igmp mac [P1]

Parameter P1: MAC address * If P1 is omitted, IGMP Snooping entry for all the MAC addresses are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show igmp mac IGMP Snooping Multicast MAC Table ================================= IGMP Group Address : 01:00:5e:0a:0b:0c IGMP Group Ports : 1/6 VLAN ID : 1 Total Number of Ports: 1 *Switch@1#

Output items IGMP Group Address: IGMP Snooping MAC address IGMP Group Ports: Port (line) number registered as the multicast entry VLAN ID: VLAN ID Total Number of Ports: Number of ports (lines) allocated to the same group

Related command

None

Route Control

9-37

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear igmp mac Clearing of IGMP Snooping entry for specified group address

Clears the IGMP Snooping entry for the specified group address.

Input format clear igmp mac P1 [P2]

Parameters P1: Group address P2: VLAN identifier {VLAN-ID | VLAN-name}

VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (single specification) VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters * P2 is omitted, IGMP Snooping entries of all the VLANs are cleared.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear igmp mac 01:00:5e:01:01:01 10 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set igmp Setting of IGMP Snooping function enable/disable show igmp status Display of IGMP Snooping function enable/disable information clear igmp vid Clearing of IGMP Snooping entry for specified VLAN

Route Control

9-38

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show igmp vid Display of IGMP Snooping entry for specified VLAN

Shows the IGMP Snooping entry for the specified VLAN.

Input format show igmp vid [P1]

Parameter P1: VLAN identifier {VLAN-ID | VLAN-name} VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple values can be specified.) VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters * If P1 is omitted, IGMP Snooping entries of all the VLANs are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show igmp vid IGMP Snooping Multicast MAC Table ================================= VLAN ID : 1 IGMP Group Ports : 1/6 IGMP Group Address : 01:00:5e:0a:0b:0c Total Number of Ports: 1 *Switch@1#

Output items VLAN ID: VLAN ID IGMP Group Ports: Port (line) number registered as the multicast entry IGMP Group Address: IGMP Snooping MAC address Total Number of Ports: Number of ports (lines) allocated to the same group

Related command

None

Route Control

9-39

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show igmp port Display of IGMP Snooping entry for specified port number

Shows the IGMP Snooping entry for the specified port number.

Input format show igmp port [P1]

Parameter P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) * If P1 is o omitted, all the IGMP Snooping entries are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show igmp port IGMP Snooping Multicast MAC Table ================================= IGMP Group Ports : 1/6 IGMP Group Address : 01:00:5e:0a:0b:0c VLAN ID : 1 Total Number of Ports : 1 *Switch@1#

Output items IGMP Group Ports: Port (line) number registered as the multicast entry IGMP Group Address: IGMP Snooping MAC address VLAN ID: VLAN ID Total Number of Ports: Number of ports (lines allocated to the same group

Related command

None

Route Control

9-40

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear igmp vid Clearing of IGMP Snooping entry for specified VLAN

Clears the IGMP Snooping entry for the specified VLAN.

Input format clear igmp vid [P1]

Parameter P1: VLAN identifier {VLAN-ID | VLAN-name} VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (single specification) VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters * If P1 is omitted, IGMP Snooping entries of all the VLANs are cleared.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear igmp vid 10 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set igmp Setting of IGMP Snooping function enable/disable show igmp status Display of IGMP Snooping function enable/disable information clear igmp mac Clearing of IGMP Snooping entry for specified group address

Filters

10-1

10 Filters

Filters

10-2

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set isolate port Setting/clearing of port isolate

Sets and clears port isolate.

Input format set isolate port P1 P2 P3

Parameters P1: Receiving line number (Multiple values can be specified.) or receiving line module number (Multiple values can be specified.) P2: Destination line number (Multiple values can be specified.) or destination line module number (Multiple values can be specified.) P3: Enable/disable setting {enable | disable}

enable: Enable setting disable: Disables setting

Default values All the destination line numbers are disabled that correspond to all the receiving line

numbers.

Usage conditions You cannot simultaneously set a receiving line number and a receiving line module number in P1. You cannot simultaneously set a destination line number and a destination line module number in P2. If the line module type is ATMP, TDMP, or GbE-MUX, only the line module number can be specified. If the line module type is other than the above, only the line number can be specified.

Notes Specifying enable in P3 disables transfer of the inflow frame from the specified receiving line to the specified destination line. If enable is specified, the configuration that is already set is not affected because the destination line number or destination line module number specified in P2 is added to the receiving line number or receiving line module number specified in P1. If disable is specified, the other configurations that are already set are not affected because only the destination line number or destination line module number in P2 corresponding to the receiving line number or receiving line module number specified in P1 is disabled.

Input example *Switch@1# set isolate port 1/1-8/1 1/1-8/1 enable *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show isolate port Display of port isolate setting status

Filters

10-3

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show isolate port Display of port isolate setting state

Shows the port isolate setting state.

Input format show isolate port [P1]

Parameter P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) * If P1 is omitted, the port isolate setting states of all the ports are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show isolate port Port-Isolate Configuration ========================== State of Port-Isolate of Port: 1/1 Transfer-Blocking Port : 1/2-8/1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------- State of Port-Isolate of Port: 2/1 Transfer-Blocking Port : 1/1-1/8,2/2-8/1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------- State of Port-Isolate of Port: 9/1 Transfer-Blocking Port : ----------------------------------------------------------------------- State of Port-Isolate of Port: 12/1 Transfer-Blocking Port : *Switch@1#

Output items State of Port-Isolate of Port: Receiving port Transfer-Blocking Port: Destination port whose port isolate setting in the receiving port is enabled

Related command

set isolate port Setting/clearing of port isolate

Filters

10-4

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set filter profile Creating of filtering profile

Creates a filtering profile.

- Setting other set filter profile P1 P2 (other) P3 - Selecting dest-mac/src-mac in the filter setting set filter profile P1 [P2 (index number)] P3 P4 (dest-mac | src-mac) P5 P6 - Selecting ether-type in the filter setting set filter profile P1 [P2 (index number)] P3 P4 (ether-type) P5 - Selecting proto-type in the filter setting set filter profile P1 [P2 (index number)] P3 P4 (proto-type) P5

Input formats

- Selecting dest-ip/src-ip in the filter setting set filter profile P1 [P2 (index number)] P3 P4 (dest-ip | src-ip) P5 P6

Parameters P1: Profile number (1 to 128) P2: Index number or others {other}

Index number: 1 to 31 other: Others * If P2 is omitted, a free and low-number index is used. (However, if there is an index number that is already registered, that number is used.)

P3: Filtering mode {admit | block} admit: Transparency specification block: Discard specification

P4: Filter setting {dest-mac | src-mac | ether-type | proto-type | dest-ip | src-ip} dest-mac: Destination MAC Address src-mac: Source MAC Address ether-type: Ether-Type proto-type: IPv4 Protocol Type dest-ip: IPv4 Destination IP Address src-ip: IPv4 Source IP Address

• When dest-mac or src-mac is selected in P4 P5: MAC address P6: MAC address mask

• When ether-type is selected in P4 P5: Ethernet type (0x600 to 0xffff)

• When proto-type is selected in P4 P6: Protocol type or user specification {tcp | udp | ospf | icmp | user}

tcp: TCP udp: UDP ospf: OSPF icmp: ICMP User specification: 0 to 255

Filters

10-5

• When dest-ip or src-ip is selected in P4 P5: IP address P6: Net mask

Default value None


Note You can set overwrite for a registered index but cannot reregister the index.

Input examples *Switch@1# set filter profile 1 1 admit dest-mac 10:20:30:40:50:60 ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:00 *Switch@1# set filter profile 1 10 admit ether-type 0x9100 *Switch@1# set filter profile 2 5 block proto-type tcp *Switch@1# set filter profile 5 admit proto-type 128 *Switch@1# set filter profile 10 1 block dest-ip 10.20.30.40 255.255.255.0*Switch@1# set filter profile 20 other block *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

show filter profile Display of filtering profile clear filter profile Clearing of filtering profile set filter in-port Setting of input filtering show filter in-port Display of input filtering clear filter in-port Clearing of input filtering set filter out-port Setting of output filtering show filter out-port Display of output filtering clear filter out-port Clearing of output filtering

Filters

10-6

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show filter profile Display of filtering profile

Shows a filtering profile.

Input format show filter profile [P1]

Parameter P1: Profile number (1 to 128) * If P1 is omitted, information for all the profiles registered in the device is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show filter profile Filter Profile Table ==================== Profile No. : 1 ================= Index Mode Field Type Field Type Information Mask Information ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 admit dest-mac 01:02:03:04:05:06 ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:00 10 block ether-type 0x9000 --- 15 block proto-type tcp --- 20 block dest-ip 110.120.130.140 255.255.255.0 Other admit --- --- --- Profile No. : 5 ================= Index Mode Field Type Field Type Information Mask Information ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 admit dest-mac 10:20:30:40:50:60 ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:00 5 block proto-type udp --- 6 block proto-type 250 --- 10 block dest-ip 10.20.30.40 255.255.255.0 Other admit --- --- --- *Switch@1#

Filters

10-7

Output items Profile No: Profile number Index: Profile index Mode: Mode specification

admit: Transparency specified block: Discard specified

Field Type: Filter type dest-mac: Destination MAC Address specified ether-type: Ether-Type specified proto-type: IPv4 Protocol Type specified dest-ip: IPv4 Destination IP Address specified

Field Type Information: Filter contents MAC address: The MAC address is shown when Field Type is dest-mac. Ethernet type: The Ethernet type is shown when Field Type is ether-type. Protocol type: The protocol type is shown when Field Type is proto-type. IP address: The IP address is shown when Field Type is dest-ip.

Mask Information: Mask information MAC address mask: The MAC mask is shown when Field Type is dest-mac. Subnet mask: The subnet mask is shown when Field Type is dest-ip.

Related commands

set filter profile Creating of filtering profile clear filter profile Clearing of filtering profile set filter in-port Setting of input filtering show filter in-port Display of input filtering clear filter in-port Clearing of input filtering set filter out-port Setting of output filtering show filter out-port Display of output filtering clear filter out-port Clearing of output filtering

Filters

10-8

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear filter profile Clearing of filtering profile

Clears a filtering profile.

Input format clear filter profile [P1 [P2]]

Parameters P1: Profile number (1 to 128) P2: Index number (1 to 31)

* If only P2 is omitted, all the settings of the specified profile are cleared. * If all the parameters are omitted, all the registered filtering profiles are cleared.

Default value None

Usage condition If command mode is safety mode, you cannot clear the profiles that are already mapped.

Notes If P1 and P2 are omitted, execution is confirmed after this command has been entered.If the index number specified in P2 is not registered, an error occurs. No error occurs even if the profile number specified in P1 does not exist.

Input example *Switch@1# clear filter profile 1 10 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set filter profile Creating of filtering profile show filter profile Display of filtering profile set filter in-port Setting of input filtering show filter in-port Display of input filtering clear filter in-port Clearing of input filtering set filter out-port Setting of output filtering show filter out-port Display of output filtering clear filter out-port Clearing of output filtering

Filters

10-9

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set filter in-port Setting of input filtering

Sets input filtering.

Input format set filter in-port P1 P2 P3 P4




P4: Profile number (1 to 128) * If no profile is registered, all data is made transparent.

Default value None


Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set filter in-port fe 1/1 100 10 *Switch@1# set filter in-port gbe 6/1 VLAN100 128 *Switch@1# set filter in-port atm 3/1 200 20 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set filter profile Creating of filtering profile show filter profile Display of filtering profile clear filter profile Clearing of filtering profile show filter in-port Display of input filtering clear filter in-port Clearing of input filtering set filter out-port Setting of output filtering show filter out-port Display of output filtering clear filter out-port Clearing of output filtering

Filters

10-10

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show filter in-port Display of input filtering

Shows input filtering.

Input format show filter in-port [P1]

Parameters P1: Port (line) number or VLAN identifier {VLAN-ID | VLAN-name} Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple values can be specified.) VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters * If the port (line) number is specified, input filtering is shown per port. * If VLAN-ID is specified, input filtering is shown per VLAN.

* If all the parameters are omitted, the input filtering profile lists of all the VLANs set in all the ports are shown. * If all the parameters are omitted, input filtering is shown per port.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show filter in-port 1/1-3,1/5 Input Filter Table ================== Port VID Profile ---------------------------------- 1/1 1 1 1/1 10 10 1/1 100 1 1/3 100 5 1/3 200 20 1/3 1000 100 1/5 100 20 *Switch@1#


Filters

10-11

Related commands

set filter profile Creating of filtering profile show filter profile Display of filtering profile clear filter profile Clearing of filtering profile set filter in-port Setting of input filtering clear filter in-port Clearing of input filtering set filter out-port Setting of output filtering show filter out-port Display of output filtering clear filter out-port Clearing of output filtering

Filters

10-12

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear filter in-port Clearing of input filtering

Clears input filtering.

Input format clear filter in-port P1 P2 [P3]



VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters * If P3 is omitted, the input filtering settings of all the VLANs of the port specified in P2 are cleared.

Default value None



Input examples *Switch@1# clear filter in-port fe 1/1 10 *Switch@1# clear filter in-port gbe 6/1 VLAN100 *Switch@1# clear filter in-port gbe 6/1 Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y *Switch@1# clear filter in-port atm 3/1 2 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set filter profile Creating of filtering profile show filter profile Display of filtering profile clear filter profile Clearing of filtering profile set filter in-port Setting of input filtering show filter in-port Display of input filtering set filter out-port Setting of output filtering show filter out-port Display of output filtering clear filter out-port Clearing of output filtering

Filters

10-13

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set filter out-port Setting of output filtering

Set output filtering.

Input format set filter out-port P1 P2 P3 P4




P4: Profile number (1 to 128) * If no profile is registered, all data is made transparent.

Default value None

Usage condition If command mode is safety mode, you cannot specify unregistered profiles.

Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set filter out-port fe 1/1 100 10 *Switch@1# set filter out-port gbe 6/1 VLAN100 128 *Switch@1# set filter out-port atm 3/1 200 2 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set filter profile Creating of filtering profile show filter profile Display of filtering profile clear filter profile Clearing of filtering profile set filter in-port Setting of input filtering show filter in-port Display of input filtering clear filter in-port Clearing of input filtering. show filter out-port Display of output filtering clear filter out-port Clearing of output filtering

Filters

10-14

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show filter out-port Display of output filtering

Shows output filtering.

Input format show filter out-port [P1]

Parameters P1: Port (line) number or VLAN identifier {VLAN-ID | VLAN-name} Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple values can be specified.) VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters * If the port (line) number is specified, output filtering is shown per port. * If VLAN-ID is specified, output filtering is shown per VLAN.

* If all the parameters are omitted, the output filtering profile lists of all the VLANs set in all the ports are shown. * If all the parameters are omitted, output filtering is shown per port.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show filter out-port 1/1-7 Output Filter Table =================== Port VID Profile ----------------------------------- 1/1 1 1 1/1 10 10 1/1 100 1 1/2 15 30 1/2 30 30 1/3 100 5 1/3 200 20 1/3 1000 100 1/7 200 1 *Switch@1#


Filters

10-15

Related commands

set filter profile Creating of filtering profile show filter profile Display of filtering profile clear filter profile Clearing of filtering profile set filter in-port Setting of input filtering show filter in-port Display of input filtering clear filter in-port Clearing of input filtering set filter out-port Setting of output filtering clear filter out-port Clearing of output filtering

Filters

10-16

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear filter out-port Clearing of output filtering

Clears output filtering.

Input format clear filter out-port P1 P2 [P3]



VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters * If P3 is omitted, the output filtering settings of all the VLANs of the port specified in P2 are cleared.

Default value None



Input examples *Switch@1# clear filter out-port fe 1/1 20 *Switch@1# clear filter out-port gbe 6/1 VLAN100 *Switch@1# clear filter out-port gbe 6/1 Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y *Switch@1# clear filter out-port atm 3/1 200 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set filter profile Creating of filtering profile show filter profile Display of filtering profile clear filter profile Clearing of filtering profile set filter in-port Setting of input filtering show filter in-port Display of input filtering clear filter in-port Clearing of input filtering set filter out-port Setting of output filtering show filter out-port Display of output filtering

Filters

10-17

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set fdb limiter Setting of MAC address learning limiting count function

Sets the MAC address learning limiting count function.

Input format set fdb limiter P1 P2 P3 P4




P4: MAC address learning limiting count (1 to 8192) * If the MAC address learning limiting count is 1 to 16, the granularity is 1. If the MAC address learning limiting count is 16 to 8192, the granularity is 16. * If the priority is not a multiple of the setting granularity, this parameter results in an error. * You can set up to 8192 counts per card.

Default value None


Notes You can register up to 8192 counts for MAC address learning limit per line module. If a Static MAC address is already registered, you cannot change the MAC address learning limiting count.

Input examples *Switch@1# set fdb limiter fe 1/1 100 11 *Switch@1# set fdb limiter gbe 3/1 VLAN 200 7 *Switch@1# set fdb limiter gbe 5/1 VLAN 200 32 *Switch@1# set fdb limiter atm 7/1 VLAN 300 64 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

show fdb limiter Display of MAC address learning count limiting function clear fdb limiter Clearing of MAC address learning count limiting function set fdb limiter static Setting of static MAC address of MAC address learning

limiting count function clear fdb limiter static Clearing of static MAC address of MAC address learning

limiting count function

Filters

10-18

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show fdb limiter Display of MAC address learning count limiting function

Shows a MAC address learning count limiting function.

Input format show fdb limiter [P1]

Parameters P1: Port (line) number or VLAN identifier {VLAN-ID | VLAN-name} Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple values can be specified.) VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters * If the port (line) number is specified or P1 is omitted, the MAC address learning count limiting functions are shown per port. * If VLAN-ID is specified, the MAC address learning count limiting functions are shown per VLAN.

* If all the parameters are omitted, the MAC address learning count limiting functions set in all the VLANs of all the ports are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show fdb limiter MAC Limiter Line Table ====================== Module Registered-Block Available-Block -------------------------------------------------------------------- Line#1 : --- --- Line#2 : --- --- Line#3 : --- --- Line#4 : 32 480 Line#5 : none none Line#6 : 16 496 Line#7 : --- --- Line#8 : --- --- Line#9 : --- --- Line#10 : --- --- Line#11 : --- --- Line#12 : --- --- MAC Limiter Port Table ====================== Port VID Registered-MAC Static-MAC -------------------------------------------------------------- 4/1 1 512 1 6/1 100 256 1

Filters

10-19

MAC Limiter Port Static Address Table ===================================== Port VID Static-MAC Address ------------------------------------------------------------------ 4/1 1 00:00:00:00:00:01 6/1 100 00:00:00:00:00:02 *Switch@1#

Output items (MAC Limiter Line Table) Module: Line module (1 to 10) Registered-Block: Number of MAC limiting blocks. Available-Block: Number of available MAC limiting blocks (MAC Limiter Port Table) Port: Port (line) number VID: VLAN ID Registered-MAC: Number of MAC limiting blocks set per port number and VLAN ID Static-MAC: Number of registered static MAC addresses of MAC address learning count limiting functions (MAC Limiter Port Static Address Table) Port: Port (line) number VID : VLAN ID Static-MAC Address: Setting of static MAC address of MAC address learning count limiting function

Related commands

set fdb limiter Setting of MAC address learning count limiting function clear fdb limiter Clearing of MAC address learning count limiting function set fdb limiter static Setting of static MAC address of MAC address learning

count limiting function clear fdb limiter static Clearing of static MAC address of MAC address learning

count limiting function

Filters

10-20

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear fdb limiter Clearing of MAC address learning count limiting function

Clears a MAC address learning count limiting function.

Input format clear fdb limiter P1 P2 [P3]



VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (single specification) VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters * If P3 is omitted, the MAC address learning count limiting functions of all the VLANs of the port specified in P2 are cleared.

Default value None


Notes If P3 is omitted, execution is confirmed after this command has been entered. The static MAC addresses of MAC address learning count limiting functions are also cleared.

Input examples *Switch@1# clear fdb limiter fe 1/1 100 *Switch@1# clear fdb limiter gbe 3/1 200 *Switch@1# clear fdb limiter atm 5/1 300 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set fdb limiter Setting of MAC address learning count limiting function show fdb limiter Display of MAC address learning count limiting function set fdb limiter static Setting of static MAC address of MAC address learning

count limiting function clear fdb limiter static Clearing of static MAC address of MAC address learning


Filters

10-21

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set fdb limiter static Setting of static MAC address of MAC address learning count limiting function

Sets the static MAC address of a MAC address learning count limiting function.

Input format set fdb limiter static P1 P2 P3 P4




P4: Source MAC address 00:00:00:00:00:00 to ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff

Default value None

Usage condition If no MAC address learning count limiting function is set, you cannot set this function.

Note You can register up to 16 static MAC addresses of MAC address learning count limiting functions per VLAN.

Input examples *Switch@1# set fdb limiter static fe 1/1 100 00:00:00:00:00:01 *Switch@1# set fdb limiter static gbe 6/1 100 00:00:00:00:00:02 *Switch@1# set fdb limiter static atm 5/1 200 00:00:00:00:00:03 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set fdb limiter Setting of MAC address learning count limiting function show fdb limiter Display of MAC address learning count limiting function clear fdb limiter Clearing of MAC address learning count limiting function clear fdb limiter static Clearing of static MAC address of MAC address learning


Filters

10-22

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear fdb limiter static Clearing of static MAC address of MAC address learning count limiting function

Clears the static MAC address of a MAC address learning count limiting function.

Input format clear fdb limiter static P1 P2 [P3 [P4] ]



VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (single specification) VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters * If P3 is omitted, the static MAC addresses registered in all the VLANs of the port specified in P2 are cleared.

P4: Source MAC address 00:00:00:00:00:00 to ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff * If P4 is omitted, all static MAC addresses registered in the specified VLAN of the port specified in P2 or P3 are cleared.

Default value None


Note If P3 or P4 is omitted, execution is confirmed after this command has been entered.

Input examples *Switch@1# clear fdb limiter static fe 1/1 100 00:00:00:00:00:01 *Switch@1# clear fdb limiter static gbe 1/1 200 Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y *Switch@1# clear fdb limiter static gbe 10/1 Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y *Switch@1# clear fdb limiter static atm 5/1 100 00:00:00:00:00:03 *Switch@1#

Output item Related commands

set fdb limiter Setting of MAC address learning count limiting function show fdb limiter Display of MAC address learning count limiting function clear fdb limiter Clearing of MAC address learning count limiting function set fdb limiter static Setting of static MAC address of MAC address learning


EtherOAM

11-1

11 EtherOAM

EtherOAM

11-2

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set ether-oam meg Setting of MEG

Creates MEG.

Input format set ether-oam meg P1 P2 P3 [P4]

Parameters P1: MEG index (1 to 1536) P2: MEG ID (1 to 13 characters) P3: MEG level (0 to 7) P4: CC transmission period period {3.33ms | 100ms | 1s | 10s | 60s }

period 3.33ms: 3.33 millisecond period 100ms: 100 millisecond period 1s: 1 second period 10s: 10 seconds period 60s: 60 seconds * If P4 is omitted, 1 second is assumed.

Default value P1: 1s

Usage condition You cannot register the same MEG ID to two or more MEG indexes. If the specified MEG ID has already been registered, an error occurs. If the MEP data of the specified MEG index exists, you cannot execute update.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set ether-oam meg 10 MEG0123456789 1 period 10s *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

show ether-oam meg Display of MEG setting information clear ether-oam meg Clearing of MEG set ether-oam mep Setting of MEP show ether-oam mep Display of MEP setting information

EtherOAM

11-3

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show ether-oam meg Display of MEG setting information

Shows the setting information of MEG.

Input format show ether-oam meg [P1]

Parameter P1: MEG index (1 to 1536) * If P1 is omitted, all MEG setting information is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show ether-oam meg 10 Ether OAM MEG Information ========================= MEG Index MEG ID MEG Level ETH-CC Period -------------------------------------------------- 10 TEST000000002 3 10sec MEP Index ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 5,10,25,30 *Switch@1# show ether-oam meg Ether OAM MEG Information ========================= Total number of entries: 3 MEG Index MEG ID MEG Level ETH-CC Period -------------------------------------------------- 1 TEST000000001 2 1sec 10 TEST000000002 3 10sec 100 TEST000000003 4 10sec *Switch@1# show ether-oam meg Ether OAM MEG Information ========================= No entry in the table. *Switch@1#

EtherOAM

11-4

Output items Total number of entries : Number of registered MEG MEGIndex : MEG index MEG ID : MEG ID MEG Level : MEG level ETH-CC Period : Transmission period MEP Index : Value of the MEP index of the MEP which includes the MEG index specified with the command (Only when P1 is specified)

Related commands

set ether-oam meg Setting of MEG clear ether-oam meg Clearing of MEG

EtherOAM

11-5

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear ether-oam meg Clearing of MEG

Clears MEG.

Input format clear ether-oam meg P1

Parameter P1: MEG index (1 to 1536)

Default value None

Usage conditions

If the MEP data of the specified MEG index exists, you cannot clear it.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear ether-oam meg 10 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set ether-oam meg Setting of MEG show ether-oam meg Display of MEG setting information set ether-oam mep Setting of MEP show ether-oam mep Display of MEP setting information

EtherOAM

11-6

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set ether-oam mep Setting of MEP

Creates MEP.

Input format set ether-oam mep P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6

Parameters P1: MEP index (1 to 1536) P2: Port (line) number (single specification) P3: VLAN-ID or Untag specification {untag}

VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (single specification) untag: Untag specification

P4: MEG index (1 to 1536) P5: Transmission direction { inside | outside }

inside: Transmission directed to the inside of the switch outside: Transmission directed to the outside of the switch

P6: MEP ID (1 to 8191)

Default value None

Usage conditions

If the line module type of the specified port (line) number is ATMP155 or TDMP155, you must disable APS. If the MEG data of the specified MEG index does not exist, or if the MEP data of the specified MEP index has already been registered, you cannot execute registration. If the MEG data transmission period of the specified MEG index is 3.33ms or 100ms, your can register MEP only when the line module type is GbE-PV2. If you specify untag for the tagbase VLAN port, you must specify outside for the transmission direction. If the line module type of the specified port (line) number is ATMP/TDMP/ATMP155/TDMP155, you must specify inside for the transmission direction. If redundant configuration by EtherPS is set for the specified port (line) number, the following cannot be set. - inside MEP setting - multiple MEP settings - Untag MEP setting - MEP setting on a VLAN other than the one when EtherPS control VLAN is set - MEP setting with MEG LEVEL other than the one when EtherPS control VLAN is set If EtherPS control VLAN is registered for the specified port (line) number, set the same value for VLAN and MEG level. If the line module type of the specified port (line) number is TDMP or TDMP155, the line mode must have been set. You can register the maximum number of MEPs per line module (the maximum number of MEPs: GbE-PV2 [EtherPS disabled] [64], GbE-PV2 [EtherPS enabled] [1], ATMP [64], TDMP [64], ATMP155 [128], TDMP155 [128]). If the line module type is ATMP/TDMP/ATMP155/TDMP155, however, you can register only one MEP per VLAN.

EtherOAM

11-7

Notes The specified VLAN ID must have been set for the specified port (line). If the VLAN tag swapping is set for the specified port (line) number, execute this setting specifying the swapping destination VLAN ID.

Input example *Switch@1# set ether-oam mep 20 1/1 333 10 inside 2000 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set ether-oam meg Setting of MEG clear ether-oam meg Clearing of MEG show ether-oam mep Display of MEP setting information clear ether-oam mep Clearing of MEP set ether-oam peer-mep Setting of associated MEP ID set ether-oam lm Setting of test target MEP

EtherOAM

11-8

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show ether-oam mep Display of MEP setting information

Shows the setting information of MEP.

- Specifying port (line) show ether-oam mep P1 (port) [P2]

Input formats

- Specifying index show ether-oam mep P1 (index) [P2]

Parameters P1: Port (line) specification {port} or index specification {index} port: Port (line) specification index: Index specification

• When port is specified in P1 P2: Port (line) number

* If P2 is omitted, setting information of all ports is shown. • When index is specified in P1

P2: MEP index (1 to 1536) * If P2 is omitted, setting information of all indexes is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show ether-oam mep port Ether OAM MEP Information ========================= Port MEP Index VID MEG Level MEG Index MEG ID Position MEP IDCC Priority Transmit Receive Kind DES MAC Address RDI ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 1/1 10 20 3 2 TEST000000002 outside 180 7 disabled enabled --- --- enabled *Switch@1# show ether-oam mep index 10 Ether OAM MEP Information ========================= MEP Index Port VID MEG Level MEG Index MEG ID Position MEP IDCC Priority Transmit Receive Kind DES MAC Address RDI ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 10 1/1 20 3 2 TEST000000002 outside 180 7 disabled enabled --- --- enabled ETH-CC Fault Table ================== Status : loc

EtherOAM

11-9

Ether OAM Peer MEP Information ============================== Peer MEP ID Condition RDI-Received ------------------------------------ 10 normal rdi 28 loc no-rdi 7001 loc no-rdi *Switch@1# show ether-oam mep index Ether OAM MEP Information ========================= MEP Index Port VID MEG Level MEG Index MEG ID Position MEP IDCC Priority Transmit Receive Kind DES MAC Address RDI ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 10 1/1 20 3 2 TEST000000002 outside 180 7 disabled enabled --- --- enabled *Switch@1#

Output items Port: Port (line) number MEP Index: MEP index VID: VLAN ID: In the case of untagMEP, “untag” is shown. MEG Level: MEG level MEG Index: MEG index MEG ID: MEG ID MEP ID: MEP ID Position: Frame transmission direction CC Priority: CC frame priority Transmit: Enabling/disabling setting of CC frame sending Receive: Enabling/disabling setting of CC frame receiving Kind: CC frame transmission type DES MAC Address: CC frame destination address of RDI: RDI transmission setting Status: MEP fault information Peer MEP ID: Associated MEP ID Condition: Associated MEP fault information

normal: No LOC fault, when no VLAN is set loc: LOC fault disabled: Receiving check is stopped

RDI-Received: RDI fault information no-rdi: No RDI fault rdi: RDI fault disabled: RDI operation disabled

Related commands

set ether-oam meg Setting of MEG clear ether-oam meg Clearing of MEG set ether-oam mep Setting of MEP clear ether-oam mep Clearing of MEP set ether-oam peer-mep Setting of associated MEP ID clear ether-oam peer-mep Clearing of associated MEP ID set ether-oam cc Setting of EtherOAM Continuity Check transmission set ether-oam rdi Setting of RDI operation

EtherOAM

11-10

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear ether-oam mep Clearing of MEP

Clears MEP.

Input format clear ether-oam mep P1

Parameter P1: MEP index (1 to 1536)

Default value None


Notes If the associated MEP ID has been registered for the specified MEP index, the setting of the associated MEP ID is also cleared when the MEP index is cleared. If the specified MEP index has been registered as a test target MEP, the setting of the test target MEP is also cleared when the MEP index is cleared. During ETH-CCM operation (either of sending or receiving is currently enabled), the MEP of the specified MEP index cannot be cleared.

Input example *Switch@1# clear ether-oam mep 20 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

clear ether-oam meg Clearing of MEG set ether-oam mep Setting of MEP show ether-oam mep Display of MEP setting information set ether-oam peer-mep Setting of associated MEP ID clear ether-oam peer-mep Clearing of associated MEP ID set ether-oam lm Setting of test target MEP clear ether-oam lm Clearing of test target MEP

EtherOAM

11-11

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set ether-oam lm Setting of test target MEP

Sets a test target MEP.

Input format set ether-oam lm P1 [P2]

Parameters P1: MEP index (1 to 1536) P2: Test target frame priority specification or all priorities specification {all}

Specifying test target frame priority: 0 to 7 All: Specifying all priorities * If P2 is omitted, all is assumed.

Default value P2: all

Usage conditions

If the MEP data of the specified MEP index has not been registered, you cannot execute registration. If the test target MEP has already been registered, you cannot execute registration.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set ether-oam lm 15 all *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set ether-oam meg Setting of MEG clear ether-oam meg Clearing of MEG set ether-oam mep Setting of MEP clear ether-oam mep Clearing of MEP show ether-oam lm Display of test target MEP clear ether-oam lm Clearing of test target MEP

EtherOAM

11-12

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show ether-oam lm Display of test target MEP setting information

Shows the test target MEP setting information.

Input format show ether-oam lm

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show ether-oam lm Ether OAM Loss Measurement Information ====================================== MEP Index : 15 Target Priority : all Port : 5/1 MAC Address : 00:30:13:a1:0f:3c VID : 100 MEG ID : A MEP ID : 15 MEG Level : 1 *Switch@1#

Output items MEP Index: MEP index Target Priority: Priority of measurement target frame Port: Port (line) number MAC Address: MAC address of test target port VID: VLAN ID

For untagMEP, ”untag” is displayed. MEG ID: MEG ID MEP ID: MEP ID MEG Level: MEG level

Related commands

set ether-oam meg Setting of MEG clear ether-oam meg Clearing of MEG set ether-oam mep Setting of MEP clear ether-oam mep Clearing of MEP set ether-oam lm Setting of test target MEP clear ether-oam lm Clearing of test target MEP

EtherOAM

11-13

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear ether-oam lm Clearing of test target MEP

Clears a test target MEP.

Input format clear ether-oam lm

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear ether-oam lm *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set ether-oam meg Setting of MEG clear ether-oam meg Clearing of MEG set ether-oam mep Setting of MEP clear ether-oam mep Clearing of MEP set ether-oam lm Setting of test target MEP show ether-oam lm Display of test target MEP setting information

EtherOAM

11-14

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set ether-oam peer-mep Setting of associated MEP ID

Sets the associated MEP ID.

Input format set ether-oam peer-mep P1 P2 [P3]

Parameters P1: MEP index (1 to 1536) P2: Associated MEP ID (1 to 8191) (Multiple values can be specified.) P3: CCM receiving setting {receive-enable | receive-disable}

receive-enable: Enables CCM receiving setting receive-disable: Disables CCM receiving setting * If P3 is omitted, receive-enable is assumed.

Default value P3: receive-enable

Usage conditions

If the MEP data of the specified MEP index has not been registered, you cannot execute registration. Also, if the line module is other than GbE-PV2/ATMP/TDMP/ATMP155/ TDMP155, you cannot execute registration. The maximum number of the associated MEPs can be registered for every line module [the maximum number of the associated MEPs: GbE-PV2 (256), ATMP (64), and TDMP (64)] per port of a line (1 port). You can register the maximum number of associated MEPs per line module (the maximum number of associated MEPs: GbE-PV2 [EtherPS disabled] [1024], GbE-PV2 [EtherPS enabled] [1], ATMP [64], TDMP [64], ATMP155 [128], TDMP155 [128]). If the line module type is ATMP/TDMP/ATMP155/TDMP155, however, you can register only one associated MEP per MEP

Note To enable CCM receiving monitoring, you must set receive-enable for ETH-CC transmission setting to allow receiving.

Input example *Switch@1# set ether-oam peer-mep 10 3000,4000 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set ether-oam meg Setting of MEG clear ether-oam meg Clearing of MEG set ether-oam mep Setting of MEP show ether-oam mep Display of MEP setting information clear ether-oam mep Clearing of MEP clear ether-oam peer-mep Clearing of associated MEP ID

EtherOAM

11-15

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear ether-oam peer-mep Clearing of associated MEP ID

Clears the associated MEP ID.

Input format clear ether-oam peer-mep P1 [P2]

Parameters P1: MEP index (1 to 1536) P2: Associated MEP ID (1 to 8191) (single specification)

* If P2 is omitted, all the associated MEP IDs are cleared.

Default value None

Usage condition You can clear the associated MEP ID of the specified MEP index only in the following conditions. Otherwise, you cannot clear it. Conditions: [1] If the receiving setting of the own MEP is disabled, all the associated MEP ID of the

own MEP can be cleared. [2] If the receiving setting of the own MEP is enabled and that of an associated MEP is

disabled, only the associated MEP of the own MEP can be cleared.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear ether-oam peer-mep 10 3000 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set ether-oam meg Setting of MEG clear ether-oam meg Clearing of MEG set ether-oam mep Setting of MEP show ether-oam mep Display of MEP setting information clear ether-oam mep Clearing of MEP set ether-oam peer-mep Setting of associated MEP ID

EtherOAM

11-16

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set ether-oam mip Setting of MIP

Creates MIP.

Input format set ether-oam mip P1 P2 P3 P4

Parameters

P1: MIP index (1 to 96) P2: Port (line) number (single specification) P3: VLAN ID (1 to 4094) (Multiple values can be specified.) P4: MEG level (0 to 7)

Default value None

Usage conditions

If the MIP data of the specified MIP index has already been registered, you cannot execute registration. If the maximum number of the MIP data shown below has already been registered for the specified port (line) number, you cannot execute registration: Up to 8 MIPs can be registered per port. Up to 4094 VLANs can be specified for one MIP. Only the GbE-PV2 card can operate.

Notes The specified VLAN ID must have been set for the specified port (line). If the VLAN tag swapping is set for the specified port (line) number, execute this setting specifying the swapping destination VLAN ID.

Input example *Switch@1# set ether-oam mip 96 2/1 444 2 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set ether-oam meg Setting of MEG clear ether-oam meg Clearing of MEG show ether-oam mip Display of MIP setting information clear ether-oam mip Clearing of MIP

EtherOAM

11-17

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show ether-oam mip Display of MIP setting information

Shows the setting information of MIP.

- Specifying port (line) show ether-oam mip P1(port) [P2]

Input formats

- Specifying index show ether-oam mip P1(index) [P2]

Parameters P1: Port (line) specification {port} or index specification {index} port: Port (line) specification index: Index specification

• When port is specified in P1 P2: Port (line) number

* If P2 is omitted, setting information of all ports is shown. • When index is specified in P1

P2: MIP index (1 to 768) * If P2 is omitted, setting information of all indexes is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example Switch@1# show ether-oam mip port Ether OAM MIP Information ========================= Port MIP Index MEG Level VID ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 1/1 10 5 10-20 2/1 2 1 1 *Switch@1# show ether-oam mip index Ether OAM MIP Information ========================= MIP Index Port MEG Level VID ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 2/1 1 1 10 1/1 5 10-20 *Switch@1#

EtherOAM

11-18

Output items Port: Port (line) number Index: MEP index MEG Level: MEG level VID: VLAN ID

Related commands

set ether-oam meg Setting of MEG clear ether-oam meg Clearing of MEG set ether-oam mip Setting of MIP clear ether-oam mip Clearing of MIP

EtherOAM

11-19

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear ether-oam mip Clearing of MIP

Clears MIP.

Input format clear ether-oam mip P1 [P2]

Parameters P1: MIP index (1 to 96) P2: VLAN ID (1 to 4094) (single specification)

* If P2 is omitted, all the VLANs which correspond with the MIP index are cleared.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear ether-oam mip 96 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set ether-oam meg Setting of MEG clear ether-oam meg Clearing of MEG set ether-oam mip Setting of MIP show ether-oam mip Display of MIP setting information

EtherOAM

11-20

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set ether-oam frame Setting of EtherOAM frame common information

Sets the common information of EtherOAM frame.

- Specifying DA Multicast MAC address set ether-oam frame P1 - Specifying protocol type set ether-oam frame P2

Input formats

- Specifying both conditions set ether-oam frame P1 P2

Parameters

P1: DA Multicast MAC address <01:00:00:00:00:00- 01:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff> * If P1 is omitted, nothing is specified.

P2: Protocol type (0x0600 to 0xffff) * If P2 is omitted, nothing is specified.

Default values P1: 01:80:c2:00:00:30

P2: 0x8902 Usage condition None

Note Execute this setting before performing ETH-CC, ETH-LB, and ETH-LT tests. The following MAC addresses cannot be set in P1. 01:00:5E:00:00:00 - 01:00:5E:7F:FF:FF 01:80:C2:00:00:00 - 01:80:C2:00:00:2F

Input example *Switch@1# set ether-oam frame 01 :02 :03 :04 :05 :06 0x0600 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

show ether-oam frame Display of EtherOAM frame common information

EtherOAM

11-21

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show ether-oam frame Display of EtherOAM frame common information

Shows the common information of EtherOAM frame.

Input format show ether-oam frame

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show ether-oam frame Ether OAM Frame Multicast MAC Address ===================================== Class1 : 01:80:c3:00:00:70 Class2 : 01:80:c3:00:00:78 Ether OAM Frame Protocol Type ============================= Protocol Type : 0xfffe *Switch@1#

Output items Multicast MAC address(class1): Destination Multicast MAC for Ether CC/LB frame Multicast MAC address(class2): Destination Multicast MAC for Ether LT frame Protocol type: Protocol type

Related command

set ether-oam frame Setting of Ether-OAM frame common information

EtherOAM

11-22

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set ether-oam reply-period Setting of Reply frame returning period

Sets the returning period of Reply frame.

Input format set ether-oam reply-period P1 P2

Parameters P1: Reply frame type {loopback | linktrace} loopback: ETH-LBR linktrace: ETH-LTR

P2: Reply frame returning period {random | immediately} random: Random immediately: Immediate

P3: VLAN ID (1 to 4094) (Multiple values can be specified.) P4: MEG level (0 to 7)

Default values P2: random (for loopback)

Immediately (for linktrace)


Note ETH-LBR can be applied only when the multicast ETH-LBM is received.

Input example *Switch@1# set ether-oam reply-period loopback random *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show ether-oam reply-period Display of Reply frame returning period

EtherOAM

11-23

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show ether-oam reply-period Display of Reply frame returning period

Shows the returning period of Reply frame.

Input format show ether-oam reply-period

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show ether-oam reply-period Ether OAM Reply Period Information ================================== Reply Frame Reply Period ------------------------- ETH-LBR immediately ETH-LTR random *Switch@1#

Output items Reply Frame: Reply frame type Reply Period: Reply frame returning period

Related command

set ether-oam reply-period Setting of Reply frame returning period

EtherOAM

11-24

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set ether-oam cc Setting of EtherOAM Continuity Check transmission

Sets the transmission of EtherOAM Continuity Check.

- Starting transmission set ether-oam cc P1 P2 (transmit-enable) [P3] P4 [P5]

Input formats

- Stopping transmission set ether-oam cc P1 P2 (transmit-disable) P3

Parameters P1: MEP index (1 to 1536) P2: Transmission type {transmit-enable | transmit-disable}

transmit-enable: Starts ETH-CCM transmission transmit-disable: Stops ETH-CCM transmission

• When transmit-enable is specified in P2 P3: Destination MAC address

* If P3 is omitted, the multicast transmission is assumed. P4: Receiving allowance {receive-enable | receive-disable}

receive-enable: Starts ETH-CCM receiving check receive-disable: Stops ETH-CCM receiving check

P5: Priority priority (0 to 7) * If P5 is omitted, 7 is assumed.

• When transmit-disable is specified in P2 P3: Receiving allowance {receive-enable | receive-disable}

receive-enable: Starts ETH-CCM receiving check receive-disable: Stops ETH-CCM receiving check

Default values P2: transmit-disable

P4: receive-disable P5: 7

Usage condition If the MEP data of the specified MEP index has not been registered, you cannot execute this setting.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set ether-oam cc 20 transmit-enable 00 :03 :06 :09 :12 :15 receive-enable priority 4 *Switch@1#

Output item

EtherOAM

11-25

Related commands

set ether-oam meg Setting of MEG clear ether-oam meg Clearing of MEG set ether-oam mep Setting of MEP show ether-oam mep Display of MEP setting information clear ether-oam mep Clearing of MEP

EtherOAM

11-26

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set ether-oam rdi Setting of RDI operation

Sets RDI transmission.

Input format set ether-oam rdi P1 P2

Parameters P1: MEP index (1 to 1536) P2: RDI operation {enable | disable}

enable: RDI operation enabled disable: RDI operation disabled


Usage condition If the MEP data of the specified MEP index has not been registered, you cannot execute registration.

Note To enable RDI transmission, you must enable ETH-CC transmission starting.

Input example *Switch@1# set ether-oam rdi 1 enable *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set ether-oam meg Setting of MEG clear ether-oam meg Clearing of MEG set ether-oam mep Setting of MEP show ether-oam mep Display of MEP setting information clear ether-oam mep Clearing of MEP set ether-oam cc Setting of Ether-OAM Continuity Check transmission

EtherOAM

11-27

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show ether-oam fault last-change Display of final fault information

Shows final fault information.

Input format show ether-oam fault last-change

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show ether-oam fault last-change Ether OAM CCM DB Final Fault Information ======================================== Date : 01/01/2000 00:00:00 Fault : LOC DETECT MEP INDEX:1 *Switch@1#

Output items Date: Date Fault: Fault information MEP INDEX: MEP index

Related command

None

EtherOAM

11-28

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show ether-oam fault reason Display of CCM error cause

Shows the detailed information about CCM error cause of the port.

Input format show ether-oam fault reason [P1]

Parameter P1: Port (line) number (single specification) * If P1 is omitted, detailed information of error cause for all the ports is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show ether-oam fault reason Ether OAM CCM Fault Table Information ===================================== Port MEP Index Fault MAC Address Value ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 1/1 1 unexpected-level 00:03:06:09:12:15 4 2/1 --- 3/1 3 mismerge 00:02:05:10:01:01 [01 20 0d] MEG0123456789 4/1 20 unexpected-mep 00:04:10:03:01:02 1024 : 12/1 50 unexpected-period 00:07:01:02:01:03 10sec *Switch@1# show ether-oam fault reason 3/1 Ether OAM CCM Fault Table Information ===================================== Port MEP Index Fault MAC Address Value ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 3/1 3 mismerge 00:02:05:10:01:01 [01 20 0d] MEG0123456789 *Switch@1#

EtherOAM

11-29

Output items Port: Port (line) number MEP Index: MEP index Fault: Fault cause

unexpected-level: Unexpected MEG Level mismerge: Mismerge unexpected-mep: Unexpected MEP ID unexpected-period: Unexpected Period

MAC Address: Source MAC address Value: Fault detailed information

unexpected-level: MEG level mismerge: [xx xx xx] MEG ID [xx xx xx]: The beginning 3 bytes of hexadecimal MEG ID unexpected-mep: MEP ID unexpected-period: Period value 3.33 msec, 10 msec, 100 msec, 1 sec, 10 sec, 60 sec, 10 min

Related command

clear ether-oam fault reason Clearing of CCM error cause

EtherOAM

11-30

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear ether-oam fault reason Clearing of CCM error cause

Clears the detailed information about CCM error cause of the port.

Input format clear ether-oam fault reason [P1]

Parameter P1: Port (line) number (single specification)

* If P1 is omitted, detailed information of error cause for all the ports is cleared.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear ether-oam fault reason 1/1 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show ether-oam fault reason Display of CCM error cause

EtherOAM

11-31

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

loopback ether-oam Starting of EtherOAM Loop Back test

Executes ETH-LB transmission.

Input format loopback ether-oam P1 [P2 [P3] [P4]] [P5] [P6]

Parameters P1: MEP index (1 to 1536) P2: Destination MAC address

* If P2 is omitted, the multicast transmission is assumed. P3: LBM transmission count count (1 to 127)

* If P3 is omitted, 4 is assumed. P4: Transmission period (sec) period (1 to 10)

* If P4 is omitted, 1 is assumed. P5: PDU size size (46 to 2026)

* If P5 is omitted, 46 is assumed. P6: Priority priority (0 to 7)


Default values P3: 4

P4: 1 P5: 46 P6: 7

Usage conditions

If the MEP data of the specified MEP index does not exist, you cannot execute this command. You cannot activate two or more of this command simultaneously. Also, you cannot activate this command and any/all of the ETH-LT transmission command, the ETH-DM transmission command, or/and the ETH-LM transmission command simultaneously. For a GbE-PV2 line module, a value exceeding 1518 cannot be specified in P5.

Note None

EtherOAM

11-32

Input example *Switch@1# loopback ether-oam 1 00:30:13:41:77:70 Ether OAM Loopback Port Information =================================== Port : 1/1 MAC Address : 00:30:13:41:77:d0 VID : 1 MEG ID : MEGID0001 MEP ID : 1 MEG Level : 1 result 00:30:13:41:77:70 seq=1 bytes=46 time<5ms test ok result 00:30:13:41:77:70 seq=2 bytes=46 time<5ms test ok result 00:30:13:41:77:70 seq=3 bytes=46 time<5ms test ok result 00:30:13:41:77:70 seq=4 bytes=46 time<5ms test ok *Switch@1# loopback ether-oam 1 00:30:13:41:77:70 Ether OAM Loopback Port Information =================================== Port : 1/1 MAC Address : 00:30:13:41:77:d0 VID : 1 MEG ID : MEGID0001 MEP ID : 1 MEG Level : 1 result 00:30:13:41:77:70 seq=1 bytes=46 time<5ms test ok result 00:30:13:41:77:70 seq=2 bytes=46 time<5ms test ok result 00:30:13:41:77:70 seq=3 bytes=46 time<5ms test ok result 00:30:13:41:77:70 seq=4 bytes=46 time<5ms test ok Ether OAM Loopback Result Information for 00:30:13:41:77:70 =========================================================== request = 4 : test ok = 4 : test fail = 0 (0% failure) delay minimum = 5msec maximum = 5msec average = 5msec delay variation = 0msec *Switch@1#

Output items port: Port (line) number MAC Address: Destination MAC address VID: VLAN ID MEG ID: MEG ID MEP ID: MEP ID MEG Level: MEG level

Related commands

set ether-oam meg Setting of MEG clear ether-oam meg Clearing of MEG set ether-oam mep Setting of MEP clear ether-oam mep Clearing of MEP

EtherOAM

11-33

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

linktrace ether-oam Starting of EtherOAM Link Trace test

Executes ETH-LT transmission.

Input format linktrace ether-oam P1 P2 [P3] [P4] [P5]

Parameters P1: MEP index (1 to 1536) P2: Destination MAC address P3: ETH-LTR monitoring time wait-time {5s | 10s}

wait-time 5s: 5 seconds wait-time 10s: 10 seconds * If P3 is omitted, 5s is assumed.

P4: TTL ttl (1 to 255) * If P4 is omitted, 255 is assumed.

P5: Priority priority (0 to 7) * If P5 is omitted, 7 is assumed.

Default values P3: 5s

P4: 255 P5: 7

Usage conditions

If the MEP data of the specified MEP index does not exist, you cannot execute this command. You cannot activate two or more of this command simultaneously. Also, you cannot activate this command and any/all of the ETH-LB transmission command, the ETH-DM transmission command, or/and the ETH-LM transmission command simultaneously.

Note None

EtherOAM

11-34

Input example *Switch@1# linktrace ether-oam 1 00:30:13:b0:01:03 Ether OAM Link Trace Port Information ===================================== Port : 1/1 MAC Address : 00:30:13:b0:01:01 VID : 3 MEG ID : MEGID0001 MEP ID : 1 MEG Level : 1 Ether OAM Link Trace Result Information for 00:30:13:b0:01:03 ============================================================= TTL MAC Address Relay Action ------------------------------------ 254 00:30:13:b0:01:03 RlyHit Trace Complete *Switch@1#

Output items port: Port (line) number MAC Address: Destination MAC address VID: VLAN ID MEG ID: MEG ID MEP ID: MEP ID MEG Level: MEG level TTL: Time To Live MAC Address: Source MAC address of ETH-LT returning Relay Action: Relay Action

Related commands


EtherOAM

11-35

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

dm ether-oam Starting of EtherOAM Frame Delay Measurement test

Executes ETH-DM transmission.

Input format dm ether-oam P1 P2 [P3] [P4] [P5]

Parameters P1: MEP index (1 to 1536) P2: Destination MAC address P3: DMM frame transmission count

count (1 to 500) * If P3 is omitted, 4 is assumed.

P4: Transmission period of ETH-DMM (sec or msec) Transmission period (sec): second-period (1 to 10) (sec) Transmission period (msec): milli-period (100 to 1000) (msec) * If P4 is omitted, 1 (sec) is assumed.

P5: Priority priority 0 to 7 * If P5 is omitted, 7 is assumed.


P4: 1 P5: 7

Usage conditions

If the MEP data of the specified MEP index does not exist, you cannot execute this command. You cannot activate two or more of this command simultaneously. Also, you cannot activate this command and any/all of the ETH-LB transmission command, the ETH-LT transmission command, or/and the ETH-LM transmission command simultaneously.

Note None

EtherOAM

11-36

Input example *Switch@1# dm ether-oam 1 00:30:13:41:37:a3 count 10 second-period 1 Ether OAM Delay Measurement Port Information ============================================ Port : 1/1 MAC Address : 00:30:13:41:37:fd VID : 1 MEG ID : MEGID0001 MEP ID : 1 MEG Level : 1 During an ETH-DM examination........ Ether OAM Delay Measurement Result Information for 00:30:13:41:37:a3 ==================================================================== Request DMM : 10 Receive DMR : 10 Delay Minimum(msec) : 0.11 Delay Maximum(msec) : 0.11 Delay Average(msec) : 0.11 Delay Variation(msec) : 0.00 Error Count : 0 Result : complete

Output items Port: Port (line) number MAC Address: Source MAC address VID: VLAN ID MEG ID: MEG ID MEP ID: MEP ID MEG Level: MEG level Request DMM: Sending DMM count Receive DMR: Receiving DMR count Delay Minimum(msec): Delay time (Minimum) Delay Maximum(msec): Delay time (Maximum) Delay Average(msec): Delay time (Average) Delay Variation(msec): Delay time (Deviation) Error Count: Error count Result: Result

complete: ETH-DMM transmission of the set count has been completed. over flow: Stop due to overflow forced stop: Stop by Ctrl-C link down: Stop due to link down close line: Stop due to line module blocking change switch: Stop due to system switchover of switch illegal line state: Line module is in the state in which ETH-DM cannot be executed. failed: Stop because ETH-DMR is not received three consecutive times

Related commands


EtherOAM

11-37

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

lm ether-oam Starting of EtherOAM Loss Measurement test

Executes ETH-LM transmission.

Input format lm ether-oam P1 P2 [P3] [P4] [P5]

Parameters P1: MEP index (1 to 1536) P2: Destination MAC address P3: LMM frame transmission count

count (1 to 500) * If P3 is omitted, 4 is assumed.

P4: Transmission period of ETH-LMM (sec or msec) Transmission period (sec): second-period (1 to 10) (sec) Transmission period (msec): milli-period (100 to 1000) (msec) * If P4 is omitted, 1 (sec) is assumed.

P5: Priority priority 0 to 7 * If P5 is omitted, 7 is assumed.


P4: 1 P5: 7

Usage conditions

If the test target MEP data of the specified MEP index does not exist, you cannot execute this command. You cannot activate two or more of this command simultaneously. Also, you cannot activate this command and any/all of the ETH-LB transmission command, the ETH-LT transmission command, or/and the ETH-DM transmission command simultaneously.

Note None

EtherOAM

11-38

Input example *Switch@1# lm ether-oam 15 00:30:13:a1:0f:0a Ether OAM Loss Measurement Port Information =========================================== Port : 5/1 MAC Address : 00:30:13:a1:0f:7c VID : 100 MEG ID : A MEP ID : 15 MEG Level : 1 During an ETH-LM examination..... Ether OAM Loss Measurement Result Information for 00:30:13:a1:0f:0a =================================================================== Examination MEP Index : 15 Examination MEP ID : 15 Target Priority : all Request LMM : 5 Receive LMR : 5 Sum of Frame Loss Far : 0 Sum of Frame Loss Near : 0 Error Count : 0 Result : complete *Switch@1#

Output items Port: Port (line) number MAC Address: Source MAC address VID: VLAN ID MEG ID: MEG ID MEP ID: MEP ID MEG Level: MEG level Examination MEP Index: Test target MEP Index Examination MEP ID: Test target MEP ID Target Priority: Measurement target frame priority Request LMM: Sending LMM count Receive LMR: Receiving LMR count Sum of Frame Loss Far: Sending frame loss count Sum of Frame Loss Near: Receiving frame loss count Error Count: Error count Result: Result

complete: ETH-LMM transmission of the set count has been completed. over flow: Stop due to overflow forced stop: Stop by Ctrl-C link down: Stop due to link down close line: Stop due to line module blocking c h a n g e s w i t c h: Stop due to system switchover of switch i l l e g a l l i n e s t a t e: Line module is in the state in which ETH-LM cannot be executed. failed: Stop because ETH-LMR is not received three consecutive times

EtherOAM

11-39

Related commands

set ether-oam meg Setting of MEG clear ether-oam meg Clearing of MEG set ether-oam mep Setting of MEP clear ether-oam mep Clearing of MEP set ether-oam lm Setting of test target MEP clear ether-oam lm Clearing of test target MEP

EtherOAM

11-40

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set ether-ps Setting of EtherPS enable/disable

Sets whether to enable or disable the EtherPS function.

Input formats - Enabling EtherPS set ether-ps P1 P2 (enable) P3 P4 P5

- Disabling EtherPS set ether-ps P1 P2 (disable)

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (single specification) {1/1 | 2/1 | 5/1 | 6/1 | 9/1 | 10/1} P2: EtherPS function enable/disable setting {enable | disable}

enable: Enables EtherPS function disable: Disables EtherPS function

• When enable is specified in P2 P3: Switchover method {1:1}

1:1: 1:1 method P4: Direction {bi}

bi: bi-directional P5: Switchback mode {revertive | non-revertive}

revertive: Automatic switchback non-revertive: Manual switchback


Usage conditions

If two or more MEPs have been registered, the MEP transmission direction is other than outside, or the VLAN of the MEP is registered with Untag specification to the specified port (line) number, you cannot execute this setting. If two or more associated MEPs are set for the registered MEP, you cannot execute this setting. If a link aggregation group is set or the spanning tree port is enabled for the specified port (line) number, this command cannot be set.

Notes To modify the setting, disable EtherPS once. If the line type of the specified port (line) is GbE, the line mode must have been set to the GbE mode.

Input example *Switch@1# set ether-ps 1/1 enable 1:1 bi revertive *Switch@1#

Output item

EtherOAM

11-41

Related commands

set ether-ps control-vlan Setting of EtherPS control VLAN set ether-ps time Setting of EtherPS timer set ether-ps lockout Setting of EtherPS lockout change ether-ps Changeover of EtherPS state change ether-ps reset Resetting of EtherPS state changeover show ether-ps config Display of EtherPS configuration information show ether-ps status Display of EtherPS status

EtherOAM

11-42

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set ether-ps control-vlan Setting of EtherPS control VLAN

Sets EtherPS control VLAN.

Input formats - Enabling EtherPS control VLAN set ether-ps control-vlan P1 P2 (enable) P3 P4 [P5]

- Disabling EtherPS control VLAN set ether-ps control-vlan P1 P2 (disable)

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (single specification) {1/1 | 2/1 | 5/1 | 6/1 | 9/1 | 10/1} P2: EtherPS control VLAN enable/disable setting {enable | disable}

enable: Enables EtherPS control VLAN disable: Disables EtherPS control VLAN

• When enable is specified in P2 P3: Control VLAN (1 to 4094) P4: MEG level (0 to 7) P5: Priority (0 to 7)

* If P5 is omitted, 7 is assumed. Default values P2: disable

P5: 7

Usage conditions

If EtherPS of the specified port (line) number is not enabled, you cannot execute this setting. If MEP has been registered for the specified port (line) number, set the same value for Control VLAN and MEG level.

Note To modify the setting, disable EtherPS control VLAN once.

Input example *Switch@1# set ether-ps control-vlan 1/1 enable 1000 7 7 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set ether-ps Setting of EtherPS enable/disable show ether-ps config Display of EtherPS configuration information

EtherOAM

11-43

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set ether-ps lockout Setting of EtherPS lockout

Sets EtherPS lockout.

Input format set ether-ps lockout P1 P2

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (single specification) {1/1 | 2/1 | 5/1 | 6/1 | 9/1 | 10/1} P2: EtherPS lockout enable/disable setting {enable | disable}

enable: Enables EtherPS lockout disable: Disables EtherPS lockout


Usage condition If EtherPS of the specified port (line) number is not enabled, you cannot execute this setting.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set ether-ps lockout 1/1 enable *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set ether-ps Setting of EtherPS enable/disable show ether-ps status Display of EtherPS status

EtherOAM

11-44

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set ether-ps time Setting of EtherPS timer

Sets the EtherPS timer.

Input format set ether-ps time P1 P2 P3

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (single specification) {1/1 | 2/1 | 5/1 | 6/1 | 9/1 | 10/1} P2: Change timer type {wtr}

wtr: Recovery standby protection time P3: Time (0 to 12)

* 0, and 5 to12 can be specified.

Default value P3: 5

Usage conditions

If EtherPS of the specified port (line) number is not enabled, you cannot execute this setting. If EtherPS of the specified port (line) number is set to the non-revertive mode, you cannot execute this setting.

Note If you set the recovery standby protection time to 0, it will be infinite.

Input example *Switch@1# set ether-ps time 1/1 wtr 12 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set ether-ps Setting of EtherPS enable/disable show ether-ps config Display of EtherPS configuration information

EtherOAM

11-45

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

change ether-ps Changeover of EtherPS state

Changes the EtherPS state.

Input format change ether-ps P1 P2

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (single specification) {1/1 | 2/1 | 5/1 | 6/1 | 9/1 | 10/1} P2: Change mode {lockout | forced | manual | exercise}

lockout: Lockout forced: Forced change manual: Manual change exercise: Test request

Default value None

Usage conditions

If EtherPS of the specified port (line) number is not enabled, you cannot execute this setting. If EtherPS lockout for the specified port (line) number is enabled, you cannot execute this setting.

Note You may be unable to execute this command depending on the EtherPS state. Refer to “EtherPS Functions” in the “Instruction Manual”.

Input example *Switch@1# change ether-ps 1/1 forced *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

change ether-ps reset Resetting of EtherPS state changeover show ether-ps status Display of EtherPS status

EtherOAM

11-46

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

change ether-ps reset Resetting of EtherPS state changeover

Resets the EtherPS state changeover.

Input format change ether-ps reset P1

Parameter P1: Port (line) number (single specification) {1/1 | 2/1 | 5/1 | 6/1 | 9/1 | 10/1}

Default value None

Usage conditions

If EtherPS of the specified port (line) number is not enabled, you cannot execute this setting. If EtherPS lockout for the specified port (line) number is enabled, you cannot execute this setting.

Note You may be unable to execute this command depending on the EtherPS state. Refer to “EtherPS Functions” in the “Instruction Manual”.

Input example *Switch@1# change ether-ps reset 1/1 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

change ether-ps Changeover of EtherPS state show ether-ps status Display of EtherPS status

EtherOAM

11-47

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show ether-ps config Display of EtherPS configuration information

Shows the EtherPS configuration information.

Input format show ether-ps config [P1]

Parameter P1: Port (line) number (single specification) {1/1 | 2/1 | 5/1 | 6/1 | 9/1 | 10/1} * If P1 is omitted, the EtherPS configuration information on all EtherPS ports (lines) is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show ether-ps config Ether PS Config =============== Change Revertive Port ETH-PS Mode Direction Mode WTR(min) ------------------------------------------------------------- 1/1 enabled 1:1 bi-direction revertive 10 2/1 enabled 1:1 bi-direction non-revertive --- Ether PS Frame Config ===================== Multicast MAC Address : 01:80:c2:00:00:30 Protocol Type : 0x8902 ========================================= Port Control VID MEG Level Priority -------------------------------------- 1/1 1 7 7 2/1 10 7 7 *Switch@1#

EtherOAM

11-48

Output items Port: Port (line) number ETH-PS: EtherPS enable/disable setting

enable: EtherPS enabled disable: EtherPS disabled

Change Mode: Change mode 1:1: 1:1 method

Direction: Direction bi-direction: Bi-directional

Revertive Mode: Switchback mode revertive: Automatic switchback non-revertive: Manual switchback

WTR: Recovery standby protection time 0, 5-12: 0, 5-12 (min)

Multicast MAC Address: Destination Multicast MAC address Protocol Type: Protocol type Control VID: VLAN ID MEG Level: MEG level Priority: Priority

Related commands

set ether-ps Setting of EtherPS enable/disable set ether-ps control-vlan Setting of EtherPS control VLAN set ether-ps time Setting of EtherPS timer

EtherOAM

11-49

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show ether-ps status Display of EtherPS status

Shows the EtherPS status information.

Input format show ether-ps status [P1]

Parameter P1: Port (line) number (single specification) {1/1 | 2/1 | 5/1 | 6/1 | 9/1 | 10/1} * If P1 is omitted, the EtherPS status information on all EtherPS ports (lines) is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show ether-ps status Ether PS Status =============== Port Status Name ETH-PS Status Request Lockout ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 1/1 active working no-request local-nr disabled 3/1 standby protection no-request local-nr disabled 2/1 standby working signal-fail-for-working local-sf disabled 4/1 active protection signal-fail-for-working local-sf disabled Ether PS Alarm ============== Port FOP-PMb FOP-NR FOP-CM FOP-PMa FOP-PMd FOP-PMr -------------------------------------------------------- 1/1 --- --- --- --- --- --- 2/1 --- --- --- --- --- --- *Switch@1#

EtherOAM

11-50

Output items Port: Port (line) number Status: Line status

active: ACT status standby: SBY status

Name: Port operation status working: Active system protection: Standby system

ETH-PS Status: EtherPS status Refer to “EtherPS Functions” in the “Instruction Manual”.

Request: Status change cause Refer to “EtherPS Functions” in the “Instruction Manual”.

Ether PS Alarm: ETH-APS failure Refer to “EtherPS Functions” in the “Instruction Manual”. ---: Not detected defect: Detected

Related commands

set ether-ps Setting of EtherPS enable/disable set ether-ps lockout Setting of EtherPS lockout change ether-ps Changeover of EtherPS state change ether-ps reset Resetting of EtherPS state changeover

APS

12-1

12 APS

APS

12-2

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set aps Setting of APS enable/disable

Sets whether to enable or disable APS and operation mode.

Input formats - Annex-A and Annex-B specification set aps P1 P2 (enable) [P3]

- Disable setting specification set aps P1 P2 (disable)

Parameters P1: Port (line) number {1/1 | 2/1 | 5/1 | 6/1 | 9/1 | 10/1} P2: Enable/disable setting {enable | disable}

enable: Enables APS disable: Disables APS

• When enable is specified in P1 P3: Operation mode {annex-a | annex-b} (valid only when enable is set in P2)

annex-a: Annex-A(SDH) of ITU-T G.783/G.841, Annex-A(SONET) of GR-253annex-b: Annex-B of ITU-T G.783/G.841 * If P3 is omitted, annex-b is set.


Usage conditions If the ATM line module is not installed in the smaller slot number of the slots whose line module type is NONE and which take redundant configuration, you cannot set APS. If the line module type is not ATM155/ATMP155/TDMP155, you cannot set APS. You cannot specify Annex-B for ports whose frame mode is set to SONET. If the greater slot number of the specified line module has already been configured, you cannot set APS. If MEP has already been set for the specified line module, you cannot set APS. If the TDMP155 line mode (SDH/SONET) is not set for the TDMP155 line module, you cannot set APS.

Notes To modify APS settings, disable APS once. If APS is enabled when the ATM line module installed in the greater slot, the greater slot is initialized. If the greater slot cannot be initialized because it is in contention with another event, however, the line module is installed with OUS status. Reinitialize the line module installed with OUS status by using the reset line command after this command has ended.

Input example *Switch@1# set aps 9/1 enable annex-a *Switch@1#

Output item

APS

12-3

Related commands

set port frame Setting of ATM transmission path framing mode set line mode tdmp155 Setting of TDMP155 line mode set ether-oam mep Setting of MEP set aps lockout Setting of APS lockout set aps time Setting of APS timer values change aps Changeover of APS change aps reset Resetting of APS changeover show aps information Display of APS settings and status reset line Resetting of line module

APS

12-4

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set aps lockout Setting of APS lockout

Sets APS target line module lockout.

Input format set aps lockout P1 P2

Parameters P1: Port (line) number {1/1 | 2/1 | 5/1 | 6/1 | 9/1 | 10/1} P2: Enable/disable setting {enable | disable}

enable: Enables APS lockout disable: Disables APS lockout

Default value P2:disable

Usage conditions If APS is disabled, this setting is cleared. You can set APS lockout when APS is enabled. Set the same APS lockout for the local office and associated office. If the associated office does not have the APS lockout function, do not set APS lockout because it may not support lockout setting.

Note If APS lockout is set for only the local office or associated office, the APS status of the local office may not match the APS status of the associated office or vice versa. However, you can solve this mismatch by clearing the APS lockout settings.

Input example *Switch@1# set aps lockout 9/1 enable *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set aps Setting of APS enable/disable change aps Changeover of APS change aps reset Resetting of APS changeover show aps information Display of APS settings and status

APS

12-5

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set aps time Setting of APS timer values

Sets APS changeover response wait time and recovery standby protection time.

Input formats - Changeover response wait time specification set aps time P1 P2 (response) P3

- Recovery standby protection time specification set aps time P1 P2 (recover) P3

Parameters P1: Port (line) number {1/1 | 2/1 | 5/1 | 6/1 | 9/1 | 10/1} P2: Timer {response | recover}

response: Changeover response wait time recover: Recovery standby protection time (you cannot specify recover when APS mode is set to Annex-A)

• When response is specified in P2 P3: Time (500 to 1000 msec)

* Setting granularity: 500 (msec) • When recover is specified in P2

P3: Time (30 to 600 msec) * Setting granularity: 30 (msec)

Default values When response is specified in P2: 1000(msec)

When recover is specified in P2: 300(sec)

Usage conditions You can set changeover response wait time and recovery standby protection time when APS is enabled.

Note If APS is disabled, this setting is cleared.

Input examples *Switch@1# set aps time 9/1 response 1000 *Switch@1# set aps time 9/1 recover 330 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set aps Setting of APS enable/disable show aps information Display of APS settings and status

APS

12-6

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

change aps Changeover of APS

Changes APS.

Input formats - APS changeover mode (forced change/manual change) change aps P1 [P2 (forced / manual) P3]

- APS changeover mode (lockout/test request) change aps P1 [P2 (lkop / exercise)]

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (single specification) {1/1 | 2/1 | 5/1 | 6/1 | 9/1 | 10/1} P2: Change mode {forced | manual | lkop | exercise}

forced: Forced change manual: Manual change lkop: Lockout (LKOP) exercise: Test request

• When forced or manual is specified in P2 P3: Change port {master | reserve}

master: Smaller-number line module specification reserve: Greater-number line module specification

Default value None

Usage conditions You can enter this command when APS is enabled. If APS lockout is enabled, you cannot enter this command. If APS mode is Annex.B, you cannot specify P2 and P3. If APS mode is Annex.A and exercise or lkop is specified in P2, you cannot specify P3.

Notes If forced is specified in P2 or APS mode is Annex.B, APS is changed forcedly. If manual is specified in P2, APS is changed manually. If exercise is specified in P2, standby port validity test is performed. Changeover operation and APS status change are not performed. If lkop is specified in P2, LKOP changeover is performed. Depending on the following, APS may be unable to be changed:

- Switch destination line module status - Port (line) status - APS status - ACT system specification in P3

If the APS status is changed despite the fact that APS is not changed by this command, you must reset APS changeover with the change aps reset command, because APS changeover due to a port (line) failure is disabled. If APS mode is Annex.B, the APS name is also changed when APS changeover is reset.

APS

12-7

Input examples *Switch@1# change aps 9/1 lkop *Switch@1# change aps 9/1 forced master *Switch@1# change aps 9/1 manual reserve *Switch@1# change aps 9/1 exercise APS exercise result =================== Port : 9/1 Result : succeeded Cause : --- *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set aps Setting of APS enable/disable set aps lockout Setting of APS lockout set aps time Setting of APS timer values change aps reset Resetting of APS changeover show aps information Display of APS settings and status

APS

12-8

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

change aps reset Resetting of APS changeover

Resets APS changeover to enable the system to accept APS changeover resulting from a port (line) failure.If APS mode is Annex.B, this reset also involves name change.

Input format change aps reset P1

Parameter P1: Port (line) number {1/1 | 2/1 | 5/1 | 6/1 | 9/1 | 10/1}

Default value None

Usage conditions You can enter this command when APS is enabled. You cannot enter this command when APS lockout is enabled.

Note Use this command when resetting APS changeover is required after APS changeover by the change aps command is performed.

Input example *Switch@1# change aps reset 9/1 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set aps Setting of APS enable/disable set aps lockout Setting of APS lockout change aps Changeover of APS show aps information Display of APS settings and status

APS

12-9

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show aps information Display of APS settings and status

Shows the APS settings and status.

Input format show aps information [P1]

Parameter P1: Port (line) number {1/1 | 2/1 | 5/1, 6/1, 9/1, 10/1} * If P1 is omitted, information of 1/1, 2/1, 5/1, 6/1, 9/1, and 10/1 is shown.

Default value None


Note If APS is disabled, APS Alarm information and APS Status information of the corresponding port are not shown.

Input example Switch@#1 show aps information APS Config ========== Response Recover Port APS Time (msec) Time (sec) Mode ------------------------------------------------ 9/1 enabled 1000 300 annex-b 10/1 disabled --- --- --- APS Alarm ========== Port CMF FPF PSBF TAF TDF --------------------------------------- 9/1 --- ---- detect ---- ---- APS Status ========== Port Status Name APS Status Lockout ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9/1 standby working forced-switch disabled 11/1 active protection forced-switch disabled Switch@#1

APS

12-10

Output items Items displayed in APS Config Port: Port (line) number APS: APS enabled/disabled setting

enabled: APS enabled disabled: APS disabled

Response Time: Response confirmation time 500: 500(msec) 1000: 1000(msec)

Recover Time: Recovery standby protection time 30-600: 30-600(sec) *in units of 30 sec

Items shown in APS Alarm Port: Port (line) number CMF : Channel Mismatch Failure FPF : Far end Protection Line Failure PSBF : Protection Switch Byte Failure TAF : Type of Architecture Failure TDF : Type of Direction Failure

--- : Not detected detect: Detected

Items displayed in APS Status Port: Port (line) number Status: Line status

active: ACT status standby: SBY status

Name: Port operation status Working: Active system Protection: Standby system

APS Status: APS status Refer to Appendix in the Instruction Manual.

Related commands

set aps Setting of APS enable/disable set aps time Setting of APS timer values set aps lockout Setting of APS lockout change aps Changeover of APS change aps reset Resetting of APS changeover

ATM Control

13-1

13 ATM Control

ATM Control

13-2

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set pvc static Registration of PVC

Registers a PVC.

Input format set pvc static P1 P2

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (single specification) P2: VPI value/VCI value (Multiple VCI values can be specified.)

VPI-value (single specification)

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set pvc static 3/1 0/32 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

clear pvc static Clearing of PVC show pvc information Display of PVC setting information

ATM Control

13-3

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear pvc static Clearing of PVC

Clears a PVC.

Input format clear pvc static P1

Parameter P1: PVC identifier {port-number VPI-value/VCI-value | port-number [VPI-value] | PVC-name}

- port-number (single specification) - VPI-value/VCI-value (single specification) - VPI-value (single specification) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters) * If VPI-value/VCI-value is omitted, all the PVCs for the specified port (line) number are cleared. * If VPI-value is specified or omitted, execution confirmation is shown after inputting the command.

Default value None


Notes If a PVC is cleared, other settings using the PVC are also cleared. If the clear pvc static command with single specification of PVC identifier is executed when no PVC is registered, an error occurs. If P1 is omitted, this command terminates normally.

Input example *Switch@1# clear pvc static 3/1 0/32 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set pvc static Registration of PVC show pvc information Display of PVC setting information

ATM Control

13-4

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set pvc name Registration of PVC name

Registers a PVC name.

Input format set pvc name P1 P2 P3

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (single specification) P2: VPI value/VCI value (single specification)

VPI-value (single specification) P3: PVC name (1 to 32 characters)

Default value None

Usage condition If no PVC is registered, you cannot use this function.

Note When a PVC is cleared, the PVC name is automatically cleared.

Input example *Switch@1# set pvc name 3/1 0/32 pvc32 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set pvc static Registration of PVC clear pvc static Clearing of PVC clear pvc name Clearing of PVC name show pvc information Display of PVC setting information

ATM Control

13-5

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear pvc name Clearing of PVC name

Clears a PVC name.

Input format clear pvc name P1


- port-number (single specification) - VPI-value/VCI-value (single specification) - VPI-value (single specification) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters) * If VPI-value/VCI-value is omitted, all the PVC names for the specified port (line) number are cleared. * If VPI-value is specified or omitted, execution confirmation is shown after inputting the command.

Default value None


Notes If the clear pvc name command with single specification of PVC identifier is executed when no PVC is registered, an error occurs. If P1 is omitted, this command terminates normally.

Input example *Switch@1# clear pvc name 3/1 0/32 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set pvc static Registration of PVC clear pvc static Clearing of PVC set pvc name Registration of PVC name show pvc information Display of PVC setting information

ATM Control

13-6

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set pvc admin Setting of PVC blocking/unblocking

Sets whether to block or unblock a PVC.

Input format set pvc admin P1 P2

Parameters P1: PVC identifier {port-number VPI-value/VCI-value | VPI-value | PVC-name} - port-number (single specification) - VPI-value/VCI-value (Multiple VCI values can be specified.) - VPI-value (single specification) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters)

P2: Blocking/unblocking setting {enable | disable} enable: Unblocks PVC disable: Blocks PVC



Note When the PVC is cleared, this function is automatically cleared.

Input example *Switch@1# set pvc admin 3/1 0/32 disable *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set pvc static Registration of PVC clear pvc static Clearing of PVC set pvc port admin Setting of enbloc PVC blocking/unblocking show pvc information Display of PVC setting information

ATM Control

13-7

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set pvc port admin Setting of enbloc PVC blocking/unblocking

Sets enbloc PVC blocking/unblocking.

Input format set pvc port admin P1 P2

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) P2: Blocking/unblocking setting {enable | disable}

enable: Unblocks PVC disable: Blocks PVC



Notes When the PVC is cleared, this function is automatically cleared. Entering this command applies enbloc PVC blocking/unblocking to all the PVCs registered in the specified port.

Input example *Switch@1# set pvc port admin 3/1 disable *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set pvc static Registration of PVC clear pvc static Clearing of PVC set pvc admin Setting of PVC blocking/unblocking show pvc information Display of PVC setting information

ATM Control

13-8

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show pvc information Display of PVC setting information

Shows PVC setting information.

Input format show pvc information [P1] [P2]

Parameters P1: Line module number (1 to 12) P2: PVC identifier {port-number VPI-value/VCI-value | port-number [VPI-value] | PVC-name}

- port-number (single specification) - VPI-value/VCI-value (Multiple VCI values can be specified.) - VPI-value (Multiple values can be specified.) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters) * If VPI-value/VCI-value is omitted, all PVC setting information for the specified port (line) number is shown. If port-number is omitted, all PVC setting information for the ATM transmission paths of the entire device is shown.

Default value None


Notes None

Input example *Switch@1# show pvc information PVC System Connection Count =========================== Configured Configurable ------------------------------------- 3 381 PVC Connection Count ==================== Slot Enabled Disabled Configured Configurable ------------------------------------------------- 3 1 0 1 255 10 1 1 2 126 PVC Table ========= Port VPI/VCI Name Admin ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 3/1 0/32 ab123456789012345678901234567890 enabled 10/1 1/255 cd098765432109876543210987654321 enabled 10/1 255/255 disabled *Switch@1#

ATM Control

13-9

Output items PVC System Connection Count Configured: Number of registered PVCs in the entire device Configurable: Number of remaining registerable PVCs in the entire device PVC Connection Count Slot: Line module number Enabled: Number of unblocked PVCs Disabled: Number of blocked PVCs Configured: Number of registered port PVCs Configurable: Number of remaining registerable port PVCs PVC Table Port: Port (line) number VPI/VCI: VPI/VCI value Name: PVC name Admin:

enable: Unblocks PVC disable: Blocks PVC

Related commands

set pvc static Registration of PVC clear pvc static Clearing of PVC set pvc name Registration of PVC name clear pvc name Clearing of PVC name set pvc admin Setting of PVC blocking/unblocking set pvc port admin Setting of enbloc PVC blocking/unblocking

ATM Control

13-10

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set pvc-vlan mode Setting of PVC-VLAN mode

Sets an ATM transmission path portbase or tagbase.

Input format set pvc-vlan mode P1 P2

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) P2: PVC-VLAN mode setting {portbase | tagbase}

portbase: Portbase setting tagbase: Tagbase setting

Default value P2: portbase


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set pvc-vlan mode 3/1 tagbase *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

show pvc-vlan table pvc Display of VLAN VC setting status in PVC units show pvc-vlan table vid Display of VLAN VC setting status in VLAN units

ATM Control

13-11

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set pvc-vlan table Setting of VLAN VC

Sets a VLAN VC.

Input format set pvc-vlan table P1 P2

Parameters P1: PVC identifier {port-number VPI-value/VCI-value | PVC-name} - port-number (single specification) - VPI-value/VCI-value (Multiple VCI values can be specified.) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters)

P2: VLAN identifier {VLAN-ID | VLAN-name} VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters

Default value None


Note When the PVC is cleared, this function is automatically cleared.

Input example *Switch@1# set pvc-vlan table 3/1 0/32 100 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set pvc static Registration of PVC clear pvc static Clearing of PVC clear pvc-vlan table Clearing of VLAN VC settings show pvc-vlan table pvc Display of VLAN VC setting status in PVC units show pvc-vlan table vid Display of VLAN VC setting status in VLAN units

ATM Control

13-12

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear pvc-vlan table Clearing of VLAN VC settings

Clears VLAN VC settings.

Input format clear pvc-vlan table P1


- port-number (single specification) - VPI-value/VCI-value (single specification) - VPI-value (single specification) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters) * If VPI-value/VCI-value is omitted, all the VLAN VC settings for the specified port (line) number are cleared. * If VPI-value is specified or omitted, execution confirmation is shown after inputting the command.

Default value None


Note If the clear pvc-vlan table command with single specification of PVC identifier is executed when no PVC is registered, an error occurs. If P1 is omitted, this command terminates normally.

Input example *Switch@1# clear pvc-vlan table 3/1 0/32 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set pvc-vlan table Setting of VLAN VC show pvc-vlan table pvc Display of VLAN VC setting status in PVC units show pvc-vlan table vid Display of VLAN VC setting status in VLAN units

ATM Control

13-13

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show pvc-vlan table pvc Display of VLAN VC setting status in PVC units

Shows the VLAN VC setting status in PVC units.

Input format show pvc-vlan table pvc [P1]


- port-number (single specification) - VPI-value/VCI-value (Multiple VCI values can be specified.) - VPI-value (Multiple values can be specified.) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters) * If VPI-value/VCI-value is omitted, all the VLAN VC setting statuses for the specified port (line) number are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show pvc-vlan table pvc PVC-VLAN Mode Table =================== Port Base ------------------------- 3/1 port 4/1 tag PVC-VLAN Table ============== Port VPI/VCI VID VLAN-Name --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3/1 255/255 1 ab123456789012345678901234567890 4/1 25/1638 4094 cd123456789012345678901234567890 *Switch@1#

Output items PVC-VLAN Mode Table Port: Port (line) number Base: PVC-VLAN mode

port: Portbase tag: Tagbase

PVC-VLAN Table Port: Port (line) number VPI/VCI: VPI/VCI value VID: VLAN ID VLAN-Name: VLAN name

ATM Control

13-14

Related commands

set vlan name Setting of VLAN name set pvc static Registration of PVC clear pvc static Clearing of PVC set pvc-vlan mode Setting of PVC-VLAN mode set pvc-vlan table Setting of VLAN VC clear pvc-vlan table Clearing of VLAN VC settings

ATM Control

13-15

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show pvc-vlan table vid Display of VLAN VC setting status in VLAN units

Shows the VLAN VC setting status in VLAN units.

Input format show pvc-vlan table vid [P1]

Parameter P1: VLAN identifier {VLAN-ID | VLAN-name} VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple values can be specified.) VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters * If P1 is omitted, the VLAN VC setting statuses of all the VLANs are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show pvc-vlan table vid 1 PVC-VLAN Mode Table =================== Port Base ------------------ 3/1 port 4/1 tag PVC-VLAN Table ============== VID Port VPI/VCI PVC-Name ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 3/1 1/255 ab123456789012345678901234567890 1 3/1 255/255 cd123456789012345678901234567890 1 4/1 0/32 *Switch@1#

Output items PVC-VLAN Mode Table Port: Port (line) number Base: PVC-VLAN mode

port: Portbase tag: Tagbase

PVC-VLAN Table VID: VLAN ID Port: Port (line) number VPI/VCI: VPI/VCI value PVC-Name: PVC name

ATM Control

13-16

Related commands

set pvc static Registration of PVC clear pvc static Clearing of PVC set pvc name Registration of PVC name set pvc-vlan mode Setting of PVC-VLAN mode set pvc-vlan table Setting of VLAN VC clear pvc-vlan table Clearing of VLAN VC settings

ATM Control

13-17

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set isolate pvc Setting/clearing of PVC isolate

Sets or clears PVC isolate.

Input format set isolate pvc P1 P2

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) P2: Enable/disable setting {enable | disable}

enable: Enables PVC isolate setting/clearing disable: Disables PVC isolate setting/clearing



Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set isolate pvc 3/1 enable *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show isolate pvc Display of PVC isolate setting status

ATM Control

13-18

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show isolate pvc Display of PVC isolate setting status

Shows the PVC isolate setting status.

Input format show isolate pvc [P1]

Parameter P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) * If P1 is omitted, the PVC isolate setting statuses of all the ports (lines) are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show isolate pvc PVC-Isolate Configuration ========================= Port Status ------------------- 3/1 enabled 4/1 disabled *Switch@1#

Output items PVC-Isolate Configuration Port: Port (line) number Status:

enabled: PVC isolate enabled disabled: PVC isolate disabled

Related command

set isolate pvc Setting of PVC isolate

ATM Control

13-19

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show atm-fdb table pvc Display of MAC learning information in PVC units

Shows MAC learning information in PVC units.

Input format show atm-fdb table pvc [P1]


- port-number (single specification) - VPI-value/VCI-value (Multiple VCI values can be specified.) - VPI-value (Multiple values can be specified.) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters) * If P1 is omitted, MAC learning information of all the PVCs is shown. * If VPI-value/VCI-value is omitted, MAC learning information of all the PVCs for the specified port (line) number is shown. If port-number is omitted, MAC learning information of all the PVCs for the ATM transmission path in the entire device is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show atm-fdb table pvc 10/1 FDB Learning Table ================== Port VPI/VCI MAC Address VID VLAN-Name ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 10/1 1/32 00:00:00:00:00:01 4093 ab123456789012345678901234567890 10/1 255/255 00:00:00:00:00:02 4094 cd123456789012345678901234567890 *Switch@1#

Output items Port: Port (line) number VPI/VCI: VPI/VCI value MAC Address: MAC address

VID: VLAN ID VLAN-Name: VLAN name

Related commands

show atm-fdb table vid Display of MAC learning information in VLAN units show atm-fdb count pvc Display of MAC learning count in PVC units show atm-fdb count vid Display of MAC learning count in VLAN units clear atm-fdb table pvc Clearing of MAC learning information in PVC units

ATM Control

13-20

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show atm-fdb table vid Display of MAC learning information in VLAN units

Shows MAC learning information in VLAN units.

Input format show atm-fdb table vid [P1] [P2]

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) * If P1 is omitted, MAC learning information of all the ports is shown.

P2: VLAN identifier {VLAN-ID | VLAN-name} VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple values can be specified.) VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters * If P2 is omitted, MAC learning information of all the VLANs is shown.

Default value None


Notes If P2 (VLAN identifier) is omitted, MAC learning information of all the VLANs for the specified port (line) number is shown. If P1 (port (line) number) is omitted, MAC learning information of the specified VLAN for the ATM transmission path in the entire device is shown. If P1 (port (line) number) and P2 (VLAN identifier) are omitted, MAC learning information of all the VLANs for the ATM transmission path in the entire device is shown.

Input examples *Switch@1# show atm-fdb table vid FDB Learning Table ================== Port VID MAC Address VPI/VCI PVC-Name ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 3/1 1 00:00:00:00:00:0a 0/32 ab123456789012345678901234567890 3/1 2 00:00:00:00:00:0b 0/33 10/1 4093 00:00:00:00:00:01 0/32 ab123456789012345678901234567890 10/1 4094 00:00:00:00:00:02 255/255 cd123456789012345678901234567890 *Switch@1# *Switch@1# show atm-fdb table vid 10/1 4093 FDB Learning Table ================== Port VID MAC Address VPI/VCI PVC-Name ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 10/1 4093 00:00:00:00:00:01 0/32 ab123456789012345678901234567890 *Switch@1#

Output items Port: Port (line) number VID: VLAN ID MAC Address: MAC address

VPI/VCI: VPI/VCI value PVC-Name: PVC name

ATM Control

13-21

Related commands

show atm-fdb table pvc Display of MAC learning information in PVC units show atm-fdb count pvc Display of MAC learning count in PVC units show atm-fdb count vid Display of MAC learning count in VLAN units clear atm-fdb table pvc Clearing of MAC learning information in PVC units

ATM Control

13-22

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show atm-fdb count pvc Display of MAC learning count in PVC units

Shows the MAC learning count in PVC units.

Input format show atm-fdb count pvc [P1]


- port-number (single specification) - VPI-value/VCI-value (Multiple VCI values can be specified.) - VPI-value (Multiple values can be specified.) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters) * If VPI-value/VCI-value is omitted, the MAC learning counts of all the PVCs for the specified port (line) number are shown. If port-number is omitted, the MAC learning counts of all the PVCs for the ATM transmission path in the entire device is shown.

Default value None


Notes None

Input examples *Switch@1# show atm-fdb count pvc Total Learned Entry =================== Port Learned-Entry -------------------------------- 3/1 2000 10/1 1000 FDB Learned Entry ================= Port VPI/VCI PVC-Name Learned-Entry ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 3/1 0/32 ab012345678901234567890123456789 1500 3/1 1/32 500 10/1 255/255 1000 *Switch@1# show atm-fdb count pvc 10/1 255/255 FDB Learned Entry ================= Port VPI/VCI PVC-Name Learned-Entry ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 10/1 255/255 1000 *Switch@1#

ATM Control

13-23

Output items Total Learned Entry Port: Port (line) number Learned-Entry: MAC learning count FDB Learned Entry Port: Port (line) number VPI/VCI: VPI/VCI value PVC-Name: PVC name Learned-Entry: MAC learning count

Related commands

show atm-fdb table pvc Display of MAC learning information in PVC units show atm-fdb table vid Display of MAC learning information in VLAN units show atm-fdb count vid Display of MAC learning count in VLAN units clear atm-fdb table pvc Clearing of MAC learning information in PVC units

ATM Control

13-24

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show atm-fdb count vid Display of MAC learning count in VLAN units

Shows the MAC learning count in VLAN units.

Input format show atm-fdb count vid [P1] [P2]

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) * If P1 is omitted, the MAC learning counts of all the ports are shown.

P2: VLAN identifier {VLAN-ID | VLAN-name} VLAN-ID (1 to 4094) (Multiple values can be specified.) VLAN-name (1 to 32 characters) * If P2 is omitted, the MAC learning counts of all the VLANs are shown.

Default value None


Notes If P2 (VLAN identifier) is omitted, the MAC learning counts of all the VLANs for the specified port (line) number are shown. If P1 (port (line) number) is omitted, the MAC learning count of the specified VLAN for the ATM transmission path in the entire device is shown. If P1 and P2 are omitted, the MAC learning counts of all the VLANs for the ATM transmission path in the entire device are shown.

ATM Control

13-25

Input examples *Switch@1# show atm-fdb count vid Total Learned Entry =================== Port Learned-Entry ------------------------------------- 5/1 600 9/1 1000 10/1 1500 FDB Learned Entry ================= Port VID VLAN-Name Learned-Entry ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 5/1 1 ab012345678901234567890123456789 100 5/1 4094 500 9/1 4093 1000 10/1 1 ab012345678901234567890123456789 1500 *Switch@1# *Switch@1# show atm-fdb count vid 5/1 4094 FDB Learned Entry ================= Port VID VLAN-Name Learned-Entry ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 5/1 4094 500 *Switch@1#

Output items Total Learned Entry Port: Port (line) number Learned-Entry: MAC learning count FDB Learned Entry Port: Port (line) number VID: VLAN ID VLAN-Name: VLAN name Learned-Entry: MAC learning count

Related commands

show atm-fdb table pvc Display of MAC learning information in PVC units show atm-fdb table vid Display of MAC learning information in VLAN units show atm-fdb count pvc Display of MAC learning count in PVC units clear atm-fdb table pvc Clearing of MAC learning information in PVC units

ATM Control

13-26

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear atm-fdb table pvc Clearing of MAC learning information in PVC units

Clears MAC learning information of the specified PVC.

Input format clear atm-fdb table pvc P1


- port-number (single specification) - VPI-value/VCI-value (single specification) - VPI-value (single specification) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters) * If VPI-value/VCI-value is omitted, the MACs learned in all the PVCs for the specified port (line) number are cleared. * If VPI-value is specified or omitted, execution confirmation is shown after inputting the command.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear atm-fdb table pvc 3/1 0/32 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

show atm-fdb table pvc Display of MAC learning information in PVC units show atm-fdb table vid Display of MAC learning information in VLAN units show atm-fdb count pvc Display of MAC learning count in PVC units show atm-fdb count vid Display of MAC learning count in VLAN units

ATM Control

13-27

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set atm-loop Setting/clearing of ATM loop guard

Sets and clears an ATM loop guard.

Input format set atm-loop P1 P2 P3



P3: Enable/disable setting {enable | disable} enable: Enables ATM loop guard disable: Disables ATM loop guard


Usage condition You can register only the ATM loop guards mapped to the VLAN-VC.

Note When a PVC is cleared, or when the setting of a VLAN-VC is cleared, the ATM loop guard is automatically cleared.

Input example *Switch@1# set atm-loop 3/1 100,200,300 enable *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show atm-loop config Display of ATM loop guard setting status

ATM Control

13-28

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show atm-loop config Display of ATM loop guard setting status

Shows the ATM loop guard setting status.

Input format show atm-loop config [P1] [P2]

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) * If P1 is omitted, the ATM loop guard setting statuses of all the ports are shown.

P2: VLAN identifier {VLAN-ID | VLAN-name} VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple values can be specified.) VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters * If P2 is omitted, the ATM loop guard setting statuses of all the VLANs are shown.

Default value None


Note Only the ATM loop guard setting statuses are shown that are mapped to the VLAN-VC.

Input example *Switch@1# show atm-loop config ATM-Loop Configuration Table ============================ Port VID ATM-Loop -------------------------------- 3/1 4094 enabled 10/1 4094 disabled *Switch@1#

Output items Port: Port (line) number VID: VLAN ID ATM-Loop: ATM loop guard setting status

Related command

set atm-loop Setting/clearing of ATM loop guard

ATM Control

13-29

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show atm-loop information Display of ATM loop trap transmission state

Shows the ATM loop trap detection result.

Input format show atm-loop information [P1]


- port-number (single specification) - VPI-value/VCI-value (Multiple VCI values can be specified.) - VPI-value (Multiple values can be specified.) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters) * If VPI-value or VPI-value/VCI-value is omitted, all ATM loop trap transmission states for the specified port (line) number are shown. * If PVC identifier is omitted, all ATM loop trap transmission states for the entire device are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show atm-loop information ATM-Loop Information Table ========================== Port VPI/VCI VID Detect --------------------------------------------- 3/1 1/32 4094 detect 10/1 255/32 4000 --- 10/1 255/100 4001 detect r2/1 255/32 4000 --- r2/1 255/100 4001 --- *Switch@1#

Output items Port: Port (line) number VPI/VCI: VPI/VCI value

VID: VLAN ID Detect: ATM loop trap transmission state

Related command

clear atm-loop Clearing of ATM loop detection

ATM Control

13-30

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear atm-loop Clearing of ATM loop detection

Clears the ATM loop detection result.

Input format clear atm-loop P1


- port-number (single specification) - VPI-value/VCI-value (single specification) - VPI-value (single specification) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters) * If VPI-value/VCI-value is omitted, all ATM loop detection results for the specified port (line) number are cleared.

Default value None

Usage condition If the specified PVC has not been registered, you cannot execute this command.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear atm-loop 3/1 0/32 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show atm-loop information Display of ATM loop trap transmission state

ATM Control

13-31

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set atmop mode Setting of ATMoP mode

Sets ATMoP mode.

Input formats - Specifying c-tag set atmop mode P1 P2

- Specifying udp-ip set atmop mode P1 P2 P3

Parameters P1: Slot number (1 to 12) P2: Packet format {c-tag | udp-ip}

c-tag: Supports VLAN with double tag and L2 header udp-ip: Supports VLAN with single tag and UDP header

• When udp-ip is specified in P2 P3: Source IP address

Default value P2: c-tag

Usage conditions

If ATMoP format has already been set, an error occurs. If a path between ATMs has already been set, an error occurs. The following IP addresses cannot be used. 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx. Or, network address of 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set atmop mode 3 udp-ip 192.168.2.144 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set atmop format Setting of ATMoP format clear atmop format Clearing of ATMoP format setting show atmop format Display of ATMoP format information set pvc connection Setting of path between ATMs clear pvc connection Clearing path setting between ATMs show pvc connection Display of path information between ATMs

ATM Control

13-32

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set atmop format Setting of ATMoP format

Sets ATMoP format.

Input formats - Specifying c-tag for ATMoP mode set atmop format P1 [P2] P3 P4 (outer) P5 P6 (inner) P7

- Specifying udp-ip for ATMoP mode set atmop format P1 [P2] P3 P4 (outer) P5 P8 P9 [P10 P11 P12]

Parameters P1: PVC identifier { port-number VPI-value/VCI-value | VPI-value | PVC-name} - port-number (single specification) - VPI-value/VCI-value (single specification) - VPI-value (single specification) - PVC-name

P2: Conversion VPI-value/VCI-value (single specification) or conversion VPI-value (single specification) P3: Destination MAC address P4: VLAN identifier 1

outer: VLAN identifier 1 P5: VLAN identifier {VLAN ID | VLAN name}

VLAN ID (1 to 4094) (single specification) VLAN name (1 to 32 characters)

• When c-tag is specified in P2 for ATMoP mode P6: VLAN identifier 2

Inner: VLAN identifier 2 P7: VLAN identifier {VLAN ID | VLAN name}

VLAN ID (1 to 4094) (single specification) VLAN name (1 to 32 characters)

• When udp-ip is specified in P2 for ATMoP mode P8: Source port number (1024 to 65535) P9: Destination IP address P10: Destination port number (1024 to 65535) P11: TTL value (1 to 255) P12: DSCP value (0 to 63)


P11: 128 P12: 46

ATM Control

13-33

Usage conditions

If the specified PVC has not been set, you cannot execute this command. If the settings do not match the ATM mode which has already been set, an error occurs.If the connection types (VP connection/VC connection) of the registered PVC and the specified PVC do not match, an error occurs. You cannot specify the broadcast address, multicast address, local address and the address entirely composed of "0"s. The following IP addresses cannot be used. 0.xxx.xxx.xxx, 127.xxx.xxx.xxx, and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx. Or, network address of 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24. Only one combination of PVC and VLAN ID (*1) can be set in a card.

[combination of P1 and P7, combination of P2 and P7, combination of PVC of inter-ATM connection setting and source and destination VLAN ID (*1)]

Multiple VLANs cannot be set to a PVC in the port. A VLAN ID (*2) which has already been registered for TDMoP, PVC-VLAN, etc. cannot be set.

*1: inner VLAN ID when the ATMoP mode is c-tag. *2: outer VLAN ID when the ATMoP mode is c-tag.

Note When the PVC is cleared, this setting is also cleared.

Input example *Switch@1# set atmop format 3/1 0/32 5/100 00:00:00:00:00:01 outer 200 inner 3000 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set atmop mode Setting of ATMoP mode clear atmop format Clearing of ATMoP format setting show atmop format Display of ATMoP format information set pvc connection Setting of path between ATMs show pvc connection Display of path information between ATMs

ATM Control

13-34

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show atmop format Display of ATMoP format information

Shows the ATMoP format information.

Input format show atmop format [P1]

Parameter P1: PVC identifier {slot-number | port-number [VPI-value/VCI-value | VPI-value] | PVC-name}

- slot-number (1 to 12) - port-number (single specification) - VPI-value/VCI-value (multiple specification) - VPI-value (multiple specification ) - PVC-name * If VPI-value/VCI-value is omitted, all ATMoP format setting information for the specified port (line) number is shown. * If PVC identifier is omitted, all ATMoP format setting information for the ATMP ports of the entire device is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show atmop format 10/1 0/32 ATMoP Table =========== Source Packet Source Slot MAC Address Format IP Address ------------------------------------------------ 10 00:30:13:a1:2a:aa udp-ip 192.168.200.100 *00:30:13:a1:2a:ab ATMoP L2-Header Table ===================== VPI/VCI VPI/VCI Destination Outer Inner Port (ATM) (ATMoP) MAC Address VID VID ------------------------------------------------------- 10/1 0/32 5/10 00:00:00:00:00:01 1000 --- ATMoP L3-Header Table ===================== VPI/VCI Source Destination Destination Port (ATM) UDP Port IP address UDP Port TTL DSCP ---------------------------------------------------------------- 10/1 0/32 5000 200.200.200.200 5001 255 31 *Switch@1#

ATM Control

13-35

Output items ATMoP Table Slot: Slot number Source MAC Address: Source MAC address

* When the APS mode is enabled, two MAC addresses are displayed. One displayed with * is used as the source MAC address.

Packet Format: Allowed packet format Source IP Address: Source IP address ATMoP L2-Header Table Port: Port (line) number VPI/VCI(ATM): VPI/VCI value VPI/VCI(ATMoP): Conversion VPI/VCI value Destination MAC Address: Destination MAC address Outer VID: VLAN identifier 1 Inner VID: VLAN identifier 2 ATMoP L3-Header Table Port: Port (line) number VPI/VCI(ATM) : VPI/VCI value Source UDP Port: Source port number Destination IP Address: Destination IP address Destination UDP Port: Destination port number TTL: TTL value DSCP: DSCP value

Related commands

set atmop mode Setting of ATMoP mode set atmop format Setting of ATMoP format clear atmop format Clearing of ATMoP format setting

ATM Control

13-36

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear atmop format Clearing of ATMoP format setting

Clears the ATMoP format setting.

Input format clear atmop format P1


- port-number (single specification) - VPI-value/VCI-value (single specification) - VPI-value (single specification ) - PVC-name * If VPI-value/VCI-value is omitted, all the ATMoP format settings for the specified port (line) number are cleared.

Default value None


Note If this command is executed with single specification when no ATMoP format setting is registered, an error occurs. If P1 is omitted, this command terminates normally.

Input example *Switch@1# clear atmop format 3/1 0/32 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set atmop mode Setting of ATMoP mode set atmop format Setting of ATMoP format show atmop format Display of ATMoP format information

ATM Control

13-37

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set pvc connection Setting of path between ATMs

Sets a path between ATMs.

Input formats - Specifying c-tag for ATMoP mode set pvc connection P1 P2 (outer) P3 P4 (inner) P5 P6 [P7 P8 [P9 P10] ]

- Specifying udp-ip for ATMoP mode set pvc connection P1 P2 (outer) P3 P6 [P7 P8]

Parameters P1: PVC identifier {port-number VPI-value/VCI-value | VPI-value | PVC-name} - port-number (single specification) - VPI-value/VCI-value (single specification) - VPI-value (single specification) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters)

P2: VLAN identifier 1 {outer} outer: VLAN identifier 1

P3: VLAN identifier {VLAN ID | VLAN name} VLAN ID (1 to 4094) (single specification) VLAN name (1 to 32 characters)

P4: VLAN identifier 2 {inner} inner: VLAN identifier 2


P6: PVC identifier 2 {port-number VPI-value/VCI-value | VPI-value | PVC-name} - Port-number (single specification) - VPI-value/VCI-value (single specification) - VPI-value (single specification) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters)

P7: VLAN identifier 3 {outer} outer: VLAN identifier 3


P9: VLAN identifier 4 {inner} inner: VLAN identifier 4


ATM Control

13-38

Default value None

Usage conditions

If the specified PVC has not been set, you cannot execute this command. If the settings do not match the ATMoP mode which has already been set, an error occurs. If the connection types (VP connection/VC connection) of the registered PVC and the specified PVC do not match, an error occurs. If the PVC connection types of the source and the destination do not match, an error occurs. Only one combination of PVC and VLAN ID (*1) can be set in a card.

[combination of P1 and P4, combination of P1 and P9, combination of P6 and P4, combination of P6 and P9, combination of PVC and VLAN ID (*1) in the ATMoP format setting]

Multiple VLANs cannot be set to a PVC in the port. A VLAN ID (*2) which has already been registered for TDMoP, PVC-VLAN, etc. cannot be set. The same line and VLAN ID and different PVCs for the connection source and the connection destination cannot be set. *1: inner VLAN ID when the ATMoP mode is c-tag. *2: outer VLAN ID when the ATMoP mode is c-tag.

Note When the PVC is cleared, this setting is also cleared.

Input example *Switch@1# set pvc connection 3/1 0/32 outer 200 inner 3000 5/1 1/40 outer 400 inner 4000 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set atmop mode Setting of ATMoP mode clear pvc connection Clearing path setting between ATMs show pvc connection Display of path information between ATMs set atmop format Setting of ATMoP format show atmop format Display of ATMoP format information

ATM Control

13-39

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show pvc connection Display of path information between ATMs

Shows the information of the path between ATMs.

Input format show pvc connection [P1]

Parameter P1: PVC identifier {port-number [VPI-value/VCI-value | VPI-value] | PVC-name} - port-number (single specification) - VPI-value/VCI-value (Multiple VCI values can be specified.) - VPI-value (single specification) - PVC-name * If PVC identifier is omitted, all path setting information between all ATMs for the ATMP ports of the entire device is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show pvc connection 10/1 0/32 ATMoP Connection Table ====================== Port VPI/VCI Outer-VID Inner-VID Port VPI/VCI Outer-VID Inner-VID ------------------------------------------------------------------------10/1 0/32 1000 10 12/8 4/8191 1001 11 *Switch@1#

Output items ATMoP Connection Table Port: Port (line) number VPI/VCI: VPI/VCI value Outer VID: VLAN identifier 1 Inner VID: VLAN identifier 2 Source UDP Port: Source port number

Related commands

set atmop mode Setting of ATMoP mode set pvc connection Setting of path between ATMs clear pvc connection Clearing path setting between ATMs

ATM Control

13-40

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear pvc connection Clearing path setting between ATMs

Clears the path setting between ATMs.

Input format clear pvc connection P1


- port-number (single specification) - VPI-value/VCI-value (single specification) - VPI-value (single specification) - PVC-name * If VPI-value/VCI-value is omitted, the path settings between all ATMs for the specified port (line) number are cleared.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear pvc connection 3/1 0/32 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set atmop mode Setting of ATMoP mode set pvc connection Setting of path between ATMs show pvc connection Display of path information between ATMs

ATM-QoS

14-1

14 ATM-QoS

ATM-QoS

14-2

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set atm-shaper mode Setting of rate mode

Sets rate mode.

Input format set atm-shaper mode P1 P2

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) P2: Rate mode {low | high}

low: Low speed high: High speed

Default value P2: low


Note If the set VPPCR or VCPCR value of the ATM shaper is less than 384 kbps, you cannot set rate mode to high speed.

Input example *Switch@1# set atm-shaper mode 3/1 high *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show atm-shaper rate Display of ATM shaper set atm-shaper rate Setting of ATM shaper

ATM-QoS

14-3

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set atm-shaper rate Setting of ATM shaper

Sets the ATM shaper.

Input formats - VP mode, Constant Bit Rate or Unspecified Bit Rate specification set atm-shaper rate P1 P2 (vp) P3 (cbr | ubr) P4

- VP mode, Guaranteed Frame Rate specification set atm-shaper rate P1 P2 (vp) P3 (gfr) P4 P6

- VC mode, Constant Bit Rate, or Unspecified Bit Rate specification set atm-shaper rate P1 P2 (vc) P3 (cbr | ubr) P5

- VC mode, Guaranteed Frame Rate specification set atm-shaper rate P1 P2 (vc) P3 (gfr) P5 P6

- Hierarchical VP mode, Constant Bit Rate, or Unspecified Bit Rate specification set atm-shaper rate P1 P2 (vpvc) P3 (cbr | ubr) P4 P5

- Hierarchical VP mode, Guaranteed Frame Rate specification set atm-shaper rate P1 P2 (vpvc) P3 (gfr) P4 P5 P6

ATM-QoS

14-4

Parameters P1: PVC identifier {port-number VPI-value/VCI-value | port-number VPI-value | PVC-name}

- port-number (single specification) - VPI-value/VCI-value (Multiple VCI values can be specified.) - VPI-value (only VP connection) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters)

P2: Shaper mode { vp | vc | vpvc } vp: VP mode vc: VC mode vpvc: Hierarchical VP mode

P3: Traffic class { cbr | ubr | gfr } cbr: Constant Bit Rate ubr: Unspecified Bit Rate gfr: Guaranteed Frame Rate

• When vp is specified in P2 P4: VPPCR value {vppcr}

vppcr 48, 64, 96, 128, 192, 256, 384, 500 (units of 500 hereafter) to 150000 (Kbps)

• When gfr is specified in P3 P6: MCR value {mcr}

mcr 24, 32, 48, 64, 96, 100, 128, 150, 200 (units of 100 hereafter) to 150000 (Kbps)

• When vc is specified in P2 P5: VCPCR value {vcpcr}

vcpcr 48, 64, 96, 128, 192, 256, 384, 500 (units of 500 hereafter) to 150000 (Kbps)



• When vpvc is specified in P2 P4: VPPCR value {vppcr}

vppcr 48, 64, 96, 128, 192, 256, 384, 500 (units of 500 hereafter) to 150000 (Kbps)

P5: VCPCR value { vcpcr } vcpcr 48, 64, 96, 128, 192, 256, 384, 500 (units of 500 hereafter) to 150000 (Kbps)



Default value None


ATM-QoS

14-5

Notes If rate mode is set to high speed, you cannot set a value less than 384 kbps as the VPPCR or VCPCR value of the ATM shaper. You can set up to 128 ATM shapers in one port. If shaper mode is VP mode, you can set up to 256 PVCs in the same ATM shaper. If shaper mode is VC mode, you can set only one PVC in the ATM shaper. If shaper mode is hierarchical VP mode, you can set up to 256 PVCs in the same ATM shaper. You cannot set different shaper mode as the same VPI value. You cannot change the shaper mode set in the ATM shaper. If shaper mode is set to VP mode, you can omit VPPCR value setting when changing the traffic class or adding an PVC after setting the ATM shaper. If shaper mode is set to VC mode, you can omit VCPCR value setting when changing the traffic class after setting the ATM shaper. If shaper mode is set to hierarchical VP mode, you can omit VPPCR value setting and VCPCR value setting when changing the traffic class after setting the ATM shaper. You can also omit VPPCR value setting when adding a PVC. If shaper mode is VP mode, the total MCR value of the ATM shaper cannot exceed the VPPCR value. If shaper mode is VC mode, the MCR value of the ATM shaper cannot exceed the VCPCR value. If shaper mode is hierarchical VP mode, the sum of the VCPCR and MCR values of the ATM shaper whose traffic class is CBR cannot exceed the VPPCR value. The total effective band of the ATM shaper per port cannot exceed 150000 kbps (except when all the traffic classes of the ATM shaper in one port are UBR). The ATM shaper setting is automatically cleared when the PVC is cleared. If there is a traffic of 200000Kbps or higher in the direction from the Switch module to the ATM line module, up to PCR settings other than CBR may be unable to be output.

Input examples *Switch@1# set atm-shaper rate 3/1 0/32 vp cbr vppcr 1000 *Switch@1# set atm-shaper rate 3/1 1/33 vc ubr vcpcr 2000 *Switch@1# set atm-shaper rate 3/1 2/34 vpvc gfr vppcr 100000 vcpcr 50000 mcr 25000 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set pvc static Registration of PVC set atm-shaper mode Setting of rate mode show atm-shaper rate Display of ATM shaper clear atm-shaper rate Clearing of ATM shaper show atm-shaper information Display of effective band

ATM-QoS

14-6

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show atm-shaper rate Display of ATM shaper

Shows an ATM shaper.

Input format show atm-shaper rate [P1]


- port-number (single specification) - VPI-value/VCI-value (Multiple VCI values can be specified.) - VPI-value (Multiple values can be specified.) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters) * If P1 is omitted, the ATM shaper settings of all the VPIs and VCIs set in all the ports are shown. * If VPI-value is omitted, the ATM shaper settings of all the VPIs and VCIs set in the specified port are shown. * If VPI-value is specified, the ATM shaper settings of all the VCIs set in the specified port and VPI are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show atm-shaper rate Rate Mode Table =============== Port Mode ----------------- 3/1 high 4/1 low 10/1 high ATM Shaper Table(Kbps) ====================== Port VPI/VCI Class Shaper VP-PCR VC-PCR MCR ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 3/1 0/32 ubr vp 100000 --- --- 4/1 1/10000 cbr vc --- 100000 --- 10/1 3/16383 gfr vpvc 100000 100000 100000 *Switch@1#

ATM-QoS

14-7

Output items (Rate Mode Table) Port: Port (line) number Mode: Rate mode

low: Low speed high: High speed

(ATM Shaper Table(Kbps)) Port: Port (line) number VPI/VCI: VPI value/VCI value Class: Traffic class

cbr: constant bit rate ubr: unspecified bit rate gfr: guaranteed frame rate

Shaper: Shaper mode vp: VP mode vc: VC mode vpvc: Hierarchical VP mode

VP-PCR: VPPCR value VC-PCR: VCPCR value MCR: MCR value

Related commands

set atm-shaper mode Setting of rate mode set atm-shaper rate Setting of ATM shaper clear atm-shaper rate Clearing of ATM shaper

ATM-QoS

14-8

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show atm-shaper information Display of effective band

Shows an ATM shaper effective band.

Input format show atm-shaper information [P1]

Parameter P1: PVC identifier {port-number [VPI-value] | PVC-name} - port-number (single specification) - VPI-value (Multiple values can be specified.) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters) * If P1 is omitted, the ATM shaper effective bands of all the VPIs and VCIs set in all the ports are shown. * If VPI-value is omitted, the ATM shaper effective bands of all the VPIs and VCIs set in the specified port are shown. * If VPI-value is specified, the ATM shaper effective bands of all the VCIs set in the specified port and VPI are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show atm-shaper information ATM Shaper Table ================ Port Registered-Shaper Available-Shaper ----------------------------------------- 3/1 17 111 ATM Shaper Port Rate Table(Kbps) ================================ Maximum- Available- Total- Port Rate Rate Rate CBR(PCR) UBR(PCR) GFR(PCR) GFR(MCR) --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3/1 150000 29000 121000 46000 46000 46000 21000 ATM Shaper Rate Table(Kbps) =========================== Total- Port VPI VCI Shaper Rate CBR(PCR) UBR(PCR) GFR(PCR) GFR(MCR) ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 3/1 1 --- vp 4000 4000 --- --- --- 3/1 2 --- vp 4000 --- 4000 --- --- 3/1 3 --- vp 4000 --- --- 4000 2000 3/1 4 --- vp 4000 4000 4000 --- --- 3/1 5 --- vp 4000 4000 --- 4000 2000 3/1 6 --- vp 4000 --- 4000 4000 2000 3/1 7 --- vp 4000 4000 4000 4000 2000 3/1 8 32 vc 10000 10000 --- --- ---

ATM-QoS

14-9

3/1 9 33 vc 10000 --- 10000 --- --- 3/1 10 34 vc 10000 --- --- 10000 5000 3/1 11 --- vpvc 9000 5000 --- --- --- 3/1 12 --- vpvc 9000 --- 5000 --- --- 3/1 13 --- vpvc 9000 --- --- 5000 3000 3/1 14 --- vpvc 9000 5000 5000 --- --- 3/1 15 --- vpvc 9000 5000 --- 5000 3000 3/1 16 --- vpvc 9000 --- 5000 5000 3000 3/1 17 --- vpvc 9000 5000 5000 5000 3000 *Switch@1#

Output items (ATM Shaper Table) Port: Port (line) number Registered-Shaper: Number of set shapers Available-Shaper: Number of available shapers (ATM Shaper Port Rate Table(Kbps)) Port: Port (line) number Maximum-Rate] Maximum band Available-Rate: Available band Total-Rate: Total effective bands (port unit) CBR(PCR): Total of PCR values when traffic class is CBR (port unit) UBR(PCR): Total of PCR values when traffic class is UBR (port unit) GFR(PCR): Total of PCR values when traffic class is GFR (port unit) GFR(MCR): Total of MCR values when traffic class is GFR (port unit) (ATM Shaper Rate Table(Kbps)) Port: Port (line) number VPI: VPI VCI: VCI Shape: Shaper mode

vp: VP mode vc: VC mode vpvc: Hierarchical VP mode

Total-Rate: Effective band (shaper unit) CBR(PCR): Total of PCR values when traffic class is CBR (shaper unit) UBR(PCR): Total of PCR values when traffic class is UBR (shaper unit) GFR(PCR): Total of PCR values when traffic class is GFR (shaper unit) GFR(MCR): Total of MCR values when traffic class is GFR (shaper unit)

Related commands

set atm-shaper rate Setting of ATM shaper clear atm-shaper rate Clearing of ATM shaper

ATM-QoS

14-10

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear atm-shaper rate Clearing of ATM shaper

Clears an ATM shaper.

Input format clear atm-shaper rate P1


- port-number (single specification) - VPI-value/VCI-value (single specification) - VPI-value (single specification) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters) * If VPI-value is omitted, the ATM shaper settings of all the VPIs and VCIs registered in the specified port are cleared. * If VPI-value is specified, the ATM shaper settings of all the VCIs registered in the specified port and VPI are cleared.

Default value None


Note If VPI-value is specified or omitted, execution is confirmed after this command has been entered.

Input example *Switch@1# clear atm-shaper rate 3/1 1/250 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set atm-shaper rate Setting of ATM shaper show atm-shaper rate Display of ATM shaper show atm-shaper information Display of effective band

ATM-QoS

14-11

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set atm-qos aal5 Setting of AAL5 mode

Sets AAL5 mode.

Input format set atm-qos aal5 P1 P2

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) P2: AAL5 mode {epd | ppd}

epd: Early Packet Discard ppd: Partial Packet Discard

Default value P2: epd


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set atm-qos aal5 3/1 ppd *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show atm-qos aal5 Display of AAL5 mode

ATM-QoS

14-12

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show atm-qos aal5 Display of AAL5 mode

Shows AAL5 mode.

Input format show atm-qos aal5

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show atm-qos aal5 AAL5 Mode Table =============== Port Mode --------------------- 3/1 epd *Switch@1#

Output items Port: Port (line) number Mode: AAL5 mode

epd: early packet discard ppd: partial packet discard

Related command

set atm-qos aal5 Setting of AAL5 mode

ATM-QoS

14-13

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set atm-qos out-port clp Setting of CLP

Sets a CLP.

Input format set atm-qos out-port clp P1 P2

Parameters P1: PVC identifier {port-number VPI-value/VCI-value | PVC-name} - port-number (single specification) - VPI-value/VCI-value (Multiple VCI values can be specified.) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters)

P2: Priority (0 to 7) (Multiple values can be specified.)

Default value None


Note The CLP is automatically cleared when the PVC is cleared.

Input example *Switch@1# set atm-qos out-port clp 3/1 0/32 0-3 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

show atm-qos out-port clp Display of CLP clear atm-qos out-port clp Clearing of CLP

ATM-QoS

14-14

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show atm-qos out-port clp Display of CLP

Shows a CLP.

Input format show atm-qos out-port clp [P1]

Parameter [P1]: PVC identifier {port-number VPI-value/VCI-value | port-number [VPI-value] | PVC-name}

- port-number (single specification) - VPI-value/VCI-value (Multiple VCI values can be specified.) - VPI-value (Multiple values can be specified.) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters) * If P1 is omitted, the CLP settings of all the VPIs and VCIs set in all the ports are shown. * If VPI-value is omitted, the CLP settings of all the VPIs and VCIs set in the specified port are shown. * If VPI-value is specified, the CLP settings of all the VCIs set in the specified port and VPI are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show atm-qos out-port clp Output CLP Priority Mapping Table ================================= Port VPI/VCI Priority(CLP=1) ------------------------------ 10/1 0/16383 0,6 *Switch@1#

Output items (Output CLP Priority Mapping Table) Port: Port (line) number VPI/VCI: VPI value/VCI value Priority(CLP=1): CoS value whose CLP value is to be set to 1

Related commands

set atm-qos out-port clp Setting of CLP clear atm-qos out-port clp Clearing of CLP

ATM-QoS

14-15

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear atm-qos out-port clp Clearing of CLP

Clears a CLP.

Input format clear atm-qos out-port clp P1


- port-number (single specification) - VPI-value/VCI-value (single specification) - VPI-value (single specification) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters) * If VPI-value is omitted, the CLP settings of all the VPIs and VCIs registered in the specified port are cleared. * If VPI-value is specified, the CLP settings of all the VCIs registered in the specified port and VPI are cleared.

Default value None


Note If VPI-value is specified or omitted, execution is confirmed after this command has been entered.

Input example *Switch@1# clear atm-qos out-port clp 3/1 1/250 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set atm-qos out-port clp Setting of CLP show atm-qos out-port clp Display of CLP

ATM-QoS

14-16

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set atmop in-port cos Setting of CLP-CoS mapping

Sets the CoS value to the VLAN tag based on the CLP value of an ATM cell when the ATM cell is converted into an Ethernet frame. The CoS value is set by a unit of PVC. When the hop count of the VLAN tag is 2, the CoS value can be set for each tag and for each CLP.

Input formats - CLP0, CLP1 specification set atmop in-port cos P1 P2 (clp0) P3 (outer x) [P4] [P5 P6 [P7] ] set atmop in-port cos P1 P2 (clp0) P3 (inner x) [P5 P6 [P7] ]

- CLP1 specification set atmop in-port cos P1 P2 (clp1) P3 (outer x) [P4] set atmop in-port cos P1 P2 (clp1) P3 (inner x)

- Default value specification set atmop in-port cos P1 P2 (initial)

ATM-QoS

14-17

Parameters P1: PVC identifier {port-number VPI-value/VCI-value | VPI-value | PVC-name} - port-number (single specification) - VPI-value/VCI-value (Multiple VCI values can be specified.) - VPI-value (single specification) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters)

P2: CLP or default value specification { clp0 | clp1 | initial } clp0: CLP0 clp1: CLP1 initial: Default value specification

• When clp0 is specified in P2 P3: Outer tag mapping CoS value or inner tag mapping CoS value

outer 0 to 7 inner 0 to 7

• When outer tag mapping CoS value is specified in P3 P4: inner tag mapping CoS value

inner 0 to 7 P5: CLP1 specification { clp1 }

clp1: CLP1 P6: Outer tag mapping CoS value or inner tag mapping CoS value

outer 0 to 7 inner 0 to 7


inner 0 to 7 • When clp1 is specified in P2

P3: Outer tag mapping CoS value or inner tag mapping CoS value outer 0 to 7 inner 0 to 7


inner 0 to 7 Default value P3, P4, P6, P7: 7

Usage condition If no PVC is registered, you cannot execute this command.

Notes The setting is cleared when the PVC is cleared. If the CoS value is omitted (excluding initial specification) when this command is executed, the previous value will be obtained for the omitted CoS value. When initial is specified, the default value is set.

Input examples *Switch@1# set atmop in-port cos 3/1 0/32 clp0 outer 7 inner 5 clp1 outer 2 inner 0 *Switch@1# set atmop in-port cos 3/1 0/32 clp0 inner 5 clp1 outer 2 *Switch@1# set atmop in-port cos 3/1 0/32 clp0 outer 7 inner 5 *Switch@1# set atmop in-port cos 3/1 0/32 clp1 inner 0 *Switch@1# set atmop in-port cos initial

Output item

ATM-QoS

14-18

Related commands

set line mode atmp Setting of ATMP line mode set pvc static Registration of PVC clear pvc static Clearing of PVC set atmop table Setting of ATM-Ether conversion set atmop format Setting of ATM-Ether conversion format show atmop in-port cos Display of CLP-CoS mapping setting status

ATM-QoS

14-19

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show atmop in-port cos Display of CLP-CoS mapping setting status

Shows the setting status of the CLP-CoS mapping for a unit of PVC.

Input format show atmop in-port cos [P1]


- port-number (single specification) - VPI-value/VCI-value (Multiple VCI values can be specified.) - VPI-value (Multiple values can be specified.) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters) * If VCI-value is omitted, all the CoS values set in the specified VPI-value are shown. * If VPI-value is omitted, all the CoS values set in the specified port are shown. * If port-number is omitted, all the CoS values set in the equipment are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show atmop in-port cos 5/6 ATMoP Input CLP Priority Mapping Table ====================================== CLP=0 CLP=1 Port VPI/VCI Outer-tag Inner-tag Outer-tag Inner-tag --------------------------------------------------------- 5/6 2/62 1 7 7 7 5/6 2/63 1 7 7 7 5/6 2/64 1 7 7 7 5/6 2/65 1 7 7 7 5/6 2/66 1 7 7 7 *Switch@1#

Output items Port: Port (line) number VPI/VCI: : VPI value/VCI value Outer-tag: CoS value of the Outer tag Inner-tag: CoS value of the Inner tag

Related commands

set atmop in-port cos Setting of CLP-CoS mapping

ATM-QoS

14-20

(Blank page)

ATM-OAM

15-1

15 ATM-OAM

ATM-OAM

15-2

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set atm-oam Setting of ATM-OAM operation

Sets the OAM operation of an ATM transmission path.

Input formats - F4 level specification set atm-oam P1 (f4) P2 P3 (disable)

- F4 to F5 transfer specification set atm-oam P1 (f4) P2 P3 (enable) [P4]

- F5 level specification set atm-oam P1 (f5) P2 P3

Parameters P1: ATM-OAM alarm level setting {f4 | f5} f4: F4 level specification f5: F5 level specification

• When f4 is specified in P1 P2: PVC identifier {port-number VPI-value | PVC-name}

- port-number (single specification) - VPI-value (Multiple values can be specified.) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters)

P3: ATM-OAM alarm level operation setting {enable | disable} enable: VP-RDI transfer when VP-AIS is received Trap notification available Trap notification available when VP-AIS and VP-RDI is received disable: VP-AIS and VP-RDI discarded

• When enable is specified in P3 P4: F4 to F5 transfer setting {f5-generate}

f5-generate: Transfers VC-AIS and VC-RDI to the subordinate VC when VP-AIS is received * If P4 is omitted, VC-AIS and VC-RDI are not transferred to the subordinate VC.

• When f5 is specified in P1 P2: PVC identifier {port-number VPI-value/VCI-value | PVC-name}

- port-number (single specification) - VPI-value/VCI-value (Multiple VCI values can be specified.) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters)

P3: ATM-OAM alarm level operation setting {enable | disable} enable: VC-AIS and VC-RDI transfer when VC-AIS is received Trap notification available Trap notification available when VP-AIS and VCRDI is received disable: VC-AIS and VC-RDI discarded


P4: disable

ATM-OAM

15-3

Usage conditions If no PVC is registered, you cannot set this function. If a VP connection has already been registered for the VPI-value/PVC-name specified in P2 and f5-generate is specified in P4 when f4 is specified in P1, an error occurs. If a VP connection has already been registered for the VPI-value/PVC-name specified in P2 when f5 is specified in P1, an error occurs.

Note ATM-OAM is automatically cleared when the PVC is cleared.

Input examples *Switch@1# set atm-oam f4 3/1 0 enable *Switch@1# set atm-oam f4 3/1 1 enable f5-generate *Switch@1# set atm-oam f4 3/1 20 disable *Switch@1# set atm-oam f5 3/1 0/32 enable *Switch@1# set atm-oam f5 3/1 20/10000 disable

Output item

Related commands

show atm-oam flow Setting of ATM-OAM flow point show atm-oam config Display of ATM-OAM setting information show atm-oam status Display of ATM-OAM status information

ATM-OAM

15-4

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set atm-oam flow Setting of ATM-OAM flow point

Sets the OAM flow point of an ATM transmission path.

Input formats - F4 level specification set atm-oam flow P1 (f4) P2 P3 P4

- F5 level specification set atm-oam flow P1 (f5) P2 P3 P4

Parameters P1: ATM-OAM alarm level setting {f4 | f5} f4: F4 level specification f5: F5 level specification

• When f4 is specified in P1 P2: PVC identifier {port-number VPI-value | PVC-name}

- port-number (single specification) - VPI-value (Multiple values can be specified.) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters)

• When f5 is specified in P1 P2: PVC identifier {port-number VPI-value/VCI-value | PVC-name}

- port-number (single specification) - VPI-value/VCI-value (Multiple VCI values can be specified.) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters)

P3: Flow type setting {end-end | segment} end-end: End to End flow segment: Segment flow

P4: Flow point setting {end-point | connecting-point | none} end-point: End point connecting-point: Connecting point none: No setting

Default value None

Usage conditions If a VP connection or PVC has not been registered for the VPI-value/PVC-name specified in P2 when f4 is specified in P1, this function cannot be set. If a PVC has been registered for the VPI-value/PVC-name specified in P2 when f5 is specified in P1, this function cannot be set.

Note ATM-OAM is automatically cleared when the PVC is cleared.

Input examples *Switch@1# set atm-oam flow f4 3/8 0 end-end end-point *Switch@1# set atm-oam flow f4 3/8 1 segment none *Switch@1# set atm-oam flow f5 3/8 0/32 end-end connecting-point *Switch@1# set atm-oam flow f5 3/8 1/100 segment end-point *Switch@1# set atm-oam flow f5 3/8 20/10000 segment none

ATM-OAM

15-5

Output item

Related commands

show atm-oam Setting of ATM-OAM operation show atm-oam config Display of ATM-OAM setting information show atm-oam status Display of ATM-OAM status information

ATM-OAM

15-6

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show atm-oam config Display of ATM-OAM setting information

Shows setting information of the specified VPI or VPI/VCI of the specified port.

Input format show atm-oam config [P1]

Parameter [P1]: PVC identifier {port-number VPI-value/VCI-value | port-number [VPI-value] | PVC-name}

- port-number (single specification) - VPI-value/VCI-value (single specification) - VPI-value (single specification) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters) * If port-number is omitted, the setting information of all VPIs/VCIs in the device is shown. * If VPI-value is omitted, the setting information of all VPIs/VCIs registered for the specified port-number is shown. * If VCI-value is omitted, the setting information of all VCIs registered for the specified port-number and VPI is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show atm-oam config 3/1 ATM OAM Config Table ==================== OAM Config(F4) ============== Port VPI Config Option Segment End-End ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 3/1 0 enabled none none end-point 3/1 1 enabled f5-generation end-point end-point 3/1 20 disabled --- --- --- 3/1 30 disabled --- --- --- 3/1 100 enabled f5-generation end-point end-point 3/1 255 enabled none none end-point OAM Config(F5) ============== Port VPI/VCI Config Segment End-End ----------------------------------------------------------- 3/1 0/32 enabled none connecting-point 3/1 0/100 enabled end-point connecting-point 3/1 0/1000 enabled connecting-point connecting-point 3/1 0/10000 disabled --- --- 3/1 20/32 disabled --- ---

ATM-OAM

15-7

3/1 20/100 disabled --- --- 3/1 20/1000 disabled --- --- 3/1 255/32 enabled end-point connecting-point 3/1 255/100 enabled connecting-point connecting-point *Switch@1#

Output items OAM Config(F4) Port: Port (line) number VPI: Virtual path number Config: Configuration

enabled: VP-AIS and VP-RDI detection enabled Trap notified when VP-AIS or VP-RDI is detected VP-RDI transferred when VP-AIS is detected disabled: VP-AIS and VP-RDI detection disabled

Option: Expansion setting f5-generation: VP-RDI and VC-RDI transferred when VP-AIS is detected none: Not specified --- : Not set

Segment: Flow point of Segment flow end-point: End point connecting-point: Connecting point

End-End: Flow point of End to End flow end-point: End point connecting-point: Connecting point

OAM Config(F5)

Port: Port (line) number VPI/VCI: Virtual path number/virtual channel number Config:

enabled: VC-AIS and VC-RDI detection enabled Trap notified when VC-AIS or VC-RDI is detected VC-RDI transferred when VC-AIS is detected disabled: VC-AIS and VC-RDI detection disabled

Segment: Flow point of Segment flow end-point: End point connecting-point: Connecting point

End-End: Flow point of End to End flow end-point: End point connecting-point: Connecting point

Related commands

set atm-oam Setting of ATM-OAM operation show atm-oam flow Setting of ATM-OAM flow point show atm-oam status Display of ATM-OAM status information

ATM-OAM

15-8

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show atm-oam status Display of ATM-OAM status information

Shows ATM-OAM status information.

Input format show atm-oam status [P1]


- port-number (single specification) - VPI-value/VCI-value (single specification) - VPI-value (single specification) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters) * If port-number is omitted, the status information of all VPIs/VCIs in the device is shown. * If VPI-value is omitted, the status information of all VPIs/VCIs registered for the specified port-number is shown. * If VCI-value is omitted, the status information of all VCIs registered for the specified port-number and VPI is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example Switch@1# show atm-oam status 3/8 ATM OAM Status Table ==================== OAM Status(F4 Detect/Generate) ============================== Detect Generate(gen) ------------------------------ ------------------------------ Segment End-End Segment End-End -------------- -------------- -------------- -------------- Port VPI VP-AIS VP-RDI VP-AIS VP-RDI VP-AIS VP-RDI VP-AIS VP-RDI ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3/8 0 detect --- detect --- --- --- --- --- 3/8 1 detect --- detect --- --- gen --- gen 3/8 20 --- detect --- detect --- --- --- --- 3/8 255 detect --- detect --- --- gen --- gen OAM Status(F5 Detect/Generate) ============================== Detect Generate(gen) ------------------------------ ------------------------------ Segment End-End Segment End-End -------------- ------------- -------------- -------------- Port VPI/VCI VC-AIS VC-RDI VC-AIS VC-RDI VC-AIS VC-RDI VC-AIS VC-RDI ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3/8 0/32 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 3/8 0/100 detect --- detect --- --- gen --- gen

ATM-OAM

15-9

3/8 0/1000 --- detect --- detect --- --- --- --- 3/8 0/10000 detect --- detect --- --- gen --- gen 3/8 1/32 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 3/8 1/100 detect --- detect --- --- gen --- gen 3/8 1/1000 --- detect --- detect --- --- --- --- 3/8 1/10000 detect --- detect --- --- gen --- gen 3/8 20/32 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 3/8 20/100 detect --- detect --- --- gen --- gen 3/8 20/1000 --- detect --- detect --- --- --- --- 3/8 30/32 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 3/8 30/100 detect --- detect --- --- gen --- gen 3/8 30/1000 --- detect --- detect --- --- --- --- 3/8 100/32 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 3/8 100/100 detect --- detect --- --- gen --- gen 3/8 255/32 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 3/8 255/100 detect --- detect --- --- gen --- gen Switch@1#

Output items OAM Status(F4 Detect/Generate) Port: Port (line) number VPI: Virtual path number Detect VP-AIS:

detect: VP-AIS detected --- :

Detect VP-RDI: detect: VP-RDI detected --- :

Generate VP-AIS: generate : VP-AIS generated --- :

Generate VP-RDI: generate : VP-RDI generated --- :

OAM Status(F5 Detect/Generate)

Port: Port (line) number VPI/VCI: Virtual path number/virtual channel number Detect VC-AIS:

detect: VC-AIS detected --- :

Detect VC-RDI: detect: VC-RDI detected --- :

Generate VC-RDI: generate: VC-RDI generated --- :

Generate VC-AIS: generate : VC-AIS generated --- :

ATM-OAM

15-10

Related commands

set port admin Setting of port blocking/unblocking set port clock Setting of ATM transmission path clock set port frame Setting of ATM transmission path framing modeset atm-oam Setting of ATM-OAM operation show atm-oam flow Setting of ATM-OAM flow point show atm-oam config Display of ATM-OAM setting information

ATM-IMA

16-1

16 ATM-IMA

ATM-IMA

16-2

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set ima group Setting of IMA group

Sets an IMA group.

Input format set ima group P1 P2 P3 [P4] [P5] [P6] [P7]

Parameters P1: IMA group index (1 to 48) (single specification) P2: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) P3: IMA ID

id 0 to 3 * Specify unique value within the range of 0 to 3 in one line module.

P4: Number of minimum required links links 1 to 8 * This value cannot exceed the total number of the ports (lines) specified in P2.

P5: IMA frame length len { 32 | 64 | 128 | 256 }

P6: Link differential delay T1 line: delay 25 to 282 (msec) E1 line: delay 25 to 226 (msec)

P7: Root port number (single specification) root port (line) number

* A number which is not included in the P2-specified port (line) cannot be specified. * If P4 to P7 are omitted, the default values are assumed.


P5: 128 P6: 25 (msec) P7: The port (line) with the smallest number in the port (line) numbers specified in P2


Notes A port (line) over multiple IMA groups cannot be registered doubly. Up to four IMA groups can be registered within one line module. When P1 is already registered, the value is modified (overwritten). Specification over line modules is not allowed for P2. When a PVC is not set for root port, communication is unavailable.

Input examples *Switch@1# set ima group 1 1/1-3 id 1 *Switch@1# set ima group 2 1/4-8 id 1 links 1 len 25 root 1/4 *Switch@1# set ima group 2 1/4-8 id 1 links 5 root 1/5 *Switch@1# set ima group 48 10/1,10/3,10/5,10/7-8 id 3 links 8 len 256 delay 282 root 10/8

Output item

ATM-IMA

16-3

Related commands

show ima group config Display of IMA group setting information show ima group status Display of IMA group status information clear ima group Clearing of IMA group set ima clock Setting of IMA clock mode show ima clock Display of IMA clock mode setting information

ATM-IMA

16-4

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show ima group config Display of IMA group setting information

Shows IMA group setting information.

Input format show ima group config [P1]

Parameter P1: IMA group index (1 to 48) (Multiple values can be specified.) * If P1 is omitted, IMA group setting information on all IMA groups is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example Switch@1# show ima group config IMA Group Configuration Table ============================= Min-Req- Frame- Link-Diff- Root- Index Ports ID Links Length Delay(ms) Port --------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 1/1-8 1 8 128 123 1/1 2 10/2,10/4,10/ 6 1 1 32 25 10/4 48 10/1,10/3,10/5,10/7-8 3 2 256 282 10/8 Switch@1#

Output items Index: IMA index group index Ports: Port (line) number ID: IMA ID Min-Req-Links: Number of minimum required links Frame-Length: IMA frame length Link-Diff-Delay(ms): Link differential delay Root-Port: Root port number

Related commands

set ima group Setting of IMA group clear ima group Clearing of IMA group show ima group status Display of IMA group status information

ATM-IMA

16-5

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show ima group status Display of IMA group status information

Shows IMA group status information.

Input format show ima group status [P1]

Parameter P1: IMA group index (1 to 48) (Multiple values can be specified.) * If P1 is omitted, IMA group status information on all IMA groups is shown.

Default value None


Note None

ATM-IMA

16-6

Input examples ■ When IMA group index is omitted or multiple IMAA group indexes are specifiedSwitch@1# show ima group status IMA Group Status Table ====================== Index ID GSM-State(NE) GSM-State(FE) Failure-State ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1 1 operational operational no-failure 3 2 --- --- --- 7 1 startup --- no-failure 9 2 startup --- no-failure 48 0 insufficient-links insufficient-links insufficient-links-ne Switch@1# ■ When single IMA group index is specified. Switch@1# show ima group status 2 IMA Group Status Table ====================== Index ID GSM-State(NE) GSM-State(FE) Failure-State ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2 1 operational operational no-failure IMA Link Status Table ===================== Port LID TxState(NE) RxState(NE) TxState(FE) RxState(FE) Failure-State---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10/2 1 misconnect misconnect misconnect misconnect misconnect 10/4 3 active active active active no-failure 10/6 5 active active active active no-failure Switch@1#

ATM-IMA

16-7

Output items Index: IMA group index ID: IMA ID GSM-State(NE): IMA group status

---: Line module uninstalled not-configured: IMA group unregistered startup: Waiting for associated IMA activation startup-ack: Waiting for transition to next status unsupported-length: Associated IMA mismatch (unsupported frame length) incompatible-symmetry: Associated IMA mismatch (incompatible symmetry) unsupported-version: Associated IMA mismatch (unsupported IMA version) other: Associated IMA mismatch (others) insufficient-links: Insufficient number of links blocked: IMA group blocked status operational: Operation status

GSM-State(FE): Associated IMA group status * Same as GSM-State(NE) above

Failure-State: IMA group failure status ---: Line module uninstalled no-failure: No failure information startup-ne: Waiting for transition to next status startup-fe: * Same as above (Associated IMA) invalid-length-ne: Unsupported frame length invalid-length-fe: * Same as above (Associated IMA) failed-asymmetric-ne: Incompatible symmetry failed-asymmetric-fe: * Same as above (Associated IMA) invalid-version-ne: Unsupported IMA version invalid-version-fe: * Same as above (Associated IMA) other-failure: Other failure insufficient-links-ne: Insufficient links insufficient-links-fe: * Same as above (Associated IMA) blocked-ne: Group blocked blocked-fe: * Same as above (Associated IMA)

Port: Port (line) number LID: Link ID TxState(NE): IMA Tx link status

---: Line module uninstalled not-group: IMA group unregistered fault: Failure (user individual) misconnect: Failure (misconnect) inhibited: Failure (blocked status) failed: Failure (LCD, LIF, LODS, etc.) no-given: Failure (others) usable: Waiting for transition to next status active: Link up

RxState(NE): IMA Rx link status * Same as TxState(NE) above

TxState(FE): * Same as TxState(NE) above

RxState(FE): * Same as TxState(NE) above

ATM-IMA

16-8

Failure-State: ---: Line module uninstalled no-failure: No failure information failure: Failure (others) LIF-failure: Failure (LIF) LODS-failure: Failure (LODS) misconnect: Failure (misconnect) blocked: Failure (blocked status) fault: Failure (user individual) tx-unusable: Waiting for transition to next Tx status rx-unusable: Waiting for transition to next Rx status

Related commands

set ima group Setting of IMA group clear ima group Clearing of IMA group show ima group config Display of IMA group setting information

ATM-IMA

16-9

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear ima group Clearing of IMA group

Clears an IMA group.

Input format clear ima group P1

Parameter P1: IMA group index (1 to 48) (single specification)

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear ima group 48 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set ima group Setting of IMA group show ima group config Display of IMA group setting information show ima group status Display of IMA group status information

ATM-IMA

16-10

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set ima clock Setting of IMA clock mode

Sets the IMA clock mode.

Input format set ima clock P1 P2

Parameters P1: Line module number (1 to 12) (Multiple values can be specified.) P2: Transmit clock mode {ctc | itc}

ctc: Common Transmit Clock mode itc: Independent Transmit Clock mode

Default value P2: ctc


Note If a line module to which an IMA group has already been set is specified, the IMA group automatically performs the setting again. Communication is suspended until the IMA group re-setting is completed (i.e., operational state).

Input example Switch@1# set ima clock 1-3,5 itc Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set ima group Setting of IMA group show ima clock Display of IMA clock mode setting information

ATM-IMA

16-11

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show ima clock Display of IMA clock mode setting information

Shows IMA clock mode setting information.

Input format show ima clock [P1]

Parameter P1: Line module number (1 to 12) (Multiple values can be specified.) * If P1 is omitted, IMA clock mode information on all line modules whose line module type is ATMP or to which ATMP line module is installed is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example Switch@1# show ima clock 2-6 Transmit Clock Mode Information =============================== Slot Mode ---------- 2 itc 3 itc 4 ctc 5 ctc 6 itc Switch@1#

Output items Slot: Line module number Mode: Transmit clock mode

ctc: Common Transmit Clock mode itc: Independent Transmit Clock mode

Related command

set ima clock Setting of IMA clock mode

ATM-IMA

16-12

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

loopback ima Starting and result display of IMA loopback test

Starts an IMA loopback test and shows the result.

Input format loopback ima P1 P2

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (single specification) P2: Test pattern (0 to 254) (single specification)

Default value None

Usage condition An IMA group must be set in advance for the port (line) to which the loopback test is performed.

Note Enter Ctrl+C to suspend the test.

Input example *Switch@1# loopback ima 10/1 123 result 10/1 time=30ms test ok result 10/8 time=40ms test ok result 10/2 timeout result 10/3 timeout result 10/4 timeout result 10/5 timeout result 10/6 timeout result 10/7 timeout loopback information for 10/1 IMA-ID 1 test pattern 123 group ports = 8 : ok = 2 : fail = 6 (75% failure) minimum = 30msec, maximum = 40msec, average = 35msec *Switch@1#

ATM-IMA

16-13

Output items Result display per port result a/b: Test slot/port number time=XXXms: Time required for the test (This item is displayed only when the test result is test ok.1) {result message} : Result (see below)

test ok: Normal end time out: Test result timeout (5 seconds) abort: Suspension by Ctrl+C entry

Statistics display

loopback information for a/b: Tested slot/port number IMA ID = N: IMA ID to which the tested port (line) belongs test pattern = X: Value of test pattern used for test group ports = Y: Number of tested IMA group ports (including the loopback start port specified in P1) ok: Number of ports whose test result is OK fail: Number of ports whose test result is NG (time out or abort) (Z% failure): Rate of unsuccessful loopback test {fail} / {group ports} x 100

minimum = XXXmsec: Minimum test time maximum = YYYmsec: Maximum test time average = ZZZmsec: Average test time

Related command

set ima group Setting of IMA group

ATM-IMA

16-14

(Blank page)

TDM-Path

17-1

17 TDM-Path

TDM-Path

17-2

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set tdm group Setting of TDM group

Sets a TDM group.

Input formats - For TDMP line module set tdm group P1 P2 (e1 | t1) P3 P4

- For TDMP155 line module set tdm group P1 P2 (sdh | sonet) P3 P4 P5

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (single specification) P2: Frame type {e1 | t1 | sdh | sonet}

e1: Specification for E1 mode t1: Specification for T1 mode sdh: Specification for SDH mode sonnet: : Specification for SONET mode

• When e1 or t1 is specified in P2 P3: Group number or group name

Group number (single specification) E1 mode: 1 to 32 T1 mode: 1 to 24 Group name (1 to 32 characters)

P4: Time slot number E1 mode (0 to 31) (Multiple values can be specified.) * 0 can be specified only when unframed. T1 mode: 1 to 24 (Multiple values can be specified.)


SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3 SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4

P4: Group number or group name Group number (single specification) SDH mode: 1 to 32 SONET mode: 1 to 24 Group name (1 to 32 characters)

P5: Time slot number SDH mode (0 to 31) (Multiple values can be specified.) * 0 can be specified only when unframed. SONET mode: 1 to 24 (Multiple values can be specified.)

Default value None

TDM-Path

17-3

Usage conditions

tdm must be set in the TDMP line mode setting or the TDMP155 line mode setting in advance. Time slot numbers, group numbers, or group names already set to a group within the same port (line) cannot be used. When the frame type is set to E1 or SDH mode, the frame format must be set to unframed to use time slot number 0.

Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set tdm group 1/1 e1 1 1 *Switch@1# set tdm group 2/1 e1 1 0-31 *Switch@1# set tdm group 12/8 t1 24 1-24 *Switch@1# set tdm group 3/1 sdh 1/1/1 1 1 *Switch@1# set tdm group 4/1 sonet 1/7/4 SONET_1 1-24

Output item

Related commands

set line mode tdmp Setting of TDMP line mode set line mode tdmp155 Setting of TDMP155 line mode set port logical-interface Setting of TDMP155 port logical interface set port impedance Setting of impedance set tdm group-name Setting of TDM group name set tdm path Setting of TDM path show tdm group Display of TDM group setting information clear tdm group Clearing of TDM group

TDM-Path

17-4

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show tdm group Display of TDM group setting information

Shows TDM group setting information.

Input formats - For TDMP line module show tdm group [ P1 [ P3 ] ]

- For TDMP155 line module show tdm group [ P1 [P2 [P3] ] ]

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (single specification) P2: Logical port number

SDH: 1-3 /1-7 / 1-3 SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4 * If P2 is omitted, TDM group setting information on all TDM groups set to the ports (lines) specified in P1 is shown.

P3: Group number or group name Group number (Multiple values can be specified.) E1 mode: 1 to 32 T1 mode: 1 to 24 SDH mode: 1 to 32 SONET mode: 1 to 24 Group name (1 to 32 characters) * If P3 is omitted in the E1 or T1 mode, TDM group setting information on all TDM groups set to the port (line) specified in P1 is shown. * If P3 is omitted in the SDH or SONET mode, TDM group setting information on all TDM groups set to the port (line) specified in P1 and the logical port number specified in P2 is shown.

* If all parameters are omitted, TDM group setting information on all ports (lines) set to the TDM mode is shown.

Default value None


Note Specify P2 when a TDMP155 line module is installed.

TDM-Path

17-5

Input examples *Switch@1# show tdm group TDM Group Registration Table ============================ Logical Port Port Group Name Time Slot Type ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 1/1 --- 1 1-32 e1 1/2 --- 1 CX2600_220_MBH_E1_GROUP_AAAAAAAA 1-32 e1 4/1 3/1/1 32 CX2600_220_MBH_SDH_GROUP_BBBBBBB 1 sdh 12/1 1/3/4 24 CX2600_220_MBH_SONET_GROUP_CCCCC 1-24 sonet *Switch@1#

Output items Port: Port (line) number Logical Port: Logical port number Group: Group number Name: Group name Time Slot: Time slot number Type: Frame type

e1/sdh or t1/sonet Related commands

set tdm group Setting of TDM group clear tdm group Clearing of TDM group

TDM-Path

17-6

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear tdm group Clearing of TDM group

Clears a TDM group.

Input formats - For TDMP line module clear tdm group P1 [P2 (e1 | t1) P3]

- For TDMP155 line module clear tdm group P1 P2 (sdh | sonet) P3 [P4]


e1: Specification for E1 mode t1: Specification for T1 mode sdh: Specification for SDH mode sonet: Specification for SONET mode


Group number (single specification) E1 mode: 1 to 32 T1 mode: 1 to 24 Group name (1 to 32 characters) * If P2 and P3 are omitted, all TDM groups set to the port (line) specified in P1 and the frame type specified in P2 are cleared.

• When sdh or sonet is specified in P2 P3: Logical port number P4: Group number or group name

Group number (single specification) SDH mode: 1 to 32 SONET mode: 1 to 24 Group name (1 to 32 characters) * If P4 is omitted, all TDM groups set to the port (line) specified in P1, the frame type specified in P2, and the logical port number specified in P3 are cleared.

Default value None

Usage conditions

tdm must be set in the TDMP line mode setting or the TDMP155 line mode setting in advance. If a group to which a TDM path is set is specified, an error occurs.

Note If P2, P3 (when E1 or T1), or P4 (when SDH or SONET) is omitted, execution is verified after the command entry.

TDM-Path

17-7

Input examples *Switch@1# clear tdm group 1/1 e1 1 *Switch@1# clear tdm group 1/1 sdh 2/5/1 32 *Switch@1# clear tdm group 8/5 e1 E1_GROUP_1 *Switch@1# clear tdm group 12/8 Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y *Switch@1# clear tdm group 12/1 sonet 1/7/4 Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set line mode tdmp Setting of TDMP line mode set line mode tdmp155 Setting of TDMP155 line mode set tdm path Setting of TDM path set tdm group-name Setting of TDM group name set tdm group Setting of TDM group show tdm group Display of TDM group setting information

TDM-Path

17-8

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set tdm group-name Setting of TDM group name

Sets a group name for a TDM group.

Input formats - For TDMP line module set tdm group-name P1 P2 (e1 | t1) P3 P5

- For TDMP155 line module set tdm group-name P1 P2 (sdh | sonet) P3 P4 P5



• When e1 or t1 is specified in P2 P3: Group number

E1 mode: 1 to 32 T1 mode: 1 to 24


SDH: 1-3 /1-7 / 1-3 SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4

P4: Group number SDH mode: 1 to 32 SONET mode: 1 to 24

P5 Group name (1 to 32 characters)

Default value None

Usage condition The TDMP line mode or the TDMP155 line mode must be set in advance.

Note If a command that changes the frame type is entered in the TDMP line mode setting or the TDMP155 line mode setting, the TDM group name of the line module is cleared.

Input examples *Switch@1# set tdm group-name 1/1 e1 1 E1GROUP_1 *Switch@1# set tdm group-name 3/1 sdh 1/1/1 3 SDHGROUP_1

Output item

TDM-Path

17-9

Related commands

set line mode tdmp Setting of TDMP line mode set line mode tdmp155 Setting of TDMP155 line mode set port logical-interface Setting of TDMP155 port logical interface set tdm path Setting of TDM path set tdm group Setting of TDM group show tdm group Display of TDM group setting information clear tdm group Clearing of TDM group show tdm group-name Display of TDM group name setting clear tdm group-name Clearing of TDM group name setting

TDM-Path

17-10

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show tdm group-name Display of TDM group name setting

Shows the group name setting for a TDM group.

Input formats - For TDMP line module show tdm group-name [P1 [P3]]

- For TDMP155 line module show tdm group-name [P1 [P2 [P3]]]


SDH: 1-3 /1-7 / 1-3 SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4 * If P2 is omitted, the group name setting on all TDM groups set to the ports (lines) specified in P1 is shown.

P3: Group number or group name Group number (multiple specification) E1 mode: 1 to 32 T1 mode: 1 to 24 SDH mode: 1 to 32 SONET mode: 1 to 24 Group name (1 to 32 characters) * If P3 is omitted in the E1 or T1 mode, the group name setting on all TDM groups set to the ports (lines) specified in P1 is shown. * If P3 is omitted in the SDH or SONET mode, the group name setting on all TDM groups set to the ports (lines) specified in P1 and the logical port number specified in P2 is shown.

* If all parameters are omitted, the group name setting on all ports (lines) set to the TDM mode is shown.

Default value None


Note None

TDM-Path

17-11

Input example *Switch@1# *Switch@1# show tdm group-name TDM Group Name Table ==================== Logical Port Port Group Name ------------------------------------------------------ 1/8 --- 1 CX2600_220_MBH_GROUP_NAME_AAAAAA 7/1 3/7/3 32 CX2600_220_SDH_GROUP_NAME_BBBBBB 12/1 3/7/4 24 CX2600_220_SONET_GROUP_NAME_CCCC *Switch@1#

Output items Port: Port (line) number Logical Port: Logical port number Group: Group number Name: Group name

Related commands

set tdm group Setting of TDM group set tdm group-name Setting of TDM group name clear tdm group-name Clearing of TDM group name setting

TDM-Path

17-12

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear tdm group-name Clearing of TDM group name setting

Clears group name setting for a TDM group.

Input formats - For TDMP line module clear tdm group-name P1 P2 (e1 | t1) [P3]

- For TDMP155 line module clear tdm group-name P1 P2 (sdh | sonet) P3 [P4]






SDH: 1-3 /1-7 / 1-3 SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4


Default value None

Usage conditions

The TDMP line mode or the TDMP155 line mode must be set in advance. When a group name is specified, an error occurs when the group name does not exist.

Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# clear tdm group-name 1/1 sdh 1/1/1 1 *Switch@1# clear tdm group-name 1/1 sonet 1/1/1 *Switch@1#

Output item

TDM-Path

17-13

Related commands

set line mode tdmp Setting of TDMP line mode set line mode tdmp155 Setting of TDMP155 line mode set tdm group Setting of TDM group show tdm group Display of TDM group setting information set tdm group-name Setting of TDM group name show tdm group-name Display of TDM group name setting

TDM-Path

17-14

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set tdm path Setting of TDM path

Sets a TDM path.

Input formats - Path setting between TDMP line modules set tdm path P1 [P3] P4 [P6]

- Path setting between TDMP155 line modules set tdm path P1 P2 [P3] P4 P5 [P6]

- Path setting from TDMP line module to TDMP155 line module set tdm path P1 [P3] P4 P5 [P6]

- Path setting from TDMP155 line module to TDMP line module set tdm path P1 P2 [P3] P4 [P6]


SDH: 1-3 /1-7 / 1-3 SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4

P3: Group number or group name Group number (multiple specification) E1 mode: 1 to 32 T1 mode: 1 to 24 SDH mode: 1 to 32 SONET mode: 1 to 24 * If group number is omitted, 1 is assumed. Group name (1 to 32 characters)

P4: Port (line) number of path destination (single specification) P5: Logical port (line) number of path destination

SDH: 1-3 /1-7 / 1-3 SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4

P6: Group number or group name of path destination Group number (single specification) E1 mode: 1 to 32 T1 mode: 1 to 24 SDH mode: 1 to 32 SONET mode: 1 to 24 * If group number is omitted, 1 is assumed. Group name (1 to 32 characters)

Default value None

TDM-Path

17-15

Usage conditions

tdm must be set in the TDMP line mode setting or the TDMP155 line mode setting in advance. If a group number or group name to which a TDM group is not set, an error occurs. If a group to which a TDM path has already been set is specified, an error occurs. If a TDM path is set within the same port (line) or the same logical port, an error occurs.If groups with different frame type each other are specified, an error occurs. A path can be set only to groups with the same number of time slots.

Note Two TDM groups are created to set a TDM path.

Input example *Switch@1# set tdm path 1/1 1 2/1 1 *Switch@1 set tdm path 1/1 2/1 1/1/3 *Switch@1 set tdm path 1/1 GROUP_NUM_1 2/1 2 *Switch@1

Output item

Related commands

set line mode tdmp Setting of TDMP line mode set line mode tdmp155 Setting of TDMP155 line mode set port logical-interface Setting of TDMP155 port logical interface set tdm group Setting of TDM group set tdm group-name Setting of TDM group name show tdm path Display of TDM path setting information clear tdm path Clearing of TDM path

TDM-Path

17-16

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show tdm path Display of TDM path setting information

Shows TDM path setting information.

Input formats - For TDMP line module show tdm path [P1 [P3]]

- For TDMP155 line module show tdm path [P1 [P2 [P3]]]


SDH: 1-3 /1-7 / 1-3 SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4

P3: Group number or group name Group number (Multiple values can be specified.) E1 mode: 1 to 32 T1 mode: 1 to 24 SDH mode: 1 to 32 SONET mode: 1 to 24 Group name (1 to 32 characters) * If P3 is omitted in the E1 or T1 mode, TDM path setting information on all TDM paths set to the port (line) specified in P1 is shown. * If P3 is omitted in the SDH or SONET mode, TDM path setting information on all TDM paths set to the port (line) specified in P1 or the logical port number specified in P2 is shown.

* If all parameters are omitted, TDM path setting information on all ports (lines) set to the TDM mode is shown.

Default value None


Notes Information is displayed based on the small port (line) number with TDM path setting. side-A and side-B displayed in the side column indicate the pair of the TDM path setting.

Input examples *Switch@1# show tdm path TDM Path Connection Table ========================= Logical Port Port Group Name Time Slot Type Side -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1/1 --- 1 CX2600_220_MBH_E1_GROUP_NAME_AAA 1-16 e1 side-A 12/1 --- 32 12345678901234567890123456789012 16-31 e1 side-B 2/1 1/1/1 24 CX2600_220_MBH_SONET_GROUP_BBBBB 1-24 sonet side-A 4/1 2/2/2 1 CX2600_220_MBH_SONET_GROUP_CCCCC 1-24 sonet side-B *Switch@1#@1#

TDM-Path

17-17

Output items Port: Port (line) number Logical Port: Logical port number Group: Group number Name: TDM group name Time Slot: Time slot number

Time slot number or unstructured Type: Frame type

e1/sdh or t1/sonet Side: side-A or side-B

Related commands

set tdm group-name Setting of TDM group name set tdm path Setting of TDM path clear tdm path Clearing of TDM path

TDM-Path

17-18

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear tdm path Clearing of TDM path

Clears a TDM path.

Input formats - For TDMP line module clear tdm path P1 [ P3 ]

- For TDMP155 line module clear tdm path P1 P2 [ P3 ]


SDH: 1-3 /1-7 / 1-3 SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4

P3: Group number or group name Group number (single specification) E1 mode: 1 to 32 T1 mode: 1 to 24 SDH mode: 1 to 32 SONET mode: 1 to 24 Group name (1 to 32 characters) * If P3 is omitted in the E1 or T1 mode, all TDM paths set to the port (line) specified in P1 are cleared. * If P3 is omitted in the SDH or SONET mode, all TDM paths set to the port (line) specified in P1 or the logical port number specified in P2 are cleared.

Input format clear tdm path P1 [P2]

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (single specification) P2: Group number (single specification)

E1 mode: 1 to 32 T1 mode: 1 to 24 * If P2 is omitted, all TDM paths set for the line specified in P1 are cleared.

Default value None

Usage condition tdm must be set in the TDMP line mode setting or the TDMP155 line mode setting in advance.

Note To clear a TDM path setting, specify one from the port (line) number, the group number, or the group number used for the TDM path setting. (Specifying the port (line) number, the group number, or the group name clears the TDM path setting.) If P3 is omitted, execution is verified after the command entry.

TDM-Path

17-19

Input examples *Switch@1# clear tdm path 1/1 1 *Switch@1# clear tdm path 1/1 GROUP_NUM_1 *Switch@1# clear tdm path 12/8 Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y

Output item

Related commands

set line mode tdmp Setting of TDMP line mode set line mode tdmp155 Setting of TDMP155 line mode set tdm group Setting of TDM group set tdm group-name Setting of TDM group name set tdm path Setting of TDM path show tdm path Display of TDM path setting information

TDM-Path

17-20

(Blank page)

TDM over Packet

18-1

18 TDM over Packet

TDM over Packet

18-2

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set tdmop mode Setting of TDMoP mode

Sets the TDMoP mode.

Input formats - Metro Ethernet Forum setting set tdmop mode P1 P2 P3 [P4] [P5]

- UDP over IP setting set tdmop mode P1 P2 P3 P4 [P5] [P6]

Parameters P1: Line module number (1 to 12) (single specification) P2: TDMoP operation mode {satop | cesopsn}

satop: SAToP cesopsn: CESoPSN

P3: Packet format {mef | udp-ip} mef: MEF8 udp-ip: UDP over IP

• When mef is specified in P3 P4: Number of sent frames

* If P4 is omitted, 8 is set. P5: RTP header setting {rtp_on | rtp_off}

rtp_on: With RTP header rtp_off : Without RTP header * If P5 is omitted, rtp_on is set.

• When udp-ip is specified in P3 P4: Source IP address P5: Number of sent frames

* If P5 is omitted, 8 is set. P6: RTP header setting {rtp_on | rtp_off}

rtp_on: With RTP header rtp_off : Without RTP header * If P6 is omitted, rtp_on is set.

Default value P4: 8, P5: rtp_on (P3=mef)

P5: 8, P6: rtp_on (P3=rtp_on)

Usage conditions

TDMP/TDMP 155 line mode must have been set to none. You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx, and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx as the manager IP address. (“xxx” is any numeric character.) You cannot set 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 as the network address.

Note None

TDM over Packet

18-3

Input example *Switch@1# set tdmop mode 1 cesopsn mef 5 rtp_off *Switch@1# set tdmop mode 2 satop udp-ip 192.168.2.2 7 rtp_on *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set line mode tdmp Setting of TDMP line mode set line mode tdmp155 Setting of TDMP155 line mode set port logical-interface Setting of TDMP155 port logical interface set tdmop group Setting of TDMoP group set tdmop jitter Setting of variation tolerance set tdmop adaptive-clock Setting of adaptive clock set tdmop format Setting of TDMoP format set tdmop connection Setting of TDMoP connection set tdmop admin Setting of TDMoP blocking/unblocking clear tdmop mode Clearing of TDMoP mode setting show tdmop format Display of TDMoP format setting

TDM over Packet

18-4

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear tdmop mode Clearing of TDMoP mode setting

Clears the settings of a TDMoP mode.

Input format clear tdmop mode P1

Parameter P1: Line module number (1 to 12) (single specification)

Default value None

Usage condition TDMP/TDMP 155 line mode must have been set to none.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear tdmop mode 1 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set line mode tdmp Setting of TDMP line mode set line mode tdmp155 Setting of TDMP155 line mode set tdmop mode Setting of TDMoP mode

TDM over Packet

18-5

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set tdmop group Setting of TDMoP group

Sets a TDMoP group.

Input formats - For TDMP line module set tdmop group P1 P2 (e1 | t1) P3 P4

- For TDMP155 line module set tdmop group P1 P2 (sdh | sonet) P3 P4 P5





P4: Time slot number E1 mode To specify time slot numbers: 1 to 31 (Multiple values can be specified.) To specify all the time slots: all T1 mode To specify time slot numbers: 1 to 24 (Multiple values can be specified.) To specify all the time slots: all


SDH: 1-3 /1-7 / 1-3 SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4


P5: Time slot number SDH mode To specify time slot numbers: 1 to 31 (Multiple values can be specified.) To specify all the time slots: all SONET mode To specify time slot numbers: 1 to 24 (Multiple values can be specified.) To specify all the time slots: all

TDM over Packet

18-6

Default value None

Usage conditions

TDMP/TDMP 155 line mode must have been set to tdmop. If 121 or more TDMoP groups is specified for a TDMP line module, an error occurs. If 85 or more TDMoP groups is specified for a TDMP155 line module, an error occurs. * Up to 28 groups can be specified for a TUG-3 or a STS-1. To specify a timeslot number, TDMoP operation mode must be set to CESoPSN mode by using the "set tdmop mode" command. A timeslot number or group number that has been set for another group in an identical line cannot be specified.

Notes Variation tolerance is set to the default value.

Input examples *Switch@1# set tdmop group 1/1 e1 1 1-32 *Switch@1# set tdmop group 12/1 t1 1 1-24 *Switch@1# set tdmop group 12/7 t1 1 all *Switch@1# set tdmop group 2/1 sdh 1/2/1 1 all *Switch@1# set tdmop group 6/1 sonet 1/1/1 SONET_1 all

Output item

Related commands

set line mode tdmp Setting of TDMP line mode set line mode tdmp155 Setting of TDMP155 line mode set port logical-interface Setting of TDMP155 port logical interface set port impedance Setting of impedance set tdmop mode Setting of TDMoP mode set tdmop jitter Setting of variation tolerance set tdmop adaptive-clock Setting of adaptive clock set tdmop format Setting of TDMoP format set tdmop connection Setting of TDMoP connection set tdmop admin Setting of TDMoP blocking/unblocking set tdm group-name Setting of TDM group name show tdmop information Display of TDMoP group setting information clear tdmop group Clearing of TDMoP group

TDM over Packet

18-7

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show tdmop information Display of TDMoP group setting information

Shows TDMoP group setting information.

Input formats - For TDMP line module show tdmop information [P1 [P3]]

- For TDMP155 line module show tdmop information [P1 [P2 [P3]]]

Parameter P1: Port (line) number (single specification) P2: Logical port number

SDH: 1-3 /1-7 / 1-3 SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4 * If P2 is omitted, TDMoP group setting information on all TDMoP groups set for the port (line) number specified in P1 is shown.

P3: Group number or group name Group number (single specification) E1 mode: 1 to 32 T1 mode: 1 to 24 SDH mode: 1 to 32 SONET mode: 1 to 24 Group name (1 to 32 characters) * If P3 is omitted in E1 or T1 mode, TDMoP group setting information on all TDMoP groups set for the port (line) number specified in P1 is shown. * If P3 is omitted in SDH or SONET mode, TDMoP group setting information on all TDMoP groups set for the port (line) number specified in P1 and for the logical port number specified in P2 is shown.

* If all the parameters are omitted, TDMoP group setting information on all ports (lines) set to TDMoP mode is shown.

Default value None


Note None

TDM over Packet

18-8

Input examples *Switch@1# show tdmop information TDMoP Group Count ================= TUG-3/ Slot STS-1 Enabled Disabled Configured Configurable --------------------------------------------------------- 1 1 1 0 1 27 1 2 1 0 1 27 1 3 1 0 1 27 2 --- 1 0 1 119 3 --- 0 1 1 119 4 1 1 0 1 27 4 2 0 0 0 28 4 3 0 0 0 28 TDMoP Group Table ================= Logical Port Port Group Name Time Slot Type ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1/1 1/1/1 1 CX2600_220_MBH_CES_MBH_GROUP_001 all sdh 1/1 2/5/3 32 all sdh 1/1 3/2/2 10 CX2600_220_MBH_SDH_3_1_1_GROUP10 all sdh 2/1 --- 2 all e1 3/1 --- 3 CX2600_220_MBH_CES_MBH_GROUP_007 all t1 4/1 1/7/4 4 CX2600_220_MBH_CES_MBH_GROUP_005 all sonet *Switch@1#

Output items Slot: Line module number TUG-3 / STS-1: TUG-3 or STS-1 Enabled: Number of groups unblocked Disabled: Number of groups blocked Configured: Number of groups that have been set Configurable: Rest number of groups that allowed to be set Port: Port (line) number Logical Port: Logical port number Group: Group number Name: Group name Time Slot: Time slot

Timeslot number(s) or all Type: Frame type

e1/sdh or t1/sonet Related commands

set line mode tdmp Setting of TDMP line mode set line mode tdmp155 Setting of TDMP155 line mode set tdmop admin Setting of TDMoP blocking/unblocking set tdm group-name Setting of TDM group name set tdmop group Setting of TDMoP group clear tdmop group Clearing of TDMoP group

TDM over Packet

18-9

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear tdmop group Clearing of TDMoP group

Clears a TDMoP group.

Input formats - For TDMP line module clear tdmop group P1 [P2(e1 | t1) P3]

- For TDMP155 line module clear tdmop group P1 P2(sdh | sonet) P3 [P4]





* If both of P2 and P3 are omitted, TDMoP group setting information on all TDMoP groups set for the port (line) number specified in P1 is cleared.


SDH: 1-3 /1-7 / 1-3 SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4

P4: Group number or group name Group number (single specification) SDH mode: 1 to 32 SONET mode: 1 to 24 Group name (1 to 32 characters) * If P4 is omitted, TDMoP group setting information on all TDMoP groups set for the port (line) number specified in P1, with the frame type specified in P2 and for the logical port specified in P3 is cleared.

Default value None

Usage conditions

TDMP/TDMP 155 line mode must have been set to tdmop. If a group to which any of the following is set is specified, an error occurs..

set tdmop format set tdmop connection

TDM over Packet

18-10

Notes If a group to which variation tolerance has been set is cleared, the variation tolerance returns to the default value. If a group to which adaptive clock has been set is cleared, adaptive clock setting for the group is also cleared automatically. If P3 and P4 are omitted, execution is verified after the command entry.

Input examples *Switch@1# clear tdmop group 1/1 e1 1 *Switch@1# clear tdmop group 5/8 t1 T1_01 *Switch@1# clear tdmop group 7/1 sdh 3/3/3 Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y *Switch@1# clear tdmop group 12/8 Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y

Output item

Related commands

set line mode tdmp Setting of TDMP line mode set line mode tdmp155 Setting of TDMP155 line mode set tdmop connection Setting of TDMoP connection set tdmop format Setting of TDMoP format set tdmop jitter Setting of variation tolerance set tdmop adaptive-clock Setting of adaptive clock set reference-clock priority Setting of reference clock priority set tdm group-name Setting of TDM group name set tdmop group Setting of TDMoP group show tdmop information Display of TDMoP group setting information

TDM over Packet

18-11

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set tdmop connection Setting of TDMoP connection

Sets a TDMoP connection.

Input formats - Connection between TDMP line modules set tdmop connection P1 P3 P4 P5 P7 P8 P9 [P10]

- Connection between TDMP155 line modules set tdmop connection P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 [P10]

- Connection from a TDMP line module to a TDMP155 line module set tdmop connection P1 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 [P10]

- Connection from a TDMP155 line module to a TDMP line module set tdmop connection P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P7 P8 P9 [P10]


SDH: 1-3 /1-7 / 1-3 SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4

P3: Group number or group name Group number (single specification) E1 mode: 1 to 32 T1 mode: 1 to 24 SDH mode: 1 to 32 SONET mode: 1 to 24 Group name (1 to 32 characters)

P4: ECID (1 to1048575) P5: Loopback destination line number (single specification) P6: Loopback destination port number

SDH: 1-3 /1-7 / 1-3 SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4

P7: Group number or group name of Loopback destination Group number (single specification) E1 mode: 1 to 32 T1 mode: 1 to 24 SDH mode: 1 to 32 SONET mode: 1 to 24 Group name (1 to 32 characters)

P8: Loopback destination ECID (1 to1048575) P9: VLAN identifier

VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 VLAN name: 1 to 32 characters

P10: CoS value (0 to 7) * If P10 is omitted, 5 is set.

TDM over Packet

18-12


Usage conditions

If a group to which no TDMoP group is set is specified, an error occurs. If connection setting is executed specifying an identical line during a TDMP line module is installed, an error occurs. If connection setting is executed specifying an identical line and an identical logical port during TDMP155 line mode is applied, an error occurs. If a VLAN ID which is set for ATMoP or the like is specified, an error occurs. If a group to which any of the following is set is specified, an error occurs.


Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set tdmop connection 1/1 1 100 12/8 32 101 1000 7 *Switch@1# set tdmop connection 1/2 10 1 1/8 18 2 4094 *Switch@1# 4/1 1/1/1 1 100 5/1 1/2/3 1 10 4094 2 *Switch@1# set tdmop connection 6/1 1/1/1 GRP_1 100 10/5 GRP_5 10 3000 2

Output item

Related commands

set line mode tdmp Setting of TDMP line mode set line mode tdmp155 Setting of TDMP155 line mode set port logical-interface Setting of TDMP155 port logical interface set tdmop mode Setting of TDMoP mode set tdmop group Setting of TDMoP group set tdm group-name Setting of TDM group name set tdmop jitter Setting of variation tolerance set tdmop adaptive-clock Setting of adaptive clock set tdmop format Setting of TDMoP format set tdmop admin Setting of TDMoP blocking/unblocking show tdmop connection Display of TDMoP connection setting clear tdmop connection Clearing of TDMoP connection

TDM over Packet

18-13

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show tdmop connection Display of TDMoP connection setting

Shows the setting of a TDMoP connection.

Input formats - For TDMP line module show tdmop connection [P1 [P3]]

- For TDMP155 line module show tdmop connection [P1 [P2 [P3]]]


SDH: 1-3 /1-7 / 1-3 SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4

P3: Group number or group name Group number (single specification) E1 mode: 1 to 32 T1 mode: 1 to 24 SDH mode: 1 to 32 SONET mode: 1 to 24 Group name (1 to 32 characters) * If P3 is omitted in E1 or T1 mode, TDMoP connection setting information on all connections set for the port (line) number specified in P1 is shown. * If P3 is omitted in SDH or SONET mode, TDMoP connection setting information on all connections set for the port (line) number specified in P1 and for the logical port number specified in P2 is shown.

* If all the parameters are omitted, TDMoP connection setting information on all ports (lines) to which TDMoP connections are set is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show tdmop connection TDMoP Connection Table ====================== Logical Logical Port Port Group ECID Port Port Group ECID VID CoS ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 1/1 1/1/1 1 100 4/5 --- 21 100 4094 7 3/1 --- 3 10000 8/1 2/3/2 4 3000 1000 7 *Switch@1#

TDM over Packet

18-14

Output items Port: Port (line) number Logical Port: Logical port number Group: Group number VID: VLAN ID CoS: CoS value ECID: ECID value

Related commands

set tdmop connection Setting of TDMoP connection clear tdmop connection Clearing of TDMoP connection

TDM over Packet

18-15

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear tdmop connection Clearing of TDMoP connection

Clears the setting of a TDMoP connection.

Input formats - For TDMP line module clear tdmop connection P1 [P3]

- For TDMP155 line module clear tdmop connection P1 P2 [P3]


SDH: 1-3 /1-7 / 1-3 SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4

P3: Group number or group name Group number (single specification) E1 mode: 1 to 32 T1 mode: 1 to 24 SDH mode: 1 to 32 SONET mode: 1 to 24 Group name (1 to 32 characters) * If P3 is omitted in E1 or T1 mode, TDMoP connection setting information on all connections set for the port (line) number specified in P1 is cleared. * If P3 is omitted in SDH or SONET mode, TDMoP connection setting information on all connections set for the port (line) number specified in P1 and for the logical port number specified in P2 is cleared.

Default value None

Usage condition TDMP/TDMP 155 line mode must have been set to tdmop.

Notes If P3 is omitted, execution is verified after the command entry. If setting of a TDMoP connection is cleared, connection setting of the loopback destination of the cleared connection is also cleared automatically. If the TDMoP is blocked, it is automatically unblocked.

Input examples *Switch@1# clear tdmop connection 1/1 1 *Switch@1# clear tdmop connection 12/8 Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y

Output item

Related commands

set tdm group-name Setting of TDM group name set tdmop admin Setting of TDMoP blocking/unblocking set tdmop connection Setting of TDMoP connection show tdmop connection Display of TDMoP connection setting

TDM over Packet

18-16

TDM over Packet

18-17

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set tdmop jitter Setting of variation tolerance

Sets variation tolerance.

Input formats - For TDMP line module set tdmop jitter P1 P3 P4

- For TDMP155 line module set tdmop jitter P1 P2 P3 P4


SDH: 1-3 /1-7 / 1-3 SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4


P4: jitter value (variation) tolerance {2ms | 4ms | 8ms | 16ms | 32ms | 64ms | 128ms} 2ms: 2ms 4ms: 4ms 8ms: 8ms 16ms: 16ms 32ms: 32ms 64ms: 64ms 128ms: 128ms

Default value P4: 4ms

Usage conditions

Only a group number or a group name to which a TDMoP group is set can be specified.If variation tolerance is set to a group to which the following commands have been executed, an error occurs.


* However, setting is available even under the above conditions when blocking/unblocking setting of the TDMoP is blocked.

Notes If a TDMoP group is set, the variation tolerance is set back to the default value. If a TDMoP group is cleared, the variation tolerance is set back to the default value. To return to the default value, enter the command specifying 4ms in P4.

Input example *Switch@1# set tdmop jitter 1/1 1 16ms *Switch@1 set tdmop jitter 2/1 2/2/2 1 4ms

TDM over Packet

18-18

Output item

Related commands

set line mode tdmp Setting of TDMP line mode set line mode tdmp155 Setting of TDMP155 line mode set port logical-interface Setting of TDMP155 port logical interface set tdmop mode Setting of TDMoP mode set tdmop group Setting of TDMoP group set tdm group-name Setting of TDM group name clear tdmop group Clearing of TDMoP group set tdmop adaptive-clock Setting of adaptive clock set tdmop format Setting of TDMoP format set tdmop connection Setting of TDMoP connection set tdmop admin Setting of TDMoP blocking/unblocking show tdmop jitter Display of variation tolerance

TDM over Packet

18-19

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show tdmop jitter Display of variation tolerance

Shows variation tolerance.

Input formats - For TDMP line module show tdmop jitter [P1 [P3]]

- For TDMP155 line module show tdmop jitter [P1 [P2 [P3]]]


SDH: 1-3 /1-7 / 1-3 SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4

P3: Group number or group name Group number (single specification) E1 mode: 1 to 32 T1 mode: 1 to 24 SDH mode: 1 to 32 SONET mode: 1 to 24 Group name (1 to 32 characters) * If P3 is omitted in E1 or T1 mode, variation tolerance on all TDMoP groups set for the port (line) number specified in P1 is shown. * If P3 is omitted in SDH or SONET mode, variation tolerance on all TDMoP groups set for the port (line) number specified in P1 and for the logical port number specified in P2 is shown.

* If all the parameters are omitted, variation tolerance on all lines set to TDMoP mode is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# show tdmop jitter TDMoP Jitter Configuration ========================== Logical Port Port Group Jitter ----------------------------- 1/1 1/1/1 1 32ms 1/1 1/1/2 2 16ms 1/1 1/1/3 15 8ms : : 12/8 --- 32 2ms *Switch@1#

TDM over Packet

18-20

Output items Port: Port (line) number Logical Port: Logical port number Group: Group number Jitter: Variation tolerance

Related commands

set tdmop group Setting of TDMoP group set tdmop group-name Setting of TDMoP group name set tdmop jitter Setting of variation tolerance

TDM over Packet

18-21

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show tdmop status Display of TDMoP path setting status information

Shows TDMoP path setting status information.

Input formats - For TDMP line module show tdmop status [P1 [P3]]

- For TDMP155 line module show tdmop status [P1 [P2 [P3]]]


SDH: 1-3 /1-7 / 1-3 SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4 * If P2 is omitted, TDMoP path setting status information on all TDMoP groups set for the port (line) number specified in P1 is shown.

P3: Group number or group name Group number (single specification) E1 mode: 1 to 32 T1 mode: 1 to 24 SDH mode: 1 to 32 SONET mode: 1 to 24 Group name (1 to 32 characters) * If P3 is omitted in E1 or T1 mode, TDMoP path setting status information on all TDMoP groups set for the port (line) number specified in P1 is shown. * If P3 is omitted in SDH or SONET mode, TDMoP path setting status information on all TDMoP groups set for the port (line) number specified in P1 and for the logical port number specified in P2 is shown.

* If all the parameters are omitted, TDMoP path setting status information on all ports (lines) to which TDMoP groups are set is shown.

Default value None


Note None

TDM over Packet

18-22

Input examples *Switch@1# show tdmop status TDMoP Status Table ================== Logical Port Port Group Underrun Admin ---------------------------------------- 1/1 --- 1 normal enabled 5/1 1/1/1 1 normal enabled 5/1 2/2/2 2 fault disabled 12/8 --- 24 fault disabled *Switch@1#

Output items Port: Port (line) number Logical Port: Logical port number Group: Group number Underrun: Buffer Underrun status

norma: Buffer Underrun not occurred fault: Buffer Underrun occurred

Admin: TDMoP blocking/unblocking setting enabled: Unblocked disabled: Blocked

Related commands

set tdmop group-name Setting of TDMoP group name set tdmop group Setting of TDMoP group set tdmop admin Setting of TDMoP blocking

TDM over Packet

18-23

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set tdmop format Setting of TDMoP format

Sets a TDMoP format.

Input formats - For TDMP line module (MEF8 mode) set tdmop format P1 P3 P4 P5 [P6] P7

- For TDMP line module (UDP over IP mode) set tdmop format P1 P3 P4 P5 [P6] P7 P8 [P9] [P10] [P11]

- For TDMP155 line module (MEF8 mode) set tdmop format P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 [P6] P7

- For TDMP155 line module (UDP over IP mode) set tdmop format P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 [P6] P7 P8 [P9] [P10] [P11]

TDM over Packet

18-24


SDH: 1-3 /1-7 / 1-3 SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4


P4: Destination MAC address P5: VLAN identifier 1 {VLAN ID | VLAN name}

VLAN ID (1 to 4094) VLAN name (1 to 32 characters)

P6: CoS value (0 to 7) * When P6 is omitted, 5 is assumed.

• When MEF8 is set for the packet format P7: ECID

ecid 1 to 1048575 • When UDP over IP is set for the packet format

P7: Source UDP port number src-udp 1024 to 65535

P8: Destination IP address P9: Destination UDP port number

dst-udp 1024 to 65535 * When P9 is omitted, 2142 is assumed.

P10: TTL ttl 1 to 255 * When P10 is omitted, 128 is assumed.

P11: DSCP dscp 0 to 63 * When P11 is omitted, 46 is assumed.

Default values P6: 5, P9: 2142, P10: 128, P11: 46

Usage conditions

A TDMoP format can be set only to a group number or a group name to which a TDMoP group is set. If a VLAN ID which is set for ATMoP or the like is specified, an error occurs. You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx or 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx as the IP address. (”xxx” is any numeric character.) You cannot set network address of 192.168.128.0/24 or 192.168.129.0/24. If you specify the same destination IP address as the source IP address, an error occurs. The ECID must be unique in an identical line module. If a group to which any of the following is set is specified, an error occurs.


TDM over Packet

18-25

Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set tdmop format 1/1 1 00:00:00:00:00:01 1000 7 ecid 10 *Switch@1# set tdmop format 1/1 5 00:00:00:00:00:01 1000 7 src-udp 65535 192.168.2.2 dst-udp 65535 ttl 255 dscp 63

Output item

Related commands

set line mode tdmp Setting of TDMP line mode set line mode tdmp155 Setting of TDMP155 line mode set port logical-interface Setting of TDMP155 port logical interface set tdmop mode Setting of TDMoP mode set tdmop group Setting of TDMoP group set tdm group-name Setting of TDM group name set tdmop jitter Setting of variation tolerance set tdmop adaptive-clock Setting of adaptive clock set tdmop connection Setting of TDMoP connection set vlan name Setting of VLAN name set atmop format Setting of ATMoP format show tdmop format Display of TDMoP format setting clear tdmop format Clearing of TDMoP format

TDM over Packet

18-26

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show tdmop format Display of TDMoP format setting

Shows the TDMoP format setting.

Input formats - For TDMP line module show tdmop format [P1 [P3]]

- For TDMP155 line module show tdmop format [P1 [P2 [P3]]]


SDH: 1-3 /1-7 / 1-3 SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4 * If P2 is omitted, setting information of all TDMoP formats set for the port (line) number specified in P1 is shown.

P3: Group number or group name Group number (single specification) E1 mode: 1 to 32 T1 mode: 1 to 24 SDH mode: 1 to 32 SONET mode: 1 to 24 Group name (1 to 32 characters) * If P3 is omitted in E1 or T1 mode, setting information of all TDMoP formats set for the port (line) number specified in P1 is shown. * If P3 is omitted in SDH or SONET mode, setting information of all TDMoP formats set for the port (line) number specified in P1 and for the logical port number specified in P2 is shown.

* If all the parameters are omitted, TDMoP format setting information on all ports (lines) to which TDMoP formats are set is shown.

Default value None


Note When APS is enabled, the source MAC addresses are displayed in two lines. The character "*" is attached to the display of the enabled one.

TDM over Packet

18-27

Input example *Switch@1# show tdmop format TDMoP Format Table ================== Source TDMoP Packet Source Frame RTP Slot MAC Address Mode Format IP Address Count Header ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 00:30:13:a1:2a:aa satop mef --- 8 off *00:30:13:a1:2a:af 2 00:30:13:a1:2a:ab satop udp-ip 192.168.100.100 8 off TDMoP L2-Header Table ===================== Logical Destination Port Port Group MAC Address VID CoS ECID ----------------------------------------------------------- 1/1 --- 1 00:00:00:00:00:01 1000 7 1048575 2/1 1/1/1 2 00:00:00:00:00:02 2000 6 --- TDMoP L3-Header Table ===================== Logical Source Destination Destination Port Port Group UDP Port IP Address UDP Port TTL DSCP ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 1/1 --- 1 --- --- --- --- --- 2/1 1/1/1 2 --- --- --- --- --- *Switch@1#

Output items Slot: Line module number Source MAC Address: Source MAC address TDMoP Mode: TDMoP operation mode Packet Format: Packet format Source IP Address: Source IP address Frame Count: Number of sent frames RTP Header: RTP header flag

On or off Port: Port (line) number Logical Port: Group: Group number Destination MAC Address: Destination MAC address VID: VLAN ID CoS: CoS value ECID: ECID value Port Port (line) number Logical Port: Group: Group number Source UDP Port: Source UDP port number Destination IP Address: Destination IP address Destination UDP Port: Destination UDP port number TTL: TTL value DSCP:DSCP value

TDM over Packet

18-28

Related commands

set tdmop mode Setting of TDMoP mode set tdm group-name Setting of TDM group name set tdmop format Setting of TDMoP format clear tdmop format Clearing of TDMoP format

TDM over Packet

18-29

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear tdmop format Clearing of TDMoP format

Clears a TDMoP format.

Input formats - For TDMP line module clear tdmop format P1 [P3]

- For TDMP155 line module clear tdmop format P1 P2 [P3]


SDH: 1-3 /1-7 / 1-3 SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4

P3: Group number or group name Group number (single specification) E1 mode: 1 to 32 T1 mode: 1 to 24 SDH mode: 1 to 32 SONET mode: 1 to 24 Group name (1 to 32 characters) * If P3 is omitted in E1 or T1 mode, setting information of all TDMoP formats set for the port (line) number specified in P1 is cleared. * If P3 is omitted in SDH or SONET mode, setting information of all TDMoP formats set for the port (line) number specified in P1 and for the logical port number specified in P2 is cleared.

Default value None

Usage condition TDMP/TDMP 155 line mode must have been set to tdmop.

Notes If P3 is omitted, execution is confirmed after this command is entered. If the blocking/unblocking setting of TDMoP is blocked, it is changed to unblocked automatically.

Input examples *Switch@1# clear tdmop format 1/1 8 *Switch@1# clear tdmop format 1/1 *Switch@1# Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y *Switch@1#

Output item

TDM over Packet

18-30

Related commands

set line mode tdmp Setting of TDMP line mode set line mode tdmp155 Setting of TDMP155 line mode set tdm group-name Setting of TDM group name set tdmop admin Setting of TDMoP blocking/unblocking set tdmop format Setting of TDMoP format show tdmop format Display of TDMoP format setting

TDM over Packet

18-31

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set tdmop admin Setting of TDMoP blocking/unblocking

Sets whether to block or unblock TDMoP.

Input formats - For TDMP line module set tdmop admin P1 P3 P4

- For TDMP155 line module set tdmop admin P1 P2 P3 P4


SDH: 1-3 /1-7 / 1-3 SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4


P4: Blocking setting {enable | disable} enable: Unblocking disable: Blocking


Usage condition If a group to which neither a TDMoP format nor a TDMoP connection is set is specified, an error occurs.

Note If a TDMoP format or TDMoP connection is cleared when TDMoP is blocked, the blocking state is automatically cleared.

Input examples *Switch@1# set tdmop admin 1/1 1/1/1 1 disable *Switch@1# set tdmop admin 8/8 8 enable

Output item

TDM over Packet

18-32

Related commands

set line mode tdmp Setting of TDMP line mode set line mode tdmp155 Setting of TDMP155 line mode set port logical-interface Setting of TDMP155 port logical interface set tdmop mode Setting of TDMoP mode set tdmop group Setting of TDMoP group set tdm group-name Setting of TDM group name set tdmop jitter Setting of variation tolerance set tdmop adaptive-clock Setting of adaptive clock set tdmop format Setting of TDMoP format set tdmop connection Setting of TDMoP connection show tdmop status Display of TDMoP path setting status information

TDM over Packet

18-33

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set tdmop adaptive-clock Setting of adaptive clock

Sets the adaptive clock.

Input formats - For TDMP line module set tdmop adaptive-clock P1 P3 [P4]

- For TDMP155 line module set tdmop adaptive-clock P1 P2 P3 [P4]


SDH: 1-3 /1-7 / 1-3 SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4


P4: Network type {narrow | middle | wide} narrow: Small scale middle: Medium scale wide: Large scale * When P4 is omitted, wide is assumed.

Default value P4: wide

Usage conditions

TDMP/TDMP 155 line mode must have been set to tdmop. If a group to which neither a TDMoP group number nor a group name is set is specified, an error occurs. You cannot set two or more systems of adaptive clock in an identical line module. If the adaptive clock is set for a group to which any of the following is set, an error occurs.


* However, if TDMoP is blocked, it can be set.

Notes Up to two systems of adaptive clock can be set in a whole system. If a group to which adaptive clock is set is cleared, its adaptive clock setting is also cleared automatically.

Input examples *Switch@1# set tdmop adaptive-clock 1/1 1 middle *Switch@1# set tdmop adaptive-clock 2/1 2/2/2 2 narrow

TDM over Packet

18-34

Output item

Related commands

set line mode tdmp Setting of TDMP line mode set line mode tdmp155 Setting of TDMP155 line mode set port logical-interface Setting of TDMP155 port logical interface set tdmop mode Setting of TDMoP mode set tdmop group Setting of TDMoP group set tdm group-name Setting of TDM group name set tdmop jitter Setting of variation tolerance set tdmop format Setting of TDMoP format set tdmop connection Setting of TDMoP connection set tdmop admin Setting of TDMoP blocking/unblocking show tdmop adaptive-clock Display of adaptive clock setting clear tdmop adaptive-clock Clearing of adaptive clock set reference-clock priority Setting of reference clock priority

TDM over Packet

18-35

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show tdmop adaptive-clock Display of adaptive clock setting

Shows the adaptive clock setting.

Input format show tdmop adaptive-clock

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show tdmop adaptive-clock TDMoP Adaptive-Clock Table ========================== Logical Port Port Group Network Type ---------------------------------- 3/1 --- 1 narrow 4/1 1/1/1 3 middle *Switch@1#

Output items Port: Port (line) number Logical Port: Group: Group number Network Type: Network type

narrow middle wide

Related commands

set tdmop adaptive-clock Setting of adaptive clock clear tdmop adaptive-clock Clearing of adaptive clock

TDM over Packet

18-36

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear tdmop adaptive-clock Clearing of adaptive clock

Clears the adaptive clock.

Input formats - For TDMP line module clear tdmop adaptive-clock P1 P3

- For TDMP155 line module clear tdmop adaptive-clock P1 P2 P3


SDH: 1-3 /1-7 / 1-3 SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4


Default value None

Usage conditions

TDMP/TDMP 155 line mode must have been set to tdmop. If the reference clock priority is set, an error occurs. If a group to which neither a TDMoP format nor a TDMoP connection is set is specified, an error occurs. If the specified group name does not exist, an error occurs. If any of the following is set for a group to which the adaptive clock is set, an error occurs.


* However, if TDMoP is blocked, it can be cleared.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear tdmop adaptive-clock 1/1 1 *Switch@1#

Output item

TDM over Packet

18-37

Related commands

set reference-clock priority Setting of reference clock priority show reference-clock information Display of reference clock information set tdmop group Setting of TDMoP group set tdm group-name Setting of TDM group name set tdmop format Setting of TDMoP format set tdmop connection Setting of TDMoP connection set tdmop admin Setting of TDMoP blocking/unblocking set tdmop adaptive-clock Setting of adaptive clock show tdmop adaptive-clock Display of adaptive clock setting

TDM over Packet

18-38

(Blank page)

Clock Control

19-1

19 Clock Control

Clock Control

19-2

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set external-clock mode Setting of external clock mode

Sets the external clock mode.

Input format set external-clock mode P1

Parameter P1: External clock mode {none | dcs-64+8+0.4 | dcs-64+8 | t1-ami-sf | t1-ami-esf | t1-b8zs-sf | t1-b8zs-esf | e1-ami-crc-75 | e1-ami-crc-120 | e1-ami-fas-75 | e1-ami-fas-120 | e1-hdb3-crc-75 | e1-hdb3-crc-120 | e1-hdb3-fas-75 | e1-hdb3-fas-120 | e1-sync-75 | e1-sync-120}

none: Clear indication dcs-64+8+0.4: DCS 64kHz+8kHz+0.4kHz dcs-64+8: DCS 64kHz+8kHz t1-ami-sf: T1/AMI/SF mode t1-ami-esf: T1/AMI/ESF mode t1-b8zs-sf: T1/B8ZS/SF mode t1-b8zs-esf: T1/B8ZS/ESF mode e1-ami-crc-75: E1/AMI/CRC mode/75Ω e1-ami-crc-120: E1/AMI/CRC mode/120Ω e1-ami-fas-75: E1/AMI/FAS mode/75Ω e1-ami-fas-120: E1/AMI/FAS mode/120Ω e1-hdb3-crc-75: E1/HDB3/CRC mode/75Ω e1-hdb3-crc-120: E1/HDB3/CRC mode/120Ω e1-hdb3-fas-75: E1/HDB3/FAS mode/75Ω e1-hdb3-fas-120: E1/HDB3/FAS mode/120Ω e1-sync-75: E1/Synchironization mode/75Ω e1-sync-120: E1/Synchironization mode/120Ω

Default value P1: none

Usage conditions

Execute change of external clock mode after a clear indication (specifying none). External clock mode cannot be cleared while external clock is set in the priority. Set external clock mode again after clearing external clock from the priority settings.

Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set external-clock mode dcs-64+8+0.4 *Switch@1# set reference-clock mode none *Switch@1#

Output item

Clock Control

19-3

Related commands

set external-clock mode Setting of external clock mode reset reference-clock Resetting of reference clock set reference-clock mode Setting of reference clock operation change external-clock Change of external clock show reference-clock information Display of reference clock information

Clock Control

19-4

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set reference-clock priority Setting of reference clock priority

Sets the reference clock priority.

Input formats - Clear specification for specified priority set reference-clock priority P1 P2(none)

- External clock specification set reference-clock priority P1 P2(external)

- Port extraction clock specification set reference-clock priority P1 P2(port) P3

- Line module extraction clock specification set reference-clock priority P1 P2(adaptive) P3 P4

Parameters P1: Priority (1 to 5) (single specification) P2: Clear indication for specified priority {none}, External clock {external}, port extraction clock {port}, or RTP packet regeneration clock {adaptive}

none: Clear indication for specified priority external: External clock port: port extraction clock adaptive: RTP packet regeneration clock

•When external is specified in P2. P3: Switch module number (1 to 2) (single specification)

•When port is specified in P2. P3: Port (line) number {atmp | tdmp | atmp155 | tdmp155} (single specification)

atmp: ATMP line module tdmp: TDMP line module atmp155: ATMP155 line module tdmp155: TDMP155 line module

P4: Port (line) number (single specification) • When adaptive is specified in P2.

P3: Port (line) number {tdmp | tdmp 155} tdmp: TDMP port tdmp155: TDMP155 port

P4: Line module number(1 to 12) (single specification)

Default value None

Clock Control

19-5

Usage conditions

Port extraction clock can be set to ATMP/TDMP/ ATMP155/TDMP155 line modules. Line module extraction clock can be set to TDMP/TDMP155 line modules. Modification of the priority that has already been set needs to be done after executing the clear indication (none specification). Priority of the line module whose priority has already been set cannot be changed. When 1 or 2 is set to the priority, only external clock can be set. When 2 to 4 is set to the priority, port extraction clock or line module extraction clock can be set. Up to 2 line module extraction clocks can be set. To specify external clock, setting of external clock mode is required in advance. To specify Line module extraction clock, Adaptive-clock setting of TDMoP is required in advance.

Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set reference-clock priority 1 external 1 *Switch@1# set reference-clock priority 2 external 2 *Switch@1# set reference-clock priority 4 port tdmp 12/8 *Switch@1# set reference-clock priority 3 adaptive tdmp 3 *Switch@1# set reference-clock priority 1 none *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set external-clock mode Setting of external clock mode reset reference-clock Resetting of reference clock set reference-clock mode Setting of reference clock operation change external-clock Change of external clock show reference-clock information Display of reference clock information

Clock Control

19-6

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set reference-clock mode Setting of reference clock operation

Sets the reference clock operation mode.

Input format set reference-clock mode P1

Parameter P1: Operation mode {revertive | non-revertive} revertive: Autonomous switching enabled/autonomous reverting enabled non-revertive: Autonomous switching enabled/autonomous reverting disabled

Default value P1: non-revertive


Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set reference-clock mode revertive *Switch@1# set reference-clock mode non-revertive *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set external-clock mode Setting of external clock mode set reference-clock priority Setting of reference clock priority reset reference-clock Resetting of reference clock change external-clock Change of external clock show reference-clock information Display of reference clock information

Clock Control

19-7

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show reference-clock information Display of reference clock information

Displays the reference clock settings and status.

Input format show reference-clock information

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show reference-clock information Reference Clock Information =========================== Reference Clock Mode ==================== mode : revertive Clock Supply Status Table(Switch#1) =================================== Priority Source Status ------------------------------------ 1 dcs fail 2 port tdmp 3/1 fail 3 port atmp155 2/1 fail 4 top tdmp 5 fail Clock Supply Status Table(Switch#2) =================================== Priority Source Status ------------------------------------ * 1 dcs normal 2 port tdmp 3/1 fail 3 port atmp155 2/1 fail 4 top tdmp 5 fail *Switch@1#

Clock Control

19-8

Output items Mode: Reference clock operation mode revertive: Autonomous reverting setting enabled non-revertive: Autonomous reverting setting disabled

Priority: Clock switching priority (1 to 4) Source: Clock supply source

External switch number: External clock port atmp port (line) number: Port extraction ATMP port port tdmp port (line) number: Port extraction TDMP port port atmp155 port (line) number: Port extraction ATMP155 port port tdmp155 port (line) number: Port extraction TDMP155 port top tdmp line number: Line module extraction TDMP port

Status: Clock supply source status normal: Clock input fail: No clock input ---: (only when switch module of other system is uninstalled/initializing/OUS/CR failure)

Related commands

set external-clock mode Setting of external clock mode set reference-clock priority Setting of reference clock priority reset reference-clock Resetting of reference clock change external-clock Change of external clock set reference-clock mode Setting of reference clock operation

Clock Control

19-9

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

reset reference-clock Resetting of reference clock

Selectively resets the reference clock.

Input format reset reference-clock

Parameter None

Default value None


Note When a clock is supplied to the source clock with higher priority over the reference clock that is currently selected, switch the reference clock.

Input example *Switch@1# reset reference-clock *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set external-clock mode Setting of external clock mode set reference-clock priority Setting of reference clock priority set reference-clock mode Setting of reference clock operation change external-clock Change of external clock show reference-clock information Display of reference clock information

Clock Control

19-10

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

change external-clock Change of external clock

Changes external clock.

Input format change external-clock

Parameter None

Default value None

Usage conditions

This command is available in the following conditions only. During UGSW redundant operation and external clock is supplied to both UGSW systems. The external clock used for both UGSW systems has been set in the clock priority. External clock is selected as the reference clock.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# change external-clock *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set external-clock mode Setting of external clock mode set reference-clock priority Setting of reference clock priority set reference-clock mode Setting of reference clock operation change external-clock Change of external clock show reference-clock information Display of reference clock information

Network Management

20-1

20 Network

Management

Network Management

20-2

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set snmp Setting of SNMP enable/disable

Sets SNMP security access.

Input format set snmp P1

Parameter P1: SNMP enable/disable setting {enable | disable} enable: Enables SNMP disable: Disables SNMP



Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set snmp enable *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set ip address in-band Setting of in-band IP address set ip address out-band Setting of out-band IP address set snmp manager Setting of SNMP manager set snmp trap-manager Setting of SNMP trap manager set snmp authen-trap Setting of SNMP unauthorized access trap transmissionshow snmp Display of SNMP setting information

Network Management

20-3

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set snmp manager Setting of SNMP manager

Sets an SNMP manager.

Input format set snmp manager P1 P2 P3 P4 [P5]

Parameters P1: Manager number (1 to 20) P2: Community name (1 to 255 characters) P3: IP address P4: Access authority {read-only | read-write}

read-only: General user read-write: Privileged user

[P5]: Memo (1 to 31 characters)

Default value None

Usage conditions When using the same community, you cannot set a different access authority.

Notes You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx, and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx as the manager IP address. (“xxx” is any numeric character.) If an SNMP manager exists at the network address 192.168.128.0/24 or 192.168.129.0/24, you can set the manager. This setting, however, does not provide correct communication.

Input example *Switch@1# set snmp manager 1 a 1.2.3.4 read-only *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set ip address in-band Setting of in-band IP address set ip address out-band Setting of out-band IP address set snmp Setting of SNMP enable/disable show snmp Display of SNMP setting information clear snmp manager Clearing of SNMP manager

Network Management

20-4

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set snmp trap-manager Setting of SNMP trap manager

Sets an SNMP trap manager.

Input format set snmp trap-manager P1 P2 P3 P4 [P5]

Parameters P1: Trap manager number (1 to 10) P2: Community name (1 to 255 characters) P3: IP address P4: Trap format {v1 | v2c}

v1: V1 Trap v2c: V2C Trap

[P5]: Memo (1 to 31 characters)

Default value None

Usage conditions You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx, and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx as the manager IP address. (“xxx” is any numeric character.) If an SNMP manager exists at the network address 192.168.128.0/24 or 192.168.129.0/24, you can set the manager. This setting, however, does not provide correct communication.

Notes Set a community name and memo with ASCII characters other than ["], [?], and [control character]. When using [space], enclose the entire character string in double quotation marks.

Input example *Switch@1# set snmp trap-manager 1 a 50.60.70.80 v1 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set ip address in-band Setting of in-band IP address set ip address out-band Setting of out-band IP address set snmp Setting of SNMP enable/disable show snmp Display of SNMP setting information clear snmp trap-manager Clearing of SNMP trap manager

Network Management

20-5

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear snmp manager Clearing of SNMP manager settings

Clears SNMP manager settings.

Input format clear snmp manager P1

Parameter P1: Manager number (1 to 20)

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear snmp manager 1 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set snmp Setting of SNMP enable/disable set snmp manager Setting of SNMP manager show snmp Display of SNMP setting information

Network Management

20-6

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear snmp trap-manager Clearing of SNMP trap manager settings

Clears SNMP trap manager settings.

Input format clear snmp trap-manager P1

Parameter P1: Trap manager number (1 to 10)

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear snmp trap-manager 1 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set snmp Setting of SNMP enable/disable set snmp trap-manager Setting of SNMP trap manager show snmp Display of SNMP setting information

Network Management

20-7

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set snmp authen-trap Setting of SNMP unauthorized access trap transmission

Sets SNMP unauthorized access trap transmission.

Input format set snmp authen-trap P1

Parameter P1: Enable/disable setting {enable | disable} enable: Enables SNMP unauthorized access trap transmission disable: Disables SNMP unauthorized access trap transmission



Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set snmp authen-trap enable *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set ip address out-band Setting of out-band IP address set ip address in-band Setting of in-band IP address set snmp trap-manager Setting of SNMP trap manager show snmp Display of SNMP setting information

Network Management

20-8

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show snmp Display of SNMP setting information

Shows SNMP setting information.

Input format show snmp

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show snmp SNMP Access Configuration ========================= SNMP Access : disabled Manager Configuration ===================== Manager Index 1 Community Name: a IP Address : 1.2.3.4 Authority : read-only Note : Manager Index 2 Community Name: cx2600-2 IP Address : 192.168.0.3 Authority : read-write Note : right Manager Index 20 Community Name: b IP Address : 10.20.30.40 Authority : read-write Note : Authentication Failure Trap Configuration ========================================= Authen Trap : enabled Trap Manager Configuration ========================== Trap Manager Index 1 Community Name: a IP Address : 50.60.70.80

Network Management

20-9

Trap Mode : v1 Note : Trap Manager Index 2 Community Name: cx2600-2 IP Address : 192.168.0.3 Trap Mode : v2c Note : right <Omission>

Output items SNMP Access: SNMP security access setting Manager Index: Manager number Community Name: Community name IP Address: IP address Authority: Access authority Note: Memo Authen Trap: Setting of SNMP unauthorized access trap transmission Trap Manager Index: Trap manager number Community Name: Community name IP Address: IP address Trap Mode: Trap format Note: Memo

Related commands

set snmp Setting of SNMP enable/disable set snmp manager Setting of SNMP manager set snmp trap-manager Setting of SNMP trap manager set snmp authen-trap Setting of SNMP unauthorized access trap transmissionhow snmp Display of SNMP setting information clear snmp trap-manager Clearing of SNMP trap manager clear snmp manager Clearing of SNMP manager

Network Management

20-10

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set session ip-permit Setting of access list

Sets a telnet connection access list.

Input format set session ip-permit P1 P2 [P3]

Parameters P1: Access list number (1 to 4) P2: IP address [P3]: Subnet mask

Default value None

Usage conditions You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx, and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx as the manager IP address. (“xxx” is any numeric character.) You can set the network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 as the network address but this setting does not provide correct communication.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set session ip-permit 1 10.20.30.40 255.255.255.0 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

show session ip-permit Display of access list clear session ip-permit Clearing of access list

Network Management

20-11

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show session ip-permit Display of access list

Shows a telnet connection access list.

Input format show session ip-permit [P1]

Parameter [P1]: Access list number (1 to 4) * If P1 is omitted, all access list numbers are assumed.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show session ip-permit Telnet Filter Table =================== No IP Address Netmask ------------------------------------ 1 192.168.2.211 255.255.255.0 *Switch@1#

Output items No: Access list number IP Address: IP address Netmask: Subnet mask

Related commands

set session ip-permit Setting of access list clear session ip-permit Clearing of access list

Network Management

20-12

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear session ip-permit Clearing of access list

Clears a telnet connection access list.

Input format clear session ip-permit P1

Parameter P1: Access list number (1 to 4)

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear session ip-permit 1 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set session ip-permit Setting of access list show session ip-permit Display of access list

Network Management

20-13

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show session Display of session

Shows terminal line information.

Input format show session

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show session Terminal Session Table ====================== Session ID Terminal IP Address User Name Status ----------------------------------------------------------------------- * 0 local --- --- established 1 remote 192.168.2.138 --- established 2 remote listen 3 remote listen 4 remote listen *Switch@1#

Output items *: Console showing terminal line information Session ID: Session ID Terminal: Console type

local: Local console remote: Remote console

IP Address: Connection source IP address User Name: Account name Status: Connection status

established: Session connected listen: Session not connected busy: Resource busy authenticating: during login authentication

Related command

clear session Clearing of session

Network Management

20-14

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear session Clearing of session

Clears a telnet session.

Input format clear session P1

Parameter P1: Session number (1 to 4)

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear session 1 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show session Display of session

Network Management

20-15

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set syslog remote Setting of remote log enable/disable

Sets whether to enable or disable a remote log.

Input format set syslog remote P1

Parameter P1: Remote log enable/disable setting {enable | disable} enable: Enables remote log disable: Disables remote log



Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set syslog remote enable *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set ip address out-band Setting of out-band IP address set ip address in-band Setting of in-band IP address set syslog server Setting of syslog server and message facility clear syslog server Clearing of syslog server show syslog server Display of syslog server configuration information

Network Management

20-16

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set syslog server Setting of syslog server and message facility

Sets a syslog server and message facility.

Input format set syslog server P1 P2 P3

Parameters P1: syslog server number (1 to 5) P2: IP address P3: Facility {local0 to local7}

local0: Log type “local user 0” local1: Log type “local user 1” local2: Log type “local user 2” local3: Log type “local user 3” local4: Log type “local user 4” local5: Log typ3 “local user 5” local6: Log type “local user 6” local7: Log type “local user 7”

Default value None

Usage conditions You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx, and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx as the server IP address. (“xxx” is any numeric character.) If a syslog server exists at the network address 192.168.128.0/24 or 192.168.129.0/24, you can set the server. This setting, however, does not provide correct communication.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set syslog server 1 1.2.3.4 local0 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set ip address in-band Setting of in-band IP address set ip address out-band Setting of out-band IP address set syslog remote Setting of remote log enable/disable show syslog server Display of syslog server configuration informationclear syslog server Clearing of syslog server

Network Management

20-17

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show syslog server Display of syslog server configuration information

Shows syslog server configuration information.

Input format show syslog server

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show syslog server Syslog Remote Configuration =========================== Syslog Remote: enabled Syslog Server Table =================== Index IP Address Facility --------------------------------------------------------- 1 10.20.30.40 LOG_LOCAL7 2 192.168.0.3 LOG_LOCAL1 5 5.6.7.8 LOG_LOCAL7 *Switch@1#

Output items Syslog Remote: Remote log enable/disable setting enabled: Remote log enabled disabled: Remote log disabled

Index: syslog server number IP Address: IP address Facility: syslog facility

Related commands

set syslog remote Setting of remote log enable/disable set syslog server Setting of syslog server and message facility clear syslog server Clearing of syslog server

Network Management

20-18

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear syslog server Clearing of syslog server

Clears a syslog server.

Input format clear syslog server P1

Parameter P1: syslog server (1 to 5)

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear syslog server 1 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set syslog remote Setting of remote log enable/disable set syslog server Setting of syslog server and message facility show syslog server Display of syslog server configuration information

Network Management

20-19

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set syslog map Setting of syslog message level remapping

Sets syslog message level remapping.

Input format set syslog map P1 P2

Parameters P1: Group For the group parameter, refer to “Mapping” of “syslog Functions” of “Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions” in the “Instruction Manual”.

P2: syslog level For the syslog level parameter, refer to “Mapping” of “syslog Functions” of “Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions” in the “Instruction Manual”.

Default value For the default values, refer to “Mapping” of “syslog Functions” of “Method of Operating

Maintenance and Management Functions” in the “Instruction Manual”.


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set syslog map TRAP_SYSINF information *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

clear syslog map Clearing of syslog message level remapping show syslog map Display of syslog message level mapping status show syslog local Display of local log

Network Management

20-20

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show syslog map Display of syslog message level mapping status

Shows the syslog message level mapping status.

Input format show syslog map

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show syslog map Syslog Map Configuration ======================== TRAP_SYSFLT : LOG_CRIT TRAP_SYSMJR : LOG_ERR TRAP_SYSMNR : LOG_ERR TRAP_SYSWAR : LOG_WARNING TRAP_SYSCLR : LOG_INFO TRAP_SYSINF : LOG_INFO TRAP_LINEFLT : LOG_CRIT TRAP_LINEMJR : LOG_ERR TRAP_LINEMNR : LOG_ERR TRAP_LINEWAR : LOG_WARNING TRAP_LINECLR : LOG_INFO TRAP_LINEINF : LOG_INFO TRAP_ROUTEMJR : LOG_ERR TRAP_ROUTEMNR : LOG_ERR TRAP_ROUTEWAR : LOG_WARNING TRAP_ROUTECLR : LOG_INFO TRAP_ROUTEINF : LOG_INFO TRAP_PORTMJR : LOG_ERR TRAP_PORTCLR : LOG_INFO TRAP_PORTINF : LOG_INFO COMMAND_LOG : LOG_INFO *Switch@1#

Output items For the output items, refer to “Mapping” of “syslog Functions” of “Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions” in the “Instruction Manual”.

Related commands

set syslog map Setting of syslog message level remapping clear syslog map Clearing of syslog message level remapping

Network Management

20-21

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear syslog map Clearing of syslog message level remapping

Sets syslog message level remapping.

Input format clear syslog map P1

Parameter P1: Group For the group parameter, refer to “Mapping” of syslog Functions of “Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions” in the “Instruction Manual”.

Default value For the default value, refer to “Mapping” of syslog Functions of “Method of Operating

Maintenance and Management Functions” in the “Instruction Manual”.


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear syslog map TRAP_LINEMNR *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set syslog map Setting of syslog message level remapping show syslog map Display of syslog message level mapping status

Network Management

20-22

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show syslog local Display of local log

Shows a local log.

Input format show syslog local [P1] [P2] [P3]

Parameters P1: Log group {all | system | line | command | route | port} all: Shows all local logs system: Shows local logs related to system status notification line: Shows local logs related to line module status notification command: Shows local logs related to commands route: Shows local logs related to route status notification port: Shows local logs related to port status notification * If P1 is omitted, all is assumed.

P2: Order in which to show local logs {oldest | newest} oldest: Shows saved local logs, starting at the oldest local log newest: Shows saved local logs, starting at the newest local log * If P2 is omitted, oldest is assumed.

P3: Terminal type {terminal | free} terminal: Forcibly begins a new line at column 80 and shows local logs free: Shows local logs without forcibly beginning a new line * If P3 is omitted, free is assumed.

Default value None

Usage condition You can save local logs up to about 1MB.

Note None

Network Management

20-23

Input example *Switch@1# show syslog local Syslog Local Table ================== Index Date Time Log Text ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 01/01/2000 00:06:25 #1 local_console:0 clear syslog local 2 01/01/2000 00:06:39 #1 local_console:0 write memory 3 01/01/2000 00:10:33 #1 local_console:0 set terminal prompt Switch 4 01/01/2000 00:11:05 #1 local_console:0 set terminal prompt a 5 01/01/2000 00:11:05 #1 local_console:0 set terminal prompt abcd 6 01/01/2000 00:11:06 #1 local_console:0 set terminal prompt Switch 7 01/01/2000 00:11:06 #1 local_console:0 set terminal scroll system off 8 01/01/2000 00:11:07 #1 local_console:0 set terminal scroll system on 9 01/01/2000 00:11:07 #1 local_console:0 set terminal scroll system on 1 10 01/01/2000 00:11:07 #1 local_console:0 set terminal scroll system on 99 11 01/01/2000 00:11:11 #1 local_console:0 set terminal logout 0 12 01/01/2000 00:11:11 #1 local_console:0 set terminal logout 60 13 01/01/2000 00:11:12 #1 local_console:0 set system contact sit 14 01/01/2000 00:11:12 #1 local_console:0 set system name CX2600/220 15 01/01/2000 00:11:13 #1 local_console:0 set system location NEC 16 01/01/2000 00:00:00 #1 local_console:0 date 01/01/00 00:00:00 17 12/31/2099 23:59:59 #1 local_console:0 date 12/31/99 23:59:59 18 12/31/2099 23:59:59 #1 local *Switch@1#

Output items Index: syslog number Date: Date Time: Time Log Text: Log information

Related commands

set syslog map Setting of syslog message level remapping clear syslog local Clearing of local log upload local-syslog Uploading of system log

Network Management

20-24

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear syslog local Clearing of local log

Clears a local log.

Input format clear syslog local

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear syslog local *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

show syslog local Display of local log upload local-syslog Uploading of system log to ftp server

Network Management

20-25

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set ntp access-time Setting of NTP access time

Sets NTP server access cycle time.

Input format set ntp access-time P1

Parameter P1: Access time (0 to 168 hours) 0: Disables NTP server access

Default value P1: 0 (hour)


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set ntp access-time 168 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set ip address out-band Setting of out-band IP address set ip address in-band Setting of in-band IP address set ntp server Setting of IP address of NTP server clear ntp server Clearing of IP address of NTP server show ntp Display of NTP server setting information

Network Management

20-26

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set ntp server Setting of IP address of NTP server

Sets the IP address of an NTP server.

Input format set ntp server [P1] P2

Parameters P1: Server priority {primary | secondary} primary: Priority server secondary: Alternate server * If P1 is omitted, primary is assumed.

P2: IP address

Default value None

Usage conditions You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx, and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx as the server IP address. (“xxx” is any numeric character.) If an NTP server exists at the network address 192.168.128.0/24 or 192.168.129.0/24, you can set the server. This setting, however, does not provide correct communication.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set ntp server 10.20.30.40 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set ip address out-band Setting of out-band IP address set ip address in-band Setting of in-band IP address set ntp access-time Setting of NTP access time clear ntp server Clearing of IP address of NTP server show ntp Display of NTP server setting information

Network Management

20-27

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show ntp Display of NTP server setting information

Shows NTP server setting information.

Input format show ntp

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show ntp NTP Server Configuration ======================== Primary IP Address : 10.20.30.40 Secondary IP Address : 10.20.30.41 Retrieval time (hour): 168 *Switch@1#

Output items Primary IP Address: IP address of primary priority server Secondary IP Address: IP address of secondary priority server Retrieval Time (hour): Access time

Related commands

set ntp access-time Setting of NTP access time set ntp server Setting of IP address of NTP server clear ntp server Clearing of IP address of NTP server

Network Management

20-28

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear ntp server Clearing of IP address of NTP server

Clears the IP address of an NTP server.

Input format clear ntp server P1

Parameter P1: Server priority {primary | secondary} primary: Priority server secondary: Alternate server

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear ntp server *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set ntp access-time Setting of NTP access time set ntp server Setting of IP address of NTP server show ntp Display of NTP server setting information

Network Test

21-1

21 Network Test

Network Test

21-2

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set mc management Setting of M/C management function basics

Sets terminal M/C management function basics. Enabling this setting allows you to perform a loopback test and collect terminal M/C information.

- Enabling UTP mode set mc management P1 P2(enable) [P3]

Input formats

- Disabling UTP mode set mc management P1 P2(disable)

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (1/1 to 4/8) (Multiple values can be specified.) P2: Enable/disable setting {enable | disable}

enable: Enables setting M/C management function basics disable: Disables setting M/C management function basics

• When enable is specified in P2 P3: UTP mode setting {utp}

utp: UTP mode Default value P2* enable

Usage condition You can use only 100BASE-FX line modules.

Note When P3 is omitted, UTP mode setting will be disabled.

Note

Input example *Switch@1# set mc management 1/1 enable *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show mc information Display of M/C status

Network Test

21-3

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

loopback mc Starting of M/C loopback test

Starts the media converter (M/C) loopback test when the 100BASE-FX line module is used. This loopback test requires that enable be selected in the set mc management command in advance.

Input format loopback mc P1 [P2] [P3] [P4]

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (1/1 to 4/8) (Multiple values can be specified.) P2: Test count (count 1 to 1000)

* If P2 is omitted, count 1 is set. P3: Frame size (frame {64 | 1518}) (bytes)

64 : 64 bytes 1518: 1518 bytes * If P3 is omitted, frame 64 is set.

P4: Response wait time (wait 610 to 2000) (msec) * If P4 is omitted, wait 610 is set.

Default value None

Usage conditions Since frames cannot be transferred between this device and the user during the loopback test, do not conduct this test on a line in use. Depending on the M/C to be used, the UTP side may link down during the loopback test. In this case, the user side detects network disconnection.

Note You can set response wait time within the range from 610 to 2000 (msec) in units of 10 (msec). For how to look at the test result, refer to the “Instruction Manual”.

Input example *Switch@1# loopback mc 9/3 count 4 frame 1518 wait 610 result 9/3 <seq=1> time=465ms test ok result 9/3 <seq=2> time=460ms test ok result 9/3 <seq=3> time=460ms test ok result 9/3 <seq=4> time=460ms test ok loopback statistics for 9/3 request = 4 : test ok = 4 : test fail = 0 (0% failure) minimum = 460msec, maximum = 465msec, average = 460msec test ok 4 test timeout 0 test terminate receive 0 test close request timeout 0 frame timeout 0 frame fail 0 test start request timeout 0 other error 0 *Switch@1#

Network Test

21-4

Output items Result display per loopback test result a/b: Test slot number/port number <seq=N>: Test count time=XXXms : Time required for test(*1)

This item is displayed only when the test result is test ok or frame fail. {result message} : Result (see below)

test ok: Normal end test time out: Test time (T1) timeout occurrence test terminate receive: Forced termination based on termination notification received from terminal MC test close request timeout: Response wait timeout from terminal MC in test termination negotiation frame timeout: Loopback frame reception wait timeout frame fail: Loopback frame error detection (e.g., data mismatch) test start request timeout: Response wait timeout from terminal MC in test start negotiation other error: Other errors (including a HW failure or terminal MC sequence error)

Statistics display

loopback statistics for a/b: Slot number/port number to be displayed in loopback statistics display

request = N: Number of times loopback test was performed test ok = X: Number of times loopback test succeeded test fail = Y: Number of times loopback test failed (other than test ok) (Z% failure): Rate of unsuccessful loopback test

{test fail} / {request} x 100 minimum = XXXmsec: Minimum test time(*1)(*2) maximum = YYYmsec: Maximum test time(*1)(*2) average = ZZZmsec Average test time(*1)(*2)

(*1) This time includes the time required for terminal MC negotiation performed before

and after the loopback test. (*2) This item is collected only when the test result is test ok or frame fail.

Related command

set mc management Setting of M/C management function basics

Network Test

21-5

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

update mc information Prompting of M/C to send M/C status notification

Prompts the M/C to send an M/C status notification.

Input format update mc information P1

Parameter P1: Port (line) number (1/1 to 4/8) (single specification)

Default value None

Usage condition You can enter this command when the FX8/FX8-PV line module is inserted into the specified slot or FX8 is specified as the line module type.

Notes This command prompts the M/C to send an M/C status notification when the M/C may not autonomously send it. Originally, the M/C status is automatically collected when link-up is established. Usually, you need not use this command because the M/C autonomously sends the M/C status notification when the M/C status changes. If a failure may have occurred, see the loopback mc command separately.

Input example Switch@1# update mc information 1/1 Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

loopback mc Starting of M/C loopback test show mc information Display of M/C information

Network Test

21-6

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show mc information Display of M/C information

Shows terminal M/C information.

Input format show mc information [P1]

Parameter [P1]: Line module number (single specification) or port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.)

Line module number (single specification) 1 to 4 Port (line) number (1/1 to 4/8) (Multiple values can be specified.) * If P1 is omitted, terminal M/C information for all line modules is shown.

Default value None


Note Some terminal M/C information is shown only when a port (line) number is specified.

Input examples *Switch@1# show mc information 1/5 Remote MC Information ===================== Port : 1/5 MC management : enabled Option : utp Power Status : normal UTP Link Status : up MC Fail : normal Rx-OPT Status : normal Notice Rx-OPT Down : frame LoopTest Status : idle Option B support : support Vendor Code : 0x00004c Model-ID : 0x000001 UTP I/F : single UTP Auto-negotiation : enabled UTP Link Speed (Mbps) : 100 UTP Duplex Mode : full *Switch@1# show mc information 1 MC Man- Power UTP MC Rx-OPT Notice LoopTest Port agement Option Status Link Fail Status Rx-OPT Status ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 1/1 disabled --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 1/2 enabled none 1/3 enabled utp 1/4 enabled none 1/5 enabled utp normal up normal normal frame idle 1/6 enabled none normal up normal normal frame idle

Network Test

21-7

1/7 enabled utp 1/8 enabled none *Switch@1#

Output items Port: Port (line) number MC management: Setting terminal M/C management function basics

enabled: Setting terminal M/C management function basics is enabled disabled: Setting terminal M/C management function basics is disabled

Option: UTP mode setting information none: UTP mode is not set utp: UTP mode is set

Power Status: Terminal M/C power information normal: Normal fail: Power interruption

UTP Link: Terminal M/C UTP information up: Normal down: UTP interruption

MC Fail: Terminal M/C failure information normal: Normal fail: Failure occurred

Rx-OPT Status: Information for receive optical error detected by terminal M/C normal: Normal fail: Failure occurred

Notice Rx-OPT: Method for notifying terminal M/C receive optical error frame: Maintenance frame fefi: FEFI signal

LoopTest Status: Loopback test status Idle: Loopback test not yet performed testing: Loopback test being performed

Option B support: Support of option B of terminal M/C complying with TS1000 standardsupport: Option B supported not support: Option B not supported

Vendor Code: Vendor code of terminal M/C Model-ID: Module ID of terminal M/C UTP I/F: Number of UTP interfaces of terminal M/C

Single: Single Multi: Multiple

UTP Auto-negotiation: UTP port auto-negotiation status of terminal M/C enabled: Auto-negotiation enabled disabled: Auto-negotiation disabled

UTP Link Speed (Mbps): UTP physical line speed information of terminal M/C 10: 10 Mbps 100: 100Mbps 1000: 1000Mbps other: Others

UTP Duplex Mode: UTP communication mode information for terminal M/C Half: Half Duplex Full: Full Duplex

Network Test

21-8

Related command

set mc management Set M/C management function basics

Network Test

21-9

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

loopback atm Starting of ATM loopback test

Starts the ATM transmission path loopback test.

Input formats - Specifying F4 level loopback atm P1(f4) P2 [P3] [P4] [P5] [P6] [P7] [P8]

- Specifying F5 level loopback atm P1(f5) P2 [P3] [P4] [P5] [P6] [P7] [P8]

Parameters P1: Level {f4 | f5} f4: F4(VP) level f5: F5(VC) level

• When f4 is specified in P1 P2: PVC identifier {line-number VPI-value | PVC-name}

line-number (single specification) VPI-value (single specification) PVC-name (1 to 32 characters)

• When f5 is specified in P1 P2: PVC identifier {line-number VPI-value/VCI-value | PVC-name}

line-number (single specification) VPI-value/VCI-value (single specification) PVC-name (1 to 32 characters)

P3: Test section {segment | end} segment: Between nodes end: End * If P3 is omitted, end is set.

P4: Location ID (0x1 to 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff) (hexadecimal) * If P4 is omitted, 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff is set.

P5: Indication check {enable | disable} enable: Enables indication check disable: Disables indication check * If P5 is omitted, enable is set.

P6: Test count (count 1 to 1000) * If P6 is omitted, count 1 is set.

P7: Response wait time (wait 5 to 10 (seconds)) * If P7 is omitted, 5 seconds are set.

P8: Test direction {outside | inside} outside: Line side (Output direction from UGSW to line modules) inside: SW side (Output direction from line modules to UGSW) * If P8 is omitted, outside is set.

Network Test

21-10

Default values P3: end P4: 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff P5: enable P6: 1 P7: 5 P8: outside

Usage conditions When f4 is specified in P1, this function cannot be executed if the VP connection or the PVC that includes the targeted VPI has not been registered. When f5 is specified in P1, this function cannot be executed if the targeted PVC has not been registered. You cannot also execute this function simultaneously on multiple ports. When inside is specified in P8, this function cannot be executed if OAM flow point of the targeted VPI or PVC is set to end-point. You cannot execute multiple loopback test (specifying 0x0 for the location ID). * Refer to the "set atm-oam flow" command for OAM flow point setting.

Note To cancel this test halfway, press Ctrl+C. Function that allows to specify inside in P8 will be supported in the future.

Input examples *Switch@1# loopback atm f4 3/1 0 segment 0x1234 count 3 wait 10 result 3/1 0 <seq=1> time=465ms ok result 3/1 0 <seq=2> time=460ms ok result 3/1 0 <seq=3> timeout loopback statistics for 3/1 0 level f4 section segment indication-check enabled wait 10(s) location-ID 0x00000000000000000000000000001234 direction outside test count = 3 : ok = 2 : fail = 1 (33% failure) minimum = 460msec, maximum = 465msec, average = 460msec Switch@1# loopback atm f5 3/1 0/200 segment 0x1234 count 3 wait 10 result 3/1 0/200 <seq=1> time=465ms ok result 3/1 0/200 <seq=2> time=460ms ok result 3/1 0/200 <seq=3> timeout loopback statistics for 3/1 0/200 level f5 section segment indication-check enabled wait 10(s) location-ID 0x00000000000000000000000000001234 direction outside test count = 3 : ok = 2 : fail = 1 (33% failure) minimum = 460msec, maximum = 465msec, average = 460msec *Switch@1#

Network Test

21-11

Output items Result display per loopback test result a/b x/z: Test slot number/port number and VPI/VCI

If the test level is f4, only VPI is displayed, not VPI/VCI. <seq=N>: Test count time=XXXms: Time required for test

This item is displayed only when the test result is test ok or frame fail.

Statistics display loopback statistics for a/b x/z:

Slot number/port number and VPI/VCI in loopback statistics display If the test level is f4, only VPI is displayed, not VPI/VCI.

level: Test level section: Test section indication-check: Indication check setting wait: Response wait time location-ID: Location ID direction: Test direction test count: Number of times loopback test was performed

ok: Number of times loopback test succeeded (normal termination) fail: Number of times loopback test failed (other than normal termination) (X% failure): Rate of unsuccessful loopback test {fail} / {test count} x 100

minimum: Minimum test time(*1) maximum: Maximum test time(*1) average: Average test time(*1) (*1) This item is collected only when the test result is ok or sell fail.

Related commands

set loopback atm source-id Setting of ATM loopback source ID show loopback atm source-id Display of ATM loopback source ID

Network Test

21-12

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set loopback atm source-id Setting of ATM loopback source ID

Sets an ATM loopback source ID.

Input format set loopback atm source-id P1

Parameter P1: Source ID (1 to 32 digits) (hexadecimal)

Default value P1: 0x00000000000000000000000000000001

Usage condition Bits set in P1 must not be entirely zero or 1 (0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff).

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set loopback atm source-id 0x1234 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

loopback atm Starting of ATM loopback test set loopback atm source-id Setting of ATM loopback source ID

Network Test

21-13

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show loopback atm source-id Display of ATM loopback source ID

Shows an ATM loopback source ID.

Input format show loopback atm source-id

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show loopback atm source-id ATM Loopback Source-ID Table ============================ Source-ID : 0x00000000000000000000000000FFAA33 *Switch@1#

Output item ATM Loopback Source-ID Table source-ID: Source ID

Related commands

loopback atm Starting of ATM loopback test set loopback atm source-id Setting of ATM loopback source ID

Network Test

21-14

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set loopback atm keepalive-mode Setting of ATM loopback monitoring mode

Sets whether to enable or disable ATM loopback monitoring for registered connections.

Input format set loopback atm keepalive-mode P1

Parameter P1: Loopback monitoring mode {enable | disable} enable: Enables loopback monitoring disable: Disables loopback monitoring



Notes Timeout for each PVC is 5 seconds and the monitoring period for all PVCs is 5 minutes.When loopback monitoring is enabled, monitoring statistical information is cleared.

Input example *Switch@1# set loopback atm keepalive-mode enable *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set loopback atm keepalive Setting of ATM loopback monitoring function show loopback atm keepalive config Display of ATM loopback monitoring configuration show loopback atm keepalive information Display of ATM loopback monitoring information clear loopback atm keepalive Clearing of ATM loopback monitoring function

Network Test

21-15

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show loopback atm keepalive config Display of ATM loopback monitoring configuration

Shows an ATM loopback monitoring configuration.

Input format show loopback atm keepalive config [P1]

Parameter P1: PVC identifier [{line-number [{VPI-value/VCI-value | VPI-value}] |PVC-name}] - line-number (slot number/port number) Slot number (1 to 12) Port number (1 to 8) - VPI-value/VCI-value VPI value (0 to 255) VCI value (32 to 16383) - VPI-value VPI value (0 to 255) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters) * If P1 is omitted, the loopback monitoring configurations of all ports are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show loopback atm keepalive config ATM Loopback Config Table ========================= Keepalive-Mode : enabled ATM Loopback Cell F4 Config Table ================================= Port VPI Section Direction Success Threshold Fail Threshold ---------------------------------------------------------------- 1/8 200 segment outside 1 1 ATM Loopback Cell F4 Location-ID ================================ Port VPI Location-ID --------------------------------------------- 1/8 200 0x00000000000000000000000000000001 ATM Loopback Cell F5 Config Table ================================= No entry in the table. *Switch@1# show loopback atm keepalive config ATM Loopback Config Table

Network Test

21-16

========================= Keepalive-Mode : enabled ATM Loopback Cell F4 Config Table ================================= No entry in the table. ATM Loopback Cell F5 Config Table ================================= Port VPI/VCI Section Direction Success Threshold Fail Threshold -------------------------------------------------------------------- 1/1 100/100 segment outside 1 1 ATM Loopback Cell F5 Location-ID ================================ Port VPI/VCI Location-ID ------------------------------------------------- 1/1 100/100 0x00000000000000000000000000000001 *Switch@1#

Output items ATM Loopback Config Table: keepalive-mode: Loopback monitoring mode

ATM Loopback Cell F4 Config Table: Port: Port (line) number VPI: VPI value Section: Test section Direction: Test direction Success Threshold: Threshold for monitoring result change Fail Threshold: Threshold for monitoring result change

ATM Loopback Cell F4 Location-ID Port: Port (line) number VPI: VPI value Location-ID: Location ID

ATM Loopback Cell F5 Config Table: Port: Port (line) number VPI/VCI: VPI/VCI value Section: Test section Direction: Test direction Success Threshold: Threshold for monitoring result change Fail Threshold: Threshold for monitoring result change

ATM Loopback Cell F5 Location-ID Port: Port (line) number VPI/VCI: VPI/VCI value Location-ID: Location ID

Network Test

21-17

Related commands

set loopback atm keepalive-mode Setting of ATM loopback monitoring mode set loopback atm keepalive Setting of ATM loopback monitoring function show loopback atm keepalive information Display of ATM loopback monitoring information clear loopback atm keepalive Clearing of ATM loopback monitoring function

Network Test

21-18

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set loopback atm keepalive Setting of ATM loopback monitoring function

Sets a PVC that performs ATM loopback monitoring. Also sets a level, location ID, test section, and thresholds for changing the loopback monitoring result.

Input formats - Specifying F4 level set loopback atm keepalive P1 (f4) P2 [P3] [P4] [P5] [P6]

- Specifying F5 level set loopback atm keepalive P1 (f5) P2 [P3] [P4] [P5] [P6]

Parameters P1: Level {f4 | f5} f4: F4(VP) level f5: F5(VC) level

• When f4 is specified in P1 P2: PVC identifier {line-number VPI-value | PVC-name}

line-number (single specification) VPI-value (single specification) PVC-name (1 to 32 characters)

• When f5 is specified in P1 P2: PVC identifier {line-number VPI-value/VCI-value | PVC-name}

line-number (single specification) VPI-value/VCI-value (Multiple specification is allowed for VCI-value only.) PVC-name (1 to 32 characters)

P3: Test section {segment | end} segment: Between nodes end: End * If P3 is omitted, end is set.

P4: Location ID (0x1 to 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff) * If P4 is omitted, 0xffffffffffffffffffffffff is set.

P5: Threshold for changing loopback monitoring result (success) success 1 to 10 * If P5 is omitted, 1 is set.

P6: Threshold for changing loopback monitoring result (fail) fail 1 to 10 * If P6 is omitted, 1 is set.

P7: Monitoring direction {outside | inside} outside: Line side (Output direction from UGSW to line modules) inside: SW side (Output direction from line modules to UGSW) * If P7 is omitted, outside is set.

Default values P3: end

P4: 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff P5: 1 P6: 1

Network Test

21-19

Usage conditions When f4 is specified in P1, this function cannot be executed if the VP connection or the PVC that includes the targeted VPI has not been registered. When f5 is specified in P1, this function cannot be executed if the targeted PVC has not been registered. You cannot simultaneously set F4 monitoring and F5 monitoring specifying an identical VP. If the loopback monitoring configuration is changed, monitoring statistical information for the PVC that performs loopback monitoring is cleared. When inside is specified in P7, this function cannot be executed if OAM flow point of the targeted VPI or PVC is set to end-point. You cannot execute multiple loopback test (specifying 0x0 for the location ID). * Refer to the "set atm-oam flow" command for OAM flow point setting.

Notes If the PVC is cleared, the monitoring settings of this function for the PVC are also cleared. If all the PVCs that include a certain VPI is cleared, the monitoring settings of this function for the VP are also cleared. The monitoring settings changed during loopback monitoring are reflected in the next period. Function that allows to specify inside in P7 will be supported in the future.

Input examples *Switch@1# set loopback atm keepalive f4 3/1 10 segment 0x1234 success 10 fail 5 *Switch@1# set loopback atm keepalive f5 4/1 10/20 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set loopback atm keepalive-mode Setting of ATM loopback monitoring mode show loopback atm keepalive config Display of ATM loopback monitoring configuration show loopback atm keepalive information Display of ATM loopback monitoring information clear loopback atm keepalive Clearing of ATM loopback monitoring function

Network Test

21-20

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show loopback atm keepalive information Display of ATM loopback monitoring information

Shows ATM loopback monitoring information.

Input format show loopback atm keepalive information [P1]

Parameter P1: PVC identifier [{line-number [{VPI-value/VCI-value | VPI-value}] |PVC-name}] - line-number (slot number/port number) Slot number (1 to 12) Port number (1 to 8) - VPI-value/VCI-value VPI value (0 to 255) VCI value (32 to 16383) - VPI-value VPI value (0 to 255) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters) * If P1 is omitted, the loopback monitoring configurations of all ports are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example switch@1# show loopback atm keepalive information ATM Loopback Config Table ========================= Keepalive-Mode : enabled ATM Loopback F4 Status Table ============================ Port VPI Section Direction Test Status Last Result Count(ok/test) ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 5/1 0 segment outside success timeout 0/10 12/1 1 end inside --- --- 0/0 ATM Loopback F5 Status Table ============================ Port VPI/VCI Section Direction Test Status Last Result Count(ok/test)--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5/1 1/32 segment outside fail timeout 0/100 5/1 1/33 end inside success ok 10/10 Switch@1#

Network Test

21-21

Output items ATM Loopback Config Table: keepalive-mode: Loopback monitoring mode

ATM Loopback Cell F4 Status Table: Port: Port (line) number VPI: VPI value Section: Test section Direction : Test direction Test Status: Monitoring status (success/fail) Last Result: Last loopback test result (ok/timeout) Count: Number of times loopback test succeeded/total number of loopback transmissions

ATM Loopback Cell F5 Status Table:

Port: Port (line) number VPI/VCI: VPI/VCI value Section: Test section Direction : Test direction Test Status: Monitoring status (success/fail) Last Result: Last loopback test result (ok/timeout) Count: Number of times loopback test succeeded/total number of loopback transmissions

Related commands

set loopback atm keepalive-mode Setting of ATM loopback monitoring mode set loopback atm keepalive Setting of ATM loopback monitoring function show loopback atm keepalive config Display of ATM loopback monitoring configuration clear loopback atm keepalive Clearing of ATM loopback monitoring function

Network Test

21-22

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear loopback atm keepalive Clearing of ATM loopback monitoring function

Clears a PVC that performs ATM loopback monitoring.

Input formats - Specifying F4 level clear loopback atm keepalive P1(f4) P2

- Specifying F5 level clear loopback atm keepalive P1(f5) P2

- Specifying line number clear loopback atm keepalive P1(line number)

Parameters P1: Level {f4 | f5} or line number f4: F4(VP) level f5: F5(VC) level Line number (single specification)

• When f4 is specified in P1 P2: PVC identifier {line-number [VPI-value] | PVC-name}

line-number (single specification) VPI-value (single specification) PVC-name (1 to 32 characters) * When VPI-value is omitted, all monitoring settings for the specified port at the P1-specified level are cleared.

• When f5 is specified in P1 P2: PVC identifier {line-number [VPI-value/VCI-value] | PVC-name}

line-number (single specification) VPI-value/VCI-value (single specification) PVC-name (1 to 32 characters) * When VPI-value/VCI-value is omitted, all monitoring settings for the specified port at the P1-specified level are cleared.

Default value None


Note The monitoring settings cleared during loopback monitoring are not reflected right after execution of the command. Reflection requires up to 5 minutes because loopback monitoring is executed in 5 minute periods.

Input examples *Switch@1# clear loopback atm keepalive f4 10/1 10 *Switch@1# clear loopback atm keepalive f5 10/1 *Switch@1# clear loopback atm keepalive 10/1

Output item

Network Test

21-23

Related commands

set loopback atm keepalive-mode Setting of ATM loopback monitoring mode set loopback atm keepalive Setting of ATM loopback monitoring function show loopback atm keepalive config Display of ATM loopback monitoring configuration show loopback atm keepalive information Display of ATM loopback monitoring information

Network Test

21-24

(Blank page)

Monitors

22-1

22 Monitors

Monitors

22-2

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show counter port Display of port counter

Shows various counter information for transmission and reception in port units.

- Realtime showing show counter port P1 (real) P2 (up to 24 port (line) numbers)

Input formats

- Detailed showing show counter port P1 (detail) P2 (single port (line) number)

Parameters P1: Showing type {real | detail} real: Realtime showing detail: Detailed showing

P2: Port (line) number * When detail is specified in P1, you can specify only one port. * When real is specified in P1, you can specify multiple ports (up to 24).

Default value None

Usage condition This command cannot be used for ATMP/TDMP line modules.

Notes If the specified port (line) is in line module duplex operation, counter information of the

greater number port is also shown. In realtime showing, you can simultaneously show up to 24 lines. However, only 20 lines will be displayed in the case of specification that exceeds the maximum number of lines. Pressing [Ctrl]+[C] in realtime showing enables you to end port counter showing. If the counter value exceeds either of 32 bits or 64 bits (*), the value will be returned to zero and then incremented from zero again. * 32 bits = 4294967295, 64 bits = 18446744073709551615 The counter value may be unable to be collected during UGSW module system switching. If discarding is caused by an FCS error or a frame size violation, even the output port may increment the discard counter value. If a frame is interrupted by a transfer block of the port isolate function, the input port may increment the discard counter value. When it receives a frame of large size (FE: frames of 8 kilobytes or more, GbE/GbE-MUX: frames of 16 kilobytes or more), the line module may shorten the frame size and increment the error counter value (e.g., RxJabbers).

Input examples *Switch@1# show counter port real 9/1,12/1 Port Counter Table ================== Last All Time Clearing of Port Counter unknown hour --------------------------------------------------------------------- Port Link Pkts(Rx) Pkts(Tx) | Port Link Pkts(Rx) Pkts(Tx) ===================================+=================================

Monitors

22-3

9/1 down 0 0 | 12/1 down 0 0 Count-End with [Ctrl]+[c] *Switch@1# *Switch@1# show counter port detail 1/1 Port Counter Table ================== Port : 1/1 Link Status : up Last Clearing Time of Port Counter 0:00:01 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Item Counts | Item Counts=================================+=================================== RxOctets : 0 | TxOctets : 0RxPkts : 0 | TxPkts : 0 RxDropEvents : 0 | RxErrors : 0 | TxErrors : 0RxUndersizePkts : 0 | RxFragments : 0 | Rx64octs : 0 | Rx65to127octs : 0 | Rx128to255octs : 0 | Rx256to511octs : 0 | Rx512to1023octs : 0 | Rx1024to1518octs: 0 | RxCRCErrors : 0 | RxOversizePkts : 0 | RxJabbers : 0 | | TxCollisions : 0RxUcastPkts : 0 | TxUcastPkts : 0RxMcastPkts : 0 | TxMcastPkts : 0RxBcastPkts : 0 | TxBcastPkts : 0RxUnsupp : 0 | TxUnsupp : 0RxDiscards : 0 | TxDiscards : 0 *Switch@1#

Output items TxOctets Last clearing time of port counter: Elapsed time of counter collection (Realtime showing)

The elapsed time of counter collection for the entire device is shown in the hour:minute:second format. When the elapsed time exceeds 24 hours, “over 24 hour” is shown. If the port counter is cleared per port or the line module is reset or if the line module is inserted, “unknown hour” is shown. Clearing all the port counters also clears the elapsed time of counter collection for the device at the same time.

Monitors

22-4

(Detailed showing) The elapsed time of counter collection for the specified port is shown in the hour:minute:second format. When the elapsed time exceeds 24 hours, “over 24 hour” is shown. Clearing the port counter also clears the elapsed time of counter collection for the port at the same time.

RxOctets: Number of receiving octets RxPkts: Number of receiving frames RxDropEvents: Number of times discard event occurred RxErrors: Number of frames where receiving error occurred RxUndersizePkts: Number of received frames where the data length is less than 64

octets RxFragments: Number of received error frames where the data length is less

than 64 octets Rx64octs: Number of received frames where the data length is 64 octets Rx65to127octs: Number of received frames where the data length is 65 to 127

octets Rx128to255octs: Number of received frames where the data length is 128 to 255



octets Rx1024to1518octs: Number of received frames where the data length is 1024 to

1518 octets RxCRCErrors: Number of received alignment/FCS error frames RxOversizePkts: Number of received frames where the data length is greater than

or equal to 1519 octets RxJabbers: Number of received error frames where the data length is greater

than or equal to 1519 octets RxUcastPkts: Number of receiving unicast frames RxMcastPkts: Number of receiving multicast frames RxBcastPkts: Number of receiving broadcast frames RxUnsupp: Number of received and discarded unsupported packages RxDiscards: Number of frames discarded for reasons other than receiving

errors TxOctets: Number of sent octets TxPkts: Number of sent frames TxErrors: Number of frames where sending error occurred TxCollisions: Number of collision frames at sending TxUcastPkts: Number of sent unicast frames TxMcastPkts: Number of sent multicast frames TxBcastPkts: Number of sent broadcast frames TxUnsupp: Number of sent and discarded unsupported frames TxDiscards: Number of frames discarded for reasons other than sending

errors Related commands

clear counter port Clearing of port counter show counter discard Display of discard counter

Monitors

22-5

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear counter port Clearing of port counter

Clears various counter information for transmission and reception in port units.

Input format clear counter port [P1]

Parameter P1: Port (line) number (single specification) * If P1 is omitted, counter information of all the ports is cleared.

Default value None

Usage condition This command cannot be used for ATM/TDMP line modules.

Note If P1 is omitted, execution is confirmed after this command is entered. If the specified port (line) is in line module duplex operation, counter information of the greater number port is also cleared.

Input example *Switch@1# clear counter port 1/1 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

show counter port Display of port counter show counter discard Display of discard counter

Monitors

22-6

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show counter discard Display of discard counter

Shows discard counter information in port units.

Input format show counter discard P1

Parameter P1: Port (line) number (single specification)

Default value None


Notes If the specified port (line) is in line module duplex operation, counter information of the

greater number port is also shown. If the active slot side increments “RxDisOutQoS Pkts” and L2SW Discard Counter items during line module duplex operation, counter items for lines in the both systems will be incremented. The counter value may be unable to be collected during UGSW module system switching. If discarding is caused by an FCS error or a frame size violation, even the output port may increment the discard counter value. If a frame is interrupted by a transfer block of the port isolate function, the input port may increment the discard counter value. GbE-MUX collects “RxDisOutQoS Pkts” and L2SW Discard Counter items in line module units, so all the ports increment the same counter value without reference to link up and down.

Input example *Switch@1# show counter discard 2/1 Discard Counter Table ===================== Port : 2/1 Link Status : down Line Discard Counter Table ========================== Item Pkts | Item Pkts ------------------------------------------+---------------------------- RxUnknownTPID : 0 | TxUnknownTPID : 0 RxUnknownVID : 0 | QoS Discard Counter Table ========================= Item Pkts | Item Pkts -------------------------------------------+--------------------------- RxDisInQoSPkts : 0 | RxDisOutQoSPkts : 0 | TxDisOutQoSPkts : 0 RxFilterPkts : 0 | TxFilterPkts : 0

Monitors

22-7

RxMACLimitPkts : 0 | RxFairnessPkts : 0 | L2SW Discard Counter Table ========================== Item Pkts | Item Pkts ------------------------------------------+---------------------------- RxDropPkts : 0 | TxDropPkts : 0 | TxQueue0DisPkts : 0 | TxQueue1DisPkts : 0 | TxQueue2DisPkts : 0 | TxQueue3DisPkts : 0 | TxQueue4DisPkts : 0 | TxQueue5DisPkts : 0 *Switch@1#

Output items Port : Port (line) number Link Status: Physical link status of port

up: Link up status down : Link down status

RxUnknownTPID: Number of unsupported TPID receiving frames or number of discarded receiving frames whose Ethernet types are 0x8100 on portbase Untag set port

RxUnknownVID: Number of received and discarded unsupported VID frames TxUnknownTPID: Number of unsupported TPID sending frames or number of

discarded sending frames whose Ethernet types are 0x8100 on portbase Untag set port

RxDisInQoSPkts: Number of receiving frames discarded by the maximum band limiting function of the input port

RxDisOutQoSPkts: Number of receiving frames discarded by the output fairness control function

RxFilterPkts: Number of receiving frames discarded by the input filtering function

RxMACLimitPkts: Number of receiving frames discarded by the MAC address learning count limiting function

RxFairnessPkts: Number of receiving frames discarded by the input fairness control function *Unsupported

TxDisOutQoSPkts: Number of sending frames discarded by the maximum band limiting function of the output port

TxFilterPkts: Number of sending frames discarded by the output filtering function

RxDropPkts: Number of receiving frames discarded as invalid frames by L2SW TxDropPkts: Number of frames discarded by L2SW before being enqueued for

sending TxQueue0DisPkts: Number of sending frames discarded by L2SW (without class) TxQueue1DisPkts: Number of Class–D sending frames discarded by L2SW TxQueue2DisPkts: Number of Class–C sending frames discarded by L2SW TxQueue3DisPkts: Number of Class–B sending frames discarded by L2SW TxQueue4DisPkts: Number of Class–A sending frames discarded by L2SW TxQueue5DisPkts: Number of control frame sending frames from CPU discarded by

L2SW Related commands

show counter port Display of port counter clear counter port Clearing of port counter

Monitors

22-8

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show counter vlan value Display of VLAN counter

Shows various counter information for transmission and reception in VLAN units.

- Short-cycle realtime showing show counter vlan value P1 (short) P2 (real) P3 [P4] - Short-cycle showing (detailed/realtime detailed) show counter vlan value P1 (short) P2 (detail | real-detail) P3 P4 [P5]

Input formats

- Specifying long-cycle showing items show counter vlan value P1 (long) P3 P4 [P5]

Parameters P1: Counter collection cycle {short | long} short: Short cycle long: Long cycle

P2: Showing type {real | detail | real-detail} real: Realtime showing (Multiple indexes can be specified [up to 6 indexes].) detail: Detailed showing (single index specification) real-detail: Detailed realtime showing (single index specification)

• When short is specified in P1 P2: Showing type {real | detail | real-detail}

real: Realtime showing detail: Detailed showing real-detail: Detailed realtime showing


VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple values can be specified.) VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters * Only when real is specified in P2, multiple indexes can be specified (up to 6). * Only when real is specified in P2, P4 can be omitted. If P4 is omitted, only the number of lines that can be displayed is shown in ascending order of registered VLAN IDs.

P5: Display item specification {priority | class} priority (0 to 7) class {class-a | class-b | class-c | class-d} * If P5 is omitted, the integrated value of all the priorities is shown.

Default value None


Monitors

22-9

Notes Using VLAN counter display requires that counter information collection conditions in VLAN units be registered in advance. If the specified port is in line module duplex operation when the counter collection cycle is short and the showing type is detail or when the counter collection cycle is long, counter information of the greater number port is also shown. If the specified port is in line module duplex operation when the counter collection cycle is short and the showing type is real time detail, information of the active port side counter is also shown. For detailed showing, specifying priority in P5 enables VLAN counter information to be shown in priority units. For realtime showing or detailed realtime showing, pressing [Ctrl]+[C] enables you to end counter information showing. If the counter value exceeds either of 32 bits or 64 bits (*), the value will be returned to zero and then incremented from zero again. If the active slot side increments “RxDisOutQoS Octs” and “RxDisOutQoSPkts” counter items during line module duplex operation, counter items for lines in the both systems will be incremented. VLAN counter values may be unable to be collected during UGSW module system switching or VLAN settings change. When VLAN tag swapping is set, the VLAN counter is incremented based on the swapping source VLAN-ID. The CoS priority mapping setup port shows post-mapping priority values. The portbase VLAN setup port increments the VLAN counter when the priority value is 0. (However, the CoS priority mapping setup port shows post-mapping priority values.)If no priority is mapped to the specified class, class information and target counter items are shown by hyphens “---“. There may be a case that some of counters cannot be displayed when the specification exceeds the maximum display number of VIDs or when a slot in line module duplex operation is specified. If there is any counter not displayed, a sentence will be displayed to indicate it.

Input examples *Switch@1# show counter vlan value short real 5/8 4094 VLAN Counter Table (Short Cycle) ================================ Port : 5/1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------- VID Pkts(Rx) Pkts(Tx) ================================================ 4094 0 0 Count-End with [Ctrl]+[c] *Switch@1# *Switch@1# show counter vlan value short real-detail 5/8 4094 0 VLAN Counter Table (Short Cycle) ================================ Port : 5/1 VID : 4094 Name : VID-4094 Kind : Priority.0 ----------------------------------------------------------------------- Item Counts | Item Counts =================================+===================================== RxOcts : 0 | TxOcts : 0 RxUcastOcts : 0 | TxUcastOcts : 0 RxMcastOcts : 0 | TxMcastOcts : 0

Monitors

22-10

RxBcastOcts : 0 | TxBcastOcts : 0 RxDisInQoSOcts : 0 | RxDisOutQoSOcts : 0 | TxDisOutQoSOcts : 0RxFilterOcts : 0 | TxFilterOcts : 0RxMACLimitOcts : 0 | RxPkts : 0 | TxPkts : 0 RxUcastPkts : 0 | TxUcastPkts : 0RxMcastPkts : 0 | TxMcastPkts : 0RxBcastPkts : 0 | TxBcastPkts : 0RxDisInQoSPkts : 0 | RxDisOutQoSPkts : 0 | TxDisOutQoSPkts : 0RxFilterPkts : 0 | TxFilterPkts : 0RxMACLimitPkts : 0 | RxFairnessPkts : 0 | Count-End with [Ctrl]+[c] *Switch@1# *Switch@1# show counter vlan value long 2/1 100 class-a VLAN Counter Table (Long Cycle) =============================== Port : 2/1 VID : 100 Name : VID-100 Kind : Class-A Class Information ================= In-Maximum In-Fairness Out-Fairness Out-Maximum Module (Priority) (Priority) (Priority) (Priority) ----------------------------------------------------------------------- Line : 6,7 6,7 --- Switch : 6,7 ----------------------------------------------------------------------- Item Counts | Item Counts =================================+===================================== RxOcts : 0 | TxOcts : --- RxUcastOcts : 0 | TxUcastOcts : --- RxMcastOcts : 0 | TxMcastOcts : --- RxBcastOcts : 0 | TxBcastOcts : --- RxDisInQoSOcts : 0 | RxDisOutQoSOcts : 0 | TxDisOutQoSOcts : ---RxFilterOcts : 0 | TxFilterOcts : ---RxMACLimitOcts : 0 | RxPkts : 0 | TxPkts : --- RxUcastPkts : 0 | TxUcastPkts : --- RxMcastPkts : 0 | TxMcastPkts : --- RxBcastPkts : 0 | TxBcastPkts : --- RxDisInQoSPkts : 0 | RxDisOutQoSPkts : 0 | TxDisOutQoSPkts : ---RxFilterPkts : 0 | TxFilterPkts : ---RxMACLimitPkts : 0 | RxFairnessPkts : 0 | *Switch@1#

Monitors

22-11

Output items Port: Port (line) number VID: VLAN ID Name: VLAN name [Realtime sowing] Pkts(Rx): Number of receiving frames Pkts(Tx): Number of sending frames [Detailed showing] Kind: Priority value or class to be shown RxOcts: Number of receiving octets *1RxUcastOcts: Number of receiving unicast octets *1RxMcastOcts: Number of receiving multicast octets *1RxBcastOcts: Number of receiving broadcast octets *1RxDisInQoSOcts: Number of receiving octets discarded by the maximum band

limiting function of the input port *1RxDisOutQoSOcts: Number of receiving octets discarded by the output fairness

control function *4RxFilterOcts: Number of receiving octets discarded by the input filtering function

*1 RxMACLimitOcts: Number of receiving octets discarded by the MAC address

learning count limiting function *1RxPkts: Number of receiving frames *1RxUcastPkts: Number of receiving unicast frames *1RxMcastPkts: Number of receiving multicast frames *1RxBcastPkts: Number of receiving broadcast frames *1RxDisInQoSPkts: Number of receiving frames discarded by the maximum band

limiting function of the input port *1RxDisOutQoSPkts: Number of receiving frames discarded by the output fairness

control function *4RxFilterPkts: Number of receiving frames discarded by the input filtering

function *1RxMACLimitPkts: Number of receiving frames discarded by the MAC address

learning count limiting function *1RxFairnessPkts: Number of receiving frames discarded by the input fairness control

function *Unsupported *2TxOcts: Number of sending octets *3TxUcastOcts: Number of sending unicast octets *3TxMcastOcts: Number of sending multicast octets *3TxBcastOcts: Number of sending broadcast octets *3TxDisOutQoSOcts: Number of sending octets discarded by the maximum band limiting

function of the output port *3TxFilterOcts: Number of sending octets discarded by the output filtering function

*3 TxPkts: Number of sending frames *3TxUcastPkts: Number of sending unicast frames *3TxMcastPkts: Number of sending multicast frames *3TxBcastPkts: Number of sending broadcast frames *3TxDisOutQoSPkts: Number of sending frames discarded by the maximum band

limiting function of the output port *3TxFilterPkts: Number of sending frames discarded by the output filtering

function *3

Monitors

22-12

[Class showing] Line(In-Maximum): Priority mapping in the maximum band limiting function of the

line module input port (This item is shown for the counter items indicated by *1 above.)

Line(In-Fairness): Priority mapping in the input fairness control function of the line module (This item is shown for the counter items indicated by *2 above.) *Unsupported

Line(Out-Maximum): Priority mapping in the maximum band limiting function of the line module output port (This item is shown for the counter items indicated by *3 above.)

Switch(Out-Fairness): Priority mapping in the output fairness control function of Switch (This item is shown for the counter items indicated by *4 above.)

Related commands

clear counter vlan value Clearing of VLAN counter set counter vlan entry Registration of VLAN counter show counter vlan entry Show VLAN counter registration information

Monitors

22-13

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear counter vlan value Clearing of VLAN counter

Clears various counter information for transmission and reception in VLAN units.

Input format clear counter vlan value P1 [ P2 [P3] ]


P2: Port (line) number (single specification) * If P2 is omitted, counter information of all the ports is cleared.

P3: VLAN identifier {VLAN-ID | VLAN-name} VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (single specification) VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters * If P3 is omitted, counter information of all the VLANs is cleared.

Default value None


Notes After this command has been entered, execution is confirmed. If the specified port (line) is in line module duplex operation, counter information of the greater number port is also cleared.

Input example *Switch@1# clear counter vlan value short 7/1 Would you like to clear the counter? :(Y/N): y *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

show counter vlan value Display of VLAN counter show counter vlan entry Display of VLAN counter registration information

Monitors

22-14

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set counter vlan entry Registration of VLAN counter

Registers counter information collection conditions in VLAN units.

Input format set counter vlan entry P1 P2 P3



VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple VLAN-IDs can be specified.) VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters

Default value None

Usage condition This command cannot be used for ATMP/DMP line modules.

Notes If the specified port (line) is in line module duplex operation, VLAN counter collection conditions for the greater number port are also registered. Each of the maximum numbers of VLAN counter information collection conditions that can be registered is as follows: - Maximum number of VLAN counter information collection conditions that can be

registered when the counter collection cycle is short: 16 - Maximum number of VLAN counter information collection conditions that can be

registered when the counter collection cycle is long: 256 - Maximum number of VLAN counter information collection conditions that can be

registered per slot: 64 * (For the GbE-MUX line module, the maximum number of VLAN counter information collection conditions that can be registered per slot is 128.)

- Maximum number of VLAN counter information collection conditions that can be registered per port: 16 *

* This maximum number is the total of the maximum number of VLAN counter information collection conditions that can be registered when the counter collection cycle is short and that when the counter collection cycle is long. The settings of the same port and VLAN when the counter collection cycle is short and those when the counter collection cycle is long are counted as 1.

Input example *Switch@1# set counter vlan entry short 1/8 4094

*Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

show counter vlan value Display of VLAN counter show counter vlan entry Display of VLAN counter registration information clear counter vlan entry Clearing of registered VLAN counter

Monitors

22-15

Monitors

22-16

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show counter vlan entry Display of VLAN counter registration information

Shows registered counter collection condition information in VLAN units.

Input format show counter vlan entry P1 [P2 [P3] ]


P2: Port (line) number (single specification) * If P2 is omitted, registered counter collection condition information of all the ports is shown.

P3: VLAN identifier {VLAN-ID | VLAN-name} VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple VLAN-IDs can be specified.) VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters * If P3 is omitted, registered counter collection condition information of all the VLANs is shown.

Default value None


Notes The number of counter collection condition information registered in VLAN units shown in “Entry Count” does not include information of the greater number port.

Input example *Switch@1# show counter vlan entry long VLAN Counter Entry (Long Cycle) =============================== Entry Count : 3 Port VID Name -------------------------------------------- 2/1 100 VID-100 9/1 4094 VID-4094 12/1 4094 VID-4094 *Switch@1#

Output items Entry Count: Number of counter collection condition information registered in the specified collection cycle Port: Port (line) number VID: VLAN ID Name: VLAN name

Monitors

22-17

Related commands

show counter vlan value Display of VLAN counter set counter vlan entry Registration of VLAN counter clear counter vlan entry Clearing of VLAN counter registration

Monitors

22-18

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear counter vlan entry Clearing of VLAN counter registration

Clears registered counter information collection conditions in VLAN units.

Input format clear counter vlan entry P1 P2 [P3]



VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (single specification) VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters * If P3 is omitted, the registered counter information collection conditions of all the VLANs are cleared.

Default value None


Notes After this command is entered, execution is confirmed. If the specified port (line) is in line module duplex operation, the VLAN counter collection conditions of the greater number port are also cleared.

Input example *Switch@1# clear counter vlan entry short 7/1 100 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set counter vlan entry Registration of VLAN counter show counter vlan entry Display of VLAN counter registration information

Monitors

22-19

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set counter pvc entry Registration of PVC counter

Registers a PVC counter.

Input format set counter pvc entry P1

Parameter P1: PVC identifier {line-number [VPI-value/VCI-value | VPI-value] | PVC-name} - line-number (single specification) - VPI-value/VCI-value (Only multiple VCI values can be specified.) - VPI-value (single specification) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters)

Default value None

Usage condition This command can be used only for ATM155/ATMP/ATMP155 line modules. You can use this function only for registered PVCs. To specify a port set for APS operation, use the smaller slot number. (The greater slot number cannot be specified.)

Note Clearing a PVC also clears all the corresponding registered PVC counters.

Input example *Switch@1# set counter pvc entry 1/1 1/32 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

show counter pvc entry Display of PVC counter registration information clear counter pvc entry Clearing of PVC counter registration

Monitors

22-20

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show counter pvc entry Display of PVC counter registration information

Shows PVC counter registration information.

Input format show counter pvc entry [P1]

Parameter P1: PVC identifier {slot number | line-number [VPI-value/VCI-value | VPI-value] | PVC-name}

- slot-number (single specification) - line-number (single specification) - VPI-value/VCI-value (Only multiple VCI values can be specified.) - VPI-value (Multiple VPI values can be specified) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters)

Default value None

Usage condition This command can be used only for ATM155/ATMP/ATMP155 line modules. To specify a port set for APS operation, use the smaller slot number. (The greater slot number cannot be specified.)

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show counter pvc entry PVC Counter Entry ================= Entry Count : 2 Port VPI/VCI Name ------------------------------------------------- 5/1 255/100 abc0123456789 10/1 255/123 abc9876543 *Switch@1#

Output items Entry Count: Number of registered PVC counters Port: Port (line) number VPI/VCI: VPI/VCI values Name: PVC name

Related commands

set counter pvc entry Registration of PVC counter clear counter pvc entry Clearing of PVC counter registration

Monitors

22-21

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear counter pvc entry Clearing of PVC counter registration

Clears a registered PVC counter.

Input format clear counter pvc entry P1

Parameter P1: PVC identifier {line-number [VPI-value/VCI-value | VPI-value] | PVC-name} - line-number (single specification) - VPI-value/VCI-value (single specification) - VPI-value (single specification) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters)

Default value None

Usage condition This command can be used only for ATM155/ATMP/ATMP155 line modules. To specify VPI-value/VCI-value or PVC-name, you can use registered PVC counters only. To specify a port set for APS operation, use the smaller slot number. (The greater slot number cannot be specified.)

Notes If only line-number is specified or VPI-value is specified, execution is confirmed after this command is entered. Also, all the PVC counters subordinated to the specified one will be cleared. When the PVC is cleared, PVC counter registration is automatically cleared.

Input example *Switch@1# clear counter pvc entry 10/1 255/123 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set counter pvc entry Registration of PVC counter show counter pvc entry Display of PVC counter registration information

Monitors

22-22

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show counter pvc value Display of byte/frame counter information in PVC units

Shows byte/frame counter information in PVC units.

Input format show counter pvc value P1 P2

Parameters P1: Showing type {real | detail | act-real | act-detail} real: Realtime showing detail: Detailed showing act-real: Realtime showing on APS active side act-detail: Detailed showing on APS active side

P2: PVC identifier {line-number {VPI-value/VCI-value | VPI-value} | PVC-name} - line-number (single specification) - VPI-value/VCI-value (single specification) - VPI-value (single specification) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters) * When real or act-detail is specified in P1, you can specify multiple values for VPI-value or multiple values for VCI-value of VPI-value/VCI-value. * You can specify VPI-value in P2 only when act-real or act-detail is specified in P1.

Default value None

Usage condition This command can be used only for ATM155 line modules. To specify a port set for APS operation, use the smaller slot number. (The greater slot number cannot be specified.)

Notes Using display of byte/frame counter information in PVC units requires that the PVC has been registered in advance. If the counter value exceeds the counter bit width, it is cleared to zero and then incremented. Counter values may be unable to be collected during system switching of SWITCH or target PVC settings change. When real or act-real is specified, up to 14 indexes will be displayed. Display counters for act-real and act-detail collects count values of APS active side by the update timing. If APS function is disabled at any update timing, then they collects the counter value of the smaller number slot.

Input examples *Switch@1# show counter pvc value real 10/1 30/100-101 PVC Counter Table ================= Port : 10/1 VPI/VCI Pkts(Rx) Pkts(Tx) Entry ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 30/100 18446744073709551615 18446744073709551615 registered 30/101 18446744073709551615 18446744073709551615 unregistered

Monitors

22-23

Count-End with [Ctrl]+[c] *Switch@1# *Switch@1# show counter pvc value detail 10/1 30/100 PVC Counter Table ================= Port : 10/1 VPI/VCI : 30/100 Name : abc0123456 Entry : registered Item Counts | Item Counts -----------------------------------------------------+----------------- RxOcts : 18446744073709551615 | TxOcts : 18446744073709551615 RxPkts : 123456789012345678 | TxPkts : 123456789012345678 RxErrors : 0 | *Switch@1#

Output items [Realtime showing] Port: Port (line) number VPI/VCI: VPI/VCI values Pkts(Rx): Number of receiving frames Pkts(Tx): Number of sending frames Entry:

registered: PVC counter registered unregistered: PVC counter not registered

[Detailed showing] Port: Port (line) number VPI/VCI: VPI/VCI values Name: PVC name Entry:


RxOcts: Number of receiving octets RxPkts: Number of receiving frames RxErrors: Number discarded receiving frames TxOcts: Number of sending octets TxPkts: Number of sending frames

Related commands

set counter pvc entry Registration of PVC counter show counter pvc entry Display of PVC counter registration information clear counter pvc value Clearing of byte/frame counter information in PVC units

Monitors

22-24

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear counter pvc value Clearing of byte/frame counter information in PVC units

Clears byte/frame counter information in PVC units.

Input format clear counter pvc value P1


Default value None

Usage condition This command can be used only for ATM155/ ATMP/ATMP155 line modules. However, this command has no effect on ATMP/ATMP155 lines because there is no information to be displayed for these lines. To specify VPI-value/VCI-value or PVC-name, you can use registered PVC counters only. To specify a port set for APS operation, use the smaller slot number. (The greater slot number cannot be specified.)

Notes If only line-number is specified or VPI-value is specified, execution is confirmed after this command is entered. Also, values of all the byte/frame counter in PVC units subordinated to the specified one will be cleared.

Input example *Switch@1# clear counter pvc value 1/1 0/32 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show counter pvc value Display of byte/frame counter information in PVC units

Monitors

22-25

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show counter cell Display of cell counter information

Shows various cell counter information in port units or in IMA group units.

Input format show counter cell P1 P2


P2: Port (line) number (single specification) * You can specify multiple port (line) numbers when real is specified in P1.

Default value None

Usage condition This command can be used only for ATM155/ ATMP/ATMP155 line modules. To specify a port set for APS operation, use the smaller slot number. (The greater slot number cannot be specified.) To specify a port set for an IMA group, use the rout port line number. (If a value other than the rout port line number is specified, an error occurs.)

Notes If the counter value exceeds the counter bit width, it is cleared to zero and then incremented. Counter values may be unable to be collected during system switching of SWITCH or target PVC settings change. When real is specified, up to 14 indexes will be displayed. In the case of OAM cell counters, only counters for registered PVCs are collected. If a route port of an IMA group is specified, counter information will be displayed in IMA group units. To display counter information for each port in an IMA group separately, use the "show counter ima-port" command.

Monitors

22-26

Input examples *Switch@1# show counter cell real 10/1 Cell Counter Table ================== Port Cells(Rx) Cells(Tx) Entry ----------------------------------------------------------------- 10/1 18446744073709551615 18446744073709551615 --- Count-End with [Ctrl]+[c] *Switch@1# *Switch@1# show counter cell detail 10/1 Cell Counter Table ================== Port : 10/1 Item Counts | Item Counts ---------------------------------------+------------------------------- RxCells : 1234567890 | TxCells : 1234567890RxErrors : 1 | TxErrors : 0RxF4SegAIS : 0 | TxF4SegAIS : 0RxF4SegRDI : 0 | TxF4SegRDI : 0RxF4SegLoopback : 0 | TxF4SegLoopback : 0RxF4SegOthers : 0 | TxF4SegOthers : 0RxF4EndAIS : 0 | TxF4EndAIS : 0RxF4EndRDI : 0 | TxF4EndRDI : 0RxF4EndLoopback : 0 | TxF4EndLoopback : 0RxF4EndOthers : 0 | TxF4EndOthers : 0RxF5SegAIS : 0 | TxF5SegAIS : 0RxF5SegRDI : 0 | TxF5SegRDI : 0RxF5SegLoopback : 0 | TxF5SegLoopback : 0RxF5SegOthers : 0 | TxF5SegOthers : 0RxF5EndAIS : 0 | TxF5EndAIS : 0RxF5EndRDI : 0 | TxF5EndRDI : 0RxF5EndLoopback : 0 | TxF5EndLoopback : 0RxF5EndOthers : 0 | TxF5EndOthers : 0 *Switch@1#

Monitors

22-27

Output items [Realtime showing] Port: Port (line) number Cells(Rx): Number of receiving cells Cells(Tx): Number of sending cells Entry: Fixed to "---" [Detailed showing] Port: Port (line) number RxCells: Number of receiving cells RxErrors: Number of discarded receiving cells RxF4SegAIS: VP-AIS cell of receiving segment RxF4SegRDI: VP-RDI cell of receiving segment RxF4SegLoopback: Loopback cell of receiving F4-level segment RxF4SegOthers: Other receiving cells of F4-level segment RxF4EndAIS: VP-AIS cell of receiving end RxF4EndRDI: VP-RDI cell of receiving end RxF4EndLoopback: Loopback cell of receiving F4-level end RxF4EndOthers: Other receiving cells of F4-level end RxF5SegAIS: VC-AIS cell of receiving segment RxF5SegRDI: VC-RDI cell of receiving segment RxF5SegLoopback: Loopback cell of receiving F5-level segment RxF5SegOthers: Other receiving cells of F5-level segment RxF5EndAIS: VC-AIS cell of receiving end RxF5EndRDI: VC-RDI cell of receiving end RxF5EndLoopback: Loopback cell of receiving F5-level end RxF5EndOthers: Other receiving cells of F5-level end TxCells: Number of sending cells TxErrors: Number of discarded sending cells TxF4SegAIS: VP-AIS cell of sending segment TxF4SegRDI: VP-RDI cell of sending segment TxF4SegLoopback: Loopback cell of sending F4-level segment TxF4SegOthers: Other sending cell of F4-level segment TxF4EndAIS: VP-AIS cell of sending end TxF4EndRDI: VP-RDI cell of sending end TxF4EndLoopback: Loopback cell of sending F4-level end TxF4EndOthers: Other sending cell of F4-level end TxF5SegAIS: VC-AIS cell of sending segment TxF5SegRDI: VC-RDI cell of sending segment TxF5SegLoopback: Loopback cell of sending F5-level segment TxF5SegOthers: Other sending cell of F5-level segment TxF5EndAIS: VC-AIS cell of sending end TxF5EndRDI: VC-RDI cell of sending end TxF5EndLoopback: Loopback cell of sending F5-level end TxF5EndOthers: Other sending cell of F5-level end

Related commands

set counter pvc entry Registration of PVC counter show counter pvc entry Display of PVC counter registration information clear counter cell Clearing of cell counter information set ima group Setting of IMA group clear ima group Clearing of IMA group

Monitors

22-28

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show counter cell f4 Display of cell counter information in F4 units

Shows various cell counter information in F4 units.

Input format show counter cell f4 P1 P2


P2: PVC identifier {line-number VPI-value | PVC-name} - line-number (single specification) - VPI-value (single specification) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters) (VP connection only) * You can specify multiple VPI values when real is specified in P1.

Default value None


Notes Using cell counter display requires that a PVC be registered in advance. If the counter value exceeds the counter bit width, it is cleared to zero and then incremented. Counter values may be unable to be collected during system switching of SWITCH or target PVC settings change. When real is specified, up to 14 indexes will be displayed. In the case of OAM cell counters, only counters for registered PVCs are collected. Values of F5 OAM cell counters for VP connection are fixed to zeros.

Input examples *Switch@1# show counter cell f4 real 10/1 255 F4-Cell Counter Table ===================== Port : 10/1 VPI Cells(Rx) Cells(Tx) Entry ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 255 18446744073709551615 18446744073709551615 unregistered Count-End with [Ctrl]+[c] *Switch@1# *Switch@1# show counter cell f4 detail 10/1 255

Monitors

22-29

F4-Cell Counter Table ===================== Port : 10/1 VPI : 255 Entry : unregistered Item Counts | Item Counts ----------------------------------------------------------+------------ RxCells : 1234567890 | TxCells : 1234567890RxErrors : 0 | TxErrors : 0RxF4SegAIS : 0 | TxF4SegAIS : 0RxF4SegRDI : 0 | TxF4SegRDI : 0RxF4SegLoopback : 0 | TxF4SegLoopback : 0RxF4SegOthers : 0 | TxF4SegOthers : 0RxF4EndAIS : 0 | TxF4EndAIS : 0RxF4EndRDI : 0 | TxF4EndRDI : 0RxF4EndLoopback : 0 | TxF4EndLoopback : 0RxF4EndOthers : 0 | TxF4EndOthers : 0RxF5SegAIS : 0 | TxF5SegAIS : 0RxF5SegRDI : 0 | TxF5SegRDI : 0RxF5SegLoopback : 0 | TxF5SegLoopback : 0RxF5SegOthers : 0 | TxF5SegOthers : 0RxF5EndAIS : 0 | TxF5EndAIS : 0RxF5EndRDI : 0 | TxF5EndRDI : 0RxF5EndLoopback : 0 | TxF5EndLoopback : 0RxF5EndOthers : 0 | TxF5EndOthers : 0 *Switch@1#

Output items [Realtime showing] Port: Port (line) number VPI: VPI value Cells(Rx): Number of receiving cells Cells(Tx): Number of sending cells Entry:


[Detailed showing] Port: Port (line) number VPI: VPI value Entry:


RxCells: Number of receiving cells RxErrors: Number of discarded receiving cells RxF4SegAIS: VP-AIS cell of receiving segment RxF4SegRDI: VP-RDI cell of receiving segment RxF4SegLoopback: Loopback cell of receiving F4-level segment RxF4SegOthers: Other receiving cells of F4-level segment RxF4EndAIS: VP-AIS cell of receiving end RxF4EndRDI: VP-RDI cell of receiving end RxF4EndLoopback: Loopback cell of receiving F4-level end RxF4EndOthers: Other receiving cells of F4-level end

Monitors

22-30

RxF5SegAIS: VC-AIS cell of receiving segment RxF5SegRDI: VC-RDI cell of receiving segment RxF5SegLoopback: Loopback cell of receiving F5-level segment RxF5SegOthers: Other receiving cells of F5-level segment RxF5EndAIS: VC-AIS cell of receiving end RxF5EndRDI: VC-RDI cell of receiving end RxF5EndLoopback: Loopback cell of receiving F5-level end RxF5EndOthers: Other receiving cells of F5-level end TxCells: Number of sending cells TxErrors: Number of discarded sending cells TxF4SegAIS: VP-AIS cell of sending segment TxF4SegRDI: VP-RDI cell of sending segment TxF4SegLoopback: Loopback cell of sending F4-level segment TxF4SegOthers: Other sending cell of F4-level segment TxF4EndAIS: VP-AIS cell of sending end TxF4EndRDI: VP-RDI cell of sending end TxF4EndLoopback: Loopback cell of sending F4-level end TxF4EndOthers: Other sending cell of F4-level end TxF5SegAIS: VC-AIS cell of sending segment TxF5SegRDI: VC-RDI cell of sending segment TxF5SegLoopback: Loopback cell of sending F5-level segment TxF5SegOthers: Other sending cell of F5-level segment TxF5EndAIS: VC-AIS cell of sending end TxF5EndRDI: VC-RDI cell of sending end TxF5EndLoopback: Loopback cell of sending F5-level end TxF5EndOthers: Other sending cell of F5-level end

Related commands

set counter pvc entry Registration of PVC counter show counter pvc entry display of PVC counter registration information clear counter cell Clearing of cell counter information set ima group Setting of IMA group clear ima group Clearing of IMA group

Monitors

22-31

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show counter cell f5 Display of cell counter information in F5 units

Shows various cell counter information in F5 units.

Input format show counter cell f5 P1 P2


P2: PVC identifier {line-number VPI-value/VCI-value | PVC-name} - line-number (single specification) - VPI-value/VCI-value (single specification) - PVC-name (1 to 32 characters) (VC connection only) * You can specify multiple values for VCI-value of VPI-value/VCI-value when real is specified in P1. * You can specify VPI-value in P2 only when real or act-real is specified in P1.

Default value None


Notes Using display of byte/frame counter information in PVC units requires that a PVC be registered in advance. If the counter value exceeds the counter bit width, it is cleared to zero and then incremented. Counter values may be unable to be collected during system switching of SWITCH or target PVC settings change. When real is specified, up to 14 indexes will be displayed. In the case of OAM cell counters, only counters for registered PVCs are collected. Values of F4 OAM cell counters for VP connection are fixed to zeros.

Input examples *Switch@1# show counter cell f5 real 10/1 255/100 F5-Cell Counter Table ===================== Port : 10/1 VPI/VCI Cells(Rx) Cells(Tx) Entry ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 255/100 18446744073709551615 18446744073709551615 registered Count-End with [Ctrl]+[c]

Monitors

22-32

*Switch@1# *Switch@1# show counter cell f5 detail 10/1 255/100 F5-Cell Counter Table ===================== Port : 10/1 VPI/VCI : 255/100 Entry : registered Item Counts | Item Counts ----------------------------------------------------------+------------ RxCells : 1234567890 | TxCells : 1234567890RxErrors : 0 | TxErrors : 0RxF4SegAIS : 0 | TxF4SegAIS : 0RxF4SegRDI : 0 | TxF4SegRDI : 0RxF4SegLoopback : 0 | TxF4SegLoopback : 0RxF4SegOthers : 0 | TxF4SegOthers : 0RxF4EndAIS : 0 | TxF4EndAIS : 0RxF4EndRDI : 0 | TxF4EndRDI : 0RxF4EndLoopback : 0 | TxF4EndLoopback : 0RxF4EndOthers : 0 | TxF4EndOthers : 0RxF5SegAIS : 0 | TxF5SegAIS : 0RxF5SegRDI : 0 | TxF5SegRDI : 0RxF5SegLoopback : 0 | TxF5SegLoopback : 0RxF5SegOthers : 0 | TxF5SegOthers : 0RxF5EndAIS : 0 | TxF5EndAIS : 0RxF5EndRDI : 0 | TxF5EndRDI : 0RxF5EndLoopback : 0 | TxF5EndLoopback : 0RxF5EndOthers : 0 | TxF5EndOthers : 0 *Switch@1#

Output items [Realtime showing] Port: Port (line) number VPI/VCI: VPI/VCI values Cells(Rx): Number of receiving cells Cells(Tx): Number of sending cells Entry:


[Detailed showing] Port: Port (line) number VPI/VCI: VPI/VCI values Entry:


RxCells: Number of receiving cells RxErrors: Number of discarded receiving cells RxF4SegAIS: VP-AIS cell of receiving segment RxF4SegRDI: VP-RDI cell of receiving segment RxF4SegLoopback: Loopback cell of receiving F4-level segment RxF4SegOthers: Other receiving cells of F4-level segment RxF4EndAIS: VP-AIS cell of receiving end

Monitors

22-33

RxF4EndRDI: VP-RDI cell of receiving end RxF4EndLoopback: Loopback cell of receiving F4-level end RxF4EndOthers: Other receiving cells of F4-level end RxF5SegAIS: VC-AIS cell of receiving segment RxF5SegRDI: VC-RDI cell of receiving segment RxF5SegLoopback: Loopback cell of receiving F5-level segment RxF5SegOthers: Other receiving cells of F5-level segment RxF5EndAIS: VC-AIS cell of receiving end RxF5EndRDI: VC-RDI cell of receiving end RxF5EndLoopback: Loopback cell of receiving F5-level end RxF5EndOthers: Other receiving cells of F5-level end TxCells: Number of sending cells TxErrors: Number of discarded sending cells TxF4SegAIS: VP-AIS cell of sending segment TxF4SegRDI: VP-RDI cell of sending segment TxF4SegLoopback: Loopback cell of sending F4-level segment TxF4SegOthers: Other sending cell of F4-level segment TxF4EndAIS: VP-AIS cell of sending end TxF4EndRDI: VP-RDI cell of sending end TxF4EndLoopback: Loopback cell of sending F4-level end TxF4EndOthers: Other sending cell of F4-level end TxF5SegAIS: VC-AIS cell of sending segment TxF5SegRDI: VC-RDI cell of sending segment TxF5SegLoopback: Loopback cell of sending F5-level segment TxF5SegOthers: Other sending cell of F5-level segment TxF5EndAIS: VC-AIS cell of sending end TxF5EndRDI: VC-RDI cell of sending end TxF5EndLoopback: Loopback cell of sending F5-level endTxCells TxF5EndOthers: Other sending cell of F5-level end

Related commands


Monitors

22-34

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show counter cell ima-port Display of cell counter information in IMA port units

Shows various cell counter information in units of ports in an IMA group.

Input format show counter cell ima-port P1 P2


P2: Port (line) number (single specification) * You can specify multiple port (line) numbers when real is specified in P1.

Default value None

Usage conditions

This command can be used only for ATMP line modules. Only ports set for an IMA group can be displayed.

Notes If the counter value exceeds the counter bit width, it is cleared to zero and then incremented. Counter values may be unable to be collected during system switching of SWITCH or target PVC settings change. When real is specified, up to 14 indexes will be displayed.

Monitors

22-35

Input examples *Switch@1# show counter cell ima-port real 10/1-3 Cell Counter Table ================== Port : 10/1-3 Port Cells(Rx) Cells(Tx) Entry ----------------------------------------------------------------- 10/1 18446744073709551615 18446744073709551615 --- 10/2 18446744073709551615 18446744073709551615 --- 10/3 18446744073709551615 18446744073709551615 --- Count-End with [Ctrl]+[c] *Switch@1# *Switch@1# show counter cell ima-port detail 10/2 Cell Counter Table ================== Port : 10/2 Item Counts | Item Counts---------------------------------------+------------------------------- RxCells : 18446744073709551615 | TxCells : 18446744073709551615RxErrors : 18446744073709551615 | TxErrors : 0 *Switch@1#

Output items [Realtime showing] Port: Port (line) number Cells(Rx): Number of receiving cells Cells(Tx): Number of sending cells Entry: Fixed to "---" [Detailed showing] Port: Port (line) number RxCells: Number of receiving cells RxErrors: Number of discarded receiving cells TxCells: Number of sending cells TxErrors: Number of discarded sending cells

Related commands


Monitors

22-36

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear counter cell Clearing of cell counter information

Clears various cell counter information.

Input format clear counter cell P1


Default value None

Usage condition This command can be used only for ATM155/ ATMP/ATMP155 line modules. To specify VPI-value/VCI-value or PVC-name, you can use registered PVC counters only. To specify a port set for APS operation, use the smaller slot number. (The greater slot number cannot be specified.) To specify a port set for an IMA group, use the rout port line number. (If a value other than the rout port line number is specified, an error occurs.)

Notes If only line-number is specified or VPI-value is specified, execution is confirmed after this command is entered. Also, all the cell counters included will be cleared.

Input example *Switch@1# clear counter cell 1/1 0/32 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

show counter pvc entry Display of PVC counter registration information show counter cell Display of cell counter information show counter cell f4 Display of cell counter information in F4 units show counter cell f5 Display of cell counter information in F5 units

Monitors

22-37

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

mirror port Setting of mirroring start or stop

Sets mirroring start or stop.

- Stopping mirroring mirror port P1 (stop) - Starting mirroring (with only input-side lines specified for mirroring target) mirror port P1 (start) P2 P3 - Starting mirroring (with only output-side lines specified for mirroring target) mirror port P1 (start) P2 P4

Input formats

- Starting mirroring (with input- and output-side lines specified for mirroring target) mirror port P1 (start) P2 P3 P4 mirror port P1 (start) P2 P4 P3

Parameters P1: Mirroring start or stop {start | stop} start: Mirroring start stop: Mirroring stop

P2: Mirroring output destination line number (single specification) P3: Mirroring target line (input-side)

in-port line number (Multiple values can be specified.) P4: Mirroring target line (output-side)

out-port line number (Multiple values can be specified.)

Default value None


Notes In the following cases, you cannot set mirroring start: - The mirroring output destination port is duplicated with the mirroring target port. - VLAN is set in the port to be specified as the mirroring output destination. - Link aggregation is set in the port to be specified as the mirroring output destination.- In the mirroring setting for GbE-MUX line module, a line module other than the same

line module is specified. - In the mirroring setting for GbE-MUX line module, multiple mirroring target port input

sides (in-port) are specified. - In the mirroring setting for GbE-MUX line module where mirroring target port

output-side (out-port) is specified, the protocol control frame can perform monitoring only at the input-side port specified for mirroring target.

Input example *Switch@1# mirror port start 7/1 in-port 8/1

*Switch@1#

Monitors

22-38

Output item

Related command

show mirror port Display of mirroring settings

Monitors

22-39

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show mirror port Display of mirroring settings

Shows mirroring settings.

Input format show mirror port

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show mirror port Mirror Information ================== Mirror To ---------- Port: 7/1 Mirror From -------------- In Port: 8/1 Out Port: *Switch@1#

Output items Mirror To: Mirroring output destination port Port: Port (line) number

Mirror From: Mirroring target port In Port: Port (line) number specified on input side Out Port: Port (line) number specified on output side

Related command

mirror port Setting of mirroring start or stop

Monitors

22-40

(Blank page)

Maintenance and Operation

23-1

23 Maintenance and

Operation


23-2

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

upload running-config Uploading of running configuration to ftp server

Uploads running configuration to the ftp server.

Input format upload running-config P1 P2

Parameters P1: IP address P2: File name or path name + file name (1 to 127 characters)

Default value None

Usage conditions You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx, and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx as the IP address. (”xxx” is any numeric character.) Also, you can set the network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 but this setting does not provide correct communication.

Notes Set an ftp user name and ftp password interactively. Set a file name or a path name + file name with alphabets, numeric characters, and symbols and signs “% & , / : = [ ] \ ^ _ { } ~ . -”. You can use “/”, ":" and “\” only when specifying a path name. You can use “.” only when specifying a file name. Configuration information which is uploaded is the same as the information displayed by the “show running-config” command.

Input example *Switch@1# upload running-config 192.168.2.212 test.txt FTP Login Name : cx2600 FTP Login Password : Data Transferring..................................... *Switch@1#

Output items FTP Login Name: User name used to log in to ftp server FTP Login Password: User password used to log in to ftp server FTP Information: ftp server error message (Only when a command error occurs)

Related commands

set ip address in-band Setting of in-band IP address set ip address out-band Setting of out-band IP address download running-config Downloading of running configuration from ftp server show running-config Display of running configuration write memory Saving of setting status


23-3

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

upload startup-config Uploading of startup configuration to ftp server

Uploads startup configuration to the ftp server.

Input format upload startup-config P1 P2


Default value None


Notes Set an ftp user name and ftp password interactively. Set a file name or a path name + file name with alphabets, numeric characters, and symbols and signs “% & , / : = [ ] \ ^ _ { } ~ . -”. You can use “/”, ":" and “\” only when specifying a path name. You can use “.” only when specifying a file name. Configuration information which is uploaded is the same as the information displayed by the “show startup-config” command.

Input example *Switch@1# upload startup-config 192.168.2.211 test2.txt FTP Login Name : cx2600 FTP Login Password : Data Transferring..................................... *Switch@1#


Related commands

set ip address in-band Setting of in-band IP address set ip address out-band Setting of out-band IP address download startup-config Downloading of startup configuration from ftp server show startup-config Display of startup configuration write memory Saving of setting status clear startup-config Clearing of startup configuration


23-4

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

upload local-syslog Uploading of system log to ftp server

Uploads the system log to the ftp server.

Input format upload local-syslog P1 P2


Default value None


Notes Set an ftp user name and ftp password interactively. Set a file name or a path name + file name with alphabets, numeric characters, and symbols and signs “% & , / : = [ ] \ ^ _ { } ~ . -”. You can use “/”, ":" and “\” only when specifying a path name. You can use “.” only when specifying a file name. Local syslog information which is uploaded is the same as the information displayed by the “show local syslog” command.

Input example *Switch@1# upload local-syslog 192.168.2.211 syslog.txt FTP Login Name : cx2600 FTP Login Password : Information is under collection. Data Transferring........................ *Switch@1#


Related commands

set ip address in-band Setting of in-band IP address set ip address out-band Setting of out-band IP address show syslog local Display of local syslog clear syslog local Clearing of local log


23-5

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

upload all-information Uploading of setting information to ftp server

Uploads setting information to the ftp server.

Input format upload all-information P1 P2


Default value None


Notes Set an ftp user name and ftp password interactively. Set a file name or a path name + file name with alphabets, numeric characters, and symbols and signs “% & , / : = [ ] \ ^ _ { } ~ . -”. You can use “/”, ":" and “\” only when specifying a path name. You can use “.” only when specifying a file name. Setting information which is uploaded is the same as the information displayed by the “show all” command.

Input example *Switch@1# upload all-information 192.168.2.211 allinfo.txt FTP Login Name : cx2600 FTP Login Password : Information is under collection. Data Transferring........................ *Switch@1#


Related command

set ip address in-band Setting of in-band IP address set ip address out-band Setting of out-band IP address show all Display of setting information


23-6

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

upload fault Uploading of fault information to ftp server

Uploads fault information to the ftp server.

Input format upload fault P1 P2


Default value None


Notes Set an ftp user name and ftp password interactively. Set a file name or a path name + file name with alphabets, numeric characters, and symbols and signs “% & , / : = [ ] \ ^ _ { } ~ . -”. You can use “/”, ":" and “\” only when specifying a path name. You can use “.” only when specifying a file name. Fault information which is uploaded is the same as the information displayed by the “show fault present” and “show fault past” commands.

Input example *Switch@1# upload fault 192.168.2.211 fault.txt FTP Login Name : cx2600 FTP Login Password : Information is under collection. Data Transferring........................... *Switch@1#


Related commands

set ip address in-band Setting of in-band IP address set ip address out-band Setting of out-band IP address show fault present Display of current fault and alarm information show fault past Display of past fault information


23-7

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

download software Downloading of software

Downloads software.

Input format download software P1 P2


Default value None


Notes Set an ftp user name and ftp password interactively. Set a file name or a path name + file name with ASCII characters other than ["], [?], and [control character]. (However, you can use only the characters that can be recognized by the ftp server.) When using [space], enclose the entire character string in double quotation marks.

Input example *Switch@1# download software 10.40.73.200 cx2600_sw/release_lm/cx2600_220_so Ft_c_010003.dlm FTP Login Name : cx2600 FTP Login Password : Data Transferring................. Download Data Processing.......................... Writing Flash Memory............ *Switch@1#


Related commands

set ip address in-band Setting of in-band IP address set ip address out-band Setting of out-band IP address


23-8

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

download fpga switch Downloading of FPGA of UGSW module

Downloads FPGA of a UGSW module.

Input format download fpga switch P1 P2


Default value None


Note Set an ftp user name and ftp password interactively. To reflect the downloaded data, you must enter the reset switch command specifying fpga-version-up parameter to reinitialize the switch module.

Input example *Switch@1# download fpga switch 192.168.1.30 /data/cx2600_220_fpga_UGSWC_020102.dlm Data Transferring.. Writing Flash Memory...................... Data Transferring.. Writing Flash Memory...................... Data Transferring.. Writing Flash Memory...................... Data Transferring.. Writing Flash Memory...................... Data Transferring.. Writing Flash Memory...................... Data Transferring.. Writing Flash Memory...................... Data Transferring.. Writing Flash Memory...................... Data Transferring.. Writing Flash Memory...................... *Switch@1#



23-9

Related command

set ip address in-band Setting of in-band IP address set ip address out-band Setting of out-band IP address reset switch Resetting of UGSW module


23-10

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

download fpga line Downloading of FPGA of line module

Downloads FPGA of a line module.

Input format download fpga line P1 P2 P3

Parameters P1: Line module type {fe | gbe | fe-pv | gbe-pv | gmx | atm | tdmp | atmp | gbe-pv2 | atmp155 | tdmp155}

fe: Line module FE8/FX8 gbe: Line module GbE fe-pv: Line module FE8-PV/FX8-PV gbe-pv: Line module Gbe-PV gmx: Line module GM8-T/GM8-X atm: Line module ATM155 tdmp: Line module TDMP atmp: Line module ATMP gbe-pv2: Line module Gbe-PV2 atmp155: Line module ATMP155 tdmp155: Line module TDMP155

P2: IP address P3: File name or path name + file name (1 to 127 characters)

Default value None


Notes To reflect the downloaded data, you must enter the reset line command to reinitialize the line module. Set an ftp user name and FTP password interactively. Set a file name or a path name + file name with ASCII characters other than ["], [?], and [control character]. (However, you can use only the characters that can be recognized by the ftp server.) When using [space], enclose the entire character string in double quotation marks.


23-11

Input example *Switch@1# download fpga line fe 192.168.1.30 /data/cx2600_220_fpga_FE_FX_020102.dlm Data Transferring.. Download Data Processing................................................. Line# 1 : completed Line# 2 : --- Line# 3 : completed Line# 4 : --- Line# 5 : --- Line# 6 : --- Line# 7 : completed Line# 8 : --- Line# 9 : --- Line#10 : --- Line#11 : --- Line#12 : --- *Switch@1#


Related command

set ip address in-band Setting of in-band IP address set ip address out-band Setting of out-band IP address reset line Resetting of line module


23-12

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

download running-config Downloading of running configuration from ftp server

Downloads running configuration from the ftp server.

Input format download running-config P1 P2


Default value None


Notes No line module can be initialized during execution of this command. For this reason, the line modules implemented during execution of this command are incorporated with OUS state. Also if a download file contains a command that involves line module initialization (e.g., set line type), the specified line module may be incorporated with OUS state. After this command terminates, use the reset line command to reinitialize the line module incorporated with OUS state. ftp transfer may be performed several times according to the configuration size to be downloaded. Set an ftp user name and ftp password interactively. Set a file name or a path name + file name with ASCII characters other than ["], [?], and [control character]. (However, you can use only the characters that can be recognized by the ftp server.) When using [space], enclose the entire character string in double quotation marks.

Input example *Switch@1# download running-config 192.168.2.212 soft_LM/test.txt FTP Login Name : cx2600 FTP Login Password : Data Transferring.... Data setting........ *Switch@1#



23-13

Related commands

set ip address in-band Setting of in-band IP address set ip address out-band Setting of out-band IP address upload running-config Uploading of running configuration to ftp server show running-config Display of running configuration write memory Saving of setting status reset line Resetting of line module


23-14

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

download startup-config Downloading of startup configuration from ftp server

Downloads startup configuration from the ftp server.

Input format download startup-config P1 P2


Default value None


Notes ftp transfer may be performed several times according to the configuration size to be downloaded. Set an ftp user name and ftp password interactively. Set a file name or a path name + file name with ASCII characters other than ["], [?], and [control character]. (However, you can use only the characters that can be recognized by the ftp server.) When using [space], enclose the entire character string in double quotation marks.

Input example *Switch@1# download startup-config 192.168.2.212 soft_LM/test.txt FTP Login Name : cx2600 FTP Login Password : Data Transferring.... Data setting........ Writing Flash Memory........ *Switch@1#


Related commands

set ip address in-band Setting of in-band IP address set ip address out-band Setting of out-band IP address upload startup-config Uploading of startup configuration to ftp server show startup-config Display of startup configuration write memory Saving of setting status clear startup-config Clearing of startup configuration


23-15

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show running-config Display of running configuration

Shows the current running configuration.

Input format show running-config [P1]

Parameter P1: Scroll specification {step | non-step} step: Step running non-step: Non-step running (automatic running to the end) * If P1 is omitted, scroll follows scroll control settings.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show running-config non-step !System : NEC CX2600/220 !Current Soft Ver.04.07.01 !Present Time : 12/25/2006 21:46:34 set terminal scroll system off set terminal logout 0 ! set fault auto-reboot disable ! set vlan user ap 1/1 3001-3032 tp 1/1 set vlan user ap 1/1 3001-3032 tp 1/2 set vlan user ap 1/2 3033-3064 tp 1/1 set vlan user ap 1/2 3033-3064 tp 1/2 set vlan remote tp 1 rp 65 ap 1/1-32,2/1-32 set port speed tp 1/2-4 1000m-full set port speed ap 1/1-32 1000m-full set frame-size rp 1500 set filter ethertype tp 1/1 other block set filter ethertype tp 1/1 1 0x800 admit set filter ethertype tp 1/1 2 0x806 admit ! set system name CX2600 set snmp enable ! ! *Switch@1#

Output item


23-16

Related commands

upload running-config Uploading of running configuration to ftp server download running-config Downloading of running configuration from ftp server write memory Saving of setting status


23-17

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show startup-config Display of startup configuration

Shows the saved startup configuration.

Input format show startup-config [P1]


Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show startup-config non-step !System : NEC CX2600/220 !Written Soft Ver.04.07.01 !Written Time : 12/25/2006 21:10:41 set terminal scroll system off set terminal logout 0 ! set fault auto-reboot disable ! set vlan user ap 1/1 3001-3032 tp 1/1 set vlan user ap 1/1 3001-3032 tp 1/2 set vlan user ap 1/1 3001-3032 tp 1/3 set vlan user ap 1/1 3001-3032 tp 1/4 set vlan user ap 1/2 3033-3064 tp 1/1 set vlan user ap 1/2 3033-3064 tp 1/2 set vlan user ap 1/2 3033-3064 tp 1/3 set vlan user ap 1/2 3033-3064 tp 1/4 set vlan remote tp 1 rp 65 ap 1/1-32,2/1-32 set port speed tp 1/2-4 1000m-full set port speed ap 1/1-32 1000m-full set frame-size rp 1500 set filter ethertype tp 1/1 other block set filter ethertype tp 1/1 1 0x800 admit set filter ethertype tp 1/1 2 0x806 admit ! set system name CX2600 set snmp enable ! ! *Switch@1#


23-18

Output item

Related commands

upload startup-config Uploading of startup configuration to ftp server download startup-config Downloading of startup configuration from ftp server write memory Saving of setting status clear startup-config Clearing of startup configuration


23-19

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show config difference Display of configuration difference

Shows whether there is a difference between startup configuration and running configuration.

Input format show config difference

Parameter None

Default value None


Note Since it takes times to show the result after command input, “…” (dots) are shown.

Input example Switch@1# show config difference Configuration Difference Information =================================== Module Configuration ----------------------------------- Switch#1 : same Switch#2 : different Switch@1#

Output items Module: Module Config: Difference between startup configuration and running configuration

same: There is no difference between startup configuration and running configurationdifference: There is a difference between startup configuration and running configuration

Related commands

download running-config Downloading of running configuration from ftp server download startup-config Downloading of startup configuration from ftp server write memory Saving of setting status clear startup-config Clearing of startup configuration


23-20

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set message transmit Setting of trap transmission selection

Sets trap transmission selection.

- Specifying private trap set message transmit [P1] [P2 (private-trap) [P3] ] P4 - Specifying trap-ID set message transmit [P1] [P2 (trap-id) [P3] ] P4 - Specifying line message set message transmit [P1] [P2 (line) [P3] ] P4 - Specifying port message or link change set message transmit [P1] [P2 (port | link) [P3] ] P4 - Specifying fault message set message transmit [P1] [P2 (fault) [P3] ] P4 - Specifying telnet message set message transmit [P1] [P2 (telnet) [P3] ] P4 - Specifying maintenance network message set message transmit [P1] [P2 (maintenance-network) [P3] ] P4 - Specifying external memory set message transmit [P1] [P2 (external-memory) [P3] ] P4 - Specifying ATM-OAM alarm set message transmit [P1] [P2 (atm-oam) [P3] ] P4 - Specifying Ether-OAM alarm set message transmit [P1] [P2 (ether-oam) [P3] ] P4 - Controlling STM-1 line set message transmit [P1] [P2 (stm) [P3] ] P4

Input formats

- Specifying messages below MC information SFP change information NTP access error Scheduled configuration upload Spanning tree MAC learning Link aggregation ATM loopback event APS event ATM loop occurrence fault EtherPS event T1E1OAM information TDMoP Buffer underrun information IMA Group Command set message transmit [P1] [P2] P4


23-21

Parameters P1: Message type {monitor | trap | remote-log | local-log} monitor: Autonomous message trap: Trap message remote-log: Remote log message local-log: Local log message * If P1 is omitted, trap transmission selection is set for all the message types.

P2: Message group private-trap: Private trap trap-id: Trap-ID line: Line message port: Port message link: Link change fault: Fault message mc: MC information sfp: SFP change information ntp: NTP access error telnet: telnet message maintenance-network: Maintenance network message backup: Scheduled configuration upload external-memory: External memory spantree: Spanning tree fdb: MAC learning aggregation: Link aggregation atm-oam: ATM-OAM alarm loopback-atm: ATM loopback event aps: APS event atm-loop: ATM loop occurrence fault ether-oam: Ether-OAM alarm ether-ps: EtherPS event t1e1: T1E1OAM information tdmop: TDMoP Buffer underrun information ima: IMA Group stm: STM-1 line control command: Command * If P2 is omitted, all the message groups are assumed to be specified.

• When private-trap is specified in P2 P3: Private trap number (1 to 99)

• When trap-id is specified in P2 P3: Trap-ID (1 to 999)

• When line is specified in P2 P3: Line module number (1 or 2)

• When port is specified in P2 P3: Port (line) number (single specification)

• When link is specified in P2 P3: Port (line) number (single specification)

• When fault is specified in P2 P3: Fault type {critical | major | minor | warning}

critical: Critical error major: Major error


23-22

minor: Minor error warning: Warning error

• When telnet is specified in P2 P3: telnet connection state {connect | fail}

connect: telnet login, logout fail: telnet error

• When maintenance-network is specified in P2 P3: Maintenance network load {out-band | in-band}

out-band: Maintenance network load (OUTBAND) in-band: Maintenance network load (INBAND)

• When external-memory is specified in P2 P3: External memory {status | fault}

status: External memory status change fault: External memory fault

• When atm-oam is specified in P2 P3: Alarm {detect-f1f3 | detect-f4f5 | detect-minor}

detect-f1f3: F1/F2/F3 alarm detection detect-f4f5: F4/F5 alarm detection detect-minor: MN alarm detection * If P3 is omitted, all the members belonging to the group specified in P2 are assumed to be specified.

• When ether-oam is specified in P2 P3: Ether-OAM alarm {unexpect-level | mismerge | unexpect-mep | unexpect-period | loc | rdi}

unexpect-level: Unexpect MEG Level mismerge: Mismerge unexpect-mep: Unexpect MEP unexpect-period: Unexpect Period loc: LOC rdi: RDI

• When stm is specified in P2

P3: STM-1 line control {detect-rs | detect-ms | detect-hp | detect-lp | detect-pdh}detect-rs: RS alarm detection detect-ms: MS alarm detection detect-hp: High-order path alarm detection detect-lp: Low-order path alarm detection detect-pdh: PDH alarm detection

P4: Enable/disable setting {enable | disable} enable: Enables trap transmission selection disable: Disables trap transmission selection



Note None


23-23

Input example *Switch@1# set message transmit trap telnet disable *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show message transmit config Display of trap transmission selection setting status


23-24

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show message transmit config Display of trap transmission selection setting status

Shows the trap transmission selection setting status.

Input format show message transmit config [P1]

Parameter P1: Message group private-trap: Private trap trap-id: Trap-ID line: Line message port: Port message link: Link change fault: Fault message mc: MC information sfp: SFP change information ntp: NTP access error telnet: telnet message maintenance-network: Maintenance network message backup: Scheduled configuration upload external-memory: External memory spantree: Spanning tree fdb: MAC learning aggregation: Link aggregation atm-oam: ATM-OAM alarm loopback-atm: ATM loopback event aps: APS event atm-loop: ATM loop occurrence fault ether-oam: Ether-OAM alarm ether-ps: EtherPS event t1e1: T1E1OAM information tdmop: TDMoP Buffer underrun information ima: IMA Group stm: STM-1 line control command: Command * If P1 is omitted, all the message groups are assumed to be specified.

Default value None


Note None


23-25

Input example *Switch@1# show message transmit config

Message Transmit Configuration(Member) ====================================== Group Member Monitor Trap Remote-log Local-log ----------------------------------------------------------------------- fault : critical enabled enabled enabled enabled major enabled enabled enabled enabled minor enabled enabled enabled enabled warning enabled enabled enabled enabled mc : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled sfp : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled ntp : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled telnet : connect enabled enabled enabled enabled fail enabled enabled enabled enabledmaintenance-network: out-band enabled enabled enabled enabled in-band enabled enabled enabled enabled backup : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled external-memory : status enabled enabled enabled enabled fault enabled enabled enabled enabled spantree : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled fdb : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled aggregation : --- enabled enabled enabled enabledatm-oam : detect-f1f3 enabled enabled enabled enabled detect-f4f5 enabled enabled enabled enabled detect-minor enabled enabled enabled enabled loopback-atm : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled aps : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled atm-loop : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled ether-oam : unexpect-level enabled enabled enabled enabled mismerge enabled enabled enabled enabled unexpect-mep enabled enabled enabled enabled unexpect-period enabled enabled enabled enabled loc enabled enabled enabled enabled rdi enabled enabled enabled enabled ether-ps : --- disabled disabled disabled disabledt1e1 : --- disabled disabled disabled disabledtdmop : --- enabled enabled enabled enabledstm : detect-rs enabled enabled enabled enabled detect-ms enabled enabled enabled enabled detect-hp enabled enabled enabled enabled detect-lp enabled enabled enabled enabled detect-pdh enabled enabled enabled enabledcommand : --- --- --- enabled enabled Message Transmit Configuration(Element) ======================================= Group Element Monitor Trap Remote-log Local-log ----------------------------------------------------------------- private-trap : 10 disabled disabled disabled disabled trap-id : 100 disabled disabled disabled disabled line : 1 enabled disabled disabled disabled 11 disabled disabled enabled enabled port : 1/1 enabled disabled disabled disabled 11/1 disabled disabled enabled enabled link : 1/1 enabled disabled disabled disabled


23-26

*Switch@1#

Output items Message Transmit Configuration(Member) Group: Group name Member: Member name Monitor: Autonomous message

enabled: Autonomous message enabled disabled: Autonomous message disabled

Trap: Trap message enabled: Trap message enabled disabled: Trap message disabled

Remote-log: Remote log message enabled: Remote log message enabled disabled: Remote log message disabled

Local-log: Local log message enabled: Local log message enabled disabled: Local log message disabled

Message Transmit Configuration(Element) Group: Group name Element: Element number Monitor: Autonomous message

enabled: Autonomous message enabled disabled: Autonomous message disabled

Trap: Trap message enabled: Trap message enabled disabled: Trap message disabled

Remote-log: Remote log message enabled: Remote log message enabled disabled: Remote log message disabled

Local-log: Local log message enabled: Local log message enabled disabled: Local log message disabled

Related command

set message transmit Setting of trap transmission selection


23-27

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show all Display of all setting information

Shows all setting information.

Input format show all [P1]


Default value None


Note For target commands, see “Appendix”.

Input example *Switch@1# show all non-step User Information ================ No entry in the table. System Date =========== Date : 10/21/2004 Time : 21:47:41 Time Zone: GMT +09:00 System Information ================== SysDescr : NEC CX2600/220 Ver.02.01.01 System Location: NEC System Name : CX2600/220 System Contact : abc System Up Time : 0 days, 00:45:42.13 Out-Band IP Table ================= Module MAC Address IP Address Netmask ----------------------------------------------------------------------- System : 00:00:4c:b4:fc:94 192.168.1.211 255.255.255.0 Switch#1 : 00:00:4c:b4:fc:94 192.168.1.212 255.255.255.0 Switch#2 : 00:00:00:00:00:00 192.168.1.213 255.255.255.0 <Omission>


23-28

Output item

Related commands

All show commands upload all-information Uploading of all setting information


23-29

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

write memory Saving of setting information

Saves the setting information.

Input format write memory [P1]

Parameter P1: Running slot {self | mate | system} self: Self slot mate: Mate slot system: Both-system slot * If P1 is omitted, self is assumed.

Default value None


Note None

Input example Switch@1# write memory Writing Flash Memory.... *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

upload running-config Uploading of running configuration to ftp server upload startup-config Uploading of startup configuration to ftp server download running-config Downloading of running configuration from ftp server download startup-config Downloading of startup configuration from ftp server show running-config Display of running configuration show startup-config Display of startup configuration clear startup-config Clearing of startup configuration


23-30

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear running-config line Clearing of line module configuration

Clears line module configuration.

Input format clear running-config line P1

Parameter P1: Line module number (1 to 12)

Default value None



Input example *Switch@1# clear running-config line 1 Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y Clearing Line Config... *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set port admin Setting of port blocking/unblocking set port speed Setting of port speed and MDI/MDI-X set port type Setting of GbE port media set port flowcontrol Setting of flow control set port protection-time Setting of port link protection time set port link-trap Setting of SNMP link trap transmission set port clock Setting of ATM transmission path clock set port frame Setting of ATM transmission path framing mode set port cable-length Setting of cable length set vlan tagbase Setting of tagbase VLAN set vlan portbase Setting of portbase VLAN set vlan swap Setting of VLAN tag swapping set vlan ethertype Setting of Ethernet type for VLAN tag recognition set qos maximum-mode Setting of maximum band limiting operation mode set qos in-rate maximum Setting of maximum band limiting function in input



units set qos out-class-map maximum Setting of priority mapping in output VLAN units set qos out-priority maximum Setting of priority discard function in output VLAN


23-31

units set qos out-rate maximum Setting of maximum band limiting function in output

VLAN units set qos class-map Setting of priority mapping set qos in-port cos-map Setting of input CoS priority mapping set qos out-port cos-map Setting of output CoS priority mapping set qos out-priority fairness Setting of burst tolerance of output-side fairness

control function of output port set qos out-weight fairness Setting of output-side fairness control function

weight of output port set qos out-rate fairness maximum-port Set upper threshold of output-side fairness control

function of output port set spantree port Set spanning tree enable/disable per port set spantree port priority Setting of priority per port set spantree port cost Setting of path cost per port set spantree port edge Setting of edge port set spantree port point-to-point Setting of point-to-point set aggregation group Setting of link aggregation group set aggregation port priority Setting of port priority set isolate port Setting /clearing of port isolate set filter in-port Setting of input filtering set filter out-port Setting of output filtering set fdb limiter Setting of MAC address learning count limiting

function set fdb limiter static Setting of static MAC address of MAC address

learning count limiting function set pvc static Registration of PVC set pvc name Registration of PVC name set pvc admin Setting of PVC blocking/unblocking set pvc port admin Setting of enbloc PVC blocking/unblocking set pvc-vlan mode Setting of PVC-VLAN mode set pvc-vlan table Setting of VLAN VC set pvc connection Setting of path between ATMs set isolate pvc Setting/clearing of PVC isolate set atm-loop Setting/clearing of ATM loop guard set atm-shaper mode Setting of rate mode set atm-shaper rate Setting of ATM shaper set atm-qos aal5 Setting of AAL5 mode set atm-qos out-port clp Setting of CLP set atm-oam Setting of ATM-OAM operation set atm-oam flow Setting of ATM-OAM flow point set loopback atm keepalive Setting of ATM loopback monitoring function set mc management Setting of M/C management function basics set counter vlan entry Setting of VLAN counter collection conditions set counter pvc entry Registration of PVC counter mirror port Setting of mirroring start or stop set line type Setting of line module type set aps Setting of APS enable/disable set aps time Setting of APS timer values set atmop mode Setting of ATMoP format set atmop format Setting of ATMoP format set atmop table Setting of ATM-Ether conversion


23-32

set atmop in-port cos Setting of CLP-CoS mapping set ima clock Setting of IMA clock mode set ima group Setting of IMA group set tdm group Setting of TDM group set tdm path Setting of TDM path set tdmop mode Setting of TDMoP mode set tdmop group Setting of TDMoP group set tdmop format Setting of TDMoP format set tdmop jitter Setting of variation tolerance set tdmop adaptive-clock Setting of adaptive clock set tdmop connection Setting of TDMoP connection set tdmop admin Setting of TDMoP blocking/unblocking set reference-clock priority Setting of reference clock priority set ether-oam mep Setting of MEP set ether-oam cc Setting of ETH-CC transmission set ether-oam peer-mep Setting of associated MEP ID set ether-oam mip Setting of MIP set ether-oam rdi Setting of RDI operation set ether-oam lm Setting of test target MEP set line mode atmp Setting of ATMP line mode set line mode tdmp Setting of TDMP line mode set line mode gbe Setting of GbE line mode set ether-ps Setting of EtherPS enable/disable set ether-ps control-vlan Setting of EtherPS control VLAN set ether-ps time Setting of EtherPS timer


23-33

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear startup-config Clearing of startup configuration

Clears startup configuration.

Input format clear startup-config P1 [P2]

Parameters P1: Initialization mode {all | exip} all: Clears all configurations exip: Clears all configurations other than IP configuration

P2: Running slot {self | mate | system} self: Self slot mate: Mate slot system: Both-system slot * If P2 is omitted, self is assumed.

Default value None



Input examples *Switch@1# clear startup-config all Would you like to delete config data? :(Y/N): y Clearing Flash Memory... *Switch@1# clear startup-config exip Would you like to delete config data? :(Y/N): y Clearing Flash Memory... *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

upload startup-config Uploading of startup configuration from ftp server download startup-config Downloading of startup configuration from ftp server show startup-config Display of startup configuration write memory Saving of setting status


23-34

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set backup server Setting of backup server

Sets a backup server.

Input format set backup server P1 P2

Parameters P1: IP address P2: FTP login name (1 to 16 characters)

Default value None

Usage conditions You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx, and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx as the server IP address. (“xxx” is any numeric character.) If a backup server exists at the network address 192.168.128.0/24 or 192.168.129.0/24, you can set the server. This setting, however, does not provide correct communication.

Notes Enter an ftp password interactively. Set an ftp login name with ASCII characters other than ["], [?], and [control character]. (However, you can use only the characters that can be recognized by the ftp server.) When using [space], enclose the entire character string in double quotation marks. Set an ftp password (0 to 16 characters) with ASCII characters other than [space], [!], [?], and [control character].

Input example *Switch@1# set backup server 192.168.2.200 cx2600 FTP Login Password : *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set ip address in-band Setting of in-band IP address set ip address out-band Setting of out-band IP address set backup schedule Setting of backup schedule show backup information Display of backup information clear backup server Clearing of backup server

mailto:*Switch@1#


23-35

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear backup server Clearing of backup server

Clears a backup server.

Input format clear backup server

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear backup server *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

set backup server Setting of backup server

mailto:*Switch@1#

mailto:*Switch@1#


23-36

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set backup schedule Setting of backup schedule

Sets backup schedule.

Input formats - Specifying 1-week cycle set backup schedule P1 P2 P3(week) P4 P5

- Specifying 1-day cycle set backup schedule P1 P2 P3(day) P4

- Specifying fixed cycle set backup schedule P1 P2 P3(cycle) P4

Parameters P1: Backup type {running-config} P2: Storage directory P3: Backup start type {week | day | cycle}

week: 1 week cycle day: 1 day cycle cycle: Fixed cycle

• When week is specified in P3 P4: Day of week specification {sunday | monday | tuesday | wednesday | thursday | friday | saturday} P5: Time specification (0 to 23 hours)

• When day is specified in P3 P4: Time specification (0 to 23 hours)

• When cycle is specified in P3 P4: Time cycle specification (disable or cycle of 12 to 168 hours)

Disable: Sets backup start disable Default value None


Note Set a storage directory with alphabets and numeric characters.

Input example *Switch@1# set backup schedule running-config /config/backup week sunday 12 *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set backup server Setting of backup server show backup information Display of backup information

mailto:*Switch@1#


23-37

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show backup information Display of backup information

Shows backup information.

Input format show backup information

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show backup information Backup Server Configuration =========================== Backup Data : running-config IP Address : 192.168.2.200 FTP Login Name : CX2600 FTP Directory : /config/backup Retrieval time : weekly(sunday) 12:00:00 Backup status : waiting *Switch@1#

Output items Backup Data: Backup type IP Address: FTP server address FTP Login Name: FTP login name

FTP Directory: FTP directory Retrieval time: Backup cycle Backup Status: Backup status

Related commands

set backup server Setting of backup server clear backup server Clearing of backup server set backup schedule Setting of backup schedule

mailto:*Switch@1#

mailto:*Switch@1#


23-38

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show fault present Display of current fault and alarm information

Shows the device fault and alarm information that has occurred so far.

Input format show fault present [P1]

Parameter P1: Detailed showing {detail} detail: Detailed showing specification

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show fault present Device Fault Information ======================== Module Type Status ---------------------------------------------------------- Switch#1 : ugswc normal : --- --- Switch#2 : ugswc temperature fault(wr:4100,01000001) : ext-m device fault(wr:4201,01000000) Line#1 : gbe normal Line#2 : gbe normal Line#3 : --- --- Line#4 : --- --- Line#5 : tdmp device fault(cr:1290,05000000) Line#6 : tdmp normal Line#7 : --- --- Line#8 : --- --- Line#9 : --- --- Line#10 : --- --- Line#11 : --- --- Line#12 : --- --- Power#1 : dc normal Power#2 : dc device fault(mj:2202,01000000) Fan : fan#1 normal fan#2 normal fan#3 device fault(mj:2201,01000000) *Switch@1#


23-39

Output items [1] Fault occurrence status normal: Normal status device: Device fault software: Software failure temperature: Temperature failure processor: CPU failure

For description of fault information, refer to “Fault List” of “Appendix” in the “Instruction Manual”. Type: Module type

ugswc: UGSW module UGSW A ext-m: external memory fe8: Line module FE8 fx8a: Line module Fx8a fx8b: Line module Fx8b fx8s: Line module Fx8s gbe: Line module GbE atm155: Line module ATM155 atmp: Line module ATMP tdmp: Line module TDMP atmp155: Line module ATMP155 tdmp155: Line module TDMP155 ac: Power module AC dc: Power module DC fan: Fan module

Related commands

show fault past Display of past fault information show system status Display of device installation status and other various statuses


23-40

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear fault warning Clearing of WR fault

Clears a WR fault.

Input format clear fault warning

Parameter None

Default value None


Notes This command clears the following faults: - Software fault WR (Switch module)

WR SWITCH SOFTWARE FAULT - Device fault WR (Switch module)

WR SWITCH DEVICE FAULT - Device fault WR (Line module)

WR LINE DEVICE FAULT

Input example *Switch@1# clear fault warning *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show fault present Display of current fault and alarm information


23-41

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show fault past Display of past fault information

Shows fault information collected when an exception and WDTOVF occurred.

Input format show fault past

Parameter None

Default value None


Note When a self exception or WDTOVF occurs, fault information can be saved every five Main CPU faces and Sub CPU faces (to 20 faces).

Input example *Switch@1# show fault past Exception Information ===================== Main CPU#1 [1] ----------------------------------------------------------------------- S/W : 03.09.04 H/W : 03.09.04 Date : 10/03/2003 17:01:15 <Exception Information> task name = MMI_TASK vector offset = 0x00000200 error number = 0x037f85a8 data exception address register = 0x003d0000 bus error address register = 0x08000000 bus error syndrome register = 0x0c000000 general purpose register 00000000 037f8658 00000000 08000000 00001200 00000000 00000000 20202020 <Omission> . . condition register = 0x44220040 fixed-point exception register = 0x00000000 Main CPU#1 [2] ----------------------------------------------------------------------- S/W : 03.09.04 H/W : 03.09.04 Date : 10/03/2003 19:00:35 <Exception Information> task name = MMI_TASK


23-42

vector offset = 0x00000200 error number = 0x037f85a8 data exception address register = 0x003d0000 bus error address register = 0x08000000 bus error syndrome register = 0x0c000000 general purpose register 00000000 037f8658 00000000 08000000 00001200 00000000 00000000 20202020 . . . condition register = 0x44220040 fixed-point exception register = 0x00000000 Error Information ================= Main CPU#1 [1] ----------------------------------------------------------------------- S/W : 03.09.04 H/W : 03.09.04 Date : 10/03/2003 17:01:15 <Task Information> Name Entry TID PRI Status PC SP ERRNO Delay ----------------------------------------------------------------------- tExcTask excTask 2f784a0 0 PEND 3066e4 2f783c0 0 0 . . <Task Trace Information> Task Name : tExcTask 2df888 vxTaskEntry +5c : excTask () 2aaf4c excTask +38 : msgQReceive () 2d3040 msgQReceive +280: qJobGet () Task Name : tLogTask . . . *Switch@1#

Output items Exception Information: Fault information collected when the exception occurred Error Information: Fault information collected when the WDTOVF occurred

Related commands

show fault present Display of current fault and alarm information clear fault past Clearing of past fault information


23-43

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

clear fault past Clearing of past fault information

Clears all the fault information that was collected when a self exception or WDTOVF occurred and is shown by the show fault past command.

Input format clear fault past

Parameter None

Default value None



Input example *Switch@1# clear fault past Would you like to clear past fault information? :(Y/N): y Clearing Flash Memory..... *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show fault past Display of past fault information


23-44

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show system status Display of device installation status and other various statuses

Shows the device installation status and other various statuses.

Input format show system status

Parameter None

Default value None


Note This command also shows the module redundant configuration status and type information.

Input example *Switch@1# show system status System Equipment Information ============================ Module Type Status Redundancy Mode Assign Install ----------------------------------------------------------------------- Switch#1 : ugswc active dual-fixed --- ugswc Switch#2 : --- unmount --- --- --- Line#1 : fe8 active single-mode none fe8 Line#2 : --- unmount single-mode none --- Line#3 : --- unmount single-mode none --- Line#4 : --- unmount single-mode none --- Line#5 : --- unmount single-mode none --- Line#6 : --- unmount single-mode none --- Line#7 : --- unmount single-mode none --- Line#8 : --- unmount single-mode none --- Line#9 : --- unmount single-mode none --- Line#10 : --- unmount single-mode none --- Line#11 : --- unmount single-mode --- --- Line#12 : --- unmount single-mode --- --- Power#1 : dc mount --- --- dc Power#2 : --- unmount --- --- --- Fan : fan#1 mount --- --- --- fan#2 mount --- --- --- fan#3 mount --- --- --- *Switch@1#


23-45

Output items Module: Module Type: Module type

ugswc: UGSW module UGSWC fe8: Line module FE8 fx8: Line module Fx8 gbe: Line module GbE atm155: Line module ATM155 atmp: Line module ATMP tdmp: Line module TDMP tdmp155: Line module TDMP155 atmp155: Line module ATMP155 ac: Power module AC dc: Power module DC

Status: Module status unmount: Unmounted status initializing: Initialization status active: ACT status standby: SBY status out of service: Out-of-service status mismatch: Incorrect insertion status active-fault: ACT-FLT status standby-fault: SBY-FLT status

Redundancy Mode: Redundancy mode single-mode: Single mode dual-fixed: Dual-fixed mode

Assign: Type setting status fe8: Line module FE8 fx8: Line module Fx8 gbe: Line module GbE atm155: Line module ATM155

Install: Installation status ugswc: ugsw module fe8: Line module fe8 fx8a: Line module fx8a fx8b: Line module fx8b fx8s: Line module fx8s gbe: Line module gbe fe8-pv: Line module fe8-pv fx8a-pv: Line module fx8a-pv fx8b-pv: Line module fx8b-pv fx8s-pv: Line module fx8s-pv gbe-pv: Line module gbe-pv gm8-t: Line module gm8-t gm8-x: Line module gm8-x atm155s: Line module atm155s atm155m: Line module atm155m atmp: Line module atmp tdmp: Line module tdmp tdmp155: Line module tdmp155 atmp155: Line module atmp155 gbe-pv2: Line module GbE-PV2 ac: Power module AC dc: Power module DC

Related command

show system revision Display of various version information


23-46

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show system bridge Display of bridge information for device

Shows the MAC address for the device, total number of line module ports, and L2SW type.

Input format show system bridge

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show system bridge System Bridge ============= Base Bridge Address : 00:00:4c:b4:fc:6c Base Number Ports : 16ports Base Type : Transparent Only *Switch@1#

Output items Base Bridge Address: MAC address for device Base Number Ports: Total number of installed line module ports Base Type: L2SW type

Related command

None


23-47

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show system module-id Display of module ID information

Shows ID information of each UGSW module and line module.

Input format show system module-id

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show system module-id System Module ID ================ Module Install Module ID Product Number MAC Address --------------------------------------------------------------------- Switch#1 : ugswc P-4X6B(002)(430) NEC755M00086 --- Switch#2 : --- --- --- --- Line#1 : --- --- --- --- Line#2 : gbe-pv2 P-4X6G(002)(430) - NEC745M05639 00:30:13:a1:da:84Line#3 : gbe-pv2 P-4X6G(002)(430) - NEC745M05336 00:30:13:a1:da:b4Line#4 : --- --- --- --- Line#5 : --- --- --- --- Line#6 : gbe-pv P-4X2Y(002)(432) -B NEC545M00102 --- Line#7 : --- --- --- --- Line#8 : --- --- --- --- Line#9 : gbe-pv P-4X2Y(002)(432) NEC999M88888 --- Line#10 : --- --- --- --- Line#11 : atmp P-4X6D(002)(430) NEC755M00059 00:30:13:a1:2a:92Line#12 : atmp P-4X6D(002)(430) NEC755M00061 00:30:13:a1:2a:ca *Switch@1#


23-48

Output items Module Number: UGSW module/line module number Install: Installation status

ugswc: UGSW module fe8: Line module FE8 fx8a: Line module Fx8a fx8b: Line module Fx8b fx8s: Line module Fx8s gbe: Line module GbE fe8-pv: Line module FE8-PV fx8a-pv: Line module Fx8a-PV fx8b-pv: Line module Fx8b-PV fx8s-pv: Line module Fx8s-PV gbe-pv: Line module GbE-PV gm8-t: Line module GM8-T gm8-x: Line module GM8-X atm155s: Line module ATM155S atm155m: Line module ATM155M atmp: Line module ATMP tdmp: Line module TDMP tdmp155: Line module TDMP155 atmp155: Line module ATMP155 gbe-pv2: Line module GbE-PV2

Module ID: Module ID Product Number: Product number MAC Address: MAC address

Related command

show system status Display of device installation status and various statuses


23-49

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show system revision Display of various version information

Shows the version information of firmware and hardware installed on the various mounted modules.

Input format show system revision

Parameter None

Default value None


Notes Current versions are shown in the Current field. Previously (finally) downloaded versions are shown in the Latest field. Last-one-but downloaded versions are shown in the Backup field.

Input example *Switch@1# show system revision System Revision =============== Current Latest Backup Current Latest Module Install Soft Ver Soft Ver Soft Ver Hard Ver Hard Ver------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Switch#1 : ugswc 00.01.07 00.01.07 00.01.06 01.01.01 01.01.01 Switch#2 : --- --- --- --- --- --- Line#1 : fe8 --- --- --- 01.02.0a 01.02.0a Line#2 : --- --- --- --- --- --- Line#3 : --- --- --- --- --- --- Line#4 : --- --- --- --- --- --- Line#5 : --- --- --- --- --- --- Line#6 : --- --- --- --- --- --- Line#7 : --- --- --- --- --- --- Line#8 : --- --- --- --- --- --- Line#9 : --- --- --- --- --- --- Line#10 : --- --- --- --- --- --- Line#11 : --- --- --- --- --- --- Line#12 : --- --- --- --- --- --- *Switch@1#


23-50

Output items Module: Module Install: Installation status


Ver: Various version information Related command



23-51

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show system temperature Display of device temperature

Shows a temperature per UGSW module or line module.

Input format show system temperature

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show system temperature System Temperature ================== Module Install Temperature -------------------------------------------------- Switch#1 : ugswc 46.5 Switch#2 : --- --- Line#1 : fe8 36.0 Line#2 : --- --- Line#3 : --- --- Line#4 : --- --- Line#5 : --- --- Line#6 : --- --- Line#7 : --- --- Line#8 : --- --- Line#9 : --- --- Line#10 : --- --- Line#11 : --- --- Line#12 : --- --- *Switch@1#


23-52

Output items Module: Module Install: Installation status


Temperature: Module temperature

Related command



23-53

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set fault auto-reboot Setting of autonomous rebooting enable/disable

Sets whether to enable or disable autonomous rebooting when a WDTOVF or EXCEPTION fault that involves rebooting is detected.

Input format set fault auto-reboot P1

Parameter P1: Enable/disable setting {enable | disable} enable: Enables autonomous rebooting disable: Disables autonomous rebooting

Default value enable


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set fault auto-reboot enable *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

show fault auto-reboot Display of autonomous rebooting settings


23-54

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show fault auto-reboot Display of autonomous rebooting settings

Shows autonomous rebooting settings when a WDTOVF or EXCEPTION fault that involves rebooting is detected.

Input format show fault auto-reboot

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# *Switch@1# show fault auto-reboot Fault AutoReboot Configuration ============================== AutoReboot: enabled *Switch@1#

Output item Mode: Setting status

Related command

set fault auto-reboot Setting of autonomous rebooting enable/disable


23-55

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show resource cpu Display of CPU usage

Shows the average CPU usages of 5 seconds, 1 minute, and 5 minutes and the peak values of the average CPU usages.

Input format show resource cpu

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show resource cpu CPU Activity Information ======================== Last Read Time :--/--/---- --:--:-- Current Time :01/01/2004 03:39:27 The Rate of CPU Use =================== Module Type Measure Time Current(%) Peak(%) (Last Read ->Current) -------------------------------------------------------------------------- Switch#1 : main 5 (sec) 7 11 (01/01/2004 03:36:40) 1 (min) 6 7 (01/01/2004 03:39:15) 5 (min) 6 6 (01/01/2004 03:39:04) Switch#1 : sub 5 (sec) 13 79 (01/01/2004 03:31:29) 1 (min) 12 22 (01/01/2004 03:32:20) 5 (min) 12 14 (01/01/2004 03:36:27) Switch#2 : main 5 (sec) --- --- (--/--/---- --:--:--) 1 (min) --- --- (--/--/---- --:--:--) 5 (min) --- --- (--/--/---- --:--:--) Switch#2 : sub 5 (sec) --- --- (--/--/---- --:--:--) 1 (min) --- --- (--/--/---- --:--:--) 5 (min) --- --- (--/--/---- --:--:--) *Switch@1#

Output items Last Read Time: Last read time Current Time: Current time Module: Module Type: Module type

main: Main CPU sub: Sub CPU

Measure Time: Time required to measure average CPU time Current(%): Current CPU usage Peak(%): Peak value of CPU usage (Last Read ->Current): Peak time at which the peak value was recorded


23-56

Related command

None


23-57

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show resource memory Display of memory usage

Shows memory usage.

Input format show resource memory

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show resource memory The Rate of Memory Use ====================== Module Type Rate(%) Used Size(byte) / Actual Size(byte) ----------------------------------------------------------------------- Switch#1 : main 39 17042776 / 42925880 Switch#1 : sub 34 14333992 / 41138696 Switch#2 : main --- --- / --- Switch#2 : sub --- --- / --- *Switch@1#


main: Main CPU sub: Sub CPU

Rate(%): Memory usage Used Size(byte): Currently used memory size Actual Size(byte): Memory size that can be actually used

Related command

None


23-58

(Blank page)

Device Control

24-1

24 Device Control

Device Control

24-2

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set line type Setting of line module type

Sets a line module type.

Input format set line type P1 P2

Parameters P1: Line module number (1 to 12) (Multiple values can be specified.) P2: Line module type { none | fe8 | fx8 | gbe | atm155 | gm8-t | gm8-x | atmp | tdmp | tdmp155 | atmp155 }

none: No line module type specification fe8: FE8 fx8: FX8 gbe: GbE atm155: ATM155 gm8-t: GM8-T gm8-x: GM8-X atmp: ATMP tdmp: TDMP tdmp155: TDMP155 atmp155: ATMP155


Usage conditions - You cannot change the line module type if a configuration other than the line module type is already entered. - You cannot set FE8/FX8 for line modules #5 to #12. - You cannot set GM8-T/GM8-X.

Notes Specifying the correct line module type for the slot that is in the MISMATCH status initializes the line module. However, if the line module cannot be initialized because it is in contention for another event, it is incorporated with OUS status. After this command ends, reinitialize the line module incorporated with OUS status using the reset line command.

Input example *Switch@1# set line type 9 gbe *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

show system status Display of device installation status and various statuses reset line Resetting of line module

Device Control

24-3

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set line mode tdmp Setting of TDMP line mode

Sets the TDMP line mode.

Input formats - Specifying line mode (TDM) set line mode tdmp P1 P2 (tdm) P3 [P4] [P5]

- Specifying line mode (TDMoP) set line mode tdmp P1 P2 (tdmop) P3 [P4] [P5]

- Specifying no line mode set line mode tdmp P1 P2 (none)

Parameters P1: Line module number (1 to 12) (Single specification) P2: Line mode {tdm | tdmop | none}

tdm: TDM mode tdmop: TDMoP mode none: No line mode setting

• When tdm or tdmop is specified in P2 P3: Frame type {e1 | t1}

e1: E1 mode t1: T1 mode

• When e1 is specified in P3 P4: Line code {hdb3 | ami}

hdb3: HDB3 ami : AMI * If P4 is omitted, hdb3 is set.

P5: Frame format {crc4 | crc4nocas | non-crc4 | unframed} crc4: CRC4 multiframe crc4nocas: CRC4 multiframe-without-CAS non-crc4: G.704 unframed: Unframed * If P5 is omitted, crc4 is set.

• When t1 is specified in P3 P4: Line code {b8zs | ami}

b8zs: B8ZS ami: AMI * If P4 is omitted, b8zs is set.

P5: Frame format {esf | sf} esf: Extended superframe sf: Superframe * If P5 is omitted, esf is set.

Device Control

24-4

Default values P4: hdb3, P5: crc4 (P3=e1) P4: b8zs, P5: esf (P3=t1)

Usage conditions

You can set the TDMP line mode only when the line type setting is tdmp, or none with a TDMP line module installed. To specify tdmop for P2, an error occurs if no TDMoP mode has been registered. To specify tdmop for P2, e1 for P3 and unframed for P5, TDMoP operation mode must have been set to SAToP mode. You cannot change the TDMP line mode setting if any of the following commands is already entered:

set tdm group set tdmop group set port cable-length set ether-oam mep

To specify tdmop for P2, there is the following restriction on the number of TDMP line modules and TDMP155 line modules: (Number of TDMP line modules x 1) + (Number of TDMP155 line modules x 3) < 16 * The above numbers of line modules mean the ones set to TDMoP mode.

Note If any of the following changes has been made while the line state is ACT, line restart will be executed: - Changing line mode from tdm to tdmop or none - Changing line mode from tdmop to tdm or none - Changing frame type If a frame type is changed with this command, TDM group name setting of the line module will be deleted.

Input examples *Switch@1# set line mode tdmp 1 none *Switch@1# set line mode tdmp 2 tdm e1 hdb3 crc4 *Switch@1# set line mode tdmp 3 tdm t1 b8zs *Switch@1# set line mode tdmp 4 tdm e1 esf *Switch@1# set line mode tdmp 5 tdmop t1 hdb3 unframed

Output item

Related commands

set line type Setting of line module type set line mode atmp Setting of ATMP line mode set line mode tdmp155 Setting of TDMP155 line mode set tdmop mode Setting of TDMoP mode set tdmop group Setting of TDMoP group set tdm group Setting of TDM group set tdm group-name Setting of TDM group name set port cable-length Setting of cable length set port impedance Setting of impedance show line mode Display of line mode setting show system status Display of device installation status and other various statusesshow port information Display of port setting and status information

Device Control

24-5

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set line mode atmp Setting of ATMP line mode

Sets the ATMP line mode.

Input formats - Specifying line mode (ATMOP) set line mode atmp P1 P2(atmop) P3 [P4] [P5]

- Specifying no line mode set line mode atmp P1 P2(none)

Parameters P1: Line module number (1 to 12) (Single specification) P2: Line mode {atmop | none}

atmop: ATMoP mode none: No line mode setting

• When atmop is specified in P2 P3: Frame type {e1 | t1}

e1: E1 mode t1: T1 mode

• When e1 is specified in P3 P4: Line code {hdb3 | ami}

hdb3: HDB3 ami : AMI * If P4 is omitted, hdb3 is set.

P5: Frame format {crc4 | crc4nocas | non-crc4 | unframed} crc4: CRC4 multiframe crc4nocas: CRC4 multiframe-without-CAS non-crc4: G.704 unframed: Unframed * If P5 is omitted, crc4 is set.

• When t1 is specified in P3 P4: Line code {b8zs | ami}

b8zs: B8ZS ami: AMI * If P4 is omitted, b8zs is set.

P5: Frame format: {esf | sf} esf: Extended superframe sf: Superframe * If P5 is omitted, esf is set.

Default values P4: hdb3, P5: crc4 (P3=e1)

P4: b8zs, P5: esf (P3=t1)

Device Control

24-6

Usage conditions

You can set the ATMP line mode only when the line type setting is atmp, or none with an ATMP line module installed. You cannot change the ATMP line mode setting if any of the following commands is already entered:

set port cable-length set ima group set ima clock

Note If any of the following changes has been made while the line state is ACT, line restart will be executed: - Changing line mode from atmop to none - Changing frame type

Input examples *Switch@1# set line mode atmp 1 none *Switch@1# set line mode atmp 2 atmop e1 *Switch@1# set line mode atmp 3 atmop t1 b8zs *Switch@1# set line mode atmp 4 atmop t1 esf *Switch@1# set line mode atmp 5 atmop e1 hdb3 unframed

Output item

Related commands

set line type Setting of line module type set line mode tdmp Setting of TDMP line mode set line mode tdmp155 Setting of TDMP155 line mode set port cable-length Setting of cable length set port impedance Setting of impedance show line mode Display of line mode setting show system status Display of device installation status and other various statusesshow port information Display of port setting and status information

Device Control

24-7

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set line mode tdmp155 Setting of TDMP155 line mode

Sets the TDMP155 line mode.

Input formats - Specifying line mode (TDM/TDMoP) set line mode tdmp155P1 P2 (tdm|tdmop) P3

- Specifying no line mode set line mode tdmp155P1 P2 (none)

Parameters P1: Line module number (1 to 12) (Single specification) P2: Line mode {tdm | tdmop | none}

tdm: TDM mode tdmop: TDMoP mode none: No line mode setting

• When tdm or tdmop is specified in P2 P3: Frame type {sdh | sonet}

sdh: SDH mode sonnet: SONET mode

Default value None

Usage conditions

You can set the TDMP155 line mode only when the line type setting is tdmp155, or the line type setting is none and a TDMP155 line module has been installed. To specify tdmop for P2, an error occurs if no TDMoP mode has been registered. You cannot change the TDMP155 line mode setting if any of the following commands is already entered:

set tdm group set tdmop group set port logical-interface set ether-oam mep

When APS is set to enabled, settings of the line module cannot be changed.

Notes If any of the following changes has been made while the line state is ACT, line restart will be executed: - Changing line mode from tdm to tdmop or none - Changing line mode from tdmop to tdm or none - Changing frame type If a frame type is changed with this command, TDM group name setting of the line module will be deleted.

Input example *Switch@1# set line mode tdmp155 3 tdmop sdh *Switch@1#

Device Control

24-8

Output item

Related commands

set line type Setting of line module type set line mode tdmp Setting of TDMP line mode set line mode atmp Setting of ATMP line mode set tdmop mode Setting of TDMoP mode set tdmop group Setting of TDMoP group set tdm group Setting of TDM group set tdm group-name Setting of TDM group name set port cable-length Setting of cable length set port impedance Setting of impedance show line mode Display of line mode setting show system status Display of device installation status and other various statuses show port information Display of port setting and status information

Device Control

24-9

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

set line mode gbe Setting of GbE line mode

Sets the GbE line mode.

Input format - Specifying line mode (GbE) set line mode gbe P1 P2

Parameters P1: Line module number (1 to 4) (Single specification) P2: Line mode {none | gbe | fe}

none: No line mode setting gbe: GbE mode fe: FE mode


Usage conditions

- You cannot change the line module type if a configuration other than the line module type is already entered. - You cannot set the GbE line mode for line modules #5 to #12. - You can set the GbE line mode only when the line module type is gbe, or the line module type setting is none and a GbE-PV or GbE-PV2 line module has been installed. - When a GbE-PV line module is installed, operation in FE mode is not allowed although setting of each line mode is available. (A link down will occur in the GbE port.)

Note If any of the following changes has been made while the line state is ACT, line restart will be executed: - Changing line mode from none or gbe to fe - Changing line mode from fe to none or gbe

Input example *Switch@1# set line mode gbe 1 fe *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

set line type Setting of line module type set port admin Setting of port blocking/unblocking set port speed Setting of port speed and MDI/MDI-X set port type Setting of GbE port media show line mode Display of line mode setting show system status Display of device installation status and other various statuses show port information Display of port setting and status information

Device Control

24-10

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show line mode Display of line mode setting

Shows the line mode setting

Input format show line mode

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show line mode Line Mode Information ===================== Line Line Frame Slot Type Mode Type --------------------------- 1 fe8 --- --- 2 tdmp tdm e1 3 atmp atmop e1 4 gbe --- --- 5 tdmp tdmop t1 6 tdmp tdmop e1 7 atmp atmop t1 8 atm155 --- --- 9 --- --- --- 10 tdmp none --- 11 tdmp155 tdm sdh 12 tdmp155 tdmop sonet *Switch@1#

Output items Slot: Line number Line Type: Line type Line Mode: Line mode Frame Type: Frame type

e1: E1 mode t1: T1 mode sdh: SDH mode sonet: SONET mode

Device Control

24-11

Related commands

set line mode atmp Setting of ATMP line mode set line mode tdmp Setting of TDMP line mode set line mode tdmp155 Setting of TDMP155 line mode set line mode gbe Setting of GbE line mode

Device Control

24-12

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

change switch Changeover of UGSW module system

Changes the UGSW module system.

Input format change switch [P1]

Parameter P1: Forced change {force} force: Forced change * If P1 is omitted, the normal system is changed.

Default value None


Notes When the UGSW module system is changed forcibly, the old ACT side enters the OUS status. When the old ACT side is in the ACT-FLT status, the UGSW module system enters the SBY-FLT status.

Input example *Switch@1# change switch *Switch@1##

Output item

Related command


Device Control

24-13

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

reset system Resetting of entire device

Resets the entire device.

Input format reset system

Parameter None

Default value None


Notes After this command is entered, execution is confirmed. After it is rebooted, the system into which this command has been entered is started in ACT mode.

Input example *Switch@1# reset system Would you like to reboot System? :(Y/N): y System is under closing.... System Reset Process is running. Please wait.... System Boot Copyright 2001-2002 NEC CPU: PPC 405GP Version: 5.4 BSP version: 1.2/5 Boot version: K01.00 Creation date: Mar 31 2004, 14:38:54 Press [Ctrl]+[c] key to enter recover mode... ... coming up latest image auto-booting... <Omission>

Device Control

24-14

Output item

Related commands

reset switch Resetting of UGSW module reset line Resetting of line module show reset Display of reset factor

Device Control

24-15

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

reset switch Resetting of UGSW module

Reset the UGSW module.

Input format reset switch P1 [P2]

Parameters P1: Switch module number (1 to 2) P2: FPGA version up specification { fpga-version-up }, or reset load module specification { latest | backup }

fpga-version-up: FPGA version up specification latest: Latest (current) face specification backup: Backup face specification * In the case of FPGA version up specification, the latest face is specified. * In the case of reset load module specification, normal reset is executed.

Default value None

Usage conditions You cannot specify the backup face when resetting the mate system. You cannot reset the ACT system when the UGSW module is in the ACT or SBY status (including the FLT status).

Notes After this command is entered, execution is confirmed. If P2 (FPGA version up) is specified, the reset factor is power-on reset.

Input example *Switch@1# reset switch 1 Would you like to reboot Switch#1? :(Y/N): y Self Switch is under closing... Switch Reset Process is running. Please wait.... System Boot Copyright 2001-2002 NEC

Device Control

24-16

CPU: PPC 405GP Version: 5.4 BSP version: 1.2/5 Boot version: K01.00 Creation date: Mar 31 2004, 14:38:54 Press [Ctrl]+[c] key to enter recover mode... ... coming up latest image auto-booting... <Omission>

Output item

Related commands

reset system Resetting of entire device show reset Display of reset factor

Device Control

24-17

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

reset line Resetting of line module

Resets a line module.

Input format reset line P1


Default value None

Usage conditions Whether you can enter this command depends on the following line statuses: Status Can be entered/cannot

be entered unmount × initializing × active × standby × out of service

mismatch

active-fault

standby-fault


Input example *Switch@1# reset line 2 Would you like to reboot 2? :(Y/N): y *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

show system status Display of device installation status and various statuses reset system Resetting of entire device ous line OUS setting of line module

Device Control

24-18

Privi- lege

Gene-ral Synchro-

nize SBY execution

show reset Display of reset factor

Shows a UGSW module reset factor.

Input format show reset [P1]

Parameter P1: Detailed showing {detail} Detail: Detailed showing

Default value None


Note Specifying the detail parameter shows reset factors in CPU units, not in UGSW module units.

Input example *Switch@1# show reset detail Reset Information ================= Module Type Reset Factor --------------------------------------------------------------------- Switch#1 : main Command Reset(reset system) Switch#1 : sub Command Reset(reset system) Switch#2 : --- --- *Switch@1#


ugswc: UGSW module main: main CPU sub: sub CPU

Reset Factor: Reset factor Power On Reset or Switch Module Insertion: Power-on reset or module insertion Command Reset(reset system): Command reset by reset system Command Reset(reset switch): The status of WDT is abnormal: Reset based on hardware judgment The fatal error has occurred: Reset based on software judgment Command Reset by mate(reset system):

Command reset by reset system from mate system Command Reset by mate(reset switch):

Command reset by reset switch from mate system Related commands

reset system Resetting of entire device reset switch Resetting of UGSW module

Device Control

24-19

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

ous switch OUS setting of UGSW module

Sets OUS of the UGSW module.

Input format ous switch P1

Parameter P1: Switch module number (1 to 2)

Default value None


Notes After this command is entered, execution is confirmed. Note that a trouble may occur if an ACT UGSW module is removed without placing it OUS status.

Input example *Switch@1# ous switch 2 Would you like to out of service switch#2? :(Y/N): y *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command


Device Control

24-20

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

ous line OUS setting of line module

Sets OUS of a line module.

Input format ous line P1 P2


Default value None

Usage condition You cannot set OUS if INS-LED is off.


Input example *Switch@1# ous line 1 Would you like to out of service 1? :(Y/N): y *Switch@1#

Output item

Related commands

show system status Display of device installation status and various statuses reset line Resetting of line module

Device Control

24-21

Privi- lege


nize SBY execution

ous external-memory Removing of external memory

Removes external memory.

Input format ous external-memory

Parameter None

Default value None

Usage conditions You can execute this command only when external memory is inserted. Operate external memory in maintenance mode.

Note Entering this command disables external memory access because external memory is disconnected from the device. If you want to access external memory again, you must reinsert it.

Input example *Switch@1# ous external-memory *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

None

Device Control

24-22

(Blank page)

Maintenance Mode

25-1

25 Maintenance Mode

Maintenance Mode

25-2

Maintenance Save Synchro-nize

SBY execution

download software Downloading of software

Downloads software.

Input format download software P1 P2

Parameters P1: Download file location {external-memory} external-memory: External memory

P2: File name or path name + file name (1 to 127 characters)

Default value None

Usage condition You can execute this command only when external memory is inserted.

Notes To reflect downloaded data, you must enter the reset switch or reset system command to reinitialize the Switch module. You can specify a path with an absolute or relative path name. However, if a relative path name of 127 characters or less (including the file name) is converted to an absolute path name of more than 246 characters, an error occurs. Paths of up to 20 directory hierarchies are permissible. No file can be specified beyond 21 directory hierarchies. If no path is specified, current directory specification is assumed. Set a file name or a path name + file name with ASCII characters other than ["], [?], and [control character]. When using [space], enclose the entire character string in double quotation marks.

Input example *Switch@1% download software external-memory cx2600_sw/release_lm/cx2600_220_so ft_c__010003.dlm Data Transferring.... Download Data Processing.......................... Writing Flash Memory............ *Switch@1%

Output item

Related commands

reset system Resetting of entire device reset switch Resetting of UGSW module ous external-memory Removing of external memory

Maintenance Mode

25-3


SBY execution

download fpga switch Downloading of FPGA of UGSW module

Downloads FPGA of the UGSW module.

Input format download fpga switch P1 P2

Parameters P1: Download file location {external-memory} external-memory: External memory


Default value None


Notes To reflect downloaded data, you must enter the reset switch command specifying fpga-version-up parameter to reinitialize the Switch module. You can specify a path with an absolute or relative path name. However, if a relative path name of 127 characters or less (including the file name) is converted to an absolute path name of more than 246 characters, an error occurs. Paths of up to 20 directory hierarchies are permissible. No file can be specified beyond 21 directory hierarchies. If no path is specified, current directory specification is assumed. Set a file name or a path name + file name with ASCII characters other than ["], [?], and [control character]. When using [space], enclose the entire character string in double quotation marks.

Input example *Switch@1# download fpga switch external-memory /data/cx2600_220_fpga_UGSWC_020102.dlm Data Transferring.. Writing Flash Memory...................... Data Transferring.. Writing Flash Memory...................... Data Transferring.. Writing Flash Memory...................... Data Transferring.. Writing Flash Memory...................... Data Transferring.. Writing Flash Memory...................... Data Transferring.. Writing Flash Memory...................... Data Transferring.. Writing Flash Memory...................... Data Transferring.. Writing Flash Memory...................... *Switch@1#

Maintenance Mode

25-4

Output item

Related commands

reset switch Resetting of UGSW module ous external-memory Removing of external memory

Maintenance Mode

25-5


SBY execution

download fpga line Downloading of FPGA of line module

Downloads FPGA of a line module.

Input format download fpga line P1 P2 P3

Parameters P1: Line module type {fe | gbe | fe-pv | gbe-pv | gmx | atm | tdmp | atmp | gbe-pv2 | atmp155 | tdmp155}

fe: Line module FE8/FX8 gbe: Line module GbE fe-pv: Line module FE8-PV/FX8-PV gbe-pv: Line module Gbe-PV gmx: Line module GM8-T/GM8-X atm: Line module ATM155 tdmp: Line module TDMP atmp: Line module ATMP gbe-pv2: Line module Gbe-PV2 atmp155: Line module ATMP155 tdmp155: Line module TDMP155

P2: Download file location {external-memory} external-memory: External memory


Default value None


Notes To reflect downloaded data, you must enter the reset line command to reinitialize the line module. You can specify a path with an absolute or relative path name. However, if a relative path name of 127 characters or less (including the file name) is converted to an absolute path name of more than 246 characters, an error occurs. Paths of up to 20 directory hierarchies are permissible. No file can be specified beyond 21 directory hierarchies. If no path is specified, current directory specification is assumed. Set a file name or a path name + file name with ASCII characters other than ["], [?], and [control character]. When using [space], enclose the entire character string in double quotation marks.

Maintenance Mode

25-6

Input example *Switch@1% download fpga line fe external-memory /data/cx2600_220_fpga_FE_FX_020102.dlm Data Transferring.. Download Data Processing................................................. Line# 1 : completed Line# 2 : --- Line# 3 : completed Line# 4 : --- Line# 5 : --- Line# 6 : --- Line# 7 : completed Line# 8 : --- Line# 9 : --- Line#10 : --- Line#11 : --- Line#12 : --- *Switch@1%

Output item

Related commands

reset line Resetting of line module ous external-memory Removing of external memory

Maintenance Mode

25-7


SBY execution

upload running-config external-memory Uploading of running configuration to external memory

Uploads a running configuration to external memory.

Input format upload running-config external-memory P1

Parameter P1: File name or path name + file name (1 to 127 characters)

Default value None


Notes You can specify a path with an absolute or relative path name. However, if a relative path name of 127 characters or less (including the file name) is converted to an absolute path name of more than 246 characters, an error occurs. Paths of up to 20 directory hierarchies are permissible. No file can be created beyond 21 directory hierarchies. If no path is specified, current directory specification is assumed. The maximum length of a file name is 99 characters. Set a file name or a path name + file name with alphanumeric characters and “% & , / = [ ] ^ _ { } ~ . –“. You can use “/” only when specifying a path name, and “.” only when specifying a file name. Configuration information which is uploaded is the same as the information displayed by the “show running-config” command.

Input example *Switch@1% upload running-config external-memory test.txt Data Transferring..................................... *Switch@1%

Output item

Related commands

show running-config Display of running configuration download running-config external-memory

Download running configuration from external memory

write memory external-memory Save setting information to external memory ous external-memory Remove external memory

Maintenance Mode

25-8


SBY execution

upload startup-config external-memory Uploading of startup configuration to external memory

Uploads a startup configuration to external memory.

Input format upload startup-config external-memory P1


Default value None


Notes You can specify a path with an absolute or relative path name. However, if a relative path name of 127 characters or less (including the file name) is converted to an absolute path name of more than 246 characters, an error occurs. Paths of up to 20 directory hierarchies are permissible. No file can be created beyond 21 directory hierarchies. If no path is specified, current directory specification is assumed. The maximum length of a file name is 99 characters. Set a file name or a path name + file name with alphanumeric characters and “% & , / = [ ] ^ _ { } ~ . –“. You can use “/” only when specifying a path name, and “.” only when specifying a file name. Configuration information which is uploaded is the same as the information displayed by the “show startup-config” command.

Input example *Switch@1% upload startup-config external-memory test2.txt Data Transferring..................................... *Switch@1%

Output item

Related commands

show startup-config Display of startup configuration clear startup-config Clearing of startup configuration download startup-config external-memory

Downloading of startup configuration from external memory

write memory external-memory Saving of setting information to external memory

Maintenance Mode

25-9


SBY execution

upload local-syslog Uploading of system log to external memory

Uploads a system log to external memory.

Input format upload local-syslog P1 P2

Parameters P1: Upload location {external-memory} external-memory: External memory


Default value None


Notes You can specify a path with an absolute or relative path name. However, if a relative path name of 127 characters or less (including the file name) is converted to an absolute path name of more than 246 characters, an error occurs. Paths of up to 20 directory hierarchies are permissible. No file can be created beyond 21 directory hierarchies. If no path is specified, current directory specification is assumed. The maximum length of a file name is 99 characters. Set a file name or a path name + file name with alphanumeric characters and “% & , / = [ ] ^ _ { } ~ . –“. You can use “/” only when specifying a path name, and “.” only when specifying a file name. Local syslog information which is uploaded is the same as the information displayed by the “show local syslog” command.

Input example *Switch@1% upload local-syslog external-memory syslog.txt Information is under collection. Data Transferring........................ *Switch@1%

Output item

Related commands

show syslog local Display of local syslog clear syslog local Clearing of local syslog ous external-memory Removing of external memory

Maintenance Mode

25-10


SBY execution

download running-config external-memory Downloading of running configuration from external memory

Downloads a running configuration from external memory.

Input format download running-config external-memory P1


Default value None

Usage condition You can execute this command only when external memory is inserted

Notes You can specify a path with an absolute or relative path name. However, if a relative path name of 127 characters or less (including the file name) is converted to an absolute path name of more than 246 characters, an error occurs. Paths of up to 20 directory hierarchies are permissible. No file can be specified beyond 21 directory hierarchies. If no path is specified, current directory specification is assumed. External memory may be accessed several times according to the configuration size to be downloaded. Set a file name or a path name + file name with ASCII characters other than ["], [?], and [control character]. When using [space], enclose the entire character string in double quotation marks.

Input example *Switch@1% download running-config external-memory soft_LM/test.txt Data Transferring... Data setting.......... *Switch@1%

Output item

Related commands

show running-config Display of running configuration upload running-config external-memory

Uploading of running configuration to external memory

write memory external-memory Saving of setting information to external memory ous external-memory Removing of external memory

Maintenance Mode

25-11


SBY execution

download startup-config external-memory Downloading of startup configuration from external memory

Downloads a startup configuration from external memory.

Input format download startup-config external-memory P1


Default value None


Notes You can specify a path with an absolute or relative path name. However, if a relative path name of 127 characters or less (including the file name) is converted to an absolute path name of more than 246 characters, an error occurs. Paths of up to 20 directory hierarchies are permissible. No file can be specified beyond 21 directory hierarchies. If no path is specified, current directory specification is assumed. External memory may be accessed several times according to the configuration size to be downloaded. Set a file name or a path name + file name with ASCII characters other than ["], [?], and [control character]. When using [space], enclose the entire character string in double quotation marks.

Input example *Switch@1% download startup-config external-memory test3.txt Data Transferring.. Data setting. Writing Flash Memory........ *Switch@1%

Output item

Related commands

clear startup-config Clearing of startup configuration upload startup-config external-memory

Uploading of startup configuration to external memory

write memory external-memory Saving of setting information to external memory ous external-memory Removing of external memory

Maintenance Mode

25-12


SBY execution

upload fault Uploading of fault information to external memory

Uploads fault information to external memory.

Input format upload fault P1 P2

Parameters P1: Upload location {external-memory} external-memory: External memory


Default value None


Notes You can specify a path with an absolute or relative path name. However, if a relative path name of 127 characters or less (including the file name) is converted to an absolute path name of more than 246 characters, an error occurs. Paths of up to 20 directory hierarchies are permissible. No file can be created beyond 21 directory hierarchies. If no path is specified, current directory specification is assumed. The maximum length of a file name is 99 characters. Set a file name or a path name + file name with alphanumeric characters and “% & , / = [ ] ^ _ { } ~ . –“. You can use “/” only when specifying a path name, and “.” only when specifying a file name. Fault information which is uploaded is the same as the information displayed by the “show fault present” and “show fault past” commands.

Input example *Switch@1# upload fault external-memory fault.txt Information is under collection. Data Transferring........................... *Switch@1%

Output item

Related commands

show fault present Display of current fault and alarm information show fault past Display of past fault information ous external-memory Removing of external memory

Maintenance Mode

25-13


SBY execution

upload all-information external-memory Uploading of setting information

Uploads setting information to external memory.

Input format upload all-information external-memory P1


Default value None


Notes You can specify a path with an absolute or relative path name. However, if a relative path name of 127 characters or less (including the file name) is converted to an absolute path name of more than 246 characters, an error occurs. Paths of up to 20 directory hierarchies are permissible. No file can be created beyond 21 directory hierarchies. If no path is specified, current directory specification is assumed. The maximum length of a file name is 99 characters. Set a file name or a path name + file name with alphanumeric characters and “% & , / = [ ] ^ _ { } ~ . –“. You can use “/” only when specifying a path name, and “.” only when specifying a file name. Setting information which is uploaded is the same as the information shown by the “show all” command.

Input example *Switch@1% upload all-information external-memory allinfo.txt Information is under collection. Data Transferring........................ *Switch@1%

Output item

Related command

show all Display of setting information

Maintenance Mode

25-14


SBY execution

write memory Saving of setting status to external memory

Saves the setting status to external memory.

Input format write memory P1 [P2]

Parameters P1: Save location {external-memory} external-memory: External memory

P2: Save format {text-config | binary-config} text-config: Text configuration binary-config: Binary configuration * If P2 is omitted, text-config is assumed.

Default value None


Note The setting status is saved to the “/auto_reflect” directory in external memory under the “startup-config.scfg” file name. If the “/auto_reflect” directory does not exist, it is automatically created.

Input example *Switch@1% write memory external-memory Information is under collection. Data Transferring.... *Switch@1%

Output item

Related commands

show running-config Display of running configuration show startup-config Display of startup configuration clear startup-config Clearing of startup configuration upload running-config external-memory

Uploading of running configuration to external memory upload startup-config external-memory

Uploading of startup configuration to external memory download running-config external-memory

Downloading of running configuration from external memorydownload startup-config external-memory Downloading of startup configuration from external memoryous external-memory Removing of external memory

Maintenance Mode

25-15


SBY execution

end Switch from maintenance mode to privileged mode

Enables you to switch from maintenance mode to privileged mode.

Input format end

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1% end *Switch@1#

Output item

Related command

maintenance Enabling you to switch from privileged mode to maintenance mode

Maintenance Mode

25-16


SBY execution

dir Display of directory list

Shows a directory list.

Input format dir [P1]

Parameter P1: Path (1 to 127 characters) * If P1 is omitted, the current directory list is shown.

Default value None


Notes You can specify a path with an absolute or relative path name. However, if a relative path name of 127 characters or less is converted to an absolute path name of more than 246 characters, an error occurs. Paths of up to 20 directory hierarchies are permissible. No directory can be referenced beyond 21 directory hierarchies. Set a path name with alphabets, numeric characters, and symbols and signs “% & , = [ ] ^ _ { } ~ /”.

Input example Switch@1% dir 11/26/2004 15:59:08 <DIR> 4096 cx2600 11/26/2004 15:59:42 <DIR> 4096 auto_reflect 11/26/2004 16:05:18 246 testConfig.scfg 11/26/2004 16:06:36 246 testConfig2.scfg Switch@1% dir

Output items Update date and time <DIR>: Directory File directory size File directory name

Related commands

mkdir Creating of directory rmdir Removing of directory cd Change of current directory ous external-memory Removing of external memory

Maintenance Mode

25-17


SBY execution

mkdir Creating of directory

Creates a directory.

Input format mkdir P1

Parameter P1: Directory name or path name + directory name (1 to 127 characters)

Default value None


Notes An error occurs if the directory name is used in a file name in the same directory. You can specify a path with an absolute or relative path name. However, if a relative path name of 127 characters or less (including the created directory name) is converted to an absolute path name of more than 246 characters, an error occurs. Paths of up to 20 directory hierarchies are permissible. No directory can be created beyond 21 directory hierarchies. If no path is specified, current directory specification is assumed. The maximum length of a directory name is 99 characters. Set a directory name or a path name + directory name with alphanumeric characters and “% & , = [ ] ^ _ { } ~ /”.

Input example Switch@1% mkdir cx2600/newdir Switch@1%

Output item

Related command

dir Display of directory list rmdir Removing of directory cd Change of current directory ous external-memory Removing of external memory

Maintenance Mode

25-18


SBY execution

rmdir Removing of directory

Removes a directory.

Input format rmdir P1

Parameter P1: Directory name or path name + directory name (1 to 127 characters)

Default value None


Notes You can specify a path with an absolute or relative path name. However, if a relative path name of 127 characters or less (including the deleted directory name) is converted to an absolute path name of more than 246 characters, an error occurs. If no path is specified, current directory specification is assumed. Paths of up to 20 directory hierarchies are permissible. No directory can be specified beyond 21 directory hierarchies. Set a directory name or a path name + directory name with alphanumeric characters and “% & , = [ ] ^ _ { } ~ /”.

Input example Switch@1% rmdir cx2600/deldir Switch@1%

Output item

Related command

mkdir Creating of directory dir Display of directory list cd Change of current directory ous external-memory Removing of external memory

Maintenance Mode

25-19


SBY execution

cd Change of current directory

Changes the current directory.

Input format cd [P1]

Parameter P1: Path (1 to 127 characters) * If P1 is omitted, paths are displayed.

Default value Root directory in external memory


Notes You can specify a path with an absolute or relative path name. However, if a relative path name of 127 characters or less is converted to an absolute path name of more than 246 characters, an error occurs. If no path is specified, current directory specification is assumed. Paths of up to 20 directory hierarchies are permissible. No directory can be specified beyond 21 directory hierarchies. Set a path name with alphanumeric characters and “% & , = [ ] ^ _ { } ~ /”.

Input example Switch@1% cd /auto_reflect Switch@1% Switch@1% cd /auto_reflect Switch@1%

Output item Path to the current directory

Related command

mkdir Creating of directory dir Display of directory list rmdir Removing of directory ous external-memory Removing of external memory

Maintenance Mode

25-20


SBY execution

copy Copying file

Copies a file.

Input format copy P1 P2

Parameters P1: Copy source fie name or copy source path name + file name (1 to 127 characters) P2: Copy destination file name or copy destination path name + file name (1 to 127 characters)

Default value None


Notes An error occurs if the copy destination file name is used in a directory name in the same directory. You can specify a path with an absolute or relative path name. However, if a relative path name of 127 characters or less (including the file name) is converted to an absolute path name of more than 246 characters, an error occurs. Paths of up to 20 directory hierarchies are permissible. No file can be created beyond 21 directory hierarchies. If no path is specified, current directory specification is assumed. The maximum length of a copy destination file name is 99 characters. Set a copy source file name, a copy source path name + file name, or a copy destination path name + file name with alphanumeric characters and “% & , = [ ] ^ _ { } ~ /.”. You can use “/” only when specifying a path name and “.” only when specifying a file name.

Input example Switch@1% copy config/startup_config.scfg config/backup/backup_config.scfg Switch@1%

Output item

Related command

rename Change of file name del Deleting file ous external-memory Removing of external memory

Maintenance Mode

25-21


SBY execution

rename Change of file name

Changes a file name.

Input format rename P1 P2

Parameters P1: Pre-change file name or pre-change path name + file name (1 to 127 characters) P2: Post-change file name (1 to 99 characters)

Default value None


Notes An error occurs if the post-change file name is used in a directory name in the same directory. You can specify a path with an absolute or relative path name. However, if a relative path name of 127 characters or less (including the file name) is converted to an absolute path name of more than 246 characters, an error occurs. Paths of up to 20 directory hierarchies are permissible. No file can be specified beyond 21 directory hierarchies. If no path is specified, current directory specification is assumed. Set a pre-change file name, a pre-change path name + file name, or a post-change file name with alphanumeric characters and “% & , = [ ] ^ _ { } ~ /.”. You can use “/” only when specifying a path name and “.” only when specifying a file name.

Input example Switch@1% rename cx2600/old_name.scfg new_name.scfg Switch@1%

Output item

Related command

copy Copying file del Deleting file ous external-memory Removing of external memory

Maintenance Mode

25-22


SBY execution

del Deleting file

Deletes a file.

Input format del P1


Default value None


Notes You can specify a path with an absolute or relative path name. However, if a relative path name of 127 characters or less (including the file name) is converted to an absolute path name of more than 246 characters, an error occurs. Paths of up to 20 directory hierarchies are permissible. No file can be specified beyond 21 directory hierarchies. If no path is specified, current directory specification is assumed. Set a file name or a path name + file name with alphanumeric characters and “% & , = [ ] ^ _ { } ~ /.”. You can use “/” only when specifying a path name and “.” only when specifying a file name.

Input example Switch@1% del cx2600/del_file.scfg Switch@1%

Output item

Related command

copy Copying file rename Change of file name ous external-memory Removing of external memory

Maintenance Mode

25-23

Maintenance Privi- lege Save Synchro

-nize SBY

execution

ous external-memory Removing of external memory

Removes external memory.

Input format ous external-memory

Parameter None

Default value None


Note Entering this command disables external memory access because external memory is disconnected from the device. If you want to access external memory again, you must reinsert it.

Input example Switch@1% ous external-memory Switch@1%

Output item

Related commands

mkdir Creating of directory dir Display of directory list rmdir Removing of directory cd Change of current directory copy Coping file rename Change of file name del Deleting file

Maintenance Mode

25-24


SBY execution

show switch status Display of asynchronous switch status of UGSW module

Shows the asynchronous switch status of the UGSW module.

Input format show switch status

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example !Switch@1% show switch status Switch Status ============= Mode : synchronous

Output item

Related command

None

Appendix

26-1

26 Appendix

Appendix

26-2

Appendix 1 Commands shown by show config and show all

The table below lists the commands shown by show running-config, show startup-config, and show all.

Command Shown by

show running-config or show startup-config

(write memory) Shown by show all

change aps × ⎯ change aps reset × ⎯ change ether-ps × ⎯ change ether-ps reset × ⎯ change external-clock × ⎯ change switch × ⎯ date × ⎯ dm ether-oam × ⎯ linktrace ether-oam × ⎯ lm ether-oam × ⎯ loopback atm × ⎯ loopback ether-oam × ⎯ loopback ima × ⎯ loopback mc × ⎯ mirror port × ⎯ ous line × ⎯ ous switch × ⎯ reset line × ⎯ reset reference-clock × ⎯ reset switch × ⎯ reset system × ⎯ set aggregation group ⎯ set aggregation port priority ⎯ set aggregation protection-time ⎯ set aggregation system priority ⎯ set aps ⎯ set aps lockout × ⎯ set aps time ⎯ set atm-loop ⎯ set atm-oam ⎯ set atm-oam flow ⎯ set atmop format ⎯ set atmop in-port cos ⎯

Appendix

26-3

Command Shown by



set atmop mode ⎯ set atm-qos aal5 ⎯ set atm-qos out-port clp ⎯ set atm-shaper mode ⎯ set atm-shaper rate ⎯ set backup schedule ⎯ set backup server ⎯ set command-mode ⎯ set counter pvc entry ⎯ set counter vlan entry ⎯ set enable password ⎯ set ether-oam cc ⎯ set ether-oam frame ⎯

set ether-oam lm ⎯

set ether-oam meg ⎯ set ether-oam mep ⎯ set ether-oam mip ⎯ set ether-oam peer-mep ⎯

set ether-oam rdi ⎯

set ether-oam reply-period ⎯ set ether-ps ⎯ set ether-ps control-vlan ⎯ set ether-ps lockout × ⎯ set ether-ps time ⎯ set external-clock mode ⎯ set fault auto-reboot ⎯ set fdb agingtime ⎯ set fdb limiter ⎯ set fdb limiter static ⎯ set filter in-port ⎯ set filter out-port ⎯ set filter profile ⎯ set frame-size ⎯ set ifg over-rate ⎯ set igmp ⎯ set ima clock ⎯ set ima group ⎯

Appendix

26-4

Command Shown by



set in-band admin ⎯ set in-band vid ⎯ set ip address in-band ⎯ set ip address out-band ⎯ set ip in-band mode ⎯ set ip route ⎯ set ip route default ⎯ set ip virtual-address ⎯ set isolate port ⎯ set isolate pvc ⎯ set l2p-transparent reserved-mac ⎯ set l2p-transparent stp-bpdu ⎯ set line mode atmp ⎯ set line mode gbe ⎯ set line mode tdmp ⎯ set line mode tdmp155 ⎯ set line type ⎯ set login password ⎯ set loopback atm keepalive ⎯ set loopback atm keepalive-mode ⎯ set loopback atm source-id ⎯ set mc management ⎯ set message transmit ⎯ set ntp access-time ⎯ set ntp server ⎯ set out-band flowcontrol ⎯ set out-band speed ⎯ set port admin ⎯ set port cable-length ⎯ set port clock ⎯ set port flowcontrol ⎯ set port frame ⎯ set port impedance ⎯ set port link-trap ⎯ set port logical-interface ⎯ set port protection-time ⎯ set port speed ⎯ set port type ⎯

Appendix

26-5

Command Shown by



set pvc admin ⎯ set pvc connection ⎯ set pvc name ⎯ set pvc port admin × ⎯ set pvc static ⎯ set pvc-vlan mode ⎯ set pvc-vlan table ⎯ set qos class-map ⎯ set qos class-map profile ⎯ set qos cos-map profile ⎯ set qos in-class-map maximum ⎯ set qos initial-class-map ⎯ set qos initial-priority ⎯ set qos in-port cos-map ⎯ set qos in-priority maximum ⎯ set qos in-rate maximum ⎯ set qos maximum-mode ⎯ set qos measure-cycle ⎯ set qos out-class-map maximum ⎯ set qos out-fairness-mode ⎯ set qos out-port cos-map ⎯ set qos out-priority fairness ⎯ set qos out-priority maximum ⎯ set qos out-rate fairness maximum-port ⎯ set qos out-rate maximum ⎯ set qos out-weight fairness ⎯ set qos out-weight rate *1 ⎯ set reference-clock mode ⎯ set reference-clock priority ⎯ set session ip-permit ⎯ set snmp ⎯ set snmp authen-trap ⎯ set snmp manager ⎯ set snmp trap-manager ⎯ set spantree ⎯ set spantree mode ⎯ set spantree port ⎯ set spantree port cost ⎯

Appendix

26-6

Command Shown by



set spantree port edge ⎯ set spantree port point-to-point ⎯ set spantree port priority ⎯ set spantree priority ⎯ set spantree time ⎯ set spantree txholdcount ⎯ set syslog map ⎯ set syslog remote ⎯ set syslog server ⎯ set system contact ⎯ set system daylight-time ⎯ set system location ⎯ set system name ⎯ set system timezone ⎯ set tdm group ⎯ set tdm path ⎯ set tdmop adaptive-clock ⎯ set tdmop admin ⎯ set tdmop connection ⎯ set tdmop format ⎯ set tdmop group ⎯ set tdm group-name ⎯ set tdmop jitter ⎯ set tdmop mode ⎯ set terminal logout ⎯ set terminal monitor × ⎯ set terminal prompt ⎯ set terminal scroll local × ⎯ set terminal scroll system ⎯ set user account ⎯ set vlan ethertype ⎯ set vlan member × ⎯ set vlan name ⎯ set vlan portbase ⎯ set vlan swap ⎯ set vlan tagbase ⎯ show aggregation group ⎯

show aggregation port priority ⎯

Appendix

26-7

Command Shown by



show aggregation protection-time ⎯

show aggregation system priority ⎯

show aps information ⎯

show atm-fdb count pvc ⎯ × show atm-fdb count vid ⎯ × show atm-fdb table pvc ⎯ × show atm-fdb table vid ⎯ × show atm-loop config ⎯

show atm-loop information ⎯

show atm-oam config ⎯

show atm-oam status ⎯

show atmop format ⎯

show atmop in-port cos ⎯

show atm-qos aal5 ⎯

show atm-qos out-port clp ⎯

show atm-shaper information ⎯

show atm-shaper rate ⎯

show backup information ⎯

show command-mode ⎯

show config difference ⎯

show counter cell ⎯ × show counter cell f4 ⎯ × show counter cell f5 ⎯ × show counter cell ima-port ⎯ × show counter discard ⎯ × show counter port ⎯ × show counter pvc entry ⎯

show counter pvc value ⎯ × show counter vlan entry ⎯

show counter vlan value ⎯ × show ether-oam fault last-change ⎯

show ether-oam fault reason ⎯

show ether-oam frame ⎯

show ether-oam lm ⎯

show ether-oam meg ⎯

show ether-oam mep ⎯

show ether-oam mip ⎯

show ether-oam reply-period ⎯

Appendix

26-8

Command Shown by



show ether-ps config ⎯

show ether-ps status ⎯

show fault auto-reboot ⎯

show fault past ⎯ × show fault present ⎯ (Detailed showing)

show fdb agingtime ⎯

show fdb count all ⎯ × show fdb count port ⎯ × show fdb count vid ⎯ × show fdb limiter ⎯

show fdb table ⎯ × show fdb table port ⎯ × show fdb table vid ⎯ × show filter in-port ⎯

show filter out-port ⎯

show filter profile ⎯

show frame-size ⎯

show ifg over-rate ⎯

show igmp mac ⎯ × show igmp port ⎯ × show igmp status ⎯

show igmp vid ⎯ × show ima clock ⎯

show ima group config ⎯

show ima group status ⎯

show in-band information ⎯

show ip config ⎯

show isolate port ⎯

show isolate pvc ⎯

show l2p-transparent reserved-mac ⎯

show l2p-transparent stp-bpdu ⎯

show line mode ⎯

show loopback atm keepalive config ⎯

show loopback atm keepalive information ⎯ ×

show loopback atm source-id ⎯

show mc information ⎯ (Outline showing)

show message transmit config ⎯

Appendix

26-9

Command Shown by



show mirror port ⎯ × show ntp ⎯

show out-band information ⎯

show port cable-length ⎯

show port impedance ⎯

show port information ⎯

show port logical-interface ⎯

show port protection-time ⎯

show port trap ⎯

show pvc connection ⎯

show pvc information ⎯

show pvc-vlan table pvc ⎯

show pvc-vlan table vid ⎯ × show qos class-map ⎯

show qos class-map profile ⎯

show qos cos-map profile ⎯

show qos initial-class-map ⎯

show qos initial-priority ⎯

show qos in-port cos-map ⎯

show qos in-rate maximum ⎯

show qos maximum-mode ⎯

show qos measure-cycle ⎯

show qos out-fairness-mode ⎯

show qos out-port cos-map ⎯

show qos out-rate maximum ⎯

show qos out-weight fairness ⎯

show reference-clock information ⎯

show reset ⎯ (Outline showing)

show resource cpu ⎯ × show resource memory ⎯ × show session ⎯

show session ip-permit ⎯

show snmp ⎯

show spantree info ⎯

show spantree mode ⎯

show spantree port ⎯

show spantree port edge ⎯

show spantree port point-to-point ⎯

Appendix

26-10

Command Shown by



show stm status ⎯

show switch status ⎯ × show syslog local ⎯ × show syslog map ⎯

show syslog server ⎯

show system bridge ⎯

show system date ⎯

show system information ⎯

show system module-id ⎯

show system revision ⎯

show system status ⎯

show system temperature ⎯

show tdm group ⎯

show tdm group-name ⎯

show tdm path ⎯

show tdmop adaptive-clock ⎯

show tdmop connection ⎯

show tdmop format ⎯

show tdmop information ⎯

show tdmop jitter ⎯

show tdmop status ⎯

show terminal config ⎯

show user account ⎯

show vlan ethertype ⎯

show vlan summary ⎯

show vlan swap ⎯

show vlan table port ⎯

show vlan table vid ⎯ ×

*1 show running-config and show startup-config are output by set qos out-weight fairness. : Shown

×: Not shown ⎯ : Not applicable

Appendix

26-11

Appendix 2 Line module type conditions

The table below lists operation restrictions on commands per line module.

Operation restrictions

Command GbE- PV

GbE-PV2

FE-PV FX-PV ATM155

ATMP ATMP 155

TDMP TDMP155

GbE8-MUX

change aps × × × × × × ×

change aps reset × × × × × × ×

change ether-ps × × × × × × × ×

change ether-ps reset × × × × × × × ×

change external-clock ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

change switch ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

date ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

dm ether-oam × × × ×

linktrace ether-oam × × × ×

lm ether-oam × × × ×

loopback atm × × × × × × ×

loopback ether-oam × × × ×

loopback ima × × × × × × × × ×

loopback mc × × × × × × × × ×

mirror port × × × × × × × ×

ous line ×

ous switch ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

reset line ×

reset reference-clock ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

reset switch ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

reset system ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set aggregation group × × × × × × × ×

set aggregation port priority × × × × × × × ×

set aggregation protection-time ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ × ⎯

set aggregation system priority ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ × ⎯

set aps × × × × × × ×

set aps lockout × × × × × × ×

set aps time × × × × × × ×

set atm-loop × × × × × × × × ×

set atm-oam × × × × × × ×

set atm-oam flow × × × × × × ×

set atmop format × × × × × × × ×

set atmop in-port cos × × × × × × × ×

set atmop mode × × × × × × × ×

set atm-qos aal5 × × × × × × × × ×

set atm-qos out-port clp × × × × × × × × ×

set atm-shaper mode × × × × × × × ×

Appendix

26-12


Command GbE- PV

GbE-PV2

FE-PV FX-PV ATM155

ATMP ATMP 155

TDMP TDMP155

GbE8-MUX

set atm-shaper rate × × × × × × × ×

set backup schedule ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set backup server ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set command-mode ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set counter pvc entry × × × × × × ×

set counter vlan entry × × × × × × ×

set enable password ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set ether-oam cc × × × ×

set ether-oam frame

set ether-oam lm × × × ×

set ether-oam meg ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set ether-oam mep × × × ×

set ether-oam mip × × × × × × × ×

set ether-oam peer-mep × × × ×

set ether-oam rdi × × × ×

set ether-oam reply-period

set ether-ps × × × × × × × ×

set ether-ps control-vlan × × × × × × × ×

set ether-ps lockout × × × × × × × ×

set ether-ps time × × × × × × × ×

set external-clock mode ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set fault auto-reboot ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set fdb agingtime ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set fdb limiter × × × × × × ×

set fdb limiter static × × × × × × ×

set filter in-port × × × × × × ×

set filter out-port × × × × × × ×

set filter profile ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set frame-size ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set ifg over-rate ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set igmp × × × × × × × × × ×

set ima clock × × × × × × × × ×

set ima group × × × × × × × × ×

set in-band admin ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set in-band vid ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set ip address in-band ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set ip address out-band ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set ip in-band mode ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set ip route ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set ip route default ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

Appendix

26-13


Command GbE- PV

GbE-PV2

FE-PV FX-PV ATM155

ATMP ATMP 155

TDMP TDMP155

GbE8-MUX

set ip virtual-address ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set isolate port × × ×

set isolate pvc × × × × × × × × ×

set l2p-transparent reserved-mac × × × × × × ×

set l2p-transparent stp-bpdu ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set line mode atmp × × × × × × × × ×

set line mode gbe × × × × × × × ×

set line mode tdmp × × × × × × × × ×

set line mode tdmp155 × × × × × × × × ×

set line type ×

set login password ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set loopback atm keepalive × × × × × × ×

set loopback atm keepalive-mode ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set loopback atm source-id ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set mc management × × × × × × × × ×

set message transmit ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set ntp access-time ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set ntp server ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set out-band flowcontrol ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set out-band speed ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set port admin ×

set port cable-length × × × × × × × ×

set port clock × × × × × × × ×

set port flowcontrol × × × × × ×

set port frame × × × × × × × ×

set port impedance × × × × × × × ×

set port link-trap ×

set port logical-interface × × × × × × × × ×

set port protection-time × × × × × ×

set port speed × × × × × × ×

set port type × × × × × × × ×

set pvc admin × × × × × × ×

set pvc connection × × × × × × × ×

set pvc name × × × × × × ×

set pvc port admin × × × × × × ×

set pvc static × × × × × × ×

set pvc-vlan mode × × × × × × × × ×

set pvc-vlan table × × × × × × × × ×

set qos class-map ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

Appendix

26-14


Command GbE- PV

GbE-PV2

FE-PV FX-PV ATM155

ATMP ATMP 155

TDMP TDMP155

GbE8-MUX

set qos class-map profile ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set qos cos-map profile × × × × ×

set qos in-class-map maximum × × × × × ×

set qos initial-class-map × × × × × ×

set qos initial-priority × × × × ×

set qos in-port cos-map × × × × ×

set qos in-priority maximum × × × × × ×

set qos in-rate maximum × × × × × ×

set qos maximum-mode × × × × × ×

set qos measure-cycle × × × × × ×

set qos out-class-map maximum × × × × × ×

set qos out-fairness-mode ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set qos out-port cos-map × × × × × ×

set qos out-priority fairness ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set qos out-priority maximum × × × × × ×

set qos out-rate fairness maximum-port ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set qos out-rate maximum × × × × × ×

set qos out-weight fairness ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set qos out-weight rate ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set reference-clock mode ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set reference-clock priority × × × × × ×

set session ip-permit ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set snmp ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set snmp authen-trap ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set snmp manager ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set snmp trap-manager ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set spantree × × × × × × × × × ×

set spantree mode ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ × ⎯

set spantree port × × × × ×

set spantree port cost × × × × ×

set spantree port edge × × × × ×

set spantree port point-to-point × × × × ×

set spantree port priority × × × × ×

set spantree priority ⎯ ⎯ × × × ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ × ×

set spantree time ⎯ ⎯ × × × ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ × ×

Appendix

26-15


Command GbE- PV

GbE-PV2

FE-PV FX-PV ATM155

ATMP ATMP 155

TDMP TDMP155

GbE8-MUX

set spantree txholdcount ⎯ ⎯ × × × ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ × ×

set syslog map ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set syslog remote ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set syslog server ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set system contact ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set system daylight-time ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set system location ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set system name ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set system timezone ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set tdm group × × × × × × × ×

set tdm group-name × × × × × × × ×

set tdm path × × × × × × × ×

set tdmop adaptive-clock × × × × × × × ×

set tdmop admin × × × × × × × ×

set tdmop connection × × × × × × × ×

set tdmop format × × × × × × × ×

set tdmop group × × × × × × × ×

set tdmop jitter × × × × × × × ×

set tdmop mode × × × × × × × ×

set terminal logout ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set terminal monitor ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set terminal prompt ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set terminal scroll local ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set terminal scroll system ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set user account ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set vlan ethertype × × × × × × ×

set vlan member × × × × × × × ×

set vlan name ⎯ ⎯ × × ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ×

set vlan portbase × × × × × × × ×

set vlan swap × × × × × × × ×

set vlan tagbase × × × × × × × ×

: Operable : Inoperable (commands can be entered) ×: Inoperable (commands cannot be entered) ⎯ : Set in UGSW

Index

Index

C cd ............................................................................................................................................... 25-19

change aps .................................................................................................................................. 12-6

change aps reset ......................................................................................................................... 12-8

change ether-ps ......................................................................................................................... 11-45

change ether-ps reset ................................................................................................................ 11-46

change external-clock ................................................................................................................ 19-10

change switch ............................................................................................................................ 24-12

clear aggregation group ............................................................................................................... 9-27

clear atm-fdb table pvc............................................................................................................... 13-26

clear atm-loop ............................................................................................................................ 13-30

clear atmop format ..................................................................................................................... 13-36

clear atm-qos out-port clp .......................................................................................................... 14-15

clear atm-shaper rate................................................................................................................. 14-10

clear backup server.................................................................................................................... 23-35

clear counter cell........................................................................................................................ 22-36

clear counter port ......................................................................................................................... 22-5

clear counter pvc entry............................................................................................................... 22-21

clear counter pvc value .............................................................................................................. 22-24

clear counter vlan entry.............................................................................................................. 22-18

clear counter vlan value ............................................................................................................. 22-13

clear enable password ................................................................................................................... 2-7

clear ether-oam fault reason ...................................................................................................... 11-30

clear ether-oam lm ..................................................................................................................... 11-13

clear ether-oam meg.................................................................................................................... 11-5

clear ether-oam mep.................................................................................................................. 11-10

clear ether-oam mip ................................................................................................................... 11-19

clear ether-oam peer-mep ......................................................................................................... 11-15

clear fault past............................................................................................................................ 23-43

clear fault warning...................................................................................................................... 23-40

clear fdb limiter........................................................................................................................... 10-20

clear fdb limiter static ................................................................................................................. 10-22

Index-1

Index

clear fdb table port ....................................................................................................................... 8-12

clear fdb table vid......................................................................................................................... 8-14

clear filter in-port ........................................................................................................................ 10-12

clear filter out-port ...................................................................................................................... 10-16

clear filter profile........................................................................................................................... 10-8

clear igmp mac............................................................................................................................. 9-37

clear igmp vid............................................................................................................................... 9-40

clear ima group ............................................................................................................................ 16-9

clear ip address in-band................................................................................................................. 4-6

clear ip address out-band .............................................................................................................. 4-3

clear ip route ................................................................................................................................ 4-12

clear ip route default ...................................................................................................................... 4-8

clear ip virtual-address................................................................................................................. 4-21

clear login password ...................................................................................................................... 2-9

clear loopback atm keepalive..................................................................................................... 21-22

clear ntp server .......................................................................................................................... 20-28

clear pvc connection .................................................................................................................. 13-40

clear pvc name............................................................................................................................. 13-5

clear pvc static ............................................................................................................................. 13-3

clear pvc-vlan table .................................................................................................................... 13-12

clear qos cos-map profile............................................................................................................. 7-48

clear qos in-port cos-map ............................................................................................................ 7-51

clear qos in-rate maximum........................................................................................................... 7-19

clear qos out-port cos-map .......................................................................................................... 7-54

clear qos out-rate maximum ........................................................................................................ 7-35

clear qos out-weight fairness ....................................................................................................... 7-69

clear running-config line............................................................................................................. 23-30

clear session .............................................................................................................................. 20-14

clear session ip-permit ............................................................................................................... 20-12

clear snmp manager .................................................................................................................... 20-5

clear snmp trap-manager............................................................................................................. 20-6

clear startup-config .................................................................................................................... 23-33

clear syslog local........................................................................................................................ 20-24

clear syslog map ........................................................................................................................ 20-21

clear syslog server ..................................................................................................................... 20-18

clear system daylight-time ........................................................................................................... 3-12

clear tdm group ............................................................................................................................ 17-6

Index-2

Index

clear tdm group-name................................................................................................................ 17-12

clear tdm path ............................................................................................................................ 17-18

clear tdmop adaptive-clock ........................................................................................................ 18-36

clear tdmop connection.............................................................................................................. 18-15

clear tdmop format ..................................................................................................................... 18-29

clear tdmop group ........................................................................................................................ 18-9

clear tdmop mode ........................................................................................................................ 18-4

clear user account........................................................................................................................ 2-18

clear vlan name............................................................................................................................ 6-16

clear vlan swap ............................................................................................................................ 6-11

clear vlan tagbase.......................................................................................................................... 6-3

copy ........................................................................................................................................... 25-20

D date ................................................................................................................................................ 3-6

del .............................................................................................................................................. 25-22

dir ............................................................................................................................................... 25-16

disable............................................................................................................................................ 2-4

dm ether-oam............................................................................................................................. 11-35

download fpga line ............................................................................................................ 23-10, 25-5

download fpga switch.......................................................................................................... 23-8, 25-3

download running-config............................................................................................................ 23-12

download running-config external-memory................................................................................ 25-10

download software ..............................................................................................................23-7, 25-2

download startup-config............................................................................................................. 23-14

download startup-config external-memory................................................................................. 25-11

E enable ............................................................................................................................................ 2-3

end ............................................................................................................................................. 25-15

exit ................................................................................................................................................. 2-2

Index-3

Index

L linktrace ether-oam .................................................................................................................... 11-33

lm ether-oam.............................................................................................................................. 11-37

loopback atm................................................................................................................................ 21-9

loopback ether-oam ................................................................................................................... 11-31

loopback ima.............................................................................................................................. 16-12

loopback mc................................................................................................................................. 21-3

M maintenance .................................................................................................................................. 2-5

mirror port .................................................................................................................................. 22-37

mkdir .......................................................................................................................................... 25-17

O ous external-memory ...................................................................................................... 24-21, 25-23

ous line....................................................................................................................................... 24-20

ous switch .................................................................................................................................. 24-19

P ping .............................................................................................................................................. 4-18

R rename....................................................................................................................................... 25-21

reset line .................................................................................................................................... 24-17

reset reference-clock ................................................................................................................... 19-9

reset switch ................................................................................................................................ 24-15

reset system............................................................................................................................... 24-13

rmdir........................................................................................................................................... 25-18

Index-4

Index

S set aggregation group .................................................................................................................. 9-24

set aggregation port priority ......................................................................................................... 9-30

set aggregation protection-time ................................................................................................... 9-32

set aggregation system priority .................................................................................................... 9-28

set aps ......................................................................................................................................... 12-2

set aps lockout ............................................................................................................................. 12-4

set aps time.................................................................................................................................. 12-5

set atm-loop ............................................................................................................................... 13-27

set atmop format ........................................................................................................................ 13-32

set atmop mode ......................................................................................................................... 13-31

set atm-qos aal5 ........................................................................................................................ 14-11

set atm-qos out-port clp ............................................................................................................. 14-13

set atm-shaper mode ................................................................................................................... 14-2

set atm-shaper rate........................................................................................................... 14-3, 14-16

set backup schedule .................................................................................................................. 23-36

set backup server....................................................................................................................... 23-34

set command-mode ..................................................................................................................... 2-19

set counter pvc entry.................................................................................................................. 22-19

set counter vlan entry................................................................................................................. 22-14

set enable password ...................................................................................................................... 2-6

set ether-oam cc ........................................................................................................................ 11-24

set ether-oam frame................................................................................................................... 11-20

set ether-oam lm ........................................................................................................................ 11-11

set ether-oam meg....................................................................................................................... 11-2

set ether-oam mep....................................................................................................................... 11-6

set ether-oam mip ...................................................................................................................... 11-16

set ether-oam peer-mep ............................................................................................................ 11-14

set ether-oam rdi........................................................................................................................ 11-26

set ether-oam reply-period......................................................................................................... 11-22

set ether-ps ................................................................................................................................ 11-40

set ether-ps control-vlan ............................................................................................................ 11-42

set ether-ps lockout.................................................................................................................... 11-43

set ether-ps time ........................................................................................................................ 11-44

set external-clock mode ............................................................................................................... 19-2

set fault auto-reboot ................................................................................................................... 23-53

set fdb agingtime............................................................................................................................ 8-4

Index-5

Index

set fdb limiter.............................................................................................................................. 10-17

set fdb limiter static .................................................................................................................... 10-21

set filter in-port ............................................................................................................................. 10-9

set filter out-port ......................................................................................................................... 10-13

set filter profile.............................................................................................................................. 10-4

set frame-size ................................................................................................................................ 8-2

set ifg over-rate ............................................................................................................................ 8-15

set igmp ....................................................................................................................................... 9-34

set ima clock .............................................................................................................................. 16-10

set ima group ............................................................................................................................... 16-2

set in-band admin ........................................................................................................................ 4-13

set in-band vid.............................................................................................................................. 4-14

set ip address in-band.................................................................................................................... 4-4

set ip address out-band ................................................................................................................. 4-2

set ip in-band mode ..................................................................................................................... 4-22

set ip route ..................................................................................................................................... 4-9

set ip route default ......................................................................................................................... 4-7

set ip virtual-address.................................................................................................................... 4-19

set isolate port.............................................................................................................................. 10-2

set isolate pvc ............................................................................................................................ 13-17

set l2p-transparent reserved-mac ................................................................................................ 9-22

set l2p-transparent stp-bpdu ........................................................................................................ 9-20

set line mode atmp....................................................................................................................... 24-5

set line mode gbe......................................................................................................................... 24-9

set line mode tdmp....................................................................................................................... 24-3

set line mode tdmp155................................................................................................................. 24-7

set line type.................................................................................................................................. 24-2

set login password ......................................................................................................................... 2-8

set loopback atm keepalive........................................................................................................ 21-18

set loopback atm keepalive-mode ............................................................................................. 21-14

set loopback atm source-id ........................................................................................................ 21-12

set mc management .................................................................................................................... 21-2

set message transmit................................................................................................................. 23-20

set ntp access-time .................................................................................................................... 20-25

set ntp server ............................................................................................................................. 20-26

set oam ............................................................................................................................... 15-2, 15-4

set out-band flowcontrol............................................................................................................... 4-16

Index-6

Index

set out-band speed ...................................................................................................................... 4-15

set port admin ................................................................................................................................ 5-2

set port cable-length .................................................................................................................... 5-19

set port clock.................................................................................................................................. 5-9

set port flowcontrol......................................................................................................................... 5-6

set port frame............................................................................................................................... 5-10

set port impedance ...................................................................................................................... 5-26

set port link-trap ............................................................................................................................. 5-8

set port logical-interface............................................................................................................... 5-23

set port protection-time .................................................................................................................. 5-7

set port speed ................................................................................................................................ 5-3

set port type ................................................................................................................................... 5-5

set pvc admin............................................................................................................................... 13-6

set pvc connection ..................................................................................................................... 13-37

set pvc name................................................................................................................................ 13-4

set pvc port admin........................................................................................................................ 13-7

set pvc static ................................................................................................................................ 13-2

set pvc-vlan mode...................................................................................................................... 13-10

set pvc-vlan table ....................................................................................................................... 13-11

set qos class-map ........................................................................................................................ 7-37

set qos class-map profile ............................................................................................................. 7-40

set qos cos-map profile................................................................................................................ 7-43

set qos in-class-map maximum ..................................................................................................... 7-9

set qos initial-priority .................................................................................................................... 7-75

set qos in-port cos-map ............................................................................................................... 7-49

set qos in-priority maximum ......................................................................................................... 7-12

set qos in-rate maximum................................................................................................................ 7-6

set qos maximum-mode................................................................................................................. 7-2

set qos measure-cycle ................................................................................................................. 7-80

set qos out-class-map maximum ................................................................................................. 7-24

set qos out-fairness-mode ........................................................................................................... 7-55

set qos out-port cos-map ............................................................................................................. 7-52

set qos out-priority fairness.......................................................................................................... 7-57

set qos out-priority maximum....................................................................................................... 7-28

set qos out-rate fairness maximum-port ...................................................................................... 7-64

set qos out-rate maximum ........................................................................................................... 7-21

set qos out-weight fairness .......................................................................................................... 7-62

Index-7

Index

set qos out-weight rate................................................................................................................. 7-60

set reference-clock mode............................................................................................................. 19-6

set reference-clock priority........................................................................................................... 19-4

set session ip-permit .................................................................................................................. 20-10

set snmp ...................................................................................................................................... 20-2

set snmp authen-trap ................................................................................................................... 20-7

set snmp manager ....................................................................................................................... 20-3

set snmp trap-manager................................................................................................................ 20-4

set spantree ................................................................................................................................... 9-2

set spantree mode ......................................................................................................................... 9-3

set spantree port .......................................................................................................................... 9-10

set spantree port cost .................................................................................................................. 9-12

set spantree port edge ................................................................................................................. 9-15

set spantree port point-to-point .................................................................................................... 9-17

set spantree port priority .............................................................................................................. 9-11

set spantree priority ....................................................................................................................... 9-5

set spantree time ........................................................................................................................... 9-6

set spantree txholdcount................................................................................................................ 9-7

set syslog map ........................................................................................................................... 20-19

set syslog remote....................................................................................................................... 20-15

set syslog server ........................................................................................................................ 20-16

set system contact ......................................................................................................................... 3-2

set system daylight-time ................................................................................................................ 3-8

set system location ........................................................................................................................ 3-4

set system name............................................................................................................................ 3-3

set system timezone ...................................................................................................................... 3-7

set tdm group ............................................................................................................................... 17-2

set tdm group-name..................................................................................................................... 17-8

set tdm path ............................................................................................................................... 17-14

set tdmop adaptive-clock ........................................................................................................... 18-33

set tdmop admin ........................................................................................................................ 18-31

set tdmop connection................................................................................................................. 18-11

set tdmop format ........................................................................................................................ 18-23

set tdmop group ........................................................................................................................... 18-5

set tdmop jitter ........................................................................................................................... 18-17

set tdmop mode ........................................................................................................................... 18-2

set terminal logout........................................................................................................................ 2-14

Index-8

Index

set terminal monitor ..................................................................................................................... 2-13

set terminal prompt ...................................................................................................................... 2-10

set terminal scroll local................................................................................................................. 2-12

set terminal scroll system............................................................................................................. 2-11

set user account........................................................................................................................... 2-16

set vlan ethertype......................................................................................................................... 6-13

set vlan member ............................................................................................................................ 6-8

set vlan name............................................................................................................................... 6-15

set vlan portbase............................................................................................................................ 6-4

set vlan swap ................................................................................................................................. 6-9

set vlan tagbase............................................................................................................................. 6-2

show aggregation group .............................................................................................................. 9-25

show aggregation port priority...................................................................................................... 9-31

show aggregation protection-time................................................................................................ 9-33

show aggregation system priority ................................................................................................ 9-29

show all ...................................................................................................................................... 23-27

show aps information ................................................................................................................... 12-9

show atm-fdb count pvc ............................................................................................................. 13-22

show atm-fdb count vid .............................................................................................................. 13-24

show atm-fdb table pvc .............................................................................................................. 13-19

show atm-fdb table vid ............................................................................................................... 13-20

show atm-loop config ................................................................................................................. 13-28

show atm-loop information......................................................................................................... 13-29

show atmop format .................................................................................................................... 13-34

show atm-qos aal5..................................................................................................................... 14-12

show atm-qos out-port clp............................................................................................... 14-14, 14-19

show atm-shaper information....................................................................................................... 14-8

show atm-shaper rate .................................................................................................................. 14-6

show backup information ........................................................................................................... 23-37

show command-mode.................................................................................................................. 2-20

show config difference ............................................................................................................... 23-19

show counter cell ....................................................................................................................... 22-25

show counter cell f4 ................................................................................................................... 22-28

show counter cell f5 ................................................................................................................... 22-31

show counter cell ima-port ......................................................................................................... 22-34

show counter discard ................................................................................................................... 22-6

show counter port ........................................................................................................................ 22-2

Index-9

Index

show counter pvc entry .............................................................................................................. 22-20

show counter pvc value ............................................................................................................. 22-22

show counter vlan entry ............................................................................................................. 22-16

show counter vlan value .............................................................................................................. 22-8

show ether-oam fault last-change.............................................................................................. 11-27

show ether-oam fault reason ..................................................................................................... 11-28

show ether-oam frame ............................................................................................................... 11-21

show ether-oam lm .................................................................................................................... 11-12

show ether-oam meg ................................................................................................................... 11-3

show ether-oam mep ................................................................................................................... 11-8

show ether-oam mip .................................................................................................................. 11-17

show ether-oam reply-period ..................................................................................................... 11-23

show ether-ps config.................................................................................................................. 11-47

show ether-ps status.................................................................................................................. 11-49

show fault auto-reboot ............................................................................................................... 23-54

show fault past ........................................................................................................................... 23-41

show fault present...................................................................................................................... 23-38

show fdb agingtime ........................................................................................................................ 8-5

show fdb count all .......................................................................................................................... 8-9

show fdb count port........................................................................................................................ 8-6

show fdb count vid ......................................................................................................................... 8-8

show fdb limiter .......................................................................................................................... 10-18

show fdb table.............................................................................................................................. 8-10

show fdb table port....................................................................................................................... 8-11

show fdb table vid ........................................................................................................................ 8-13

show filter in-port........................................................................................................................ 10-10

show filter out-port ..................................................................................................................... 10-14

show filter profile .......................................................................................................................... 10-6

show frame-size............................................................................................................................. 8-3

show ifg over-rate ........................................................................................................................ 8-16

show igmp mac ............................................................................................................................ 9-36

show igmp port............................................................................................................................. 9-39

show igmp status ......................................................................................................................... 9-35

show igmp vid .............................................................................................................................. 9-38

show ima clock........................................................................................................................... 16-11

show ima group config ................................................................................................................. 16-4

show ima group status ................................................................................................................. 16-5

Index-10

Index

show in-band information............................................................................................................... 4-5

show ip config .............................................................................................................................. 4-10

show isolate port .......................................................................................................................... 10-3

show isolate pvc......................................................................................................................... 13-18

show l2p-transparent reserved-mac ............................................................................................ 9-23

show l2p-transparent stp-bpdu .................................................................................................... 9-21

show line mode .......................................................................................................................... 24-10

show loopback atm keepalive config ......................................................................................... 21-15

show loopback atm keepalive information ................................................................................. 21-20

show loopback atm source-id .................................................................................................... 21-13

show mc information .................................................................................................................... 21-6

show message transmit config................................................................................................... 23-24

show mirror port ......................................................................................................................... 22-39

show ntp..................................................................................................................................... 20-27

show oam config .......................................................................................................................... 15-6

show oam status .......................................................................................................................... 15-8

show out-band information........................................................................................................... 4-17

show port cable-length................................................................................................................. 5-21

show port impedance................................................................................................................... 5-27

show port information................................................................................................................... 5-11

show port logical-interface ........................................................................................................... 5-25

show port protection-time............................................................................................................. 5-18

show port trap .............................................................................................................................. 5-16

show pvc connection.................................................................................................................. 13-39

show pvc information ................................................................................................................... 13-8

show pvc-vlan table pvc............................................................................................................. 13-13

show pvc-vlan table vid.............................................................................................................. 13-15

show qos class-map .................................................................................................................... 7-38

show qos class-map profile.......................................................................................................... 7-42

show qos cos-map profile ............................................................................................................ 7-46

show qos initial-class-map ........................................................................................................... 7-73

show qos initial-priority................................................................................................................. 7-78

show qos in-port cos-map............................................................................................................ 7-50

show qos in-rate maximum .......................................................................................................... 7-16

show qos maximum-mode ............................................................................................................. 7-4

show qos measure-cycle ............................................................................................................. 7-81

show qos out-fairness-mode........................................................................................................ 7-56

Index-11

Index

show qos out-port cos-map.......................................................................................................... 7-53

show qos out-rate maximum........................................................................................................ 7-32

show qos out-weight fairness....................................................................................................... 7-66

show reference-clock information ................................................................................................ 19-7

show reset.................................................................................................................................. 24-18

show resource cpu..................................................................................................................... 23-55

show resource memory.............................................................................................................. 23-57

show running-config................................................................................................................... 23-15

show session ............................................................................................................................. 20-13

show session ip-permit .............................................................................................................. 20-11

show snmp................................................................................................................................... 20-8

show spantree info......................................................................................................................... 9-8

show spantree mode...................................................................................................................... 9-4

show spantree port ...................................................................................................................... 9-13

show spantree port edge ............................................................................................................. 9-16

show spantree port point-to-point ................................................................................................ 9-18

show startup-config.................................................................................................................... 23-17

show stm status ........................................................................................................................... 5-28

show switch status ..................................................................................................................... 25-24

show syslog local ....................................................................................................................... 20-22

show syslog map ....................................................................................................................... 20-20

show syslog server .................................................................................................................... 20-17

show system bridge ................................................................................................................... 23-46

show system date ........................................................................................................................ 3-11

show system information ............................................................................................................... 3-5

show system module-id ............................................................................................................. 23-47

show system revision................................................................................................................. 23-49

show system status.................................................................................................................... 23-44

show system temperature.......................................................................................................... 23-51

show tdm group ........................................................................................................................... 17-4

show tdm group-name ............................................................................................................... 17-10

show tdm path............................................................................................................................ 17-16

show tdmop adaptive-clock........................................................................................................ 18-35

show tdmop connection ............................................................................................................. 18-13

show tdmop format .................................................................................................................... 18-26

show tdmop information............................................................................................................... 18-7

show tdmop jitter........................................................................................................................ 18-19

Index-12

Index

show tdmop status ..................................................................................................................... 18-21

show terminal config .................................................................................................................... 2-15

show user account ....................................................................................................................... 2-17

show vlan ethertype ..................................................................................................................... 6-14

show vlan summary ..................................................................................................................... 6-12

show vlan swap............................................................................................................................ 6-10

show vlan table port ....................................................................................................................... 6-5

show vlan table vid......................................................................................................................... 6-7

U update mc information ................................................................................................................. 21-5

upload all-information................................................................................................................... 23-5

upload all-information external-memory..................................................................................... 25-13

upload fault ....................................................................................................................... 23-6, 25-12

upload local-syslog ............................................................................................................. 23-4, 25-9

upload running-config .................................................................................................................. 23-2

upload running-config external-memory ...................................................................................... 25-7

upload startup-config ................................................................................................................... 23-3

upload startup-config external-memory ....................................................................................... 25-8

V virtual-ping ................................................................................................................................... 4-20

W write memory .................................................................................................................. 23-29, 25-14

Index-13

Index

(Blank page)

Index-14

cx2600-220 commandreference 0703 eng

Documents

setting of date

setting of timezone

setting of login password

general mode

maintenance mode

setting of terminal

setting of system location

display of user account